º1 ¯.

1 ´.¹
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Basic Insa
• Reading romanised Hangeul
• Pronunciation
INSA – SAYING THE RIGHT THING
For Koreans, as for all people, having the right phrase for the right occasion is the hallmark of
politeness. Insa (in Hangeul it’s written ´.¹) literally means people business, and might loosely be
described as the art of greeting and talking casually to people in the proper way. In this first unit of the
course, we learn a few basic Insa.
1 Basic Insa
Hello. I’m ...
When we extend a
friendly greeting to people
we usually say:
An-nyeong-ha-se-yo?
(How are you?)
The standard reply is to
give a positive answer, ie ne
(yes), and ask the same
question: Ne,
an-nyeong-ha-se-yo?
(Good, how are you?)
Note that
an-nyeong-ha- means to
be at peace. Thus, the literal
translation of the exchange
would be: Are you at peace?
and Yes, and are you at
peace?
To introduce ourselves,
we say our name and then
either -ye-yo or -i-e-yo
´.Ü*'~? ¯´.·´ -¯·~.
An-nyeong-ha-se-yo?
Ka-il-li wo-keo-ye-yo.
·, ´.Ü *'~? ¨.´´~·~.
Ne, an-nyeong-ha-se-yo?
Kim-sang-u-ye-yo.
·, ´.Ü *'~? ¨·¤¢´-¢·~.
Ne, an-nyeong-ha-se-yo?
Jon me-i-seun-i-e-yo.
´.Ü*'~? ¢¥ .´¢·~.
An-nyeong-ha-se-yo?
I-seon-yeong-i-e-yo.
(I’m ..., it’s ... etc). We use -ye-yo if our name ends in a vowel sound, and -i-e-yo if it ends in a
consonant sound. Note that we are talking about sounds not spelling. See how people in the picture
identify themselves.
As you would expect, your name may have to be modified, slightly or dramatically, according to the
Korean sound system. This modification may have an impact on the choice between -ye-yo and
2 c G Shin 2006
´.¹
-i-e-yo. Here are some notes. First, with names that end in an r sound, eg Barber, Miller, Taylor, etc,
Koreans don’t pronounce the final r. These names are then seen to end in a vowel sound within the
Korean sound system. This is why Kylie Walker in the picture chooses -ye-yo and says: Ka-il-li
wo-keo-ye-yo (not Ka-il-li wo-keor-i-e-yo).
What happens if your name ends in an l sound? You will use -i-e-yo since your name ends in a
consonant, but the final l sound in your name will be changed to r. Suppose your name is Debbie Bell.
You will then introduce yourself in Korean: De-bi ber-i-e-yo (not De-bi bel-i-e-yo).
When reading foreign names that end in a consonant sound such as p, b, t, d, k and g (linguists call
them non-nasal stops), Koreans generally add a schwa-like vowel sound, represented here as eu, to the
final consonant. Names such as Hart and Hind will be pronounced as Ha-teu and Ha-in-deu in
Korean, which of course means that they are to be treated as names ending in a vowel. Thus, we say:
Ha-teu-ye-yo and Ha-in-deu-ye-yo (not Hat-i-e-yo for instance).
The same goes for names ending in s, f, th and their voiced counterparts (linguists call all these
fricative sounds). If your name is Harris, you will say: Hae-ri-seu-ye-yo.
With names such as Bush, Dash and George (the final consonant of each is called a palato-alveolar
sound), Koreans add the vowel i at the end. Thus if your name is George, you will say: Jo-ji-ye-yo.
Ask your instructor, if your name is outside these notes.
Pleased to meet you.
When we meet people for the
first time, we can also say:
Ban-gap-sseum-ni-da (Pleased
to meet you). The literal meaning is
I’m pleased. Here the reason why
you are pleased (ie to meet you) is
implied.
The usual reply would be to say
ne (yes) and echo the expression:
Ne, ban-gap-sseum-ni-da
(Pleased to meet you, too), which
means Yes, and I’m pleased too.
¹.¨.´-.·¯.
Ban-gap-sseum-ni-da.
·, ¹.¨.´-.·¯.
Ne, ban-gap-sseum-ni-da.
Welcome. Come in.
You’re now visiting a Korean
family.
Upon arrival, you’ll be greeted by
the family with an expression such
as: Eo-seo o-se-yo (Welcome).
Here the literal meaning is Come
(in) quickly. This may sound pushy,
but it is an indication that your host
and hostess are so happy to see you
that they want you to come in
without delay.
Another common welcome is:
Deur-eo-o-se-yo (Come in).
·¹~'~.
Eo-seo o-se-yo.
´.Ü*'~?
An-nyeong-ha-se-yo?
´¬.·~'~.
Deur-eo-o-se-yo.
c G Shin 2006 3
º1 ¯.
Good-bye. See you again.
When someone is leaving,
we say: An-nyeong-hi
ga-se-yo (Good-bye:
literally, Please go in peace).
But if it is we who are
leaving, we say:
An-nyeong-hi gye-se-yo
(Good-bye: literally, Please
stay in peace) to whoever is
staying behind.
We can of course add: Tto
man-na-yo (See you again:
literally, We meet again).
´.Ü *z'~.
An-nyeong-hi
gye-se-yo.
·, ´.Ü *¯'~.
¨¹.·~.
Ne, an-nyeong-hi
ga-se-yo.
Tto man-na-yo.
Sorry I’m late.
For minor indiscretions, we
usually say:
Mi-an-ham-ni-da (I’m sorry:
literally, I’m upsetting things).
To respond, we say:
Gwaen-chan-a-yo (It’s OK).
To show our appreciation,
we say: Gam-sa-ham-ni-da
or Go-map-sseum-ni-da
(Thank you: literally, I’m
grateful). The two expressions
are interchangeable.
It might be useful at this
stage to know how to apologise
to your teacher for being
moderately late to Korean
language class. This is not to
encourage you to be late! But
if you happen to be late, say:
Neuj-eo-seo
mi-an-ham-ni-da (Sorry I’m
late). Here, Neuj- means
being late, and -eo-seo
because.
´.Ü *'~? `-·¹¤´.^ ".·¯.
An-nyeong-ha-se-yo?
Neuj-eo-seo mi-an-ham-ni-da.
¨.¹^ ".·¯.
Gam-sa-ham-ni-da.
Æs¬³ "¢~. ´,~.'~.
Gwaen-chan-a-yo.
Anj-eu-se-yo.
In the picture, upon the student’s apology, the friendly Korean teacher says It’s OK, and offers a seat
by saying: Anj-eu-se-yo (Take a seat). The student then says Thank you.
It is part of Western etiquette to acknowledge even minor services, such as the dispensing of tickets
or even the giving back of change, with a brief Thank you or equivalent. By contrast in Korea,
expressions of this type are not used as often. They are usually reserved for acts of individual
thoughtfulness, rather than actions performed as part of one’s job.
4 c G Shin 2006
´.¹
2 Romanisation
As you probably already know, Korean is written in its own very simple, and ingenious, phonetic
script called Hangeul. However, as a transitory means, Korean expressions in the first lesson have been
written in the English alphabet.
The process of writing Hangeul in the Roman alphabet is known as romanisation. There are a few
romanisation systems available, but the one that we follow here is ‘The Revised Romanization of
Korean’, or RRK, developed in 2000 by the National Academy of the Korean Language in the Republic
of Korea. Currently, many street signs in Korea are given not just in Hangeul but also in the Roman
Alphabet, and it is the RRK that is predominantly adopted here.
However, you should not take romanisation to be the same as spelling in English. This is because the
way words are spelt in English does not reflect the way they are actually pronounced. For example, the
a in arm, dare, dame and dam is pronounced differently in each case. Romanisation is a convention
whereby we standardise pronunciation by assigning constant values to each letter. Within RRK, as we
explain below in more detail, the letter a is consistently used to represent the English a sound as in arm;
it is not used for any other sounds which the letter a may represent in English.
Another warning is that, while Hangeul renders the sounds of Korean in a remarkably accurate way,
no script can ever fully describe the actual sounds of any given language. For instance, the Hangeul
letter is pronounced as d when it occurs between two voiced sounds, and as t elsewhere. RRK
romanises the letter as d when it is followed by a vowel, and t when it is followed by another
consonant or when it forms the final sound of a word. This works well, except when the letter occurs
sentence-initially and is followed by a vowel. This is a situation where the letter is romanised as d
but is pronounced as t. Thus, when you say: Ban-gap-sseum-ni-da, you should pronounce the
underlined d as d, but when you say: Deur-eo-o-se-yo, you should pronounce the underlined d as t.
3 RRK and pronunciation
Generally speaking, the sounds of Korean will be familiar to the English speaker, and thus
pronunciation should not be a serious problem. We shall look at pronunciation more closely in
subsequent lessons, however please note the following points.
Notes for Consonants
In the list below all the Korean consonants are given in Korean alphabetical order.
All the consonants appearing in RRK are basically the same as in English.
A doubled consonant, that is, pp, tt, ss, jj or kk, indicates tensed pronunciation. In English
tensed consonants do not constitute separate sound categories for distinguishing between words, but
tensed consonants do exist. For example, the p, t and k sounds in s clusters are tensed consonants – such
as spot, stop and sky. Ask your instructor, if you are not clear what tensed pronunciation entails.
By convention, s and ss in RRK shall be pronounced respectively as sh and ‘tensed’ sh (ie sh with a
stronger hiss) if they are followed by i or y. Thus, when you read si, for instance, you should not read
it in the same way of naming the English letter c but as she.
As briefly mentioned above, b, d, g and j are pronounced the same as in English, except when they
occur sentence-initially. In this case they are pronounced as p, t, k and ch, respectively.
Also, note that Korean r is a ‘flap’ r. Although replacing r with English r does not bring about a
meaning change, you should know r is produced by a single, quick flap of the tongue against the
alveolar ridge – the inward projection of the gums between the upper teeth and the hard palate. Ask
your instructor for a demonstration.
c G Shin 2006 5
º1 ¯.
Consonants
g
kk as in sky
n
d
tt as in stop
r/l
m
b
pp as in spot
s
ss
ng as in sing
j
jj
ch
k
t
p
h
Vowels
a as in part
ae as in cable
ya as in yard
yae as in yabby
eo as in pot
e as in pet
yeo as in yonder
ye as in yet
o as in port
wa as in wonder
wae as in wag
oe as in wet
yo as in your
u as in do
wo as in wobble
we as in wet
wi as in weeds
yu as in few
eu as in urn
ui Say Ernie without the n (and without moving the lips)
i as in feet
Notes for Vowels
In the list above all the Korean vowels are given with approximate Australian English equivalents.
We suggest you treat the equivalents as a preliminary guide only. In order to develop accurate
pronunciation, pay close attention to your instructor and to the language tapes or CDs that accompany
this course. The list is in Korean alphabetical order.
There are a total of twenty-one different vowel symbols in Hangeul. But note that, in the spoken
language, only eight vowel sounds occur. Some of these eight vowel sounds combine with either w or y
(the semi-vowels) to form composite sounds.
Note also that the distinction between oe and we is not obvious in standard spoken Korean.
Some people find it easier to relate to
vowels if they know the approximate
point of articulation in the mouth. Next is
a common figure used by linguists and
language teachers to demonstrate this. It
is a cutaway side view of the mouth. The
marked zones indicate the relative
positions of the highest point of the
tongue when a speaker is properly
pronouncing the single Korean vowels
indicated. For example, when you
pronounce i, it is a high, front vowel –
the point at which articulation occurs is
high up and in the front of the mouth. On
the other hand, u is a high, back vowel.
6 c G Shin 2006
´.¹
More Notes
The dash symbol, ‘-’, in the romanisation stands for what we loosely call syllable boundary within
an independent expression. (Strictly speaking, this is not part of RRK conventions. In RRK the usage of
the dash symbol is somewhat arbitrary. It can be inserted, for example, where there is the possibility of
confusion in pronunciation.) Broadly stated, the rhythmic structure of a Korean sentence is such that
you can take one syllable to have one beat. Thus, when you practise reading, eg
An-nyeong-ha-se-yo?, it might be an idea to clap five times while saying the whole sentence.
Koreans use punctuation marks, such as ‘,’, ‘.’, and ‘?’, in very much the same way as you do in
English. They also use a space as you do in English after an independent expression, eg a word. All
these are reflected in the Romanisation system. (Note that suffixes or particles such as case markers are
all attached to the stem or the noun concerned in Korean, that is, no space is given between the stem and
suffixes and between the noun and particles. We will study this part of grammar in more detail later in
the course.)
4 More expressions
Here are some more Insa expressions and some classroom instructions you may hear your instructor
using. They’re not intended for you to learn by heart in this unit (some of them we study more closely
in Unit 7), but their use can help to give a more Korean ‘feel’ to classroom procedure.
¨,åÃ.´-.·¯. Hope to see you again. Tto bwoep-gess-sseum-ni-da.
Ö.¹.·~. You’re welcome. Cheon-man-e-yo.
·./·. Yes. Ne./Ye.
¢·~. No. A-ni-yo.
¥.M.¹.... Teacher, ... Seon-saeng-nim ...
... (Your Name) + ~ Mr/Ms ... ... + ssi
¨.´¬.~.' ~. Listen closely. Jal deur-eu-se-yo.
¤·*'~. Repeat. Tta-ra ha-se-yo.
´÷~.'~. Read. Ilg-eu-se-yo.
~.'~. Write (it). Sseu-se-yo.
¨.`´.·~? Any questions? Jil-mun iss-eo-yo?
¢¹Ã.·~? Do you get it? A-si-gess-eo-yo?
·, ´.Ã.·~. Yes, I get it. Ne, al-gess-eo-yo.
¢·~, ¨ .-¨.Ã.·~. No, I don’t get it. A-ni-yo, jal mo-reu-gess-eo-yo.
¯`'~. Try (it). Hae bo-se-yo.
¯¨.¢... All together ... Da gach-i ...
¯¹·. ½.... Once again .., Once more ... Da-si han beon ...
¨.*`.·~. Well done! Jal ha-syeoss-eo-yo.
Ö.Ö.*... (Please speak) slowly. Cheon-cheon-hi ...
´·¬Þ.· ~. I’ve forgotten. Ij-eo-beo-ryeoss-eo-yo.
c G Shin 2006 7
º2 ¯.
2 ·.·.(1)
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Reading and writing Hangeul
• More about pronunciation
HANGEUL – THE KOREAN ALPHABET
When you finish studying the next two units you should know how to
read and write words using Hangeul – slowly at first, but getting faster
and more accurate all the time. Meanwhile, as you go through this unit,
always remember that Hangeul is a highly consistent, phonetic script, and
that most people find it easy to learn and interesting to use.
1 Hangeul: Introduction
One of the most exciting and important events in modern Korean
history was the 1988 Seoul Olympics.
When the 150 countries in the 1988 Seoul Olympics marched
into the Olympic Stadium for the opening ceremony, they did so in
alphabetical order – Korean alphabetical order. Look at the
examples of countries’ names written in Hangeul and see if you can
read them using the guide below.
¯·GHANA
(Ga-na)
¯¢¢·GUYANA
(Ga-i-a-na)
¨.¬¢THE GAMBIA
(Gam-bi-a)
g, k a
n < [ ], ng
i ) m
) b, p × j
÷ r, l ¬ u
eu · o
s ÷ t
e - k
ae d, t
¬ h
Note that when written at the beginning of a
syllable, <is a ‘dummy’ – it has no phonetic
value at all. When written at the end of a syllable,
however, it is pronounced ‘ng’.
·¢¯·¢NIGERIA
(Na-i-ji-ri-a)
²~¤·¢ROMANIA
(Ru-ma-ni-a)
`.·¨.BRAZIL
(Beu-ra-jil)
~·.¯.·´.·¢AUSTRALIA
(O-seu-teu-re-il-li-a)
-·¯CANADA
(Kae-na-da)
¯--.CHINESE HONG KONG
(Hong-kong)
¯´.?*.÷.THAILAND
(Ta-il-laen-deu)
8 c G Shin 2006
·.·.(1)
Looking at these examples can tell us a lot about the way Hangeul is written. Firstly, notice how it is
written in syllables, not in single, individually-spaced letters as in English. For example, if we were to
write Chinese Hong Kong according to the individually-spaced letter style of the English alphabet, it
would look like: ¬·<-·<(Hong Kong), whereas in the Hangeul system it is actually
written: ¯--.. On the other hand, if we were to write Hong Kong in Hangeul letters but according to
the conventions of written English, it would look like this:
H
o
ng
K
o
ng
.
The shaping of Hangeul was influenced by culture as well as linguistics. Hangeul was originally
devised to complement the use of Chinese characters, and in Chinese a single character represented a
single syllable. So the Hangeul characters were not written in their individual spaces, but were grouped
in syllables. If you want to know more about this, read the Cultural Notes on Page 13.
Secondly, each Hangeul syllable consists of a vowel with optional surrounding consonants. Look
again at the example of Hong Kong. Both syllables have a central vowel, with front and rear
consonants.
Front Consonant Vowel Rear Consonant
1st Syllable H o ng
2nd Syllable K o ng
In this case, both front and rear consonants are present, but this is not always the case. For example,
the Korean word for child is a-i. Although it has only two letters, both are vowels, and so the word is
written in two syllables.
Front Consonant Vowel Rear Consonant
1st Syllable – a –
2nd Syllable – i –
Thirdly, note from the examples at the beginning of this unit that where there is no initial consonant,
the letter <indicates this. For example, look at the examples of Guyana and Nigeria.
¯ ¢ ¢ · · ¢ ¯ · ¢
Ga- i- a- na Na- i- ji- ri- a
The reason for this is again related to the fact that Hangeul is written in syllables. If a syllable has no
initial consonant then we indicate that by inserting an initial zero consonant. Thus when we write the
Korean word for child (a-i) it comes out as: ¢¢.
If you are not clear at this stage on the terminology consonant, vowel, and syllable, it might be wise
to stop and consult a suitable reference book.
Yet another characteristic of Hangeul almost too obvious to be worth pointing out is that it
transcribes the Korean language, and so when it transcribes foreign sounds it transcribes them as the
Korean ear hears them. Thus in the examples above, some vowel sounds might appear different from
those that the native English speaker might expect.
One particular point of difference is that the Korean language doesn’t have many clusters of
consonants. Thus, in a foreign-language transcriptions, clusters of consonants are made to look and
sound ‘less foreign’ by inserting the vowel eu between consonants. In this process st- becomes
seu-t-, and str- becomes seu-teu-r- and so on. Note, for example, how Australia is written in
Hangeul.
~ ·. ¯. · ´. · ¢
O- seu- teu- re- il- li- a
c G Shin 2006 9
º2 ¯.
2 Writing Hangeul
The vowels
For most people the easiest way to learn Hangeul is through practice in writing while reading aloud.
It might be helpful to use a squared paper – such as graph paper.
The table below shows the prescribed stroke order for writing all the Hangeul vowels, listed in
Korean alphabetical order. Check the romanisation pronunciation given in Unit 1 (see Page 6).
Note the following points on pronunciation.
1. (ae) and (e): the distinction between and is being lost in standard spoken Korean.
2. (yae) and (ye): the distinction between and is likewise being lost in standard spoken
Korean.
3. +(wae), ·(oe) and -(we): as a result of loss of distinction between and , standard
spoken Korean does not normally distinguish between +, ·and -. We have learnt already (see
Page 6) that the distinction between ·(oe) and -(we) does not obtain in standard spoken
Korean.
4. (ui) can be pronounced ui, i or e, depending on context. We’ll learn more about this in a
later unit.
10 c G Shin 2006
·.·.(1)
The consonants
The nineteen consonants are shown below with their stroke order.
Note that ×, *and ·can
also be written as , and . In
this case their prescribed stroke order
will be as follows.
Writing Hangeul in syllables
Each Hangeul vowel letter consists of a basic long vertical or horizontal stroke, from which other
shorter strokes are drawn. On the basis of their shapes, we can group all the Hangeul vowel letters into
three groups as follows.
vertical
horizontal · ¬ · ·
mixed · + - - -
The grouping is important
because when consonant and
vowel letters are placed together
to form a Hangeul syllable, their
proportions within the writing
square vary according to the
shape of the vowel. The basic
principle is this: a Hangeul
syllable always begins with a
consonant letter. When the vowel
in the given syllable is vertical,
it is written to the right of the syllable-initial consonant, and when it is horizontal, it is written below the
consonant. If the vowel is a mixed one, it is written in such a way as to fit under and to the right of the
consonant. It is important to observe this principle, otherwise your writing could appear very unnatural
and difficult to read. Let us look at some examples.
c G Shin 2006 11
º2 ¯.
Vertical Vowel
Example: a-(i) = child
Further Examples:
¹ * ' · ¹ *
si ha se ye seo hi
Horizontal Vowel
Example:
O-(seu-teu-re-il-li-a)
= Australia
Further Examples:
~ ¨ ~. ´~ ¨. ¯
yo tto eu u ryo hyu
Mixed Vowel
Example: Gwa-(il) = fruits
Further Examples:
´- ·. · . °- ¨- ¯-
wo ui swae dwi mwo gwe
A Hangeul syllable can have up to two consonants after the vowel. The position for the syllable-final
consonant(s) is the lower portion of the writing-square, below the combination of the syllable-initial
consonant and the vowel. Here are some examples.
Vertical with a Final Consonant
Example: Han-(geul)
Further Examples:
´. ´ ¹. ¨. ´, ³
in sang ban gap anj chanh
Horizontal with a Final Consonant
Example: (Han)-geul
Further Examples:
´¬. `- ´-. ´. ¨· ´-
deul neuj seup ol jon seun
Mixed with a Final Consonant
Example:
Gwaen-(cha-na-yo)
= It’s OK.
Further Examples:
'-D c -¬ ) -® ¯¬¬ º-¬ º¬á
gwal oen doel gwon wen win
12 c G Shin 2006
·.·.(1)
3 Cultural Notes: Hangeul
The Korean alphabet is known as Hangeul (literally: Korean Writing). The background to its
invention is in itself an interesting story, and is also important for understanding its principles.
Understanding why something was designed helps us understand how it actually works.
Hangeul was first developed early in the 15th century under the active guidance of King Sejong
(reigned 1418–1450). This was at a time when the written language of Korea was Chinese. Chinese
writing possessed immense prestige as the instrument of a sophisticated system of government, and had
been adopted and adapted from China over hundreds of years: to abandon it would have been
unthinkable. Hangeul was designed, as far as modern scholars can tell, not to replace Chinese
characters but to complement them.
Chinese characters needed to be complemented because there were areas where they were ineffective
– the most important of these being the simple and accurate representation of the sounds of the Korean
language: native Korean place names, personal names, onomatopoeia, and song transcriptions, etc. For
many centuries, these areas had been represented by an elaborate tradition of using Chinese characters
for their phonetic values. But for reasons that are still not entirely clear, this system had largely fallen
into disuse by Sejong’s time. Moreover, the acquisition of Chinese character literacy was not open to
all, or even to many. This resulted in people without an inability to read Chinese being beyond the
effective reach of government.
By now the Korean language contained many Chinese words with Koreanised pronunciation.
Language used in government, law and administration was full of these words. If people could not be
taught to read and write Chinese characters, they could at least be helped to understand them when
heard, if a simple phonetic script to represent Chinese characters could be developed. Thus it was an
important function of Hangeul to give people who were illiterate in Chinese a simple phonetic script
with which they could pronounce words and, upon pronouncing them, grasp their meaning.
This was why when Hangeul was first unveiled in 1446 after many years of study and deliberation it
was called not ‘Han-geul’ (which is a modern name) but ‘Hun-min-jeong-eum’ – Correct Sounds
for the Instruction of the People. In support of this purpose, the script was simply written, almost
completely phonetic, and easy to remember. Interestingly, however, what has arrested the attention of
countless scholars since then is the astounding ease with which this simplicity is capable of rendering
clearly, and unambiguously, something as intricate as the sound system of the Korean language.
However, while the traditional Korean social order survived (with its systems of education and
government so firmly founded on Neo-Confucian principles), Hangeul was barely used. But, as the old
order fell into final decay late last century and a strong push for modernisation began, Hangeul came
into its own as a very effective instrument of modern mass literacy. The Korean language had, of
course, evolved a good deal over a time span of five hundred years, but the principles of Hangeul were
so clear, simple and well conceived that they could be adapted readily to modern needs. In fact the
Hangeul symbols in use today, both in the Republic of Korea and in the Democratic People’s Republic
of Korea, are surprisingly identical to those first developed under Sejong.
For students of Korean, the existence of Hangeul, a simple and effective means of writing Korean,
makes transcription of Korean into European alphabet letters superfluous. Thus, although a number of
systems of Hangeul romanisation exist, for language students they are only really useful as transitory
aids. There is really no substitution for being able to read the Hangeul script itself, and students are
strongly encouraged to devote attention to this from the outset. Hangeul is essentially phonetic, very
consistent, simple to master and innately appealing in its ingenious simplicity.
c G Shin 2006 13
º3 ¯.
3 ·.·.(2)
IN THIS UNIT ...
• More about Hangeul
• More about pronunciation
HANGEUL – THE KOREAN ALPHABET
Let us continue studying Hangeul. In this unit we learn the alphabetical order of Hangeul letters and
their individual names, and some of the very basic pronunciation rules.
1 Korean alphabetical order and names of Hangeul letters
Alphabetical order for consonants and vowels, as currently standardised in the Republic of Korea, is
as shown in the following boxes.
Consonants Names
¯´ gi-yeok
· "¯´ ssang-gi-yeok
·´- ni-eun
¯. di-geut
¬ "¯. ssang-di-geut
÷ ·´¬. ri-eul
) ¤´-. mi-eum
) ¬´-. bi-eup
· "¬´-. ssang-bi-eup
¹´- si-ot
"¹´- ssang-si-ot
< ¢´-. i-eung
× ¯´- ji-eut
* "¯´- ssang-ji-eut
· =´¬ chi-eut
- ¯´-. ki-euk
÷ ¯´¬. ti-eut
¯´- pi-eup
¬ *´¬ hi-eut
Vowels Names
¢ a
· ae
¢ ya
· yae
· eo
· e
· yeo
· ye
· ~ o
·. wa
+ ^. wae
· ·. oe
· ~ yo
¬ ´~ u
- ´- wo
- º- we
- ´- wi
· ´~ yu
~. eu
·. ui
¢ i
14 c G Shin 2006
·.·.(2)
To refer to the consonants themselves, use the names provided in the box below. For tensed
consonants, the prefix "- (ssang-: double) is added to the respective normal consonant. The vowels
are referred to as the individual sound they represent.
Alphabetical order is followed letter by letter in units of one syllable. Thus the first entry in a Korean
dictionary is ¯, followed by all the compounds whose first syllable is ¯. These compounds are of
course themselves presented in alphabetical order, and so the final entry under ¯in a standard concise
dictionary would be ¯*(fully, sufficiently), for ¬(*´¬) is alphabetically the last consonant and
(¢) is alphabetically the last vowel. The next entry would be ¨, followed by all the ¨- compounds,
then ¯.- and so on.
The tensed consonants, i.e., ·, ¬, ·, and *, are placed at the conclusion of the respective
normal consonant entries, i.e., , , ), and ×. That is, ·- entries follow the entire - entries
and precede - entries.
In dictionaries, words which begin with vowels are ordered under ‘zero-initial’ consonant <(¢´-.),
and thus before ×(¯´-) and after (" ¹´-).
Some examples
Consider the following list of Korean family names as an example of Korean alphabetical order in
action. If you picked up a Korean telephone book, the names would be in this order.
¨ z ¯· ÷. ':A ¬ ¬.
¬ ¨. ¨. · ¹. ` ÷
´ -¯· ²~ ". ¹ ` ¤ ¹.
¬ ¹. ¬ ¤ ¹ ¹. ¹
¹ ÷. ¹ `. `.´~ ` · ´·
´ -. ´-. `. ´. ´. ´ ·
´ . · ´. ´. ~ ´- ´~
Eá ´- ´~ ´¬ ´-. ¢ ´.
´ . ¨ ¯. ¨ º º¨. ¨
¨ - ¯ ¯. = × ³. ³.
¯ ~ - -. * ·. ¯. ¹
· . ¯- 4C}
c G Shin 2006 15
º3 ¯.
2 Reading Hangeul
In the first two units we made a few important points about Korean pronunciation, mostly as to how
we pronounce vowels and syllable-initial consonants. Let us review them, and study more points on
reading syllable-final consonants. For our reading practice, we draw examples from, wherever possible,
country/city names around the world and common English loan words, which should not be regarded as
foreign words but rather as Korean words of foreign origin.
The letters and
Despite the romanisation convention, (¹´-, romanised as s) and ("¹´-, romanised as ss)
are pronounced respectively as sh and ‘tensed’ sh when they occur in front of the vowel i, or a
‘y-combined’ vowel (see Page 5). Listen to the language tapes or CDs and practise reading the
following examples.
¹÷.· ~¢¹·. ¹· ··´- -·¹·. ¤¢´-~
Si-deu-ni o-a-si-seu Si-e-ra-ri-on Mo-ri-syeo-seu Me-i-seun-ssi
Sydney Oasis Sierra Leon Mauritius Mr Mason
The letter <(¢´-.)
The <(¢´-.) letter doubles as a silent, or dummy, consonant when it is the initial consonant in a
syllable; and ng when it is the final consonant in a syllable (see Page 8). Now, listen and practise.
´~¨.¯.¢ ~·· ´ ¯¨¨. ¯'-. ·.·-¯
U-reu-gwa-i o-pe-ra Sing-ga-po-reu Ga-bong Seu-ri-rang-ka
Uruguay Opera Singapore Gabon Sri Lanka
The letter ÷(·´¬.)
When ÷(·´¬.) occurs as the syllable-initial consonant it is pronounced as r, more precisely, ‘flap’ r
(see Page 5). If it occurs as the syllable-final consonant, however, ÷is pronounced as l, more precisely,
‘retroflex’ l. You produce a retroflex l sound in the same manner as you do an l, except that your tongue
tip should be placed on the hard palate, not at the back of the upper teeth. Now, listen and practise.
·¬`· ¢-. ¤÷.·÷. ª.´¯ ·- .
Re-ba-non I-ran Ma-deu-ri-deu Hel-sing-ki Ne-pal
Lebanon Iran Madrid Helsinki Nepal
When the syllable-final ÷(·´¬.) is followed by another ÷, that is, when you have two ÷s between
two vowels, the two ÷s shall be pronounced as retroflex l. Now, listen and practise.
¹.·¬¯ . -.´-. -.² . ³.· ¹.·¢¹¢
tel-le-bi-jeon pil-leum keul-leop Chil-le Mal-le-i-si-a
television film club Chile Malaysia
16 c G Shin 2006
·.·.(2)
Normal, tensed and aspirated consonants
Recall that, despite the romanisation
convention, (¯´), (¯.), )
(¬´-.) and ×(¯´-) are pronounced
respectively as k, t, p and ch when they
occur sentence-initially (see Page 5).
In fact, these four consonants, ie k, t, p
and ch, form series of three in Korean, in
which they have normal (more precisely,
partially aspirated), tensed and aspirated
(more precisely, heavily aspirated) forms,
while s also has both normal and tensed
forms.
The normal series are , , ), ×
and (¹´-), while the tensed series are
represented as ·("¯´), ¬("¯.),
·("¬´-.), *("¯´-) and
("¹´-), and the aspirated series as -
(¯´-.), ÷(¯´¬.), (¯´-) and ·
(=´¬).
The distinction is to be made clearly
when these consonants occur
syllable-initially. Listen and practise
reading the Korean words in the table on
the right.
Normal Tensed Aspirated
¯-. '-. ° -
geun kkeu keun
root string big
¹. ¹. ¹ .
dal ttal tal
moon daughter mask
'. º. ª.
bul ppul pul
fire horn grass
¯~ ?~ =~
ja-yo jja-yo cha-yo
“I sleep.” “It’s salty.” “It’s cold.”
¹~ ~~
sa-yo ssa-yo
“I buy.” “It’s cheap.”
Now, listen and practice reading the country/city names below. The focus here is on the distinction
between normal and aspirated forms. Notice in particular that normal forms, ie , , )and ×, are
pronounced as romanised – g, d, b and j, respectively – when occurring after a voiced sound, eg a
vowel. By contrast, pronunciation of aspirated forms, ie -, ÷, and ·, is constant. (Incidentally,
tensed forms, ie ·, ¬, ·, *and , are not used in representing foreign loan words in Hangeul.)
¯· ¯¯¨. -.¯· -·¨כ
Ga-na Ka-ta-reu Kong-go Mo-na-ko
Ghana Qatar Congo Monaco
¯'¬.-. ¯¯ -·¯ `.¯
Deo-beul-lin Teo-ki Kae-na-da Mol-ta
Dublin Turkey Canada Malta
`.·¨. ¨ .-· . `.¯`. ¯¨.¨·.
Beu-ra-jil Peu-rang-seu Mol-di-beu Ki-peu-ro-seu
Brazil France Maldives Kypros
¯¤¢¯ =÷ . ¯¯ ¨.`-=¢
Ja-me-i-ka Cha-deu Pi-ji Kam-pu-chi-a
Jamaica Chad Fiji Kampuchea
c G Shin 2006 17
º3 ¯.
Unexploded consonants
When occurring in the syllable-final position, (¯´), ·("¯´) and -(¯´-.) are all
pronounced as unexploded k. Likewise, (¯.) and ÷(¯´¬.), and )(¬´-.) and (¯´-), are to
be pronounced respectively as unexploded t and unexploded p in the syllable-final position. (Note that
¬("¯.) and ·("¬´-.) do not occur as a syllable-final consonant in modern Korean.)
If you are not sure of unexploded sounds, say act, opt, and “the cat pulled ...”. You will find that the
underlined k (represented as c), p and t sounds are not exploded as in, for example, back, top and cat.
Now, listen to the tapes or CDs and practise reading the following words.
¯´ ¹ ¯´-. ¯. ¯´¬. ¬´-. ¯´-
gi-yeok bak ki-euk di-geut ti-eut bi-eup pi-eup
Name of outside Name of - Name of Name of ÷ Name of ) Name of
Also, the letters (¹´-), ("¹´-), ×(¯´-), ·(=´¬) and ¬(*´¬) are all pronounced as
unexploded t when they occur in the syllable-final position. (Note that *("¯´-) does not occur as a
syllable-final consonant in modern Korean.) Now, listen and practise.
¹´- ´. ¯´- =´¬ *´¬
si-ot eot ji-eut chi-eut hi-eut
Name of Past-tense marker Name of × Name of · Name of ¬
Let’s continue. In the examples below the underlined , )and are pronounced as unexploded k,
p and t, respectively. It would be useful to know that when writing a foreign loan word in Hangeul,
(¹´-) – not (¯.), nor ÷(¯´¬.) – appears to be the most preferred letter for a syllable-final t
sound (for an unclear reason).
¹¯¢ ´.-.- ?`.·.¯ ´-¯.-. `·-` .
nek-ta-i ol-lim-pik aek-syeon-seu-ta dok-teu-rin non-pik-syeon
necktie olympics action star doctrine non-fiction
¹. ¨.¹ ¤¢ ¨.´ . -.´-. ·¯´ .
tip jip-si me-i-keu-eop pap-song ri-deo-sip
tip gypsy make-up pop(ular) song leadership
¯¹ ¨¯- ¨.·° ·° ÷-
Ti-bet ro-bot keu-ri-ket ra-ket do-neot
Tibet robot cricket racket doughnut
The vowels and
The distinction between
these vowels is being lost in
standard spoken Korean (see
Page 10).
?`. ?·.¹ . -.¤¨. -.¯
aek-syeon ek-seu-maen Den-ma-keu daen-di
action X-man Denmark dandy
18 c G Shin 2006
·.·.(2)
The vowels ·, -, and +
The distinction between ·(romanised as oe) and -(romanised as we) is not made in standard
spoken Korean (see Pages 6 and 10). Despite the romanisation convention, both of them are
pronounced we as in wet in English. Listen and practise reading the following examples.
In addition, as a result of loss of distinction between and , the distinction between -and +is
likewise being lost in standard spoken Korean.
¬º -¢¯. ¨.¬`.º - ³.· . ·.´.¯~ ^.~?
Ku-we-i-teu Jim-ba-beu-we cham-oe oe-sam-chon wae-yo
Kuwait Zimbabwe yellow melon maternal uncle “Why?”
3 Some FAQs
Are there several different Hangeul scripts?
No, there is only one. There are no separate sets of cursive, lower and upper case letters, as in
English.
So why don’t Hangeul characters appear to be written the same way.
Not only are there variations in individual handwriting, but there are also print stylisations and
different fonts. As an example of the latter, here are eight different fonts which give the characters
different looks.
Even so, these variations are relatively slight. Once your eye adjusts to them, they are never a source of
confusion.
Also note there is another source of variation – that caused by the different inner proportions of the
writing square. Look at the different proportions of the -(¯´-.) letter in the following two words.
This is because in ¬¬the -is followed by a horizontal vowel, and in -·¯it is followed by a
vertical vowel:
¬¬(Cuba) -·¯(Canada).
Is Hangeul written down or across the page?
Predominantly, across the page. However, depending on the conventions of the particular field of
writing, Hangeul can be written down. For example, some of the major South Korean magazines are
written down the page, while others write across the page.
Is Hangeul written in conjunction with Chinese characters?
Yes and no. Again, it depends on the prevailing conventions. Some South Koreans newspapers use
upwards of 3,000 Chinese characters. Others don’t use any. In North Korea Chinese characters are not
used at all.
c G Shin 2006 19
º4 ¯.
4 ·¯¯~?
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Telling people where you are going
• Some basic verbs
• Using the Polite Informal verb endings
• More about pronunciation
WHERE ARE YOU GOING?
When you run into friends or fellow students, you say hello, that is, “´.Ü*'~?”. Often, you will
then notice you are asked where you are heading. Don’t be surprised. The question is rarely meant to be
inquisitive, but is simply part of a routine Insa in Korea. It is simply asked after the initial greeting to
indicate polite interest in someone’s doings. In this unit we learn how to respond to such questions, and
study a bit about using Korean verbs to describe a range of activities.
1 Conversation
Kylie, a foreign student in Korea, has just met up with a Korean acquaintance, ¥.´(Seon-Yeong),
in the street.
¯ ´.·: ´.Ü *'~?
¥.´: ´.Ü*'~, ¯´.· ~. ·¯¯~?
¯ ´.·: ¯¯.·¯~.
¥.´: ¯.·~? ·÷¯¯.·¯~. ¨.¢¯~.
Translation
Kylie: Hi.
Seon-Yeong: Hi, Kylie. Where are you going?
Kylie: I’m going to school.
Seon-Yeong: Really? So am I. Let’s go together.
Notes for Conversation
• · · ·~(ssi): In Korean, we almost never
address someone by just their name (“David”,
“Annie”, etc) unless they are very close friends.
Rather, it is part of Korean etiquette to add some
sort of title, or status referent, to someone’s
name, and so here ¥.´adds ~to Kylie’s
name. ~is a somewhat matter-of-fact title that
usually indicates that no particular personal
relationship exists with the person being
addressed. We suggest that in addressing your
fellow students by name, you likewise add ~.
• ·¯· · ·? (eo-di): Where ...?
• ¯~(ga-yo): go; for further information, see
below.
• ¯¯.(hak-gyo): school
• · · ··(e): to
• ¯.·~? (Geu-rae-yo?): Is that so?
• ·(na): I
• · · ·÷(do): too, also
• ¨.¢(ga-chi): together; note that the ÷
(¯´¬.) in ¨.¢is not pronounced as t but ch.
20 c G Shin 2006
·¯¯~?
2 Where are you going? I am going to ...
·¯
where
´-T.
bank
¯ ~?
do you go?/are you going?
¹¨.
bookshop
¹ ¯¯.
university
¯M.´¹
student dining hall
¯¯.
school
¯M.
student
¯ .´.
classroom
´¹
dining hall, restaurant
¨·.´.
lecture room (in university)
¨.
house, home
÷ ¹\dB
library
¹·
downtown
¯¯´-.
coffee shop

to ...
´~׬
post office
¯~.
I go/I’m going
If we want to ask people where they are going we can say:
·¯¯~?
and to answer we can say:
PLACE NAME - ·¯~.
EXAMPLES
·¯¯~ ? Where are you going?
¯¯.·¯ ~. I’m going to school.
÷¹\dB· ¯~. I’m going to the library.
¹··¯ ~. I’m going to the city.
Language & Culture Notes
• A Korean sentence is complete without the overt grammatical subject. The word-on-word
translation of the question ·¯¯~ ? is in fact “Where go?”, and, out of context, it can mean
“Where do you/does she/do they go?” etc. We deduce the subject from the context of the
sentence. It may take a while for you to get familiar with this way of saying things, but for the
moment you can safely assume that, whenever you see a subjectless sentence, the English
counterpart of the ‘missing’ subject will always be a pronoun, ie either of I, you, he, she, it and
they, and exactly what the pronoun is will be worked out from the context.
• Although ¯¯.means school, it also identifies any educational establishment from a primary
school to a graduate school. Similarly, ¯.´.means classroom, referring to a classroom in any
educational institution.
c G Shin 2006 21
º4 ¯.
Pronunciation Notes: Liaison (1)
When a Hangeul character has the syllable-final consonant and there is no syllable-initial consonant
in the following character, that is, when the second character begins with <(¢´-.), the syllable-final
consonant of the first character is pronounced as if it occurs in the syllable-initial position of the second
character. This is the prototypical example of the process which we call liaison.
Liaison is important because it can bring about sound changes; it is indeed the source of many
discrepancies between spelling and pronunciation. For instance, ¨.(house) is pronounced as jip,
according to the rule we learnt in the previous unit: )(¬´-.) is pronounced as unexploded p in the
syllable-final position (see Page 18). However, when ¨.is followed by a character which begins with
<(¢´-.) as in ¨.·(to a house), the )is not pronounced as unexploded p but as b. It is pronounced
as if it occurs in the syllable-initial position of the next character. We thus say ji-be, not jip-e.
The same applies to ¯.´.(classroom). (However, there are further complications involving ÷
(·´¬.), which we learn later in this Unit.) While ¯.´.is pronounced as gyo-sil (the syllable-final ÷
is pronounced as l, as explained in Page 16), ¯.´.·(to the classroom) is to be pronounced as
gyo-si-re, not gyo-sil-e. The ÷is pronounced as if it occurs in the syllable-initial position of the
next character (see Page 16, and also Page 3). Listen to the language tapes or CDs and practise reading
the following examples.
EXAMPLES
¨. jip ¨.· ji-be to the house
¯ ¯´-. keo-pi-syop ¯¯´-.· keo-pi-syo-be to the coffee shop
´ ~׬ u-che-guk =⇒ ´~׬· u-che-gu-ge to the post office
¯.´. gyo-sil ¯.´.· gyo-si-re to the classroom
¨ ·.´. gang-ui-sil ¨·.´.· gang-ui-si-re to the lecture room
3 More places where we go ...
¯ z
corner shop
¨
cinema, theatre
¬¯~¯z
video shop
¹¨
market
´¯¤µ
supermarket
¹.¹`¹¨
Namdaemun Market
´¯
corner shop
¬·.¯¤¹.
bus terminal
¬Eá
hospital
¨¹.¯¤¹.
Gangnam Express Bus Terminal
´-.´¨.
restaurant
´
railway station
Lª.¨.
(bae-kwa-jeom)
department store
¹´.´
(Seo-ul-yeok) Seoul Station
*~¹Lª.¨.
Lotte Department Store
÷.¯
airport
÷.Eá
park
´.Ö.÷.¯
Incheon International Airport
22 c G Shin 2006
·¯¯~?
Language & Culture Notes
• ´¯¤µgenerally refers to a large Western-style supermarket, while ´¯is the name many
small local shop keepers choose – a derived name from ´¯¤µ(with perhaps the connotation
of ‘Mini-Mart’).
• ¬E áindicates a hospital or clinic. In Korea there is no widespread system of neighbourhood, or
family doctors, and people tend to go to the hospital outpatients division to obtain prescription.
• ¹.¹`¹¨(Namdaemun Market), and ´-.¹`¹¨(Dongdaemun Market), are the places to go
for bargains in Seoul: cheap clothing, jewellery, silk, ginseng, tents, and so on and wonderful
local food from street stalls. ¹.¹` and ´-.¹`(Dong-dae-mun) refer to the ‘Great South
Gate’ and the ‘Great East Gate’ in Seoul, respectively. Here, ¹.- literally means south, ´-.- east,
¹- great (see also Page 20, the same ¹- appears in ¹¯¯.), and `gate.
• ¨¹.¯¤¹.(Gangnam Bus Terminal) is Seoul’s only express bus terminal for buses to all parts
of Korea. It can be reached easily by subway. Here ¨literally means river, and refers to ·.¨
(han-gang: the Hangang River) which runs across Seoul. Can you guess where Gangnam Bus
Terminal might be located?
• ¹´ .´(Seoul Station) is in the centre of Seoul. It is both a subway station and the rail-transport
hub for long-distance trains to most of Korea. Luggage can be stored in lockers for 24 hours.
• ´.Ö.÷.¯(Incheon International Airport) is the major gateway to Korea, located 35 km
southwest of Seoul.
Pronunciation Notes
• The letter in ´¯¤µ and *~¹ is to be pronounced as unexploded t, as explained in Page 18.
• Liaison (2): When a Hangeul character ending in a partially aspirated consonant, ie (g),
(d), )(b) or ×(j), is followed by ¬(h), the ¬is not pronounced as a separate sound, but is
‘blended’ with the preceding partially aspirated consonant, resulting in a heavily aspirated
sound, ie -(k), ÷(t), (p) or ·(ch). (The same is true when ¬(h) occurs as a
syllable-final consonant and is followed by a partially aspirated consonant.) This heavily
aspirated consonant is then pronounced as if it occurs in the syllable-initial position of the second
character, ie where ¬occurs. To reflect this we’ve romanised Lª.¨.as bae-kwa-jeom.
• Liaison (3): Note that the ÷in ¹´.´(Seoul Station) is to be pronounced as l, not r. The
liaison rule (1) we introduced in Page 22 is not applied, particularly when the syllable-final ÷
(l) is followed by a vowel combined with the semi-vowel y, ie ¢(ya), ·(yeo), ~(yo) or ´~
(yu). We’ve thus romanised ¹´.´as seo-ul-yeok, not as seo-u-ryeok.
4 Using Korean Verbs (1): the Polite Informal Style
Korean verbs come at the end of clauses and sentences. They have two components: a stem and an
ending. The stem gives the meaning, and the ending shows what function the verb performs. The verbs
in the list below, marked with a dash, ie ‘-’, are in their stem forms. To use these stems we need to learn
a number of endings, and in this Unit we learn to attach the endings in order to ask simple questions and
make simple statements. It is worth observing at the outset that Korean verbs are extremely regular, and
so once you know one class of ending you can automatically use it with all the verb stems.
There are about twenty verb endings we use to show whether we’re making a statement or asking a
question (or expressing commands or suggestions). Twenty may sound a lot, but we use these endings
to express another kind of meaning as well: the speech ‘style’ (or level), ie whether we are speaking to
the hearer in a polite, formal, informal, or intimate way. We need to recognise at least four
grammatically distinctive speech styles in Korean, which we call Polite Informal, Polite Formal,
Intimate, and Written, respectively. Thus, each of the twenty verb endings can be identified as Polite
Informal Statement, Polite Informal Question, Polite Formal Statement, Polite Formal Question, and so
on.
c G Shin 2006 23
º4 ¯.
The Polite Informal style features the verb endings -¢~, -·~and, in the case of · · ·*- verbs,
¯~, with varying intonation patterns attached. See the following page for details. The Polite Informal
style is appropriate when we talk to people we feel close to, even when they are older or of higher social
status, and to strangers perhaps after an initial phase of formality or to just manifest our inclination to
be polite but informal to them. We assess that the Polite Informal is likely to be of much greater use to
most students than the other three, we concentrate on using it in this book.
The Polite Formal style is widely used in formal situations. When you use it, it is as if you pay the
hearer the compliment of regarding him/her as being of a social status superior to yours. The Polite
Formal also carries somewhat masculine connotations. So while it can be used by women, this often
occurs only when the women concerned are performing roles commonly associated with men –
exercising authority in an office situation. We will study the Polite Formal in Unit 7.
As the label suggests, the Intimate style is used between very close friends, amongst the family
members, or by an adult speaking to a child. Thus, using the Intimate style towards someone that you
don’t know very well can make the situation very awkward. The Written style is used in literary works;
using it in your talk will give an impression that you are reading aloud some written piece. We will
study these two styles in the next volume.
Some basic verbs & expressions
¯ -
go
~.-
write
~-
come
¹.·-
meet
* -
do
`-
see
÷ .`~*-
study
¹¯Z.`-
take an exam
¢¢¯*-
have a chat
¨.¯-
sleep
¹ -
eat
`.-
play
¤¹ -
drink
´´-.*-
exercise, work out
´¹*-
have a meal
¨-
what
´¬ º*-
do homework
¯~?
do you do ...?/are you doing ...?
½.ª.*-
telephone, ring
·.
Yes.
´ ÷-
(ik-) read
¢·~.
No.
Traditionally Korean verbs are listed in what is called their ‘dictionary form’, consisting of the verb
stem plus the suffix -¯(-da). However, this form is non-functional in spoken Korean, and so in the
vocabulary lists in this book you see just the verb stems. We mention this because your instructor,
especially if he or she is a native speaker, may refer to the dictionary form, and when you start to use
Korean-English dictionaries you will see all the verbs are listed in this form.
A small number of Korean syllables end with two consonants, as in ´÷- (to read). When the
consonant cluster is followed by a vowel, ie when followed by a syllable that begins with the letter <
(¢´-.), both of the consonants are pronounced (see Page 25). Otherwise, there are rules that apply to
determine which of the two are pronounced. In the case of ´÷-, the ÷(·´¬.) falls silent, and thus we
read ik-. We judge that these double consonant syllables are sufficiently rare for us to note the
pronunciation when individual cases come up, rather than to offer a list of rules at this stage.
24 c G Shin 2006
·¯¯~?
Do you ...? Yes, I do ...
To ask and respond to this question in the Polite Informal style we attach the -¢~/-·~ending to
the verb stem with an appropriate intonation pattern.
Firstly, we attach the ending as follows.
1. If the last vowel in the verb stem is =or E, we add -¢´.
Note, however, (1) the -¢is omitted from -¢~if the preceding verb stem actually ends in , and
(2) in case of stems ending in ·, the ·is written in combination with the ensuing , thus ~. Note
also that this rule is not applicable to the verb stem *- (to do) and stems ending in *-. See 3 below.
EXAMPLES
`.- + ¢~ = `.¢~ ~- + ~ = ·.~
¯- + ~ = ¯~ `- + ~ = ¹.~
¨.¯- + ~ = ¨.¯ ~ ¹¯Z.`- + ~ = ¹¯Z.¹.~
¹.·- + ~ = ¹.· ~
2. For all other final vowels in the verb stem the ending is -^´.
Note however (1) in case of stems ending in , the is written in combination with the ensuing ,
thus ~, and (2) in case of stems ending in , we drop and add ~.
EXAMPLES
´÷- + ·~ = ´÷· ~ ¤¹- + ~ = ¤¹~
¹- + ·~ = ¹· ~ ~.- =⇒ + ~ = ~ ~
3. Verb stems ending in -¬(to do) becomes -$´.
EXAMPLES
* - ¯~ ´¹*- ´¹¯~
´¬º* -
=⇒
´ ¬º¯~ ½.ª.*- =⇒ ½.ª.¯~
¢¢¯*- ¢¢ ¯¯~ ´´-.*- ´´-.¯~
÷.`~* - ÷.`~¯~
Secondly, as in English, we say the verb with a rising intonation when we ask a yes–no question, and
say with a falling intonation when we ask a wh- question, make a statement, or answer to a question.
As mentioned above, a Korean sentence is complete without the overt subject and the English
counterpart of this ‘missing’ subject is a pronoun. In the examples below we are only assuming the
pronoun to be he.
EXAMPLES
Q: ¯~? Is he going? A: ·, ¯~. Yes, he’s going.
Q: `.¢~ ?
(No-ra-yo)
Is he playing?
A: ·, `.¢~.
(Ne, no-ra-yo)
Yes, he’s playing.
Q: ´÷·~ ?
(Il-geo-yo)
Is he reading?
A: ¢·~, ~~.
(A-ni-yo, sseo-yo)
No, he’s writing.
Q: ¤¹~ ? Is he drinking? A: ¢·~, ¹·~.
(A-ni-yo, meo-geo-yo)
No, he’s eating.
Q: ¨-¯~? What’s he doing? A: ÷.`~¯~. He’s studying.
c G Shin 2006 25
º5 ¯.
5 `-=¨-'~.
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Could I have a ... please?
• Please have a ...
• Counting in Korean (1)
GREEN TEA, PLEASE
In this Unit we learn ways of asking for goods and services – specifically food and drink. We also
learn how to offer people refreshments. In addition we take our first look at the Korean counting system.
1 Conversation
Annie, another foreign student in Korea, has just walked into a coffee shop. She’s talking with the
waitress.
¨ -.2.E.: ·¹~'~.
··: ¨÷¨-·.´.·~?
¨ -.2.E .: ¤´.^".·¯, ¨÷¨-·.`-2,·~. ~®Ú.¯¨-·.´.·~.
··: `-=´.·~?
¨ -.2.E .: ·, ´.·~.
··: ¯.-., `-=¨-'~.
Translation
Waitress: Welcome.
Annie: Do you have grape juice?
Waitress: I’m sorry, we don’t have grape juice. We
have orange juice.
Annie: Do you have green tea?
Waitress: Yes, we do.
Annie: Well, then, could I have green tea, please?
Notes for Conversation
• ¨-.2.E.(jong-eo-bwon): waiter, waitress, and
other similar employees in the service industry
• ¨÷(po-do): grape
• ¨-·.(ju-seu): fruit juice
• ... ´.·~? (i-sseo-yo; see Page 27 for
pronunciation note): Is there (any) ...?, Have
you got (any) ...?
• ... 2,·~. (eop-sseo-yo: See Page 27 for
pronunciation note): There isn’t (any) ..., I
haven’t got (any) ...
• -`-/-´-(neun/eun): This is the topic particle.
It indicates that the previous word is being
specifically drawn to the other person’s
attention. The effect is similar to stressing, or
italicising, words in English: “We don’t have
any grape juice, (implying, but we do have
other fruit juice.)”
• `-=(nok-cha): green tea
• ¯.-., ... (Geu-reom): Well, then, ...
• ... ¨-'~(ju-se-yo): Please give me ..., Can
I have ...?
26 c G Shin 2006
`-=¨-'~.
2 Drinks & other expressions
`-.
water
´~´~
milk
´- .¨.´-
drink, beverage
´¯
(traditional) rice nectar
¬.·
cola
´-¨¯.
(traditional) fruit punch
·-·¢÷.
lemonade
´·./ -¨-
liquor
¹ ¢¯
lemonade
K¨-
beer
¨ -·.
juice
¨÷¨-
wine
=
tea (in general)
·¨-
distilled hard liquor
¯-=
black tea
´.-
‘there is/are ...’, to have
`-=
green tea
2,-
there isn’t/aren’t ...’, ‘to not
have’
´.´.=
ginseng tea
¨--
to give
¯¯
coffee
·¯
here
Language & Culture Notes
• ¹¢¯doesn’t mean cider, as one might expect, but lemonade, as it does in Japanese. This is
probably due to some quirk in the circumstances in which lemonade was first introduced to Japan
before being introduced in Korea. Currently, however, ·-·¢÷.is seemingly more used.
• ¯-=literally means red tea in reference to the colour of what is called black tea in the English
speaking world.
• ´¯is a traditional drink made from fermented rice and powdered malt. It is generally served as
a dessert.
• ´-¨¯.is another traditional Korean drink. It is made from dried persimmons (÷¨.: got-gam),
ginger (M.¨: saeng-gang), cinnamon (z¯: gye-pi), and honey (¨·.: kkul), and tastes a
little bitter yet sweet.
• The hyphen in -¨-(liquor) indicates that it is a bound form, ie a form that can only be used when
it is part of a compound, as is the case with the following K¨-.
• ·¨-is a vodka-like spirit made from grain or potatoes, and is very popular in Korea.
Pronunciation Notes
• Notice the pronunciation of ´-.¨.´-(drink, beverage): the ÷(·´¬.) in ¨.is to be pronounced as
n, not r.
• ´¯(rice nectar): This is another example of the liaison explained on Page 23, whereby a
partially aspirated consonant becomes heavily aspirated when followed by ¬(*´¬).
• The verb stems ´.- and 2,- are pronounced as it- (see Page 18) and eop- (see Page 24)
respectively. (However, when followed by a vowel as in ´.·~and 2,·~, the syllable-final
consonants ("¹´-) and »(¬´-.¹´-) are pronounced as they’re spelt: i-sseo-yo and
eop-seo-yo.)
c G Shin 2006 27
º5 ¯.
When we buy things ...
To ask about availability in a shop, restaurant, etc, we can say:
NOUN ´.·~?
The affirmative response will be:
·, ´.·~.
The negative response will be:
¢·~, 2,·~.
EXAMPLES
A: ¬.·´ .·~? Do you have any cola?
B: ·, ´ .·~. Yes, we do.
A: K¨-´ .·~? Do you have any beer?
B: ¢·~, 2,·~. No, we don’t.
To ask for things, we can say:
NOUN ¨-'~.
When actually handing things over, the
shopkeeper may say:
(·,) · ¯´ .·~.
which means (Yes,) here it is or here you are.
EXAMPLES
A: ·¨-¨-'~. Soju, please.
B: ·, · ¯´.·~. Yes, here it is.
A: ¯-=¨-'~. I’ll have a tea, please.
B: ·¯´ .·~. Here it is.
Language Notes: the verb ´.·~and its negative counterpart 2,·~
The Korean expressions ´.·~and 2,· ~have two uses. One is where the appropriate English
expressions would be: ‘There is/isn’t ...’ (for singular) or ‘There are/aren’t ...’ (for plural). For
example:
`-=´ .·~? Is there any green tea?
·, ´.·~. Yes, there is.
Here the question is concerned with the existence (or non-existence) of the thing concerned in some
particular circumstances.
A second use of the Korean ´.·~and 2,·~is where English expressions similar to those in the
following question/answer sequences are used:
`-=´ .·~? Do you have green tea?
·, ´.·~. Yes, we do.
Although the English version of this question/answer sequence does not use is (or are), the sequence
is nonetheless similar (even sometimes identical) in meaning to: Is there any green tea in your
possession, in your shop, at home, etc? and Yes, there is. That is, ´.·~and 2,·~are also used for
talking about possession by whoever you is, rather than about the general existence of green tea in a
given context.
28 c G Shin 2006
`-=¨-'~.
3 Fruits, refreshments and other expressions
¯.´.
fruit
³.·.
yellow melon
¹¯.
apple
¯´-
kiwi
¤
pear
¯´.·ª-.
pineapple
¨ ÷
grape
¤´.(¨-·.)
plum juice
~®Ú.¯
orange
¯.¯
biscuits
·.
mandarin
¹-
sweets
´ -¬
watermelon
¢¢·.¨.-.
ice cream
¯'-
plum
´¬.-
to take, take hold of
'-´¬.¢
peach
¹>´.-
(ma sit-) to be tasty
¹.¯
strawberry
¹>2,-
(mad eop-) to be unpalatable
¨.
persimmon
´,-
(an-) to sit
Language, Culture & Pronunciation Notes
• ¤´.is a kind of plum, green in colour and smaller and harder than a ‘usual’ plum. ¤´.¨-·.,
often known simply as ¤´., is a relatively recent but very popular soft drink in Korea.
• ¹>(mat) is taste. Thus, the literal meaning of ¹>´.·~is ‘(It) has a taste’, and ¹>2,·~‘(It)
doesn’t have a taste’. Note also that, while liaison happens in ¹>´.·~(ma si-sseo-yo), it
doesn’t in ¹>2,·~(mat eop-seo-yo). When you say ¹>2,·~, give a brief pause between
¹>and 2,·~.
• ´,-: The syllable-final consonant cluster (·´-¯´-) is pronounced as n. The ×(¯´-) falls
silent here.
When offering food and drink ...
When we offer refreshments to people we can say:
NOUN ÷.'~.
To accept food and/or drink offered to us,
we can say:
·, ¨.¹^".·¯.
To decline, we can say:
¢·~, ¨s.³"¢~.
which means “No, I’m OK (not to have any).”
EXAMPLES
=÷.'~. Have some tea. ¯.´.÷ .'~. Have some fruit.
·, ¨.¹^".·¯. Yes, thank you. ¢·~, ¨s.³"¢~. No, I’m OK.
c G Shin 2006 29
º5 ¯.
Pronunciation Notes
• In Unit 1, we learnt Mi-an-ham-ni-da (I’m sorry), Ban-gap-sum-ni-da (Nice to meet you),
and Gam-sa-ham-ni-da (Thank you). When written in Hangeul, these expressions are as
follows.
¤´.^".·¯. ¹.¨.´-.·¯. ¨.¹^".·¯.
Notice the discrepancy between spelling and pronunciation involving the syllable-final )(¬´-.)
in ^".and ´-.. As we studied in Unit 3 (see Page 18), the syllable-final )is to be pronounced as
an unexploded p, but here it is pronounced as m. This is in fact part of the general assimilation
rule within the Korean sound system whereby a non-nasal stop sound (eg p, t and k) becomes
nasalised (thus become m, n and ng respectively) when it occurs in front of a nasal sound. The
changes from p to m, t to n, and k to ng may seem strange at first sight, but, if you say them
slowly, you will see that these pairs of consonants have the same articulation points.
• In Korean, h tends to be silent (more precisely, weakly aspirated) when it occurs between two
voiced sounds. This is particularly noticeable when the speaker speaks at a normal speed. Thus,
you should pronounce ¨s.³ "¢~(“I’m OK”) as gwaen-cha-na-yo, not as
gwaen-chan-ha-yo.
4 Using Korean Verbs (2): Asking people to do in Polite Informal style
When we ask people to do things in Korean we can say
VST - (~.)' ~.
Notes: VST = verb stem; add ~.if the verb stem
ends in a consonant; pronounce the verb with a
falling intonation.
EXAMPLES
¨-- + '~ = ¨-'~. Please give me ...
¤¹- + '~ = ¤¹'~. Drink.
÷.`~*- + '~ = ÷.`~*'~. Study.
´÷- + ~.'~ = ´÷~.'~. (Il-geu-se-yo) Read.
´,- + ~.'~ = ´,~.'~. (An-jeu-se-yo) Take a seat.
Note that, while some of the English translations may sound impolite, all the Korean sentences in the
example are essentially polite – the Polite Informal ending has been employed.
Also, verb stems that end in ÷(·´¬.), such as ´¬.- (to take, take hold of ), drop the ÷before we add
-(~.)'~. This is why we say ÷.'~.
´¬.- =⇒ ÷.- + '~ = ÷.'~. (Deu-se-yo) Have some!
`¬.- =⇒ `- + '~ = `'~. (No-se-yo) Have fun!
5 Pure Korean Numbers (exist only for 1–99)
There are two sets of numbers in Korean: Pure Korean and Sino-Korean. Pure Korean numbers exist
only for the numbers 1 – 99 in modern Korean, and are mainly used for the counting of relatively small
numbers of objects or people. By contrast, Sino-Korean numbers are used for all larger numbers and, in
general, for essentially abstract counting such as mathematics, decimals, fractions, distances and
money. Let’s study Pure Korean numbers first.
30 c G Shin 2006
`-=¨-'~.
From one to ten
*· one
´-. two
± (set) three
a (net) four
¯ (da-seot) five
· (yeo-seot) six
´.÷, seven
·-ý÷ (yeo-deol) eight
¢¯-. nine
2. ten
From ten to nineteen
2. ten
2.*· (yeo-ra-na) eleven
2.´-. twelve
2.± thirteen
2.a (yeol-let) fourteen
2.¯ fifteen
2.· (yeol-yeo-seot) sixteen
2.´.÷, seventeen
2.·-ý ÷ eighteen
2.¢¯-. (yeo-ra-hop) nineteen
The other tens
·.`-. twenty
¹*- thirty
¤¯~ forty
.. fifty
·´ sixty
´.¯~ (i-reun) seventy
·´- eighty
¢¯~ ninety
Pronunciation and Language Notes
• The syllable-final (¹´-) in ±(three), a
(four), ¯(five), and ·(six) is to be
pronounced as ‘unexploded’ t (see Page 18).
• Note also that the syllable-final consonant
cluster ÷(·´¬.¬´-.) in ·-ý÷(eight) is
pronounced as l. The )(¬´-.) falls silent
here (see also Page 24 for a note on the
syllable-final consonant cluster).
• For numbers from eleven to nineteen, you
simply say ten-one, ten-two, ten-three, etc, as
you see in the table. The same applies to
numbers from twenty-one to ninety-nine;
replace 2.(ten) with other tens, ie, twenty,
thirty, etc in the table.
• As mentioned above, h tends to be silent in
between two voiced sounds. In 2.*·
(eleven), 2.¢¯-.(nineteen), and ´.¯~
(seventy), the ¬(*´¬) is regarded to not be
there and subsequently liaison happens. We
thus romanise 2.*·as yeo-ra-na, not
yeol-ha-na; and ´.¯~as i-reun, not
il-heun.
• By the same token, while we have romanised
¢¯-.(nine), ¤¯~(forty), and ¢¯~(ninety)
as a-hop, ma-heun, and a-heun
respectively, you can disregard the h in each
case.
• 2.a(fourteen) is pronounced as yeol-let,
not yeol-net. It is difficult to pronounce n
immediately after l within the Korean sound
system, and thus the n assimilates into the
preceding l.
• Notice also the pronunciations of 2.·
(sixteen) and 2.·-ý÷(eighteen). As we
explained on Page 23, liaison does not happen
when the syllable-final ÷(·´¬.) is followed
by a vowel combined with the semi-vowel y,
ie ¢(ya), ·(yeo), ~(yo) or ´~(yu).
Thus, the 2.in 2.·and 2.·-ý÷does not
change to yeo-r· · · but remains as yeol-.
• Finally, some Koreans around you may
pronounce 2.´.÷,(seventeen) as
yeol-lil-gop, not as yeo-ril-gop.
Don’t get embarrassed; variation is a part of
language. You may find it interesting that in
pre-modern Korean seven was ‘¹.÷,’
(nil-gop). While the spelling has changed,
the pronunciation assumes the same rule
applied in pronouncing 2.a(fourteen).
c G Shin 2006 31
º6 ¯.
6 ¢¯´À¤·~?
IN THIS UNIT ...
• This, that (near you) and that (far from both of us)
• Using counters (or unit noun)
• Counting in Korean (2)
• Asking/telling prices of things
HOW MUCH ARE THESE?
Having learnt the names of a few goods, Pure Korean numbers, and ways of asking availability in a
shop, we might venture into buying things using Korean at a local shop. (If you’re outside Korea, you
may try a Korean grocery shop.) For this task, let’s study how to ask for prices, including how to use
demonstratives, Sino-Korean numbers and counters.
1 Conversation
Kylie Walker has just walked into a small corner shop in Seoul. She’s talking with the shop owner.
¯¨óÀ·: ¢¯¨-·~?
¯z¨-q¼õ: 9N½¯·~.
¯¨óÀ·: 9N½¯~? ¯.¨óÀ¨-·.·~?
¯z¨-q¼õ: ¢·~, 9N½¯`-... w´‡¬¯õ'·´-.¨.´-·~.
¯¨óÀ·: ¢, ·. ... ¢~"õ¯`-´À¤·~?
¯z¨-q¼õ: w´‡z·³õEᢠ·~.
¯¨óÀ·: nU¨óÌ·~?
¯z¨-q¼õ: ¯.ÛíÁ~. ¢¨-nU¨óÌ·~.
¯¨óÀ·: ¯`Ãzn´P¨-'~.
¯z¨-q¼õ: ·. ... ~³õEᢠ·~.
32 c G Shin 2006
¢¯´À¤·~?
Translation
Kylie: What’s this?
Shop owner: It’s Si-kye.
Kylie: Si-kye? Is it a fruit juice?
Shop owner: No, it’s ... a Korean traditional drink.
Kylie: Oh, I see. ... How much are these oranges?
Shop owner: One thousand won each.
Kylie: Do they taste nice?
Shop owner: Of course. They taste very nice.
Kylie: Can I have five of them please?
Shop owner: Sure. ... That’s five thousand won, please.
Notes for Conversation
• ¨-q¼õ(ju-in): owner
• ¢¯(i-geo): this (thing)
• 9N½¯(Si-kye): Note the pronunciation. The
(¯ßî½) in 9N½and the following (*´¬) are not
pronounced as separate sounds but are
pronounced as a ‘single’ consonant – a heavily
aspirated k. See Page 23 for more explanations.
• 9N½¯~? (Si-kye-yo): Did you say ‘Si-kye’?
When you want to make sure that what you
think you heard, eg a word, is right, repeat the
word and add -~(or -¢~if the word ends in a
consonant) with a rising intonation.
• ¯õ'·(jeon-tong): tradition, traditional
• ´-.¨.´-(eum-nyo-su): As explained on Page
27, the (·´¬.) in ¨.is pronounced as n, not r.
• ¢, ·. (a, ne): This expression indicates that
you now understand what has been said. Similar
to “Oh, I see.”
• ´À¤·~? (eol-ma-ye-yo): How much is
it/are they?
• w´‡z·(han gae-e): per item. -zis a counter
for things (in general), similar in function to item
in, eg an item of furniture. Thus, w´‡zmeans an
item. The Pure Korean numbers *·, ´., ¹ú, and
-Ãbecomes w´‡, '-, ', and ·when used before
counters (see below).
• ³õEᢷ~. (cheo nwo-ni-e-yo): It’s/they’re
one thousand won. Eáis the Korean currency.
• ¯.ÛíÁ~. (geu-reom-yo): Of course!
• ¯`Ãzn´P(da-seot gae-man): only five (of
them)
2 What’s this/that?
Korean has two ways of saying that: one for things far from the speaker but near the hearer, geu-,
and one for things far from both the speaker and the hearer, jeo-.
¢-
this ...
¢¯
this thing/object

thing, object
¯.¯
that thing/object (near you)
¯.-
that ... (near you)
¯¯
that thing/object (over there)
¯-
that ... (over there)
¨-·~?
What is it?
EXAMPLES
Q: ¨-·~? What is it?
A: "ô¨-·~. It’s beer.
Q: ¢¯¨-·~? What is this?
A: (¯.¯) ¤ ·~. (That)/It is a pear. (ie near you)
Q: ¯.¯¨-·~? What is that? (ie near you)
A: (¢¯) ´ -àíį.·~. (This)/It is Sujeonggwa.
Q: ¯¯¨-·~? What is that? (ie over there)
A: (¯¯) ´ ~´~·~. (That)/It is Milk. (ie over there)
When answering to the
question “What’s this?”, you
can say “That’s ...” or “It’s ...”
in Korean, as you do in English.
If you choose to say “That’s ...”,
then give an appropriate
demonstrative; if you want to
say “It’s ...”, then don’t give any
demonstrative. As explained on
Page 21, Korean sentences are
complete without the subject
and the English counterpart of
the ‘missing’ subject is a
pronoun, eg it.
c G Shin 2006 33
º6 ¯.
3 How many ... are there?
Some useful words
¹¸ ô
book
¹r¼õ
photo
'.÷õ
ball-point pen
z
dog
´õ­óÀ
pencil
¯·:GV¢
cat
·.¯
chair
¯õª*¯
telephone
¹¸ô9FV
desk
¯¹¹~
mobile phone
`
door, gate
¹÷·¬¯õ
television
<}`
window
´-
money
Language & Culture Notes
For mobile/cell phones, an interesting term, ^õ÷.¹~(haen-deu-pon: literally hand phone), is
widely used in Korea in addition to ¯¹¹~(hyu-dae-pon).
Some counters and unit nouns
¹Æ
How many ...?
¹
counter for machines
z
counter for things in general
¤·
counter for animals
ÝîÄ
bottle; also counter for bottles
;FV
counter for paper
r´‡
cup, glass; also counter for
cups/glasses

box, container; also counter for
boxes/containers
¯²~
counter for long/thin things
¬
counter for books
Pronunciation & Language Notes
• ¹Æis always used in conjunction with a counter or a unit noun, and functions as a question word:
‘how many (items)of ...?’ Note also that the syllable-final (=´¬) in ¹Æis to be pronounced as
unexploded t, unless liaison happens.
• In Korean, it is not obligatory for a noun to carry information as to whether it is singular or plural.
For instance, a sentence such as “¹¸ô¨óÌ·~.” can mean “There is a book.” or “There are books”.
When it is necessary to show how many books there are, you use a Pure Korean number with an
appropriate counter, eg “¹¸ô¯`ì¨óÌ·~(There are five books)”. Notice the word order here:
NOUN - PK Number - Counter. You mention the thing in your mind first, and then specify it.
• We insert a space between ¹Æand the following counter. That is, we write ¹Æz, not ¹Æz.
Likewise, we insert a space between a PK number and the following counter, eg ¯`ì.
34 c G Shin 2006
¢¯´À¤·~?
How many are there?
To ask this question we can say:
¹Æz¨ óÌ·~?
To name the things we’re interested in we say:
NOUN ¹Æz¨óÌ·~?
To answer, substitute a Pure Korean number for ¹Æ.
PK z¨ óÌ·~.
NOTE: When adding a counter to Pure Korean numbers, we shorten the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 as follows.

becomes
w´ ‡
thus
w´‡z, w´‡ÝîÄ, w´‡r´‡, w´‡¯²~...
´. '- '-z, '-ÝîÄ, '-r´‡, '-¯²~...
¹ú ' 'z, 'ÝîÄ, 'r´‡, '¯²~...
-à · ·z, ·ÝîÄ, ·r´‡, ·¯²~...
EXAMPLES
Q: ¤¹Æz ¨óÌ·~? How many pears are there?
A: 'z¨ óÌ·~. There are three.
Q: ¹r¼õ¹Æ;FV¨óÌ·~? How many photos are there?
A: ·; FV¨óÌ·~. There are four.
Q: ¨-·.¹Ær´‡¨óÌ·~? How many glasses of juice are there?
A: '-r ´‡¨óÌ·~. There are two.
Q: ¯·:GV¢¹Æ¤·¨óÌ·~? How many cats are there?
A: w´‡¤ ·¨óÌ·~. There is one.
More counters and unit nouns
Ǘˬ
kilogram

won (Korean currency)
·¯
litre
'./ £ëR·
dollar
¤¯
metre
¹õ¯.
cent
NOTE: Counters of foreign origin are not used with Pure Korean numbers, but with Sino-Korean numbers,
which we learn below. Note also that we use Sino-Korean numbers in counting money. See Page 37 for examples.
4 Sino-Korean Numbers
As mentioned earlier, Sino-Korean numbers are used for all larger numbers (recall that Pure Korean
numbers exist only for 1 – 99), for reading off numerals, and for abstract counting such as mathematics,
decimals, fractions, distances and money.
c G Shin 2006 35
º6 ¯.
From zero to ten
÷. 0
¨óÀ 1
¢ 2
9FS 3
¹ 4
~ 5
´- 6
ª÷ 7
­ëR 8
¬ 9
§óÂ 10
From ten to nineteen
§óÂ 10
§ó¨óÀ (si-bil) 11
§ó¢ (si-bi) 12
§óÂ9FS 13
§ó¹ 14
§óÂ~ (si-bo) 15
§ó´- (sim-nyuk) 16
§óª÷ 17
§ó­ëR 18
§ó¬ 19
The other tens
¢§ó 20
9FS§óÂ 30
¹§ó 40
~§óÂ 50
´-§óÂ 60
ª÷§ó 70
­ëR§óÂ 80
¬§ó 90
Pronunciation and Language Notes
• For numbers from 11 to 19, you simply say ten-one, ten-two,
ten-three, etc. The same applies to numbers from 21 to 99.
• For numbers in tens, ie, 20, 30, etc, you simply say two-ten,
three-ten, etc. Counting larger numbers has the same story.
For 200, 300, 2,000, 3,000, etc, you say two-hundred,
three-hundred, two-thousand, three-thousand, etc.
• Note that 10,000 is expressed in separate term in Korean: n´P
(man). Thus, unlike in English, 20,000, 30,000, etc will be
¢n´P(two-man), 9FSn´P(three-man), etc, and 200,000,
300,000, etc ¢§óÂn´P(twenty-man), 9FS§óÂn´P(thirty-man), etc.
• n´Pcan be prefixed with up to ³õ(cheon: 1,000). Thus,
2,000,000, 3,000,000, etc are ¢¹ôn´P(two-hundred-man),
9FS¹ôn´P(three-hundred-man), etc, and 20,000,000,
30,000,000 ¢³õn´P(two-thousand-man), 9FS³õn´P
(three-thousand-man), etc.
• For 100,000,000, you use a different term, ßí½(eok), and
prefix §óÂ, ¹ôand ³õfor even larger numbers.
• The numbers §óÂ, ¹ô, ³õand n´Pare by themselves ten, one
hundred, one thousand, and one ‘ten thousand’. Thus, for
10, 100, 1,000 and 10,000, we don’t need to prefix these
numbers with ¨óÀ(il: 1).
• A few examples for liaison (see Page 22) are in the list:
§ ó¨óÀ(si-bil), §ó¢(si-bi) and §óÂ~(si-bo).
• But the (¬´-.) in §óÂis pronounced as unexploded p (see
Page 18) in §óÂ9FS(sip-sam), §ó¹(sip-sa), §óª÷
(sip-chil), §ó­ëR(sip-pal) and §ó¬(sip-gu).
• Notice how §ó´-(16) is pronounced: sim-nyuk. This is
another example for an unchanged pronunciation from
pre-modern Korean (see also Page 31), where the
Sino-Korean six was pronounced as ryuk. With the
assumed presence of an r, the sound rule applied here is:
when the syllable-final p, t, or k is followed by an r, the
syllable-final consonant becomes nasalised, ie it becomes m,
n, or ng, and at the same time the r is pronounced as n.
• Finally, note the sound changes occurring in §óÂn´P(100,000),
¹ôn´P(1,000,000), etc. See Page 30 for explanations.
Larger numbers
¹ô 100
³õ 1,000
n´P 10,000
§óÂn´P (sim-man) 100,000
¹ôn´P (baeng-man) 1,000,000
³õn´P 10,000,000
ßí½ 100,000,000
36 c G Shin 2006
¢¯´À¤·~?
5 How much is it/are they?
To ask the price of goods, we can say:
´À¤·~ ?
To name the goods we’re talking about we say:
NOUN ´À¤·~?
To answer we say:
SK Eᢷ~.
NOTE: Eáis Korean unit of currency. If the price is in dollars, we use
'.(or £ëR·) and if necessary ¹õ¯.as well, and thus: SK '.(or SK
£ëR·) SK ¹õ¯.·~(It’s/they’re SK dollars and SK cents.)
EXAMPLES
Q: ´À¤·~? How much is it/are they?
A: n´P Eᢷ~. It’s/they’re 10,000 won.
Q: ¢¯´À¤·~? How much is this/are these?
A: n´P~³õ Eᢷ~. It’s/they’re 15,000 won.
Q: `-=´À¤·~? How much is the green tea?
A: ~n´P Eᢷ~. It’s 50,000 won.
Q: ¯·.¯´À¤·~? How much is that chair (ie over there)?
A: §óÂ~n´P Eᢷ~. It’s 150,000 won.
NOTE: We insert a space between the demonstrative ¢(this), ¯.(that (near you)), or ¯(that (over there)), and
the following noun. Thus we write ¯·.¯(that chair over there), not ¯·.¯. However, we omit the space when
writing ¢¯(this thing/object), ¯.¯(that thing/object (near you)), and ¯¯(that thing/object (over there)).
Sometimes we hear people say when giving the price of things:
PK z·SK Eᢷ~.
They’re SK won for PK (items).
NOTE: PK z·= for PK number of items. Note,
however, you use SK numbers with counters of foreign
origin, eg «óÀ¨(kilogram), ·¯(litre), and ¤¯(metre).
EXAMPLES
'-z·§óÂn´PEᢷ~. They’re 1,000 won for two. (eg ornaments)
´À¯²~·ª÷³õEᢷ~. They’re 7,000 won for ten. (eg pens)
w´‡ÝîÄ·~n ´PEᢷ~. They’re 50,000 won a bottle. (eg wine)
¯`ì·¢§óÂ9FSn´PEᢷ~. They’re 230,000 won for five. (eg a series of books)
w´‡¹·³ õn´PEᢷ~. They’re 10,000,000 won each. (eg cars)
¨óÀ·¯·³õ Eᢷ~. They’re 1,000 won a litre. (eg petrol)
¨óÀ«óÀ¨·9FS'.~ §ó¹õ¯.·~. They’re three dollars and fifty cents a kilo. (eg vegetables)
c G Shin 2006 37
º7 ¯.
7 ·.¬·¯.´.
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Classroom management language
• Using the Polite Formal verb endings
KOREAN CLASS
The classroom you are in is not a place where Korean is spoken naturally. The majority of the people
there are not (at least for the moment) fluent speakers of Korean and, above all, Korean is the object of
study. However, we can make our classroom close to a real-life situation if, wherever possible, we take
Korean to be the means to achieve our goal. In this unit we study expressions that are frequently used in
teaching and learning a foreign language. We also study more about Korean politeness.
1 Conversation
´ ´~, Kylie, John, and
Annie are playing a
‘guessing’ game. ´´~is
holding a picture table,
which has not been shown to
the other three. (However,
the table is given below for
your reference.) The three
are given instead, a list of the
Korean words for all the
pictures in the table. Their
task is to find out, by asking
‘yes-no’ questions only,
which picture is in which row
and in which column. ´´~
can say only ·or ¢·~.
´´~: ¯ , ¹¨^".¯~? ... ¯´.·~!
¯´.·: ·. ... ¢... ·¨·.ºo.´-·...
¯·´¢´.·~?
´´~: ¢·~.
¨·: ·¨·.ºo.´-·z´.·~?
´´~: ·?
¨·: ·¨·.... ºo.´-·... z´.·~?
´´~: ·.
¨·: ´-.·¨·.¯´¹·¯¯´.·~?
´´~: ¢·~.
¯´.·: ´-.·¨·.¯´¹·'¬.·Ú.´.·~?
´´~: ·.
··: ±·¨·.~*-´-·P´.·~?
´´~: ¢·~.
38 c G Shin 2006
·.¬·¯.´.
Translation
Sang-U: OK, shall we start? ... Kylie!
Kylie: Oh, yes. ... Umm ... On the left of the first row
... is there a cat?
Sang-U: No.
John: On the left of the first row is there a dog?
Sang-U: Sorry?
John: On the left of the first row ... is there a dog?
Sang-U: Yes.
John: In the middle of the second row ... is there a
coffee?
Sang-U: No.
Kylie: In the middle of the second row ... is there a
pen?
Sang-U: Yes.
Annie: On the right of the third row ... is there a book?
Sang-U: No.
Notes for Conversation
• ¯... (ja): an interjection used to indicate that
I, the speaker, now invites you, the hearer, to do
something (that is good to you).
• ¹¨^ ".¯~? (si-ja-kal-kka-yo): Shall we
start?; here the stem is ¹¨*- (to start, begin),
and the ending -(~.)¯~(shall we do ...). We
will study this ending in detail later in the
course. Note also the pronunciation: the
(unexploded k) in ...¨becomes a heavily
aspirated k in combination with the following
(h) in *(see Page 23).
• ¢... (a): an interjection similar to Umm in
English. It indicates that the speaker is taking
time to figure out what, and how, to say.
• ·¨·.(cheot-jjae jul): the first row;
here ·means the first, and ¨·.line, row.
• ºo.´-·(oen-jjo-ge): on the left; here ºo.´-
means the left side, and -·is the particle we
learnt in Unit 4 (see Page 21) in conjunction
with the verb ¯- (go). Note however, while -·
there was used to indicate the place to which we
are going, -·here is used to indicate the place
at, on or in which something is. Note also the
pronunciation: Liaison happens here (see Page
22).
• ·? (ne): Sorry?, I beg your pardon?
• ´-.·¨·.(dul-jjae jul): the second row;
´-.·means the second
• ¯´¹·(ga-un-de-e): in the middle
• ±·¨·.(set-jjae jul): the third row; ±·
means the third
• ~*-´-·(o-reun-jjo-ge): on the right;
~*-´-means the right side
2 Classroom management language
Some useful expressions
·.¬·
the Korean language
¯¹·. ½.
Once again!
·.·.
Hangeul
·?
Sorry?
¢´-.
name
Ö.Ö.*
Slowly!
··¯
Ladies and Gentlemen!
'.·
Fast!
...~
Mr/Ms ...
¨.z
Loudly!
¥.M.¹.
Teacher!
¯
more
¯¨ .¢
All together!
¯
all
Language, Culture & Pronunciation Notes
• The literal meaning of ··¯(yeo-reo-bun) is many respected people, where ··means
many and ¯respected people. The function of ··¯is self explanatory: attention getter. So, if
you hear your teacher saying ··¯, you are kindly requested to look at your teacher.
• As mentioned earlier (see Page 20), your instructor will be very likely to use -~(ssi) after your
name when addressing you or when referring to you for the benefit of your fellow students. Bear
in mind that, since -~is an honorific title term, you do not use it when you talk about yourself or
c G Shin 2006 39
º7 ¯.
when you mention your name.
• When you address your teacher, you don’t use -~however. The most appropriate expression to
use is “¥ .M.¹.(seon-saeng-nim)”. ¥.M.is a noun that refers to the profession of teacher, and
¹.an honorific suffix.
• Despite the spelling, you pronounce ¯¨.¢(All together!) as da ga-chi, not da ga-ti. Here,
¯means all, and ¨.¢together.
• ¯¹·.½.(da-si han beon) means Once again!, where ¯¹means again, and ·.½.(once).
We saw in the previous unit that *·(one), ´-.(two), ±(three), and a(four) become ·., '-,
', and ·respectively when they occur in front of a counter (a grammatical marker for
indicating number properties). The counter for times is ½.(beon), thus: ·.½.(once), '-½.
(twice), '½.(three times), etc.
• We learnt ·is yes. However, if you say ·while raising the intonation, you are asking the hearer
to repeat what he or she has just said. It is a short but very useful expression to know at this stage.
• ¯(deo) means more. You can use it with expressions such as '.·(ppal-li: fast) and ¨.z
(keu-ge: loudly), as in ¯'.·(faster) ¯¨.z(more loudly).
Some expressions for Classroom Activities
·
the first
¯´¹
the middle
´-.·
the second

in, on, at
¨·.
line, row
¹.
the bottom
ºo.´-
the left side
-·¹
from
~ *-´-
the right side
¤¯¹
the last, the end
·¨·.ºo.´-·
on the left side of the first line
¹.·¹´-.·¨·.
the second last line
Language, Culture & Pronunciation Notes
• Ordinal numbers in Korean are ·(cheot-jjae: the first), ´-.·(dul-jjae: the second),
±·(set-jjae: the third), a·(net-jjae: the fourth), ¯·(cheot-jjae: the fifth),
and so on. Note the pronunciation of the syllable-final (¹´-). As explained on Pages 18 and
23, the syllable-final (¹´-) is pronounced as unexploded t unless it is followed by a vowel.
Note also that ordinal numbers in everyday Korean are used only within the context of finger
counting – they are not used, for example, in naming dates of a month as we do in English.
• If you want to say that something is on the left, on the right, and in the middle, attach the particle
-·to ºo.´-(oen-jjok), ~*-´-(o-reun-jjok) and ¯´¹(ga-un-de) respectively.
Assuming that we are looking at a table with three columns and a few rows where a cat is on the
left column of the first row, we say ·¨·.ºo.´-·¯·´¢´.·~(Cheot-jjae jul
oen-jjo-ge go-yang-i i-sseo-yo: literally, The first line on its left, there’s a cat.).
• ¹.·¹(mi-te-seo) consists of ¹.(mit: bottom) and -·¹(e-seo: from). This expression
will be very useful if you want to say, eg the second last line: ¹.·¹´-.·¨·.(mi-te-seo
dul-jjae jul: literally, the second line from the bottom).
• The very last line/row can be referred to as ¤¯¹¨·.(ma-ji-mak jul).
40 c G Shin 2006
·.¬·¯.´.
Some more useful expressions
¹¨*' ~.
Start (it)!
¤·*'~.
Repeat after me!
¨.´¬.·`'~.
Listen carefully!
¯`'~.
Try it yourself!
¨.`´.·~.
I have a question.
...´-/`-´·¨¨-·~?
What is ... in English?
...´-/`-´·¨·: z¹.¯~?
How do you say ... in English?
¹¢~?
Is it correct?
-¨.Ã.·~.
I don’t know.
´·¬Þ.·~.
I’ve forgotten.
¢¨-¨¬¢~.
Very good!
¨.*`.· ~.
Well done! (You did well!)
Language Notes
• The first four sentences, ie ¹¨*' ~(Start (it)!), ¤·*'~(Repeat after me!), ¨.´¬.·
`'~(Listen carefully!), and ¯`'~(Try it (yourself)!), are all commands (see Page 30).
You will perhaps hear your instructor saying them many times; for instance, ¹¨*'~will be
said when you are about to do some exercises or group activities, and the expression ¯`'~is
typically to invite you to have a go.
• The expression ¨.(jal) in ¨.´¬.·`'~(Listen carefully!) means well, and thus the whole
sentence means, literally, Listen well!
• When you want to know the meaning of a particular word, eg '.·(ppal-li), you can say
‘'.·’`-´·¨¨-·~? (What is ±ëRin English?). Two things we should note here: -`-
(neun) and -¨(ro). Firstly, -`-, or ´-(eun), is the topic particle. The particle indicates that
the previous word or words are being specifically drawn to the listener’s attention (because the
speaker is going to talk about it). You use -`-if the previous word ends in a vowel, and -´-if it
ends in a consonant. Secondly, -¨, or -~.¨(euro), is the instrument particle. Its English
equivalent would be by means of, by, in, etc. You use -¨after a noun ending in a vowel or the
consonant (·´¬.), and -~.¨elsewhere.
• When you are looking for a translation of a sentence, eg Repeat after me, you can say ‘Repeat
after me’`-·.¬·¨·:z¹.¯ ~? (How do you say ‘Repeat after me’ in Korean?). Here,
·: zmeans how, and ¹.¯~do you say?.
• If you are making good progress in learning Korean, you will very likely hear the last two
sentences, ie ¢¨-¨¬¢~(A-ju jo-a-yo) and ¨.*`.·~(Jal ha-syeo-sseo-yo), many
times. ¢¨-means very, and ¨¬¢~(It)’s good. We saw ¨.(jal; well) above in ¨.´¬.·
`'~(literally: Listen well!). The same ¨.is used in ¨.*`.·~(literally, You did well!).
Incidentally, if you hear ¢¨-¨.* `.·~(A-ju jal ha-syeo-sseo-yo), don’t be puzzled. It
means You did extremely well!
c G Shin 2006 41
º7 ¯.
3 Using Korean Verbs (3): the Polite Formal Style
The Polite Formal style uses the endings -·¯/-´-.·¯(-m-ni-da/-seum-ni-da) to make
statements (and to respond to questions), -·¯?/-´-.·¯? (-m-ni-kka/-seum-ni-kka) to ask
questions, and -´.¹~/-~.´.¹~(-sip-si-o/-eu-sip-si-o) to issue commands. We use -·¯,
-·¯?, and -´.¹~when the verb stem ends in a vowel, and -´-.·¯, -´-.·¯?, and -~.´.¹~
when the stem ends in a consonant.
Polite Formal endings are used when there is a feeling of distance between people. They are used,
for example, when a student speaking to a teacher; when a younger person speaking to someone who is
substantially older; when a person of more junior rank or status is speaking to someone more senior; or
when two people who do not know each other very well are conversing.
Polite Formal endings are also used between friends in a formal situations. For instance, two close
adult friends might use Polite Formal endings in a business meeting (and of course switch to Polite
Informal or even to Intimate outside the meeting room).
As mentioned above (see Pages 23 and 24), the Polite Formal also carries somewhat masculine
connotations. So while it can be used by women, this often occurs only when the women concerned are
performing roles commonly associated with men – exercising authority in an office situation.
In summary:
Polite Formal Polite Informal
Making a Statement
VST-·¯.
VST-´-.·¯.

VST-¢~/·~.
· · ·¯~.

Asking a Question
VST-·¯?
VST-´-.·¯?

VST-¢~/·~?
· · ·¯~?

Issuing a Command
VST-´.¹~.
VST-~.´.¹~.
VST-'~.
VST-~.'~
Politeness cannot be reduced to mechanical rules. You will find different people have different ideas
about what is appropriate – indeed this difference highlights, at least in part, our individuality. As far as
your classroom is concerned, you will have to determine in consultation with your instructor what level
of speech is appropriate. If the instructor is middle-aged or beyond, then a more formal style would be
appropriate. If the instructor is young, then informality would be appropriate. The age of the instructor
is not the only variant, of course. The age of the students should also be taken into account: the older
the students, the greater the possibility that formal speech forms would come into play.
We suggest that you avoid being inhibited by the fear of being too informal or formal. As a beginner,
you will make many mistakes. But Koreans will not be seriously offended. They are more likely to be
delighted that you are trying to use Korean and, as people who are extremely tolerant, friendly and
supportive towards foreigners, they will not be hyper-critical of your performance.
On the next page is a table showing both formal and informal Insa, some of which we have studied
already. As you can see, these Insa expressions exhibit highly consistent patterns (VST plus an
appropriate ending), except for the pair ¨".Ã.´-.·¯and ¨¹.·~(See you again) and where
marked with a long dash, ———, which indicates that no appropriate expression is available.
42 c G Shin 2006
·.¬·¯.´.
Meaning Polite Formal Polite Informal
Hello. ´.Ü*´.·¯? ´.Ü*'~?
Pleased to meet you. ¹.¨.´-.·¯. ¹.¯´-~.
I’m ... · · ·´ .·¯. · · ·¢·~/·~.
Good-bye. (to person leaving) ´.Ü*¯´.¹~. ´.Ü*¯'~.
Good-bye. (to person staying) ´.Ü*z´.¹~. ´.Ü*z'~.
I’m sorry. ¤´.^".·¯. ¤´.¯~.
Thank you. ¨.¹^".·¯. ———
Thank you. ¯·¹.´-.·¯. ¯·¤´-~.
Not at all. ——— Ö.¹.·~.
It’s O.K. ¨s.³"´-.·¯. ¨s.³"¢~.
Yes. ·. ·.
No. ¢¹.·¯. ¢·~.
Welcome. ·¹~´.¹~. ·¹~'~.
Come in. ´¬.·~´.¹~. ´¬.·~'~.
Sit down. ´,~.´.¹~. ´,~.'~.
See you again. ¨".Ã.´-.·¯. ¨¹.·~.
Sorry I’m late. `-·¹¤´.^".·¯. `-·¹¤´.¯~.
c G Shin 2006 43
º8 ¯.
8 ~¯· ¹¯.´.·~?
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Fixing times to meet people
• Telling and asking the time
• Days of the Week
• ‘Shall we ...?’ and ‘Let’s ...’
• ‘How about ...?’
• Using Negatives
ARE YOU FREE THIS AFTERNOON?
In this Unit we continue to look at ways of asking for basic information in Korean, especially fixing
times to meet people, and talking about the things we do on a daily basis.
Note also that from this Unit on we do not provide romanisations for Hangeul. We assess that they
should not be necessary by now.
1 Conversation
¯´ -, a Korean student, is trying to find a time to exchange language lessons with David.
¯´-: ´.Ü*'~? ¹ ¢¬÷.~.
¹¢¬÷.: ·, ´.Ü *'~? ¯´-~.
¯´-: ¯, ... ~`-.~¯·¹¯.´.·~?
¹¢¬÷.: ¤´.^".·¯. ~`-.~¯·`-¹¯.2,·~. ´-2.
´.·~. ·´.´-·¤~?
¯´-: ¢, ... ~½.´-´ .¯.~. ´´-
´.·~. ~¯'-¹·¤~?
¹¢¬÷.: ·.·~. ... '¹ `-·¤~?
¯´-: '¹Æs¬³ "¢~.
¹¢¬÷.: ¯.-., '¹·¹ .¹.¯~?
¯´-: ·, ¨¢~.
Translation
Ji-su: Hi, David, how’s things?
David: Hi, Ji-su. Yeah, fine, thanks.
Ji-su: Er, are you free this afternoon?
David: Not this afternoon, sorry – I’ve got classes. What about tomorrow?
Ji-su: The morning’s no good – I’ve got an appointment. What about two in the afternoon?
David: Mmm. ... What about three?
Ji-su: Three’s OK.
David: Well then, shall we meet at three?
Ji-su: Sure.
44 c G Shin 2006
~¯·¹¯.´.·~?
Notes for Conversation
• ¯, ...: This is a polite form of hesitation, similar
to Er ... or Um ... in English.
• ~`-.: today
• ~¯: p.m.
• ~`-.~¯: this afternoon. Notice the ordering
~`-.~¯, not ~¯~`-..
• ¹¯.: period of time, hour
• ´-2.: class
• ·´.: tomorrow
• ~½.: a.m.
• ¢, ...: This expression indicates that the speaker
is deciding what to say. It’s similar to Um ....
• ´.¯.~: · · · is no good. This is the standard
phrase to indicate that some course of action or
arrangement won’t work.
• ´´-: appointment, date
• ·.·~: This expression indicates that the
speaker is hesitant to accept – it is similar to
we-ell.
• ·¤~?: How (is it)?
• ¯.-., ...: well, then
• ¹.¹.¯~?: Shall we meet?; here the stem is
¹.·- (to meet), and the ending -(~.)¯~
(shall we do ...). See below.
• ¨¢~: Good. This indicates that the speaker is
happy to accept what’s been said – similar to
Sure.
• ´-/`-: Topic Marker. During this course, we’ll
gradually become familiar with the particle
´-/`-. Instead of just explaining its grammatical
function we prefer to show you how it works in
context, so that you can develop a feel for it. In
asking when David was free in the conversation,
¯´-’s question specified this afternoon. What
David wants to convey by saying ~`-.
~¯·`-is that although this afternoon isn’t
possible, other times are. So he gives special
emphasis to the ensuing phrase ·´.´-...,
where the particle ´-invites ¯´-to focus away
from this afternoon to other times. Likewise,
when David would prefer three o’clock to two
o’clock, he reacts non-committally to ¯´-, and
then invites ¯´-to focus on three o’clock –
hence he says '¹`-....
2 Fixing Times to Meet People
Some Useful Words
~`-.
today
-¯ minute
· ´.
tomorrow
-½ . before
~ ½.
a.m.
¹. half

p.m.
¹¯.
hour, time
¯.
now
´-2. class
-¹ o’clock ·.¬·´-2. Korean class
/¹...? What time ...? ´´-
appointment, date
Asking and Telling the Time: Hours and Minutes
To ask the time in Korean we can say:
¯./¹ ·~?
NOTES: ¯.= now; /= how many; ¹= o’clock
To answer:
PK ¹·~. or
PK ¹SK ¯¢·~.
NOTES: PK stands for Pure Korean Number, and SK
Sino-Korean Number.
c G Shin 2006 45
º8 ¯.
Examples
We use Pure Korean numbers for the hours and Sino-Korean numbers for the minutes. (See the
Cultural Note below on Page 49.) Notice that -¹in “¯./¹·~?” is a counter. While in English
we say: What time is it?, the Korean equivalent is literally: How many points in time (of the clock) is it?
We thus shorten the numbers *·(one), ´.(two), ±(three) and a(four) to ·., '-, 'and ·
respectively when adding -¹to these Pure Korean numbers (see Page 35).
·.¹´ .¯¢·~. '-¹´.¯ ¢·~. '¹·~.
not *·¹´.¯ ¢·~. not ´.¹´.¯ ¢·~. not ±¹·~.
·¹´.¯ ¢·~. ¯¹´ .¯¢·~. ·¹´ .¯¢·~.
not a¹´.¯ ¢·~.
' ¹´.´.¯ ¢·~.
or '¹¹.¢·~.
If the time is half past three, you can say either It’s thirty
(minutes) past three or It’s half past three by adding ¹.(half )
to the hour. That is:
'¹¹.¢·~.
' ¹´.~¯ ¢·~.
No equivalent expression for quarter is used in telling the
time in Korean. If the time is a quarter past three, you simply
say:
'¹´.~¯ ¢·~.
Also, if the time is 12:45, you say:
2.'-¹¹´.~¯¢·~.
Alternatively, you can say:
·.¹´ .~¯½.¢·~.
which means literally It’s ‘fifteen minutes’ to one. Here ½.
means before. The same goes for any minutes between 31
and 59.
2.'-¹¹´.~¯¢·~.
or ·.¹´.~¯½.¢·~.
46 c G Shin 2006
~¯·¹¯.´.·~?
Days of the Week
m®~´.
Monday
.~´.
Friday
m®~´.·
on Monday
¯~´.
Saturday
ª.~´.
Tuesday
´.~´.
Sunday
´ -~´.
Wednesday
´.~´.~ ¯1¹· on Sunday one p.m.
`-~´.
Thursday
¨-¹.· on the weekend
Pronunciation Notes: The liaison rule applies when you say m®~´.and ´.~´.; they are pronounced
respectively as wo-ryo-il and i-ryo-il. Note also that `-~´.and .~´.are pronounced as mo-gyo-il
and geu-myo-il respectively.
Shall we ...?
When we want to propose doing something we can say:
VST - (~.)¯~?
NOTE: If the VST ends in a consonant, add ~..
m®~´.~ ¯·.¹·¹.¹.¯~? Shall we meet at one o’clock Monday afternoon?
¯, ¹¨^".¯~? OK. Shall we start?
¯¯·.¯.¤ ´.¯~? Shall we have a cup of coffee?
·¯´,´¬.¯~? Shall we sit here?
NOTE: Unlike in English, to say one p.m., you put ~¯first and then ·.¹, not the other way around.
If we want to respond positively, we can say:
·, VST - (~ .)¹¯. Yes, let’s ...
NOTE: If the VST ends in a consonant, add ~..
The -(~.)¹¯ending carries masculine connotations, and thus female speakers tend to use:
·, VST - ¢ ~/·~/· · ·¯~. Yes, we ...
A: ·´.¹.¹.¯~? Shall we meet tomorrow?
B1: ·, · ´.¹.¹.¹¯. or Yes, let’s meet tomorrow.
B2: ·, · ´.¹.·~. Yes, let’s meet tomorrow. (Literally: Yes, we meet tomorrow.)
We can also give a short answer as follows.
A: ·´.~ ¯·¨·¨.¯~? Shall we go to a movie tomorrow afternoon?
B: ·, ¯ ...¹¯. or ·, ¯.·~. Yes, let’s do that.
And to say No, it is polite to use a non-committal expression such as below to show hesitation, rather
than giving a direct refusal.
·.·~...
We-ell ...
c G Shin 2006 47
º8 ¯.
How about ...?
When we want other people to consider what we have in mind, we can say:
NOUN ·¤~ ? How about NOUN?
NOTE: The question literally means How is/are
NOUN?
EXAMPLES
m®~´.~ ¯·¤~? How about Monday afternoon?
·´.~ ½.2.·.¹·¤~? How about eleven tomorrow morning?
¯.· ¤~? How about now?
K¨-· .¯.· ¤~? How about a beer?
To respond positively, we can say:
NOUN Æs¬³"¢ ~/ ¨¢~. NOUN is OK / good.
And to respond negatively, we can say:
NOUN ´.¯ .~. NOUN is no good.
EXAMPLES
A: m®~´.~¯'¹·¤~? How about Monday three p.m.?
B1: m®~´.~¯'¹Æs¬³"¢~. or Monday three p.m. is OK.
B2: m®~´.~¯'¹¨¢~. Monday three p.m. is good.
A: ´-~´.· ¤~? How about Wednesday?
B: ´-~´.´.¯.~. ´-2.´.·~. Wednesday’s no good. I’ve got classes.
3 Using Negatives
There are three points we should bear in mind. First, as we’ve learnt, the negative counterpart of the
verb ´.- (there is/are; to have) is 2,- (there isn’t/aren’t; ‘to not have’).
EXAMPLES
¹¯.´.·~? Do you have time?
¢·~, ¹¯.2,·~. No, I don’t have time.
¹>´.´-.·¯? Is it tasty?
·.·~, ¹>2,´-.·¯. Well, it’s not tasty.
Second, the negative counterpart of “NOUN-·~/¢·~(am/are/is a NOUN or NOUNs)” is
“NOUN-(¢/¯) ¢··~(am/are/is not a NOUN or NOUNs)”. Unlike its positive counterpart,
¢··~takes a grammatical complement that is optionally marked with the particle -¢or -¯. (As
we will study in Unit 10, -¢and -¯are two variant forms of the Subject marker.) You use the particle
-¢with a noun that ends in consonants, and -¯with one that ends in a vowel.
Note that the verbs ¢- (to be) and ¢·- (‘to not be’) don’t follow the rules we studied on Page 25.
We suggest you treat them as exceptions. Note also that ·~/¢·~and ¢··~change to ´.·¯
and ¢¹.·¯in Polite Formal statements respectively.
48 c G Shin 2006
~¯·¹¯.´.·~?
EXAMPLES
¢¯`-=·~? Is this green tea?
¢·~, ¯.¯`-=¢··~. No, that’s not green tea.
¢·~, ¯.¯`-=¯¢··~. No, that’s not green tea.
P¢·~? Is it a book?
¢·~, P¢¢··~. No, it’s not a book.
P´.·¯? Is it a book?
¢·~, P¢ ¹.·¯. No, it’s not a book.
Third, to say I/you/they etc don’t do such-and-such, you add the negative adverb ´.with a space
before the verb. Note that with verbs ending in *- (to do), the ´.is placed directly in front of the *-.
EXAMPLES
¨.·¯~? Are you going home?
¢·~, ¨.·´.¯~. No, I’m not going home.
¨-¹.·´ ´-.¯~? Do you exercise on the weekend
¢·~, ¨-¹.·´´-.´.¯~. No, I don’t exercise on the weekend
¯.· .¬·÷.`~^".·¯? Are you studying Korean now?
¢·~, ¯.·.¬·÷.`~´.^ ".·¯. No, I’m not studying Korean now.
4 Cultural Note: Numbers
The co-existence of two sets of numbers in Korean reflects the co-existence of these two major
spheres in Korean culture – the native Korean and the Sino-Korean. The influence of Chinese culture on
Korea over the centuries has been profound and perhaps nowhere is this more apparent than in the
spoken and written language, where almost 50% of the total Korean lexicon is derived from Chinese,
more precisely, Classical Chinese.
We know very little about the shape of Korean civilisation prior to the penetration of Chinese culture
into the peninsula, a process that began in earnest about 2,000 years ago. However, it is clear from the
depth of the Chinese borrowings that there were many areas, such as art, science, technology, statecraft,
and religion, in which the Koreans recognised technological, metaphysical and aesthetic
accomplishment and strove to apply Chinese norms to their own environment.
The norms of Chinese civilisation did not enter Korea through invasion. Although the Chinese had a
colony in the northwestern part of the peninsula between the first century BC and the fourth century
AD, they were not spread among the people of the peninsula by force. Rather, they seeped in over the
centuries and were adopted by a people who were strongly attracted to the grandeur and sophistication
of many aspects of Chinese civilisation. Of course, they were nonetheless Korean for avidly responding
in this way, just as Australians are nonetheless Australian for responding to the attractions of much of
European civilisation.
In practice, although Korean has two sets of numbers, rarely, if ever, is there any doubt about which
set to use. If we were to describe the difference in a nutshell, it would be that in referring to the hours of
the day – a unit of measurement that can more or less be reckoned with a tilt of the head up to the sun in
the sky – we use Pure Korean numbers, whereas in referring to the minutes of the hour – a unit of
measurement that can only be reckoned with reference to a relatively sophisticated measuring device –
we use Sino-Korean numbers. As we saw above (see Page 35), this theme of technology extends to all
foreign units of measurement. The Sino-Korean system is used in referring to units of distance, weight
and quantity in the Western metric system.
c G Shin 2006 49
º9 ¯.
9 ·`.· ··¹.oP·~?
In this Unit ...
• Countries and People
• Where do you come from?
• Using Description Verbs
• Where is it located?
WHICH COUNTRY ARE YOU FROM?
In this Unit we learn to exchange personal information about ourselves, in particular, asking and
telling people where we come from.
1 Conversation
Annie Brown, an Australian exchange student to Korea, is buying pens in a small stationery shop
near her Korean university. She is talking with the owner of the shop, a middle-aged man.
Annie: ´.Ü *'~? ... ¢'.·Ú.2.¤·~?
Shop Owner: ·.¯²~·~LEᢷ~.
Annie: '-¯²~¨-'~.
Shop Owner: ·. ... ¯M.¢·~?
Annie: ·? ... ¢, ·. ... ·, ¯M.¢·~.
Shop Owner: ¨-÷.`~¯~?
Annie: ·.¬·÷.`~¯~.
Shop Owner: ¢, ·. ... ·.¬·¯··´-~?
Annie: ·, ¨.··´-~. *¯¹., º¤´.·~.
Shop Owner: ·`.···¹.oP·~? ¤¬·¹.oP·~?
Annie: ¢·~, ¨-·¹.oP·~.
Shop Owner: ¨-~? ¨-¹-.¢·~? ... ¨-·¯¹.oP·~? ¹÷.··¹
.oP·~?
Annie: ¢·~. jB.¬··¹.oP·~. ... jB.¬·¢'~?
Shop Owner: ¯.-.~. jB.¬·¨.´.¢~. ... ³.¬*¯·¨.¢¯,¤…·~.
`.··.¤´.¯-.=¢··~?
Annie: ·? ... ¢·~, jB.¬·`-... ¢... ¨-´-÷·~. ... ¢... ¹÷.·
¯-.=·´.·~.
Shop Owner: ´-÷~? ¨-´-÷`-¹÷.·¯¢··~?
Annie: ¢·~, jB.¬··~.
Shop Owner: ¢, ·. ... ¯! '.·Ú.·¯´.·~. Ö.Eᢷ~.
Annie: ¨.¹^ ".·¯. ´.Ü*z'~.
Shop Owner: ·, ¨~'~.
50 c G. Shin 2006
·`.···¹.oP·~?
Translation
Annie: Hello. ... How much are these pens?
Shop Owner: They’re five hundred won each.
Annie: Can I have two, please?
Shop Owner: Sure. ... Are you a student?
Annie: Pardon? ... Oh! Yes! Yes, I’m a student.
Shop Owner: What do you study?
Annie: I study Korean.
Shop Owner: I see. Is Korean difficult?
Annie: Yes, a little bit. But, it’s interesting.
Shop Owner: Which country are you from? Are you from the US?
Annie: No, I’m from Australia.
Shop Owner: Australia? Are you Australian? ... Where abouts in Australia are you from? Are you from Sydney?
Annie: No, I’m from Canberra. ... Do you know Canberra?
Shop Owner: Of course, I do. ... I once went there with my friends. Isn’t it near Brisbane?
Annie: Pardon? ... No, Canberra is ... umm ... Australia’s capital. Umm ... it’s ... it’s near Sydney.
Shop Owner: Did you say that Canberra is the capital city of Australia? Isn’t the capital Sydney?
Annie: No, the capital is Canberra.
Shop Owner: I see ... Well, here are your pens. That’ll be one thousand won, thanks.
Annie: Thanks. Bye.
Shop Owner: Bye.
Language Notes
• ·?: I beg your pardon?
• ¢, ·: Similar to “Oh, I see.” See Page 45 for more information.
• ·.¬·¯··´-~?: Is Korean difficult? Note that -¯(or -¢) is the Subject marker. Use -¯
after a noun ending in a vowel, and -¢elsewhere. The verb stem of ··´-~is ·Þ.-. It is a
description verb, which means that ... is/are difficult. See Page 54 below.
• ¨.: a little bit
• *¯¹.: But ...
• º¤´.·~: It’s interesting.
• ·`.··: Which country ...
• -·¹: from
• .oP·~?: Literally, Did you come ...? See Unit 10 for Past Tense.
• ¤¬: the US
• ¨-: Australia
• ¨-~?: Did you say ho-ju? See Page 45 for more explanations.
• ¨-¹-.: an Australian
• ·¯¹= ·¯·¹: From where
• jB.¬·¢'~?: Do you know Canberra? The stem of ¢'~is ´.- (to know, to know about).
• ¯.-.~: Of course! Note that ¯.-.~is a ‘full’ sentence on its own.
• ³.¬: friend(s)
• -*¯·¨.¢: together with ...
• ¯,¤…·~: I visited ... The stem is ¯`- (literally, go and see). See Unit 10 for Past Tense.
• `.··.¤´.¯-.=: Literally, in the vicinity of Brisbane
• ¢··~?: Isn’t it ...?
• ¨-´-÷·~.: It’s Australia’s capital. ´-÷is the capital city.
• ...·´.·~: It’s located in/at/on ...
• ¯!: an interjection used to signal that the speaker is about to offer something good to the hearer,
or about to invite the hearer to do something that the speaker thinks is good to the hearer.
• ¨~'~: Literally, “Please come again!”. This is a standard Insa from shop keepers to
customers who are taking their leave.
c G. Shin 2006 51
º9 ¯.
2 Some Countries and Continents
· ·/-¬ country, nation ¨-/~·.¯.·´.·¢ Australia
·.¬ Korea (ROK) ´-´. Germany
'¬·./¢'¬ North Korea ·¹¢ Russia
¨¥. Korea (DPRK) ¨.-·./'.-.¹ France
´.¯- Japan ¢¹.·¢/¢¹· Italy
¨¬.¬ China ·.·´. Spain
¹¹. Taiwan ´¬ England, UK
`-.¯· Mongolia ¤¬ USA
¤¯.¹. Vietnam ¢¹¢ Asia
¹¬ Thailand ~'¢·¢ Oceania
¹.·¢¹¢ Malaysia ´~.. Europe
´.÷·¹¢ Indonesia ¢¤·¯ America
´.÷/´.¯¢ India ¢¨.·¯ Africa
¯¯·.-. Pakistan ·.¬ overseas
¢-. Iran ·`.· · · which · · ·
¢·¨. Iraq -·¹ from
Korean names for countries
Korean names for countries usually reflect the historical period in which Korea first encountered
those countries. Major Western Powers, for example, were first encountered in the mid to late 19th
century, during the period of encroachment into China. So Korean terms for England and the US, for
example, reflect Chinese practice at the time. Countries encountered later during the Japanese Colonial
Period (1910-1945), such as Australia, are named according to Japanese practice. In the post-war era
there has been an increasing tendency to simply name countries phonetically – the countries listed in
Units 2 and 3 are examples of this.
The names for Korea
The term ·.¬(Han-guk) refers to the Republic of Korea, South Korea (1947-), by South Koreans.
The full official title of the Republic of Korea is ¹·.¹.¬(Dae-han-min-guk), or Great Han
Republic. Han is an age-old term denoting the inhabitants of the central and southern part of the Korean
Peninsula, and was originally revived in the late 19th century. The South Koreans usually refers to
North Korea as either '¬·.(Puk-han), literally ’Northern Han’ or ¢'¬(I-buk), literally ’the North’.
¨¥.(Jo-seon) was the first kingdom of Koreans which was believed to exist until 108 BC in the
South of the Liao He river and the northwestern part of the Korean peninsula, and the name was also
used by Yi Dynasty which ruled the entire Korean peninsula from 1392 to 1910. These days ¨¥.is
still in general use in North Korea, and appropriate changes would need to be made in a North Korean
context: ¨¥.¹-.(Jo-seon sa-ram) when referring to Korean people; ¨¥.¹.(Jo-seon-mal)
when referring to the Korean language and so on. North Korea usually refers to South Korea as ¹.¨¥.
(nam-jo-seon).
52 c G. Shin 2006
·`.···¹.oP·~?
3 More Geography and Culture Words
´-., ¹, ¹ ., '¬ East, West, South, North ´· English
´-.´ the East '.· French
¹´ the West ´-· German
¨¬.´-. Middle East ·.·´.· Spanish
´-.'¬¢¹¢ Northeast Asia ¢².· Arabic
´-.¹.¢¹¢ Southeast Asia ·¨.¹¢· Persian
¹.¢¤·¯ South America ´.¯-· Japanese
´-÷ capital city ¨¬.¬· Chinese
¹-./-´. person ·.¯ letter, alphabet
¹./-· language, words ·.¯ Chinese characters
Korea/Korean
There is no special adjectival form for Korean nouns – they combine freely with each other. Thus
·.¬¹.(pronounced as Han-gung-mal) – the Korean language – is literally Korea language; ·.¬
¹-.(Han-guk-sa-ram) – a Korean person – is literally Korea person and so on.
·.¬·and ·.¬¹.
·.¬¹.(Han-gung-mal) refers to the spoken language. ·.¬·(Han-guk-eo) tends to refer to
the language in both its spoken and written forms. -·is usually employed when referring to languages
such as English which are widely known in both their spoken and written forms.
The Expression ·.- in ·.¯
The ·.- in ·.¯(han-ja) doesn’t have the same meaning as the ·.- in ·.¬. In fact it is the same
Han as in the Chinese Han Dynasty, and by association with a major Chinese dynasty this term often
means Chinese in Korea. Chinese herbal medicine, for example, is ·.´(Han-yak). The
pronunciation and Hangeul are the same, but each is written with a different Chinese character.
4 Some More Useful Words
´.- know -ý.- be hot
-*¯· and, (together) with ¯-.- be cold
· · · ¯-.=· in the vicinity of · · · ¤º-*- be (nice and) warm
-(~.)¨´~¹*- be famous for º¤´.- be interesting
···· many countries º¤2,- be boring
¯`- visit (Literally: go and see) ¨. a little (bit)
¹- be numerous SK Number - ¯- n-th floor
¨- be small (in number) ´.¯- Ground Floor
p°- be easy /¯-·...? On which floor ...?
·Þ.- be difficult ª.¨´. toilette
c G. Shin 2006 53
º9 ¯.
5 Using Description Verbs
Korean lacks the class of description words we call adjectives in English. The counterparts in
Korean of English adjectives are actually verbs: we will call them Description Verbs. To describe
something we simply add the appropriate verb ending to the relevant description verb stem, just as we
do with the verbs we studied in previous units. That is, the same rules apply. (See Page 23 for Polite
Informal endings, and Page 42 for Polite Formal ones.)
With Polite Informal, if the final vowel in the verb stem is aor iwe add -¢~; for all other final
vowels the ending is -·~. Of course, verb stems ending in *- transform to ¯~. Look at the
following list to see these rules in action.
¹- add -¢~ =⇒ ¹¢~ They’re numerous.
¨- ¨·~ They’re few.
º¤´.- add -·~ =⇒ º¤´.·~ It’s interesting.
º¤2,- º¤2,·~ It’s boring.
We’ve already seen how *- (do) can transform nouns into Action Verb stems, eg ÷.`~*- (to study),
½ .ª.*- (to telephone), ´¬º*- (to do homework), etc. But this is not the only way *- is used. *-
can form the final syllable of description verb stems, eg, ´~¹*- (be famous), ¤º-*- (be warm), etc.
Whether the *- verb is in fact an action or a description verb is usually clear, and can be judged from
the context, and from the grammar of the sentence. Consider the following description verbs.
´~¹*-
*- changes to ¯ ~ =⇒
´~¹¯~ They’re famous.
¤º-*- ¤º-¯~ It’s (nice and) warm.
Bear in mind that, with verb stems ending in , the changes to n, to which we then add -·~.
We have met two such verb stems already: ¹.¨.- (be pleased eg, to see you) and ¯·¹.- (be grateful).
Consider the following list of verbs.
¹.¨.- ¹.¯´-~ I’m pleased.
¯·¹.- ¯·¤´-~ I’m thankful.
·Þ.- changes to n,
=⇒
··´-~ It’s difficult.
p°- then add -·~ ^ -´-~ It’s easy.
- ý.- ¯ ´-~ It’s hot.
¯ -.- ¯ ~´-~ It’s cold.
With the verbs -ý.- (be hot), ¯-.- (be cold) and ¤º-*- (be warm), note that Korean doesn’t describe
a personal reaction with temperature, by saying ‘I’m hot/cold,’ but rather makes an object statement
‘It’s hot/cold.’
As for the Polite Formal style, adding the appropriate ending is indeed straightforward. We use
-·¯(for statements) and -·¯/-´.·¯(for questions) when the verb stem ends in a vowel.
When the stem ends in consonants, we use -´-.·¯(for statements) and -´-.·¯/~.´.·¯(for
questions). See Page 42 for more explanations.
54 c G. Shin 2006
·`.···¹.oP·~?
6 Where Do You Come from?
We can ask this question by saying
·¯¹.oP·~?
To answer we can say
PLACE - ·¹.oP·~.
NOTES: When followed by ~- (or indeed any other
verb that indicates motion) ·¹is equivalent to the
preposition ‘from (a place)’ in English. In normal
conversation, the ·is dropped when preceded by
·¯(where), ·¯(here), ¯¯(there, ie, near you)
and ¯¯(over there), and thus ·¯¹(from where),
·¯¹(from here), ¯¯¹(from there, ie, near you),
and ¯¯¹(from there, ie, far from us). When ·¹is followed by an action verb that does not indicate motion it
indicates the locality of the action indicated in the verb. This aspect of ·¹doesn’t concern us at the moment,
and will be covered in Unit 10.
EXAMPLES
´~¯¨כ~` -·¯¹.oP·~? Where does Yukiko come from?
´.¯-·¹. oP·~. She comes from Japan.
And we can ask, for example, And where in Japan ...? by saying:
´.¯-· ¯¹.oP·~? Where in Japan does she come from?
7 Which/What Country Are You from?
If we want to ask specifically which country someone or something comes from, we can use:
·`.··...?
EXAMPLES
·`.··· ¹.oP·~? What country are you from?
¨¬.¬·¹. oP·~. I’m from China.
·`.··¹ -.¢·~? What country is (the) person (from)?
´.¯-¹ -.¢·~. He’s/She’s Japanese.
·`.··¹.¢·~? What country is (the) language (from)?
·¨.¹¢¹ .¢·~. It’s Persian.
8 Where Is It Located?
To ask this question we can say:
...´-/`-· ¯·´.·~?
To answer we can say:
...·´ .·~.
-´-/-`-= Topic Marker ; Use -´-after a noun
ending in consonants, and -`-after a noun ending
in a vowel.
EXAMPLES
¯¯¤^".´-·¯·´.·~? Where’s Taj Mahal?
´.÷·´ .·~. It’s in India.
¬¯~¯z `-·¯·´.·~? Where’s the video shop?
´¯-.=·´ .·~. It’s near the station.
c G. Shin 2006 55
º10 ¯.
10 ¹¹ ·´.·¹.·~?
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Things we do on a daily basis
• More time expressions
• Talking about the past
• Dates: year, month and day
• Subject, object and topic markers
WHAT TIME DID YOU GET UP?
In this unit we look at ways of talking about the things we do on a daily basis with reference to time,
and also about things we did in the past.
1 Conversation
¹´ ~and Kylie are talking at the university canteen.
¹´~: ·º¨-ª·~?
¯´.·: ·º~? ... ··¯¯ª·~.
¹´~: ¢¨-¬'.·~?
¯´.·: ·.·~. ... ¯¹.^.¯~?
¹´~: ·?
¯´.·: ·`-·º... ´.÷,¹·´.·¹.·~. ´.÷,¹
¹.· ¢³.´¹ª-.ª·~. ¯.·¯·¢¯-.¹·
¯¯ .·¨.·~. ¢¯-.¹¹.··¯¹³.¬ª-.
¹.¹ .·~. ¨.¢¯¯ª-.¤`.·~. ... ´.¹·
÷¹ \dB·¨.·~. ÷¹\dB·¹'-¹¯.´-.´.
÷.` ~ª·~. ¯.·¯·´.'-¹`~¯'-¹¯¯
·.¬·´-´.¢´.´.·~. ... ¨.´.´¹`-'-
¹· ª·~. ... ·¹`~¯·.¹¯.´-.´.
´´ -.ª·~. ³.¬*¯·¨.¢´´-.ª·~.
¯`¹¹.·¨.·´.¢.oP·~. ´.÷,¹·
¯¹ ´¹ª-.ª·~. ... ·¹÷¹·´¬ºª-.
¹¨ ª·~. ¯.·¯·´.·.¹¹.·¨.¨.·~.
¹´~: ¢, ·. ... ·°´-, ¢¨-¨.*`.´-.·¯!
56 c G. Shin 2006
¹¹·´ .·¹.·~?
Translation
Tae-U: What did you do yesterday?
Kylie: Yesterday? ... I did various things.
Tae-U: Were you very busy?
Kylie: Well, ... shall I tell you everything?
Tae-U: Pardon?
Kylie: Yesterday I got up at seven. Had breakfast
at half past seven. And went to university at
nine. ... Met a friend at half past nine here.
Had coffee together. Went to the library at
ten. Studied for two hours in the library.
Then I had Korean class from twelve to
two. ... I had lunch at two. ... From four I
exercised for one hour. I did with my friend.
At half past five came back home. Had
dinner at seven. ... Started homework at
eight. And went to bed at half past eleven.
Tae-U: Oh, gosh! ... Well done, any way!
Notes for Conversation
• ¨-ª·~ ?: What did you do?
• ·º~?: Did you say ‘yesterday’? We’ve met a
similar example already, see ´¯~? on Page
33.
• ··¯¯: various/many (kinds of) things
• ¬'.·~ ?: Were you busy?
• ¯: all
• ¹.^.¯~?: Shall I talk?
• ·: I; this is the first person singular pronoun in
Korean
• ´.·¹.·~: I woke up.
• ¢³.´¹ª-.ª·~: I had breakfast.
• ¯.·¯·: And
• -·¨.·~: I went to ...; I left for ...
• ·¯¹: here/in this place
• ³.¬: friend
• ¹.¹.·~: I met.
• ¨.¢: together
• ¤`.·~: I drank.
• ÷¹\dB·¹: in the library
• '-¹¯.´-.´.: for two hours
• ÷.`~ª·~: I studied.
• ´.'-¹`~¯: from twelve o’clock
• '-¹¯¯: until two o’clock
• ´.´.·~: I had ... or There was/were ...
• ¨.´.´¹: lunch
• ´´-.ª·~: I exercised.
• ³.¬*¯·¨.¢: together with a friend
• -·´.¢.oP·~: I came back ... (so that I was
physically in ...)
• ¯¹´¹: dinner
• ´¬ºª-.¹¨ª·~: I began my homework.
• ¨.¨.·~: I slept.
• ·°´-: Anyway
2 Time expressions (1)
·º yesterday ´.º...? When ...?
¢³. morning, breakfast ¯-.(+ time word) last ...
¢³.´¹(ª-.) *- to have breakfast ¯-. m®~´. last Monday
¢³.(´¬.) ¹- to have breakfast ¯-.¨ -¹. last weekend
¨.´. lunchtime, lunch ¢¹.(+ time word) this ... (coming)
¯¹ evening, dinner ¢¹. .~´. this Friday (coming)
¹ day, daytime ¢¹.¨ -¹. this (coming) weekend
¬. night -¯ . ago
*²~ one day ·.¹¯.¯ .· one hour ago
*²~· in one day/per day ¨¹. last year
¹¹¯....? For how long (Lit. how many hours) ...? .¹. this year
NOTES: ~¯.(a.m.) and ~¯(p.m.) refer to the time before and after the midday respectively. By comparison,
¢³.(morning), ¨.´.(lunchtime) and ¯¹(evening) are times when one normally eats breakfast, lunch and
dinner respectively, whilst ¹(day) and ¬.(night) take ‘brightness’, or ‘darkness’, as the point of difference.
c G. Shin 2006 57
º10 ¯.
How many hours/times a day do you · · ·?
*²~·¹¹¯./¹ .· · ·?
¹¯.: counter for hours; ¹.: counter for times
EXAMPLES
Q: *²~·¹¹¯.¨.´¬.¯~? How many hours a day do you sleep?
A: ´.÷,¹¯.¨.´¬.¯~. I sleep seven hours a day.
Q: *²~·¹¹.´¹¯~? How many times do you eat (Lit. have meals) a day?
A: '¹.´¹¯~. I eat three times a day.
The question word ´.º(when?)
EXAMPLES
Q: ·.¬·´-´.¢´.º´.·~? When do you have Korean classes?
A: m®~´.*¯·´-~´.·´.·~. We have on Mondays and Wednesdays.
3 Talking about the past
When we want to talk about things that have happened in the past we can say
· · ·



VST – ´./´.·~.
· · ·ª·~.



NOTES: We choose from -´.·~, -´ .·~and ª·~according to
the final vowel in the verb-stem – just as we did to get the present tense
-¢~, -·~and ¯~(see Unit 4, Page 25). This rule is applicable to
both Action and Description Verbs.
When the verb ends in *- we choose ª·~.
EXAMPLES
´¬º¯ª ·~? Have you done your homework?
¯¹´¹´ .ª·~. I haven’t had dinner.
¯-.¨ -¹.·´´-.´.ª·~. I didn’t exercise last weekend.
·º`-¤ º-ª·~. It was warm yesterday
If the final vowel in the VST is either a(except for *- as shown above) or i, we add -´.·~.
When the VST actually ends in awe simply add ·~; when the stem actually ends in iwe
add ato iand then ·~.
EXAMPLES
÷.Eá·¹`.´ .·~. I played in the park.
¹¨·¹-.¢ ¢¨-¹´.·~. There were many people in the market.
¹´~~`-´ .º¨.·~? When did Tae-U go?
·.¹¯.¯ .·¹¯.,¤…·~. We had an exam an hour ago.
For all other final vowels in the VST the ending is -´.·~. When the VST ends in u, the uis
written in combination with the ensuing e, thus g, and ·~is attached; when the VST ends
in , the changes to n, to which we add eand ·~.
EXAMPLES
¢¹´÷´.·~ ? Did you read this book?
´~´~¯¤`.· ~? Have you drunk all the milk?
¹´~~`-´ ~·³.¬´.·~. Tae-U was our friend.
¨¹.·`-¢¨ -¯~qº·~. It was very cold last year.
58 c G. Shin 2006
¹¹·´ .·¹.·~?
4 Dates
To say the date in Korean we combine the relevant Sino-Korean number with year, month and day,
respectively.
· · ·¹ .· · ·m ®· · ·´.
EXAMPLES
Year
1985 ³.¬¹-.´.~¹. 1998 ³.¬¹¬´.-.¹.
2002 ¢³.¢¹. 2016 ¢³.´.´-¹.
Month
January ´.m® February ¢m®
July ³.m® December ´.¢m®
For months we use SK numbers, but note:
June ´~m®(not ´-m®) October ¹m®(not ´.m®)
Day
the 1st ´.´. the 10th ´.´.
the 28th ¢´.-.´. the 31st ´.´.´.´.
MORE EXAMPLES
1/1/1995 or 1 January 1995 ³.¬¹¬´.~¹.´.m®´.´.
25/6/1950 or 25 June 1950 ³.¬¹~´.¹.´~m®¢´.~´.
15/8/1945 or 15 August 1945 ³.¬¹¹´.~¹.-.m®´.~´.
30/10/2003 or 30 October 2003 ¢³.´.¹.¹m®´.´.´.
What date is it today?
To ask what date it is today, we can say:
~`-.´-¹m®¯³.¢·~? ¯³.= ¹´.; literally, how many days
To answer, take out ¹and put in the month and the day.
· · ·m ®· · ·´.¢·~
5 Some useful expressions
¹.´. birthday ´.··- get up
¹.´.¯¯ birthday party `-¨.¯- sleep late/sleep in
³.¬ friend ´.¢¯- go back
´·¹. guest, customer ´.¢~- come back
-¹ people (another counter for people) ¤´~- learn
·`¹ six people ´.´-.*- practise
¹¢ a lot `'· usually
¨. a little ¯¨- frequently
´.- live, reside '÷¬...? who ...?
c G. Shin 2006 59
º10 ¯.
The adverbs ¯¨-(frequently), and `'·(usually)
In talking about the frequency of particular activities, events, etc, you can use these adverbs.
EXAMPLES
Q: ÷¹\dB·¯¨-¯~? Do you go to the library often?
A: ¢·~, ¯ ¨-´.¯~. ´.¨-´.··.¹.¯~. No, not often. I go there once a week.
Q: ¯¯.·´ .º ¯~? When do you go to university?
A: `'·¢³.10¹·¯~. Usually 10 o’clock in the morning.
Together with ...
To indicate that you perform an action with somebody else, you can say:
NOUN – *¯·(¨.¢) · · ·
NOTES: In this expression ¨.¢is often omitted. Also, despite
the spelling, ¨.¢is pronounced as ga-chi, not as ga-ti.
EXAMPLES
³.¬*¯·¨ .¢·.¬·ª-.¤´-~. I learn Korean together with my friends.
`.´~*¯·÷ ¹\dB·¹÷.`~ª·~. I studied in the library with Seon-Yeong.
The particle ·¹ (at, in, etc)
If we want to indicate the location wherein an action, such as eating, meeting, studying, etc, takes
place, we use the particle -·¹.
EXAMPLES
Q: ·¯¹´ ¹¯~? Where do you eat?
A: ¯¹ .´¹·¹´¹¯~. I eat in the student canteen.
Q: ·¯¹¹ .¹.·~? Where did you meet?
A: ¯¯´-.·¹¹.¹.·~. We met in the coffee shop.
÷.`~`-¨ .·¹, ´.´-.´-¯¯.·¹¯~ We study at home, and practise in the class.
There’s no special preposition in English to indicate the location of an activity, so you’ll have to pay
careful attention to the verb to determine whether or not you should use ·¹.
6 Time expressions (2)
´-.´. for ... (duration) `-z late
·.¹¯.´-.´. for one hour ¹.~ already
´." early ¢¨+ NEG not yet
EXAMPLES
·´.´."~ '~. Come early tomorrow.
´-´.·30¯`-z.oP·~. I came to class thirty minutes late.
¹.~6m®¢· ~. It’s already June.
´¬º¢¨´.ª·~. I haven’t done my homework yet.
·º`-10 ¹ ¯.´-.´.¨.¨.·~. I slept for ten hours yesterday.
60 c G. Shin 2006
¹¹·´ .·¹.·~?
7 Subject, object and topic markers
Let us learn about the particles ¢/¯and ´¬./ª-.. The former is what we call the subject marker, and
the latter the object marker. We use ¢and ´¬.after a noun that ends in a consonant, and ¯and ª-.after
a noun that ends in a vowel. The simplest definition of the subject is that it is the answer to the question
Who ...?/What ...? etc asked before the verb; the simplest definition of a direct object is likewise that it
is the answer to the question Who ...?/What ...? after the verb. Suppose our answer to the question Who
likes Korea? is I like Korea, then the subject here is I and the object Korea, for example. Like ´-/`-, ie,
the topic marker, ¢/¯and ´¬./ª-.have no clear equivalents in English.
¹.´.¢´ .º·~? When’s your birthday?
¯¯.¯´ ·¨¨-·~? What is hak-kyo in English?
´-¬´¬.¹ ´.·~. I ate watermelon.
¯¯ª-.¤ `.·~. I drank coffee.
The Korean subject and the object markers are often left out, as you have noticed, in the course of
fluent, informal speech. Thus, when these markers are present, they are probably best thought of as a
form of mild emphasis or as an indication that the speaker tries not to confuse the hearer.
Usually the first question asked by students is: What’s the difference between vވ/pوand /? In
fact, whether you understand the distinction at this stage is not, in our view, a matter of great
importance when we think of all the other fundamental aspects of Korean you need to come to grips
with. Most students acquire a sense of the difference with time and exposure. But if you are concerned
about gaining an understanding of this distinction now, then the following note may help you.
If you recall what we’ve already said about ´-/`-you’ll recall that ´-/`-gives emphasis to the
word/words in front. What we are actually doing is announcing that what follows in the sentence relates
to the word(s) indicated by the topic of conversation. We’re picking out one of a number of possible
items for your attention and then making some statement relating to it. If you look back to the
Language Notes to the Unit 5 (Page 26) and Unit 8 (Page 45) Conversation Pieces you’ll see a detailed
explanation of this point.
With ¢/¯, however, we’re also involved in emphasis, but in a different manner – we’re indicating
that the word(s) in front of ¢/¯add to what you know already, not that some further comment is
following on the word(s). Thus, it is very likely that what follows ¢/¯is what you know already. The
same thing can be said about ´¬./ª-.. Let’s contrast these points.
3m®3´.´-º¹.´.¢·~. The 3rd of March is my birthday. or The 3rd of March, it’s my birthday.
3m®3´.¢º¹.´.¢·~. My birthday is the 3rd of March. or It’s the 3rd of March that is my birthday.
¨-·.`-´ .¤`.·~. I didn’t drink the juice. or The juice, I didn’t drink.
¨-·.ª-.´ .¤`.·~. I didn’t drink (any) juice. or It’s juice that I didn’t drink.
A final note about ¢/¯is that it gives rise to the following two variant forms. Before ¢/¯, '÷¬
(who?) becomes '÷, and ·(I) becomes · .
'÷¬ª-.¨¢¯~? Whom do you like?
'÷¯·.~? Who’s coming?
¯ª.¯·ª -.¨¢¯~? Is Jihui fond of me?
¢·~, ·¯¯ª.ª-.¨¢¯~. No, I like Jihui.
c G. Shin 2006 61
º11 ¯.
11 ¹ ¢÷.'~.
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Table Insa
• A Korean meal
• Common ingredients used in Korean meals
• Buying food and meals
• Some common Korean dishes
• Shall we ...?
BON APPETIT.
Food, clothing and shelter are the three basic material necessities of life – and food is surely the most
talked about. In this Unit, we learn about Korean food and eating habits so as to extend our ability to
interact with Koreans socially.
1 Table Insa
¯ , ÷.'~. Here, help yourself./Take some. ‘¯’ is an interjection commonly used
to encourage an action from the hearer which the speaker believes
would give pleasure. See also Page 39.
= -.¯.´,¯¹.... Lit. We’ve prepared nothing, but ...; an expression used by the
host/hostess when inviting you to help your self
¹ ¢÷.'~. Bon appetit. Lit. Take a lot.; a standard invitation from the host for a
guest not to hold back
¯ ÷.'~. Have some more.; an exhortation in the middle of the meal for the guest
to refill the plate
¨ .=¨¢* '~? Do you like Gimchi?
´ ¹^.¹¯. Let’s eat! This is the standard way for a host to invite a guest to begin a
meal, or for one member of a party to suggest to the others that they
begin. Note that this expression has masculine connotations.
¯ .¤!/´-.¹¯ . Here’s cheers. Lit. Let’s take, eg, a drink. There are a few more toasts
in Korean, but these are the standard suggestions to raise a glass of
alcohol.
¨ .¹¯.´-.· ¯. Looks good! Lit. I’ll eat well.; an expression used when you start to eat
¹´.·~. It’s tasty! Lit. There is flavour (in this food). This is the standard
compliment about the quality of the meal. We strongly advise you
commit it to memory and use it often for the pleasure that it will give
your hosts.
¢ ·~, ¹¢¹´.·~. No more, thanks. If you are being entertained in a very traditional
Korea way, your hosts may continue to press food upon you. Your only
defense then might be to say this expression politely – literally, it
means No, I’ve eaten a lot.
¨ .¹´.´-.· ¯. I’ve eaten well.; an expression used when you finish eating
62 c G. Shin 2006
¹¢÷.'~.
2 A Korean Meal & Some Related Expressions
´-.´ food ¨¨. fork
¹. cooked rice ·¢¨. knife
¬ soup ".- be hot (in taste)
?z hot-pot style of soup ?- be salty
¹.³. side-dishes ¨.´-¹- eat (respect form)
´¬.¯- spoon ¹·`- taste, try
¯¯- chopsticks ¨¢*- to like
~.- use ´÷·*- to dislike
`- cannot ´-.´´¬.¹ .´¬.- to prepare a meal
¯´ dessert ~·*- to cook
• ¹.: cooked rice. In English, we have one word for rice whether it’s in the field, in the shop or on the plate.
In Korean, if it’s in the field it’s ¬, when it’s harvested it’s "., and when it’s cooked it’s ¹..
• ~.-: ~.- can mean use as well as write (see Page 25); as we saw on Page 25, when the verb stem ends in
the vowel s, the sdrops out when attaching Polite Informal ending -·~. Thus, ´¬.¯-*¯·¯¯-´¬.
~~(We use spoons and chopsticks).
• `-: When we want to say that something out of our control, eg, allergy, is preventing us from doing
something we can place the negative adverb `-before the verb. For example, ¹-.´¬.`-¹·~(I can’t
eat peanuts). The difference between `-(cannot) and ´.(do not) is the difference between being
prevented from doing something and deciding not to do something. In English we often say I couldn’t do it
when we really mean I didn’t want to do it, and it’s the same in Korean. Since it’s always more polite to be
a victim of circumstances, than a deliberate non-performer, it’s best to under-use ´.and over-use (or so it
may seem to you) `-.
• ".- is an irregular verb to the extent that changes to nwhen followed by the -·~ending. Thus, The
gimchi is a bit hot will be ¨.=¯¨-.¤´-~. (See also Page 54.)
• ¨.´-¹- vs ¹-: When referring to a small number of basic human activities, such as eating, speaking,
giving, or sleeping, Korean speakers use special verb forms to indicate that they regard the person they are
referring to as being of a higher social status (see Unit 14). Therefore, of course, we can never use these
verb forms in referring to ourselves. For the Korean language learner the challenge is simple: when
someone uses ... ¨.´-'~? in addressing you, you need to have the mental agility to reply with ·, ...
¹·~and avoid saying ·, ... ¨.´-'~.
3 Common Ingredients of Korean Meals (1)
¯·¯ meat ¹.`. fish
·¯·¯(·) beef (cow, bull) ¯`. seafood
¯.¯¯·¯(¯.¯) pork (pig) ¹.¨. egg
¹÷¯·¯(¹÷) chicken - meat (chicken - bird) -. beans
´¯·¯(´) lamb, mutton (sheep) '-`~ tofu
• The pronunciation of ¹÷: The in ¹÷remains silent in Modern Korean, whether or not there is a
following vowel.
c G. Shin 2006 63
º11 ¯.
4 Common Ingredients of Korean Meals (2)
¢ × vegetables ¯·¯~ chili peppers
¤¯~ Chinese cabbage ¯ shallots
`- white radish ¤`-. garlic
´¯~ lettuce -¨ sauce
¹.= spinach/greens ¯.¨ soy sauce
~¢ cucumber ¯·¯~¨ chilli sauce
"´ sesame leaves ^o¬¨ soybean paste
¹-. peanuts ³.¯´-. sesame oil
5 Buying Food and Meals
~ · cuisine, cooking º bread
¨¬.¬~· Chinese cuisine º¨. bread shop, bakery
¨¬.¬´-.´¨. a Chinese restaurant ¹- to buy
´.´¨. a Japanese restaurant ¹¹- to buy meals (Lit. buy and eat)
·.´¨. a traditional Korean restaurant ¨-`*- order (eg food)
´´¨./·· .¯- a Western-style restaurant ´-´¬.·- pay
¨¨¤= a street food stall ~- be cheap
´¹¯ food court ¬~- be expensive
• º: if º sounds a little familiar it’s because it has reached the Korean language from Portuguese via Japan
and is, therefore, similar to pain, the French word for bread. It would take a little while to explain how two
or three Portuguese words got into Korean, but any book on Japan’s history will tell you the tale of the
Portuguese in Japan.
6 Some Common Korean Dishes
'.¯·¯ Korean barbecue. The meat – usually beef but in more informal settings pork is also used – is marinated in
various condiments including soy sauce, sugar, spring onion, garlic, sesame seed and sesame oil. It is then
cooked over a charcoal or gas fire, on a perforated metal dish with a raised centre or on a gridiron.
¨.¬ Spare ribs cooked in a similar manner to '.¯·¯. Pork Galbi (¯.¯¨.¬) is also served in more informal
settings.
¨.= When we say just ¨.=we mean cabbage Gimchi, in much the same way as ice cream is presumed to
refer to vanilla ice cream unless we specify otherwise. If we want to specify a non-cabbage ¨.=, we
name the vegetable. Thus, cucumber Gimchi, for instance, would be ~¢ ¨.=.
¹.'- Small dumplings with meat filling, usually eaten with a soy and vinegar sauce.
Continued on next page
64 c G. Shin 2006
¹¢÷.'~.
¨.× Sweet potato noodles and finely-chopped beef and vegetables stir-fried together.
¬¬.¹. Steamed rice served in a bowl with a number of side helpings of finely-chopped Bulgogi, mushrooms,
carrots, spinach and bean sprouts, topped with a fried egg, sunny side up. The ingredients are then
combined together by vigorous spoon action, and eaten with chili sauce and a side soup.
¨.¹. ¨.is dried green seaweed (laver). To make ¨.¹., you wrap around, with a thin layer of ¨., cooked rice
and finely chopped/sliced carrot, pickled radish, meat, fish, etc, and then sliced it into bite-size pieces.
?z The suffix ?zon the names of dishes indicates that the food is cooked ‘hot-pot’ fashion – in a soup over
high heat. Thus ¨.=?zis a hot soup where the most prominent ingredient is Chinese cabbage Gimchi.
More examples include: ¯`.?z(seafood Jjigae), ^o¬¨?z(soybean paste Jjigae), etc.
"-¨. The suffix "-¨.on the names of dishes indicates that the food is being deep-fried in light batter in a
similar fashion to Japanese tempura. Thus ¢×" -¨.is mixed vegetables deep-fried in batter.
-¹. This suffix indicates a noodle dish, such as ¹¹.– the cold noodle dish of North Korean origin which is a
summertime staple, or ·¹ .– the ever-ready instant noodles.
-¬/-- This indicates a soup, the most common of which are Manduguk (¹.'-¬: dumpling soup) and Galbitang
(¨.¬-: beefy, spare-rib broth).
7 Some language notes
About the question ¢z¨-·~?: What’s this?
By now, you might wonder what the difference would be between “¢¯¨-·~?”, which we learnt
in Unit 6 (see Page 33), and “¢z¨-·~?”. The main difference is this. Grammatically, ¢zis the
combination of ¢¯(this thing) and ¢(Subject marker), and meaning-wise, the difference between
the two questions is in fact very slight. At best, you can take ¢zas carrying a mild emphasis in line
with what we explained in Unit 10 (see Page 61). It has the Subject marker after all, which ¢¯
doesn’t!
Don’t get alarmed if you see ¯z¨-·~, ¯.z¨-·~, etc. ¯zand ¯.zare ¯¯and ¯.¯plus
the Subject marker respectively.
The expression · · · - ´-/`-~?: What (or How) about · · ·?
The expression “· · · - ´-/`-~?” can be very handy, when we’re asking a kind of contrastive
questions that involve more than one persons or things. It allows us not to repeat the whole question as
in the examples.
EXAMPLES
Q: ¯¯¤¹~? Do you drink coffee?
A: ·, ¤ ¹~. Yes, I do.
Q: `-=`-~? What about Green Tea? cf. `-=`-(¤¹)~?
A: ´.¤ ¹~. I don’t.
Q: `.´ ~`-*²~·¹¹¯.·.¬·ª-.÷.`~¯~?
Seon-Yeong, how many hours per day do you study Korean?
A: *²~·· .¹¯.÷.`~¯~. I do one hour per day.
Q: ¹´~~`-~? How about you, Tae-U? cf. ¹´~~`-(*²~·¹¹¯.·.¬·ª-.÷.`~¯)~?
A: *²~·´ .´.¯÷.`~¯~. I do thirty minutes a day.
c G. Shin 2006 65
º11 ¯.
8 Cultural Notes: Korean Food
Korean food perhaps lacks the variety to become known as one of the world’s great cuisines, but
nevertheless it contains a lot of pleasant surprises. From its temperate climate and surrounding seas,
Korea draws a wide variety of vegetables, fruits and seafood; and from its long winters when fresh food
is hard to come by, it draws the inspiration for a rich tradition of pickling or drying fresh foods for later
use. It is protein-rich and relatively fat-free.
The most common meats in Korea are beef, pork, chicken and, of course, fish. The most common
methods of cooking are slow simmering, for soups, or else broiling over a hot charcoal fire for beef or
pork. Characteristic seasoning tends to be sesame oil and seed, soy sauce, fermented bean paste
(Doen-jang), salt, white pepper, chili, spring onion, and garlic. By way of quick comparison with its
neighbours, Korean food shares a number of dishes with Japanese cuisine; but is generally more robust
and pungently flavoured. Korean restaurants offering bland versions of Korean dishes are widespread in
Japan. Korean food is also broadly similar to Northern Chinese cooking though, as a small
geographical area with little internal climatic variation, Korea lacks important sources of the culinary
variety enjoyed by China.
To start off, perhaps we’d better list some of the main styles of Korean cooking. In some cases they
overlap; but for the most part it’s difficult to find a restaurant in Korea offering food from more than one
style. Overseas Korean restaurants usually offer a kaleidoscope of Korean dishes drawn from a variety
of these different cooking styles.
¹¨¬.´-.´: Literally the food of the masses meaning ordinary, everyday food. This is what you get at
small restaurants typically around universities, which tend to feature soups based on beef and
chicken stocks with accompanying rice and side dishes, and even simple instant noodles. At its
worst it is like canteen food; but, at its best, it is a simple and wholesome way of grabbing an
inexpensive quick bite.
¬.¨¬.´-.´: Literally palace food, this is the tradition of royal cooking – Korea’s haute cuisine. You’d
be most unlikely to find any strong flavours like chili or garlic here – only the very subtle use of
condiments to enhance the natural flavour of a predominantly vegetarian cuisine. Palace food
consists of an amazing variety of flavoursome wild plants, mushrooms, nuts and berries, with an
occasional meat or fish dish. Pine nut broth, bell flower roots, gingko nuts, abalone mushroom are
typical ingredients in a cuisine which offers one of the most striking examples of the deeply
rustic, ethereal strain in Korean aesthetics.
Palace food has a very complex, precise tradition of food preparation, requiring years of training
and a good deal of labour in its preparation. It’s not surprising, then, that there are few palace
food restaurants. These are mostly to be found in major hotels in Seoul, and are extremely
expensive. For most people, however, the experience of eating in one will be unforgettable.
·.´: The title simply means Korean food, but Hansik restaurants in Korea are more up-market than
ordinary restaurants, and offer a richer, more diverse array of Korean dishes. People normally
order a set menu based on price, and get a number of courses, often representing regional
traditions of cooking. For most visitors to Korea this will be the best way of getting an idea of
what Korean cuisine is really capable of.
¨¬.ª.~·: A sign written in Chinese characters on a protruding signboard decked out with scarlet
strips of plastic and cloth usually announces the humble and ubiquitous Chinese restaurant in
Korea. The food served within will resemble Chinese food more or less depending on what
tradition of Chinese cooking you’re used to. For Australians who are usually familiar with
Cantonese or Szechuan cooking the resemblance will be rather less than more.
Basically, the food served in ¨¬.¬´-.´¨.is descended from regional cooking brought to Korea
nearly a hundred years ago from the Shandong region adjacent to Korea, and greatly modified
since then to satisfy with the demands of the Korean palate. People use Chinese restaurants like
66 c G. Shin 2006
¹¢÷.'~.
fast food outlets, catching a cheap unpretentious bowl of noodles or dumpling in the Northern
Chinese style.
There are also more elaborate Chinese meals at up-market establishments usually found in the
major hotels and in expensive neighbourhoods.
Other restaurants: There are various other types of restaurants in Korea specialising in particular dishes.
These might include ginseng chicken (´.z-), Buddhist vegetarian dishes (`.×), green pea
flour pancakes (¹.¹¹) or pigfoot (¨-¹.). Interest in foreign foods is growing slowly, but is still
not very high in Korea. In cities, almost all non-Korean restaurants outside the major international
hotels are either Japanese, highly indigenised Chinese or else Western-style fast food outlets.
Meals of the day
Koreans eat three meals a day, and to the onlooker there may seem little distinction between the
meals in terms of the food eaten. As befits a people with strong agricultural roots, breakfast tends to be
a hearty meal, with strongly flavoured soups, rice and Gimchi, although this is changing particularly in
cities like Seoul. Lunch is usually little more than a snack, and the evening meal is moderate in quantity
and generally eaten early.
Attitude to meat
The Korean attitude to meat is different to the Australian attitude in a number of ways. To begin
with, it is extremely rare to find a Korean who does not express a strong distaste for lamb. Most cite the
smell as the main reason and, seeing that no distinction seems to be made between mutton and lamb in
Korea, this is perhaps not surprising. Also behind the attitude seems to be a deep-seated cultural reflex,
shared with the Japanese and most Chinese, in which people traditionally contrasted their settled,
agricultural, beef-eating ways with the nomadic, pastoral, mutton-eating and milk-drinking ways of the
Mongols and other northern barbarians. It’s not as if the Chinese, Japanese and Koreans continue to
look down on their northern neighbours, of course. But since the constant threat of northern invasion
was a major theme of their respective histories in pre-modern times, the dietary reflex seems to persist.
Beef is the prestige meat in Korea, and it is considerably more expensive than pork. In fact, just as
¨.=tends to mean just one kind of Gimchi, so ¯·¯tends to mean beef, unless otherwise specified. It
is therefore expensive, relative to pork and chicken (the other two major meats), and in the course of a
normal household meal it is rarely eaten in the amounts that Australians are familiar with. However, for
guests beef is often laid on in abundance, and, in a very traditional mode of hospitality, a host might say
to a guest ¯·¯¹¢¨.´-'~(Eat plenty of meat!) to counteract any tentativeness the guest might
feel.
Attitude to alcohol
Koreans have acquired something of a reputation as drinkers over the years, and this reputation can
obscure the very careful, moderate attitude taken by most people in Korea. We’d advise you to observe
Korean attitudes to drink carefully rather than just accept this reputation at face value.
Above all, the use of alcohol is socially and ceremony-bound. The idea of a quiet, relaxing drink or
two after work is not common, though sitting down and having round after round with work colleagues
is more common, as is consuming considerable amounts of alcohol on weekend group picnics.
In formally entertaining foreigners Koreans will rarely hit the bottle, since getting drunk together is
an expression of close friendship, and business colleagues are unlikely to risk losing their inhibitions
until they are very familiar with the company they are in. Foreign visitors will lose no respect by
displaying a similar degree of self-discipline, even when pressed by their hosts.
c G. Shin 2006 67
º12 ¯ .
12 ¯=¨¯~, ¬·.¨¯~?
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Transportation and Travelling
• What number bus do you take?
• How far is it?
• How long does it take?
• Locations
• The Emphatic Particle -÷
DO WE GO BY TRAIN, OR BY BUS?
In Unit 4 we started learning how to identify places, in Unit 9 we learnt a bit about the countries of
the world, about asking people where they come from, and where places were located. Now we bring
these two themes together again to learn how to find out basic travel information, and describe our own
travel experiences.
1 Conversation
¹´~and Kylie are talking about going somewhere this coming weekend.
¹´~: ¢ ¹.¨-¹.·¨-¯~? ´~·, ¹.´-¯~·¨.¯~?
Kylie: ¹.´ -¯~¢~? ... The Folk Village ¹.¢·~?
¹´~: ·.
Kylie: ¨¬¢~. ... ¯.÷.¹, ¹.´-¯ ~·`-·¹z¯~? ¯=¨¯~,
¬·.¨¯~?
¹´~: ¬^.¯¨¯~.
Kylie: ·?
¹´~: `-.¹.¢·~. ... ´-E.¯¯`-¯*³.¨¯~. ¯.·¯·´-E.·¹
¹.´-¯~¯¯`-¬·.¨¯~ . ´-E.´´·`-¹.´-¯~¯`-¬·.¯
¹¢~.
Kylie: ¢, · . ... ´-E.¯¯`-´.¤·¨.·~?
¹´~: 1 ¹¯.¹.´-.¨.·~.
Kylie: ´- E.·¹¹.´-¯~¯¯`-~?
¹´~: ·.·~, 30 ¯´-.¨.².¯· ~.
Kylie: ¢, ·.
¹´~: ´~·, ¢³.8 ¹·¹´-.´´¬.¯-.¹.^.¹¯. ¹.´-¯~·¹10 ¹`~¯
2, 3 ¹¯.¬¨¯~. ¯.·¯·~¯·`-´-E.´¬.¬¨^.¹¯.
Kylie: ·, ¨¬¢~.
¹´~: ´-E.´-¨.¬¨÷´~¹¯~ . ¨.¬¨¬¢*'~?
Kylie: ·, ¨¬¢¯~.
¹´~: ¯.-., ¨.´.·`-¨.¬ª-.¹ ´-.¹¯.
68 c G. Shin 2007
¯=¨¯~, ¬·.¨¯~?
Translation
¹´~: What are we doing this weekend? Shall we go to the Min-sok-chon?
Kylie: Min-sok-chon? You mean the Folk Village?
¹´~: Yes.
Kylie: Oh, that’d be nice. ... But, how shall we go – by train or bus?
¹´~: We go by plane.
Kylie: Pardon?
¹´~: Just kidding. We go by subway to Suwon, and then by bus to the Folk Village. Lots of buses go there
from in front of Suwon Station.
Kylie: I see. About how long do you think it’ll take to get to Suwon?
¹´~: About an hour and half.
Kylie: And to the Folk Village from Suwon?
¹´~: Well, about 30 minutes perhaps?
Kylie: I see.
¹´~: Let’s set off from Seoul Station at 8.00. Then we’ll have two to three hours at the Village, and in the
afternoon let’s have a look at Suwon.
Kylie: Mm, that’ll be really nice.
¹´~: Suwon is also famous for Galbi. Do you like Galbi?
Kylie: I sure do.
¹´~: Then, let’s have some kalbi for lunch.
Language Notes
• ´~·: we
• The ¹.´-¯~(the Folk Village) is a large tourist park some thirty kilometres south of Seoul in
which many aspects of traditional Korean village life are on display.
• The Folk Village ¹.¢·~?: Do you mean ‘Folk Village’? You use the construction · · ·
¹.¢·~? when you need additional explanation of what has been said. More precisely, you
provide the · · · as an additional explanation and ask the hearer to confirm it.
• ·, ¨¬¢~: ¨¬¢~can be relative rather than absolute. It often means that, given the
alternatives, something is preferable and acceptable, rather than actually good in its own right.
• ¯.÷.¹: By the way, ...
• ·¹z: how
• ¯=: train
• ¯=¨¯~, ¬·.¨¯~?: literally, Do we go by train, or do we go by bus? This is an
‘A-or-B’ question in Korean, where two questions are juxtaposed.
• ¬^ .¯: airplane
• `-.¹.¢·~: I’m just kidding. Literally, It’s a joke.
• -¯¯: up to
• ¯*³.: subway
• · · · ´·: in front of · · ·
• ¹.´-¯~¯`-¬·.: bus going to the n¼¾B‚‡xý»
• ´.¤·¨ .·~?: How long does it take?
• -´-.: about, approximately Note that it is attached, not prefixed, to the number expression
concerned.
• · · ·´-/`-~?: What about ...?; How about ...?
• ·.·~: We-ell
• VST - (~.)¯·~: is going to VST ... This is a future tense marker (see Unit 14).
• ¯-.¹.*-: depart, set off
• ¯.·¯·: And ...
• 2, 3 ¹¯.('-, '¹¯.): two to three hours
• ¬¨*-: watch an event, view scenery, take a look
• -÷: an emphatic particle meaning also
• ¯.-.: Well, then ...
c G. Shin 2007 69
º12 ¯ .
2 Means of Transportation
¤ boat, ship ¯¯.¯ bicycle
¬^.¯ aircraft ¬·. bus
¯=/ ´.= train ¯·´-¬·. express bus for inter-province travels
¯.³. urban electric train ÷.¯¬·./ ·`-¯.¬·.
¯*³. the subway limousine bus to and from the Airport
¯.= tram, street car ~¯¬¢ motorbike
¯´-.= car -(~.)¨ by (means of), with
Buses in Seoul
¯ -¬·. ‘Blue Bus’ (urban bus travelling between Seoul CBD and outer Districts)
´·¬·. ‘Green Bus’ (urban bus travelling between a subway station and the nearby District)
` -¬·. ‘Yellow Bus’ (urban bus travelling within a District)
' .¨¬·. ‘Red Bus’ (urban bus travelling between Seoul CBD and a Satellite City)
‘Guessing’ the meaning of words
The task of learning enough vocabulary in a foreign language to enable you to function in most
situations is, of course, a lengthy one. However, you’ll find as time goes by that this task is made easier
by the fact that Korean vocabulary items are often composed of common elements, and more and more
we come to recognise these. In this unit the literal meaning of some vocabulary items is as follows.
¯ ´-.= self-move-vehicle ¯¯.¯ self-rotate-cart
¯= steam-vehicle ´.= line-vehicle
¯*³. ground-under-steel ¬^ .¯ fly-travel-machine
¯.= electricity-vehicle ¯.³. electricity-steel
Of course, this happens in English too, and the counterpart in English for ¯´-.=is automobile,
where auto- means by itself and mobile means moving.
The Instrumental Particle: -(~.)¨
In Korean we can use - (~.)¨to indicate the instrument by which we accomplish something. The
~.is inserted before all consonants except – note the case of ´.-.¨and ¯*³.¨in the examples
below. The instrument may actually be an implement, or a means of transport as in the examples below.
EXAMPLES
·.¬´-.´´-¯¯-~.¨¹·~. I eat Korean food with chopsticks.
´.-.¨ ~~. I’m writing with a pencil.
¯¯.·¬·.¨ ¯~. We go to school by bus.
¯*³ .¨¨.¹¯. Let’s go by subway.
70 c G. Shin 2007
¯=¨¯~, ¬·.¨¯~?
3 Travelling
¨d.¯- tourism (=ª-.) ¯- get on, get into, catch a vehicle
¨d.¯-¯ tourist (=ª-.) ¯¯·¯-/~- ride
·^. trip, voyage ··- get out of, off a vehicle
·^.¹ travel agency ¨.·¹¯- go on foot, walk
- ticket, token ÷³*- arrive
-¯`-¯÷ ticket counter ¯-.¹.*- depart, set off
¬^.¯- plane ticket ¯·- commute (Lit. go to ... regularly)
¯=- train ticket SK ¹ .¬·. Bus No ...
-¨ (counter for tickets) DESTINATION ¯`-¬·. a bus going to ...
¹¯.- timetable ¯.'·¯÷. travel pass (Lit. transport card)
¯· distance ...`~¯ from (a time)
=¬ fare, charge ...(·)¹`~¯ from (a place)
¬¯¯ the seaside ...¯¯ to (a time/place)
¹·. the countryside ...(~.)¨¯¹ via
The difference between “¯¯.·¯\~ ” and “¯¯.·¯~”
From ... to ...
In Korean -`~¯shows a starting point in time, the beginning point in an order of precedence, and
-¯¯shows a limit. With distances, however, we usually add ·¹(just ¹before vowels) before the
`~¯to indicate that it is a physical location that is the starting point, and in fact the ensuing `~¯is
often omitted. Note also that in talking about our trips, we use ...(~.)¨¯¹to indicate ‘by a route that
passes through ...’.
EXAMPLES
6 ¹ `~¯9 ¹¯¯÷.`~¯~. We study from 6 to 9.
m.~´.`~¯ ¯~´.¯¯¯¯.·¯~. We go to school from Monday to Saturday.
·¯¹`~¯ ´¯¯¨.·¹¨.·~. We walked from here to the station.
¹´-.· ¹`~`.¯¯¬^.¯ª-.¯¯·¯~. We’re going from Seoul to Busan by plane.
'-´-·¹` ~¯÷.-.~.¨¯¹¨¤¯¯¨.·~. We went from NY to Rome via London.
c G. Shin 2007 71
º12 ¯ .
4 Words for Expanding Sentences
¯ .·¯· And ... (between sentences) ¢·¹. Or ...
*¯¹. But ... ¯.÷.¹ By the way ...
¯.·¹ So ...
5 What Number Bus Do You Take?
To ask this question we say:
¹¹ .¬·.ª-.¯~?
NOTES: ¹= How many ...?; ¹.= number; ¬·.=
bus; -ª-.= object marker; ¯~? = do you take?
To answer, substitute a Sino-Korean number for ¹.
SK ¹ .¬·.ª-.¯~.
NOTES: When the SK number is greater than one
hundred, you can read the number digit by digit.
EXAMPLES
¹¹ .¬·.ª -.¯~? What number bus do you take?
´.¹´.´.´.¹.¬·.ª-.¯~. I take the number 333 bus.
´., ´ ., ´.¹.¬·.ª-.¯~. I take the number 3, 3, 3 bus.
¯¯.·³., ÷., ¬¹.¬·.ª-.¯¯··.~. I go (Lit come) to university by bus number 709.
6 How Far Is It ...?
To ask about distances in Korean we say:
PLACE A - (·)¹(`~¯) PLACE B - ¯¯¯·¯´.¤·¯.~?
NOTES: -(·)¹(` ~¯) = from (a place); ¯¯= up to/as far as; ¯·= distance; ¯= subject particle; ´.¤·=
about how much?; ¯.~? = does it amount to?
To answer, substitute ´.¤·with the relevant distance.
EXAMPLES
·¯¹`~¯´ ¯¯¯·¯´.¤·¯.~? How far is it from here to the station?
2 ¨.¨¤¯¯ .~. It’s 2 kilometres (from here).
´·¹¯·¯ ´.¤·¯.~? How far is it from the station?
4 ¨.¨¤¯¯ .~. It’s 4 kilometres.
·¯¯¯¯· ¯´.¤·¯.~? How far is it (from the place we’ve been talking about) to
here?
10 ¨ .¨¤¯¯ .~. It’s 10 kilometres.
72 c G. Shin 2007
¯=¨¯~, ¬·.¨¯~?
7 How Long Does It Take?
To find out how long something takes we ask:
¹¹ ¯.¨.·~? ¹= How many ...?; ¹¯.= hours; ¨.·~? = does it take?
To answer, substitute a Pure Korean number for ¹.
PK ¹ ¯.¨.·~.
It takes PK hours.
Time/Distance - ´-.
When we are referring to time in the context of casual or social arrangements, ´-.often follows the
time (or distance) concerned. ´-.corresponds to the English practice of adding about in similar contexts
– Come about 7.00; See you about 3.00; It’s about 5 kilometres from here, etc.
~¯3 ¹ ´-.¯¹~'~. Come again around 3 pm.
¹´-.· ¹`~`.¯¯`-6 ¹¯.´-.¨.·~. It takes about 6 hours from Seoul to Busan.
·¯¹`~¯ ´¯¯¯·¯5 ¨.¨¤¯´-.¯.~.
It’s about 5 kilometres from here to the station.
8 Some Locations
¹· outside ´.· inside
´· in front of °-· behind
´· next to ¹´--.· opposite
EXAMPLES
¯¯´ -.´-´´·´.·~. The coffee shop is in front of the station.
´-.´¨.´- ÷.E.´·´.·~. The restaurant’s next to the park.
´¹´ --.·´.·~. It’s opposite the station.
ª.¨´.´ -´´.·´.·~. The toilet’s inside the station.
9 The Emphatic Particle ÷
÷is an emphatic particle with the meaning too/also. It replaces ¢/¯, ´-/`-and ´¬./ª-.:
¨.ׯ¨¬¢~. ¹.'-÷¨¬¢~. Japchae is nice. Mandu is nice too.
¯´-` -'-.¯·¯ª-.¨¬¢¯~. ¹´~÷'-.¯·¯ª-.¨¬¢¯~.
Ji-Su likes Bulgogi. Tae-U likes Bulgogi too.
·.¬·ª-. ÷.`~¯~. ´.¯-·÷÷.`~¯~. I study Korean. I also study Japanese.
However, ÷ is added to any other particles, eg, -·, -·¹and -(~.)¨:
·.¬·¯~ . ´.¯-·÷¯~. I’m going to Korea. I’m going to Japan too.
¨.·¹¯¹´¬.¹·~. ´-.´¨.·¹÷¯¹´¬.¹·~.
I eat dinner at home. I eat dinner in restaurants too.
¨.¬¨´~¹ ¯~. ·¨-¨÷´~¹¯~. It’s famous for Galbi. It’s also famous for Soju.
c G. Shin 2007 73
º13 ¯.
13 ¯¨-
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Family members
• Periods of Time
• Using the Possessive Case Particle -·.
• Using the Comitative Case Particle -·./-¯.
• What’s your telephone number/name?
• “How long has it been since ...?”
• Making longer sentences using -¯·(and) and -¯¹.(but)
FAMILY
The Korean family unit is an extended family unit whose complex inter-relationships contrast
strongly with the Western nuclear family system. In this Unit we start to gain a feel for this complexity
as we acquire a basic vocabulary for describing family members. We also learn to make ‘longer’
sentences, using a couple of conjunctive endings.
1 Yun-Mi’s family
´ ¬¤·¯¨ -¢·~.
` ~-¹.¯.^.¯·¯z¹¯·,
~ ¤·.´.·, ¹.´-.¹.¢´.·~.
~ ¤·.¢´ -.´-¹´~¯·, ´.··.
¢ ´-.´-´¤, ¯.·¯·¹.´-.¹.·.
¢ ´-.´-¨´~·~. ¢¤·.´¯.´-
¬ ¹º~¯·´.¤·.´¯.´-
³.¹´-~·~ . ¯.·¯·^.¯·
´ ¯.´-¢´-ª.~·~.
^.¢¬¯`-´¬.¢¯´.·~.
´¬.¢¯`.¯3¹.¯.´.·~.
´ ¬¤·´¬`--'-´.÷,
¹ -.¢·~. ¯¨.¢´.¢~.
¢ , ¯.·¯·, ¹¯.·`-´,¯¹.,
z *¯·¯·´¢ ¯´.·~. z·.
¢ ´-.´-¨¢¯, ¯.·¯·¯·´¢·.
¢ ´-.´-¢´-.¢ ·~.
¢´-ª.
¬¹º ³.¹´-
¬¹´~ ¬´¤
¬´¬¤
¬¨´~
Language Notes
• -·: ’s (when used with a personal name) • ¯¨-: family • `~-¹.: parents • -¯./-· .= *¯·: NOUN and NOUN •
^.¯·: grandmother • VST-(TENSE)-¯·: SENTENCE, and ... • ~¤: elder brother • ´.·: elder sister • ¹.´-.¹.:
younger brother • -·.: ’s (Possessive Case Marker) • ¢´-.: name • ¢¤: daddy (endearment form) • ´.¤: mummy
(endearment form) • ´¯.: (respected person’s) name • ^.¢¬¯: grandfather • ´¬.¢¯¹-: (for a respected person to)
die, pass away • VST-(~.)¯TIME PERIOD ¯.´ .-: It’s been TIME WORD since ... • ´¬: family members • -¯¹.:
SENTENCE, but ... • ¨¢¯; puppy • ¢´-.¢: Lit. the little one that says “CµŽ(miaow)”
74 c G. Shin 2003
¯¨-
2 Family: Parents, Siblings, Grandparents, Spouse & Children
·¯· mother, mum ¯.º brothers
´.¤ mum, mummy ¯¤ sisters
¢¬¯ father, dad ^.¯· grandmother
¢¤ dad, daddy ^.¢¬¯ grandfather
`~-¹. parents ¨`~-¹. grandparents
¯. (a male’s) elder brother ·.- maternal ...
~¤ (a female’s) elder brother ·.^.¢¬¯ (maternal) grandfather
'÷· (a male’s) elder sister ·.^.¯· (maternal) grandmother
´.· (a female’s) elder sister ¹.-. husband
´-.¹. younger sibling ¢· wife
·´-.¹. younger sister ¢´¬. son
¹.´-.¹. younger brother ¹. daughter
3 Other People
¯¨- family ³.³ relative
´¬ family members °-¢¬¯ ¢¬¯·.¯.(married)
¯`´¬ a family of five °-·¯· °-¢¬¯·.¢·
-'- all together ¨´-¢¬¯ ¢¬¯·.¹.´-.¹ .(married)
-'-'¹-. a total of 3 people ¨´-·¯· ¨´-¢¬¯·.¢·
¢¯/·¯ baby ´.¯~ ¢¬¯·.¯.º(unmarried)
¢¢/· child ·.´.¯~ ·¯··.~¤, ¹.´-.¹ .
·*- adult ·.´¬- ·.´.¯~·.¢·
·¯ woman, female ¢- ·¯··.´.·, ·´-.¹ .
¹.¯ man, male ¢-`~ ¢-·.¹.- .
·´. lover, sweetheart ¯·- ¢¬¯·.'÷·, ·´-.¹ .
¹.¯³.¬ boyfriend ¯·-`~ ¯·-·.¹.- .
·¯³.¬ girlfriend ¹¯~ cousins
¯.¹ simply, as it is ¨¯, ¨¯¹. nephew, niece
Language Note: To say so and so is just a friend of mine, rather than your boy/girlfriend, you can use
the expression ¯.¹as in “¯.¹³.¬·~(He/She is just a friend)”.
c G. Shin 2003 75
º13 ¯.
4 Some Useful Expressions
¹ ··- be born ¨¬- die
¯·- grow up ¯.- be done, become
¯·¯ home town ¢´-. name
´-.´. for, period of time ´¯. (a respected person’s) name
´.¤´-.´....? for how long ..? ¨-· address
SK¹.´ -.´. for SK years ¯.ª.¹. telephone number
¢¹*- move house ´¯·*- be engaged to
¢¹~- move in (ie to one’s current address) ¨.¯·*- marry, get married
¢¹¯- move away (ie to a new address) ¢¯·*- divorce, get divorced
´¬.¢¯¹- pass away (for a respected person to die) º¯·*- ‘re-marry’
5 Periods of Time: Summary
Here is a summary for how to refer to periods of time in various ways. To ask:
¹¯´-.´....? How many minutes? ¹¨-´.´ -.´....? How many weeks?
¹¹¯.´-.´....? How many hours? ¹¹.´-.´....? How many months?
¯³.´-.´....? How many days? ¹¹.´-.´....? How many years?
To answer:
SK ¯´-.´. for SK minutes SK ¨-´.´ -.´. for SK weeks
PK ¹¯.´ -.´. for PK hours PK ¹.´ -.´. for PK months
SK ´.´-.´. for SK days SK ¹.´ -.´. for SK years
EXAMPLES
4 ¯´-.´.(¹) for 4 minutes 1 ¨-´.´ -.´.(´.) for 1 week
10 ¯´-.´.(´.) for 10 minutes 6 ¨-´.´ -.´.(´-) for 6 weeks
2 ¹¯.´-.´.('-) for 2 hour 1 ¹.´-.´.(·.) for 1 month
3 ¹¯.´-.´.(') for 3 hours 8 ¹.´-.´.(·¹÷) for 8 months
5 ´.´-.´.(~) for 5 days 4 ¹.´-.´.(¹) for 4 years
7 ´.´-.´.(³ .) for 7 days 9 ¹.´-.´.(¬) for 9 years
LANGUAGE NOTES
• More traditional expressions for days are *²~(a period of one day), ¢ª-.(two days), ¹כ.
(three days), ·כ.(four days), ¯'(five days), etc. (These are instead of ´.´., ¢´., ´.´., ¹
´., ~´., etc.)
• In talking about weeks, PK numbers can also be used, but seemingly only up to, say, nine. Thus,
don’t be surprised if you hear Koreans mentioning ·.¨-´., '-¨-´., '¨-´., ·¨-´., etc.
• Note also that the forms ´¹.for '¹.(three months) and -¹.for ·¹.(four months) also
exist.
76 c G. Shin 2003
¯¨-
6 It belongs to ...: the Possessive Case Particle -·.
When we want to say that such-and-such belongs to so-and-so, we can link the item concerned and
the owner using -·.. The pronunciation of the syllable ·.can vary according to context, and when it is
the Possessive Case Particle, it is pronounced as though it were in fact written /·/. Note also that in
normal colloquial speech ·.is usually omitted.
EXAMPLES
¢¹´-¯-`.¹.¹.·.¹¢·~. This book belongs to Mrs Hong.
¹´~~`-` .´~·.³.¬·~. Tae-U is Seon-Yeong’s friend.
°-¢¬¯` -¢¬¯·.¯.¢·~. °-¢¬¯is one’s father’s elder brother.
¯·-`~`-¯ ·-·.¹.-.¢·~. ¯·-`~is one’s father’s sister’s husband.
7 Doing together with ...: the Comitative Case Particle -·./-¯.
When we want to indicate that we’re doing something with a person we can use -·./-¯.. We use -·.
after a vowel, and -¯.after a consonant. Note that this runs counter to the practice with other particles,
where the forms of the particle which have initial consonants follow preceding vowels. (In general
-· ./-¯.are interchangeable with -*¯·, which we’ve learnt already.)
When referring to marriage, note that Korean says ‘A married with B.’, in contrast to the English ‘A
married B.’
EXAMPLES
´-¯.´-¨ ¯·.¨.¯·ª·~. Susan married George.
¨¯`-´ -¯.¯.¨.¯·ª·~. George married Susan.
´¬º`-³ .¬·.¨.¢¯~. I do my homework with my friend.
´~·¨.·`-z·.¯·´¢¯¹¢´.·~. There’re many dogs and cats in my (Lit. our) house.
8 What’s the Phone Number?
To ask this question we can say
¯.ª.¹.¯·¹z¯.~?
NOTES: ·¹z= How ..?; ¯.~? = ¯.- + ·~= ...
is it done/shaped?
To answer, we usually give the district digits as one number followed by ·, meaning ‘in (the prefix
area) ...’, and then we give the following numbers individually using Sino-Korean numbers. Thus 3456
6789 will be ´.³.¹¹~´.´-·´-, ³., -., ¬.
With Mobile Numbers, however, we give the numbers individually using SK numbers.
9 What’s Your Name?
To ask this question (not in an abrupt way), we can say:
¢´-.¢·¹z¯.~?
or
´¯.¢·¹z¯.'~?
NOTES: ¯.'~is a more polite form for ¯.~. You
use ¯.'~when the person you speak about is a
respected one.
To answer you simply give your name and -·~/-¢·~or -´.·¯.
c G. Shin 2003 77
º13 ¯.
10 How long has it been since ...?
To ask this question in Korean we can say:
VST - (~.)¯´.¤·¯.´.·~?
LANGUAGE NOTES
• ´-/= noun modifier form; ¯= since; ´.¤= How much (time); ·= about; ¯.´.·~? = ... has been
done/completed?
• ¯.´ .·~is often shortened to º-·~.
To answer:
VST - (~.)/¯TIME PERIOD ¯.´.·~.
EXAMPLES
¨-·~`.¯´.¤·¯.´.·~? How long have you been in Australia?
¤¯¹¯ =¯ ¯-.¹.·.¯30 ¯º -·~. It’s been thirty minutes since the last train departed.
¢³.´¬.¹ ´-¯·.¹¯.´-.¯.´.·~. It’s been an hour since I had breakfast.
·.¬· ÷.`~ª -.¹¨·.¯¯`¹.º-·~. It’s been five months since I started Korean.
11 Making longer sentences ...
Two sentences, complementary meaning-wise, can be combined into one as follows.
· · · VST1 - (TENSE) - ¯·, · · · VST2 - · · ·
EXAMPLES
·.¬·`-º ¤ ´.¯·¢¨-p.´-.·¯. Korean is interesting and very easy.
~¤·.¢´-.´-¹´~¯·, ´.··.¢´-.´-
´¤·~.
My elder brother’s name is Tae-U, and my elder sister’s
name Sang-Mi.
¹´~`-¤ ¬· ¹÷.`~ª¯·, ¯´-`-
´¬·¹÷.`~ª·~.
Tae-U studied in the US, and Ji-Su in the UK.
´-E.¯¯`-¯*³.¨¯¯·, ´-E.·¹
¹.´-¯~¯¯`-¬·.¨¨.¯~?
Shall we go to Su-won by the subway, and then from
Su-won to the Min-sok-chon shall we go by bus?
However, when we want to combine two seemingly contradictory sentences we can say:
· · · VST1 - (TENSE) - ¯¹., · · · VST2 - · · ·
EXAMPLES
¹´~`-´ ·ª -.÷.`~ª¯¹., ¯´-`-
'-.·ª-.÷.`~ª·~.
Tae-U studied English, but Ji-Su studied French.
·.´´-¯¯-¯.´¬.¯-~.¨¹¯¹.,
´´´-¨¨.·.·¢¨.¨¹·~.
We eat Korean-style food with spoons and chopsticks, but
we do Western-style food with forks and knives.
·.¬·`-· ¯.¯¹.º¤´.·~. Korean’s difficult but interesting.
¨.=`-¨-." .¯¹.¹´.·~. Gimchi’s a little hot but tasty.
78 c G. Shin 2003
¯¨-
12 Cultural Notes: the Korean Family
The traditional Korean family typically consisted of three generations living under the one roof – the
grandparents, their eldest son and family, and unmarried younger children. The position of head of the
household passed from eldest son (called ¨¹.) to eldest son. Thus eldest sons continued to live in their
parents’ house after marriage, while the other children left home at, or soon after, marriage; the sons
left to establish their own households, and the daughters to live in the household of their husbands. The
eldest son was the sole inheritor of his father’s property, and was the only person who could perform the
rites of clan ancestor veneration. The eldest son provided the link to line of ancestors that may go back
hundreds of years, ancestors whose names were recorded in a clan genealogy register held by individual
households known as a Jok-bo (¨-`). As a matter of course, children growing up in a Korean
household became familiar with their family’s ancestry, and aware that they belonged to such-and-such
a branch of a clan.
Korean society has passed through a rapid period of social change since the Korean War (1950–53).
As a result it is hard to generalise about the modern Korean family. However, the vast majority of
Korean children today are still raised in a system that continues to have many elements in common with
the traditional system. In modern Korea the family remains the key unit of society, and the family is
typically an extended family that includes cousins, uncles and aunts from the father’s, and to some
extent the mother’s, side of the family. In contrasts to the Western pattern of a nuclear family of
independently-minded individualism, who can call upon a wide range of social services and benefits,
this extended Korean family determines many key aspects of the shape of its members’ lives, while
pooling its financial (and other) resources to a far greater degree than its Western counterpart. Family
members become used to thinking and acting as a unit, rather than as an individual.
The Korean family unit is, like the Korean society in general, male dominated. While families may
vary in terms of what they actually arrange, it is still a principle in Korea that upon marriage the
daughters leave the household for their husband’s household and the children of the marriage belong to
the husband’s clan. (Perhaps ‘clan’ in modern Korea can be ¨.´.). When we look at the formal roles
played by men and women in Korea it is easy to focus on the subservient role of women. It may be true
that fathers (and, for that matter mothers as well) are generally more pleased if they have a son than if
they have a daughter, and that, like their Western counterparts, women who seek to challenge or extend
the conventional role of women meet with formidable obstacles, but a debate that concentrates on such
negatives finds it easy to overlook the enormous informal power wielded by Korean women.
The accepted Korean male role is to deal with the ‘outside world’, while women deal with the
household. In practice this means that men practically exclude themselves from household matters,
including interaction with their children and responsibility for the household finances. It is customary
for Korean men to hand over their entire pay packet to their wives and then draw an allowance. The
wives are then responsible for handling the rest, not only taking care of household finances but also
investing any surplus in a bewildering range of formal and informal financial institutions. Through their
constant interaction with their children and with other female members of the extended family, and
through their financial acumen, Korean women exercise a decisive influence in the rise and fall of
families. In short, it may be true that the oldest male member of the household has the final say over a
good many family matters, but often the terms of those choices have long been set by the women of the
household.
Discussing the Korean family system is a vast and fascinating topic. We suggest you take the
opportunity of discussing it with any Koreans you may know. Talking about the doings of family
members is a very natural topic of conversation for most Koreans, and provided the questions are not
too intrusive, you should gain a much greater insight into how the Korean family functions than is
possible from merely reading about it.
c G. Shin 2003 79
º14 ¯.
14 ¯ .÷.¢¨-·~?
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Education
• I’m going to ...
• I want to ...
• Before/After ...
• The Particle -¹.(only)
WHAT’S YOUR MAJOR?
In this unit we learn to talk about our educational experiences, looking back to the past, but also
looking to further study and graduation. This often involves talking about our likes and dislikes, and so
we learn how to express these as well.
1 A story about ¹´ ~...


¹´~·~. ¹ ´~`-6 ´ .¤
´~=Eá·´¬.·¨.·~. 7 ´.¤
´~=Eá´¬.¤=¯·´-.¯¯.·
´.¯ª·~. 13 ´.¤´-.¯¯.ª-.
¨.´ .ª·~. ¯.·¯·¨¬.¯¯.·
´.¯ª·~. 16 ´.¤¨¬.¯¯.ª-.
¨.´.*¯·¯·´ -.¯¯.·´.¯ª·~.
19 ´.¤¯·´-.¯¯.ª-.¨.´.*¯·
¹¯¯.·´.¯ª·~. 22 ´.¤
¹¯¯.ª-.¨.´.^.¯·~.


80 c G. Shin 2003
¯.÷.¢¨-·~?
2 Education: Some Basic Expressions
´~=E á kindergarten PK ´. ... years old
´-.¯¯. primary school ... ¤ the time when ...
¨¬.¯¯. junior high school (Years 7 – 9) 10 ´.¤ at the age of ten
¯·´-.¯¯. senior high school (Years 10 – 12) ...´¬./ª-.¯·- attend (school, etc)
¨¬.¯·´-.¯¯. secondary school ...·´.¯*- enter school, matriculate
¹¯Eá graduate school ...·´¬.·¯- go into
´.¯ school entry ...´¬./ª-.¨.´.*- graduate
¨.´. graduation ...´¬./ª-.· ~- come out of
¨.´.´ graduation ceremony ¤=- complete, finish
Vocabulary Expansion: Guessing the meaning of words
·¯- go out of, leave a place ¨¬.¯¹. a middle school student
·~- come out of, appear, arrive ¯·´-.¯¹. a high school student
´¬.·~- come in ¹¯¹. a university (undergraduate) student
´¬.·¯- go in, enter ¹¯Eá¹. a postgraduate student
´.¯´ an ‘entrance’ ceremony ¨.´.¹. a graduate
¨.´.¨ testamur, a diploma of graduation ´.¯¹. a new student
´-.¯¹. a primary school student
3 This weekend I’m going to ...
When we want to talk about our plans for the future, we usually say
VST - (~.)¯·~.
(~.) = inserted if VST ends in a consonant; =
indicates potential state; ¯= ¯= thing, situation,
·~= is.
EXAMPLES
¢¹.¨ -¹.·¹´¬.´÷´¬.¯·~. I’m going to read books this weekend.
·.¬·`-´ .º¨.¯·~? When are you going to go to Korea?
·¹.··.¬·ª-.÷.`~^.¯·~ . I’m going to study Korean next year.
22 ´.¤¹¯¯.ª-.¨.´.^.¯·~. I’m going to graduate from (my) university at the age of
twenty-two.
c G. Shin 2003 81
º14 ¯.
4 Education: More Expressions
SK ¯¹. Year 1, 2, etc (Lit. class year) `¨ marks, results
(SK) ¯¯ semester/term (1, 2, etc) ¯¨. credit points
¯¯¹. end of semester (... ¯.`-´¬.) ´ -.- undertake ...
¨¬.¯.¹¯. mid-term/semester examination ¯¨.¢´ .·~- fail (a subject)
¹¯.´¬.¨.`- do well in an exam ¯.´-´¬.¬ .- receive an education
¹¯.´¬.`-`- not do well in an exam ´~¯¹ . overseas student
¬¯ school holidays *´¬, * ´¬¨. boarding, boarding house
¯.÷. a major ¯´¬¹ university hall, dorm
`~¯.÷. a minor ¢¨.¬¢¯. part-time work
¯.`- subject of study `-´-...? Which ...?
Language Notes (Some Irregular Verbs): The verb ´-.- in ¯.`-´¬.´-.- literally means to listen. To make a Polite
Informal statement, or ask a question, with this verb stem, we change the syllable-final to and add ·~.
Thus, we say '¯.` -´¬.´¬.·~(I undertake three subjects).
Language Notes (School Years): We refer to a person’s year of schooling as follows.
´-.¯¯.5 ¯ ¹.(~) year 1 of primary ¯·´-.¯¯.1 ¯ ¹.(´.) year 2 of senior high
´-.¯¯.6 ¯ ¹.(´-) year 6 of primary ¯·´-.¯¯.3 ¯ ¹.(´.) year 3 of senior high
¨¬.¯¯.1 ¯¹.(´.) year 2 of junior high ¹¯¯.1 ¯ ¹.(´.) year 1 of university
¨¬.¯¯.2 ¯¹.(¢) year 2 of junior high ¹¯¯.4 ¯ ¹.(¹) year 4 of university
5 General
ª-¨*- enter the workforce, get a job ¯.¯.· before that
´-´¬.¹.- earn money -¯· after ...
¯Eá private academy, coaching college PK ¹¯.¯ · after PK hours
¨´´¬.*- operate, run an organisation SK ´.¯ · after SK days
¹.¯ first of all ¯.¯· after that
-¯.· before ... ´.¯ this year
PK ¹¯.¯.· before PK hours ¨¹. last year
SK ´.¯.· before SK days ´~.¨ in the future
82 c G. Shin 2003
¯.÷.¢¨-·~?
Vocabulary Expansion: Guessing the meaning of words
´.¯¹¯ . entrance exam (school) ¹¯¯.´ .¯¹.¤ at Year 3 of university
¯¯¹.¹¯ . end of semester exam .¹. this year
¨.´.¹¯. graduation exam ·¹. next year
ª-¨¹¯. entrance exam (company) ´·¬·- forget
1 ¯¯ Semester 1 -¨.- not know
Language Notes (Some Irregular Verbs): When we make a statement, or ask a question, if the verb stem ends
in ¨.and the syllable immediately before ¨.ends in a vowel, we (1) drop I, (2) add to the preceding syllable,
and (3) add -·~(or -·~). To say “I don’t know”, we say “` .·~” in Korean. The verb stem is ‘-¨.-’, and
this is how we arrive ‘` .·~’. Some other forms of -¨.- include “`.².·~(I didn’t know)”.
6 Subject of Study, Faculties
-¯ ... Studies ¯.¯ Science
·.¬¯ Korean Studies ´.`¯.¯ humanities
·¯ Language Studies ¹ª.¯.¯ social sciences
`¯ Literature ¯´.¯.¯ natural sciences
´.·¯ Linguistics ÷.¯ Engineering
´·´`¯ English Language & Literature ´-¯ Mathematics
´¹¯ History ·.¯ Medicine
¨=¯ political Science -¹¯ Faculty of ...
¨º¯ Economics `¯.¹¯ Arts Faculty
¨´¯ Business Studies ¨´¹¯ Business Faculty
¹.¯ Law ¯.´-¹¯ Faculty of Education
¯.´-¯ Education -¯. teaching department
³.¯ Philosophy ·.¬¯¯. the Korean department
7 The Particle -¹.(only ...)
The particle -¹.(only) replaces -¢/-¯ and -´¬./-ª-., but is added to other particles.
÷¹\dB·`-¹´~~¹.¨.·~. Only Tae-U went to library.
¯`-´ .¯-·ª-.´.¤´-~. ·.¬·¹.¤´-~. I don’t learn Japanese. I only learn Korean.
¯¯`-¨ .·¹¹.¤¹~. I drink coffee only at home.
"¨-`-¨ -¹.·¹.¤¹~. I drink beer only at weekends.
¯.´.·¹` -·.¬¹.¨¹.¨.`*'~. Ask questions only in Korean in the classroom.
c G. Shin 2003 83
º14 ¯.
8 I want to ...
When we want to express a strong desire we can say:
VST - ¯·´ ·~.
EXAMPLES
´-´¬.¹¢¹.¯·´·~. I want to earn a lot of money.
·¹.··.¬·¯`¯·´·~. I want to visit Korea next year.
·.¬´-.´´¬.¹·`¯·´·~. I want to try Korean dishes.
`.´~·.¨ .¯ *¯·´´-.·¯. I want to marry you, Seon-Yeoung.
But when talking about other people’s desires we say:
(· · ·´-/`-) VST - ¯·´·¯~.
EXAMPLES
¹´~~`-´-´¬.¹¢¹.¯·´·¯~. Tae-U wants to earn a lot of money.
·¹.··.¬·¯`¯·´·¯~. They want to visit Korea next year.
¯´.·~`-·.¬´-.´´¬.¹·`¯·´·~. Kylie wants to try Korean dishes.
¯´-~`-` .´~·.¨.¯*¯·´·¯~. Ji-Su wants to marry Seon-Yeoung.
9 AFTER ...
When we want to describe a sequence of events we can link them as follows.
VST - (~.)¯´-.·...
EXAMPLES
¹´¬.´ ÷´-¯´-.·`.´¬.¤`.·~. After reading a book I drank water.
·.¬¹.´¬.¨-.¤´¯´-.··.¬·¨ .¯·~. After I learn some Korean I will go to Korea.
¹÷.··¹¯·´-.¯¯.ª-.¤³.¯´ -.·
".¬*-~.¨¢¹¨.·~.
After I finished my high school in Sydney I moved to
Melbourne.
¨.´.·.¯ ´-.· ª-¨^.¯·~. After I graduate I’ll get a job.
10 Before ...
Another way of linking a sequence of events is as follows.
VST - ¯¯ .·...
EXAMPLES
`.´¬.¤¹¯¯.·¹´¬.´÷´.·~. Before drinking water I read a book.
·.¬·¯¯¯.··.¬¹.´¬.¨-.¤´.¯·~. I’ll learn some Korean before I go to Korea.
".¬*-~.¨¢¹¯¯¯.·
¹÷.··¹¯·´-.¯¯.ª-.¯¹.·~.
Before moving to Melbourne, I attended a high school in
Sydney.
´¹*¯¯ .·"¨-·.¯.·¤~? How about having a glass of beer before we eat?
84 c G. Shin 2003
¯.÷.¢¨-·~?
11 Cultural Notes: Education
The South Korean education system follows a 6-3-3 pattern, comprising six years of primary school
(´-.¯¯.), three years of middle school (¨¬.¯¯.), and three years of high school (¯·´-.¯¯.).
Kindergartens or pre-schools (´~=E á) are not regarded as part of the formal education system. Primary
and middle school education is compulsory and more or less free, and the curriculum includes subjects
such as moral education, Korean language, social studies, mathematics, natural science, physical
education, music, art and a foreign language (English). Upon completing primary school students enter
middle school for Years 7–9 of their secondary education. Middle school students are usually aged
between twelve and fourteen. For the final three years of secondary education, students enter high
schools. In the mid-1980s, 96% of middle school graduates were going on to high school, and the rate
has been steady ever since. There are two types of high school, academic high school for further
general education and vocational high school, where more specialised vocational training (agriculture,
fishing, industrial trades etc) is incorporated into the curriculum.
For several years before high school graduation the life of the Korean student is dominated by the
need to prepare for university admission examinations (´-`-.¹¯.). The exams mostly involve multiple
choice-type answers to questions across a curriculum so broad as to require many hours of daily study
during this period. The effort usually involves the whole household, with parents and other family
members taking special care to ensure their children obtain the best possible result. The pressure for
entering a good university is intense, often depriving the students of any real social life, the system is
frequently criticised by Korean educationalists because of this, but the country remains locked into the
system.
Alongside the undoubted down-side to the pressure, it should be mentioned that while there are more
than a few casualties, successful Korean graduates approach working life with a strongly disciplined
and well acculturated background, and the country’s economic transformation could hardly have been
achieved without the cohesive and talented professional class that this system has produced.
Most leading Korean universities and other institutes of higher education are private institutions, but
come under the supervision of the Ministry of Education – as, of course, do the primary and secondary
schools. Public universities, or National Universities as they are known, operate one to each province of
the country, and tend to be the first choice of intending students over rival private institutions.
Particularly noteworthy in this regard is Seoul National University (¹´.¹¯¯., or ¹´.¹for short),
whose graduates all but monopolise leading professions such as law, banking, education and the public
service. While it is not always helpful to compare institutions, at least in the social sciences and
humanities SNU is universally regarded as pre-eminent. Other prominent institutions include Yonsei
University (´.'¹¯¯., or ´.¹for short), Korea University (¯··¹¯¯., or ¯·¹for short), and
Sogang University (¹¨¹¯¯., or ¹¨¹for short) in Seoul, and Pusan National University
(`~`.¹¯¯., or `~`.¹) in Pusan. In science and technology institutions such as the Korean
Advanced Institute of Science and Technology (KAIST) and Pohang Institute of Science and
Technology (Postech) are also highly regarded.
There are some significant differences between Korean and Western university life. As huge demand
for tertiary places in a predominantly private system produces huge class sizes, courses comprise of
mass lectures and no tutorials; there is in general little in the way of intellectual contact between staff
and students. Also, extra-curricular activities assume greater significance. Students form their own little
study groups, usually revolving around social, political or religious issues. A good deal of energy is
also poured into sporting and hobby clubs and societies. The university thus becomes the centre of
student social life even on weekends and in holiday periods, and the sense of attachment to alma mater
is very strong. It is often observed that the achievement of the Korean education system is to be found,
not in the education it imparts, but in the socialisation process that Korean students go through (which
is in part responsible for the intense pressure for entering a good university).
c G. Shin 2003 85
º15 ¯.
15 ¢¬^.¨·.´.¢~?
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Sports, Hobbies, Games and Pastimes
• Do you know how to ...?
• The Auxiliary Verb: VST - ¢/·/· · ·¯ `-
• Have you (ever) ...?
• Would you like to ...
• Using Description Verbs: Modifying Nouns
CAN YOU PLAY BASEBALL?
Talking about the sports, activities, hobbies and pastimes we enjoy is another very basic way of
communicating information about ourselves. In this Unit we learn to talk about these things.
1 Do you (know how to) ...?
Q: ¯-¬^.¨·.´.¢~? Q: ¯-.¯-.¨ ·.´.¢~?
A: ·, ´.¢~. A: ¨.´.¢~.
Q: ¬´¬¨ .'-'~? Q: `·¨.*'~? Q: ¹¹¨¬¢*'~ ?
A: ·.·~, ¨.`-°-~. A: ¢·~, `-¯~. A: ·, ¢¨-¨¬¢¯~.
Q: ¯ ÷.`¬.¢^.¨·.´.¢~? Q: ¯÷¯¯¯"-.·~?
A: ¢·~, `¬.·~. A: ¢¨`-¯"-.·~.
86 c G. Shin 2003
¢¬^.¨·.´.¢~?
2 Sports, Hobbies, Games and Pastimes
¤¬ volleyball ª-¤ hobby
`-.¬ basketball `¬.¢ game
¢¬ baseball ¬´¬ Baduk (Korean ‘Go’ game)
¯-¬ football/soccer ¨¯ Janggi (Korean Chess)
-¬ ping pong ´~-´-¨. stamp collecting
´-´ swimming ´-¹ reading
.'~ boxing ¹¹ fishing
¯÷¯¯ surf riding ´-.`. mountain climbing
´-.¤ horse-riding ¨¤ horse racing
3 Some Verbs
-¬(ª-.) = - play (Lit. strike, hit) ping pong ´.¯(¯) ´ .- popular
¯-.(´¬.) ¯~- dance (a dance) ¹¯.(´¬.) " - take photos
`·(ª-.) *-/`~¨.- sing (a song) ¯-¬(ª-.) * - play soccer
¬´¬(´¬.) '-- play (Lit. place, put) Baduk ¹¹(ª-.) * - go fishing
¨¯(ª-.) '-- play Janggi ´¯.*- drive
Vocabulary Expansion: Guessing the meaning of words
¹··. tennis ·.¨. golf
¤´¯-¬ American football `´-.- bowling
¨-´¯-¬ Australian football ¯¯.¯ bicycling
-¬ rugby ¯÷.`¬.¢ card game/cards
¨.·° cricket ¯¢` piano
·.¯ skiing ¯¯ guitar
LANGUAGE NOTES: ¯¢ `ª-.=- (hitting the piano)
Korean uses the verb *- (do), not `¬.- (play), in talking about playing various sports and musical
instruments. However, in the case of sports that require, generally speaking, the hitting of a ball, or in
the case of playing musical instruments with the fingers, Korean uses the verb =- (strike, hit). Thus,
·.¨.(golf ), ¹··.(tennis), -¬(ping pong), ¤÷.¹.¹.(badminton), ¯¯(guitar), ¯¢`(piano),
etc are all used with the verb =-, ie “...´ ¬./ª-.=~”.
c G. Shin 2003 87
º15 ¯.
4 Do you know how to ...
When asking about activities requiring knowledge or training, we can say:
... VST - (~.)¨·.´.¢~?
EXAMPLES
¢¬^.¨·.¢'~? Do you know how to play baseball?
¯¢`³.¨·.¢'~? Do you know how to play the piano?
·.¯ª-.`-.¨·.¢'~? Can you write Chinese?
¯-.¯-.¨ ·.¢ ' ~? Can you dance?
Yes, I know how to ...
To answer in the positive we can say
·, ... VST (~ .)¨·.´.¢~.
EXAMPLES
·, ^.¨·.´.¢~. Yes, I know how to play rugby.
¯¢`³.¨·.´.¢~. I know how to play the piano.
·.¯ª-.`-.¨·.´.¢~. I can write Chinese.
·, ¯-.´¬.¯-.¨·.´.¢~. Yes, I can dance.
I don’t know how to ...
And in the negative
¢·~, ... VST - (~.)¨·.`¬.·~.
EXAMPLES
-¬^.¨·.`¬.·~. I don’t know how to play rugby.
¯¢`³.¨·.`¬.·~. I don’t know how to play the piano.
¢·~, ·.¯ ª-.`-.¨·.`¬.·~. No, I can’t write Chinese.
¯-.´¬.¯-.¨·.`¬.·~. I can’t dance.
Other options ...
...(´¬./ª-.) ¨ .*- be good at/do something well ...(´¬./ª-.) ¨ .`-*- be not really good at ...
...(´¬./ª-.) ¨.*- do something slightly ...(´¬./ª-.) ` -*- be no good at all at ...
In responding to ‘... VST - (~.)¨·.´.¢~?’ questions, you may be tempted to say: “·, ¨.
¯~. (intending to mean Yes, a little)”. However, this in fact sounds a bit haughty in Korean, possibly
because of its affirmative aspect, i.e., “·, ... ¯~”. A more standard, modest response would be: “¨.
`-¯~. (Lit. I can’t do it very well).” Here, ¨.is the key – without it you simply mean that you can’t.
A definite declaimer of any ability in the field under discussion is “¨.¯~. (Lit. (He/She) does it
well).” Of course, we can’t say this about ourselves without sounding boastful, but we can use it to
describe other people’s abilities.
88 c G. Shin 2003
¢¬^.¨·.´.¢~?
5 More Expressions
÷. ball ¯·¯¹ by oneself
·° racquet º´. first, the most ...
¹.÷ Tae-Kwon-Do ¯.´¬.- hard, difficult
`.´- competitor `.` newspaper
`.´-¯./- . team ¨.¯ magazine
¹^. contest, match -.¯ letter
¹ª. sports tournament ~.- write
´´-.¨ sports field ´-.´ music
¨¯ contest/race ´-.- listen to
Language Notes: • The vowel Iin ~.- (use) drops out when attaching the -·~ending, and thus -.¯ª-.~~;
• Also the in ´-.- (listen to) changes to when attaching -·~, and thus ´-.´´¬.´¬.·~.
6 The Auxiliary Verb: VST - ¢ /·/· · ·¯`-
The verb `- (see) can be attached to another verb, adding some abstract sense of ‘trial’,
‘experience’, etc. In effect, the attached `- indicates that we perform an action (as indicated by the
preceding verb) while we are non-committal about the outcome. We’ve already met such an example;
¹·`- as in “¨.=ª-.¹·"-.·~? (Have you tried the Gimchi?)” which literally means Did you
eat kimchi and see (what it was like)? Look at the contrast between the following pairs.
¯.¹´¬.´ ÷´.·~? Did you read that book?
¯.¹´¬.´ ÷·"-.·~? Did you have a look at that book?
¯.`·ª-.´¬.´.·~? Did you listen to that CD?
¯.`·ª-.´¬.·"-.·~? Did you have a listen to that CD?
¯÷¯¯¯"-.·~? Did you have a try for surfing?
¯÷¯¯ª·~? Did you surf?
7 The Expression ¯÷¯¯
There are a few ways of changing a verb into a noun, and the suffix -¯, as in in ¯÷¯¯, is one of
them. It has a similar effect of attaching -ing in English.
¯- ride ¯÷(ª-.) ¯ - surf (Lit. ride waves)
¯¯ riding ¯÷¯¯ surfing (Lit. wave-riding)
We can then say, for example:
¯÷¯¯ª-.¨¬¢*'~? Do you like surfing?
¯÷¯¯¯·¤~? What’s surfing like?
¯÷¯¯`-º¤´.¯¹.¨-.··´-~. Surfing is fun but is a little bit difficult.
¯÷¯¯ª-.¯`¯·´·~. I’d like to try surfing.
c G. Shin 2003 89
º15 ¯.
8 Some More Expressions
¯·¯¹*`-´´-. a solo sport ´-´¨ swimming pool
'-¹-.¢*`-´´-. a sport for two players ´-´'- swim wear
··¹-.¢*`-´´-. a team sport ´¬.-.-¹ ª. Olympic Games
¢¬`.´-¯. baseball team .'~¹^. boxing match
¹··.`.´- a tennis player ¯-¬¹^. soccer match
¯-¹``.´- ‘Competitor’ Hong Myung-Bo ¤´. everyday
¢¬¨¯ baseball tournament/match ¯¨- frequently, often
¨¯¨ a sports arena ¯¨. occasionally, sometime
¹··.(¨¯)¨ tennis court ¹.¨´ .· · · not especially
Cultural Note: Hong Myung-Bo was an internationally famous Korean soccer star of the 1990s and early 2000s.
9 Have you ever ...?
A common ways to ask someone about their past experiences:



VST - ¢/·
· · ·¯



¯-´.(¢) ´.·~ ? NOTE: ¨may be substituted for ´..
EXAMPLES
·.¬·¯¯ - ´.´.·~? Have you ever been to Korea?
·.¬´-.´´¬.¹·¯-´.¢´.¢~? Have you ever tried Korea food?
¤´¯ -¬ª-.¬¨¯¯-´.¢´.·~? Have you ever seen American football?
¨.=ª-.¹ .´¬.· ¯-¨¢´.·~? Have you ever tried to make kimchi?
Yes, I have / No, I haven’t
To answer, we can simply say
·, ´.·~. / ¢·~, ´,·~.
10 Would you like to ...
A common way of suggesting things to other people is to say
VST - (~.)´.· ~?
EXAMPLES
~`-.¯ ¹, ¯¯·¯´.·~? Would you like to go to a party tonight?
¢¨.¬¢¯.¯`´.·~? How would you like a part-time job?
¯.-., ¯ ´-.¨ -·¯¹~´.·~? Well then – would you like to come again next week?
¬.·¨ -.¨-´ .·~? May I have a cola? (Lit. Would you like to give me a cola?)
90 c G. Shin 2003
¢¬^.¨·.´.¢~?
11 Using Description Verbs: Modifying Nouns
We’ve learnt how to say in Korean, eg It’s delicious, It’s hot, It’s difficult, It’s good, etc. We choose
an appropriate description verb and attach endings, as we do with action verbs. We thus say ¹´.·~,
¯´-~, ··´-~, ¨¬¢~, etc.
Let us learn how to use description verbs to modify nouns, as in a hot day, a difficult matter, and so
on. There are three rules to remember:
1. With description verb stems ending in ´.- and ´,-, we add `-
EXAMPLE
¹´.-
+ `-=⇒
¹´.`- ¹´.`-´-.´ tasty food
¹´,- ¹´,`- ¹´,`-´-.´ unappetising food
º¤´.- º¤´.`- º¤´.`-¢ ¢¯ interesting stories
º¤´,- º¤´,`- º¤´,`-¢ ¢¯ boring stories
2. With description verb stems that end in , changes to ´~, to which we
then add .
EXAMPLE
".- ¤´ ¤´¨ .= hot Gimchi
¯-.- ¯~´ ¯~´· · cold country
·¯.- drop + ´=⇒ ··´ ··´´´-. a difficult sport
F.- ^-´ ^-´¯ .`- an easy subject
¹.¨.- ¹.¯´ ¹.¯´¹ -. a pleasing person
3. With all other description verb stems (with minor exceptions) we add after
vowels, ´-after consonants.
EXAMPLE
¨I.³-
+ ´-=⇒
¨I.³´ - ¨I.³´-¹ ¯. an ‘OK’ exam
¨¬- ¨¬´- ¨¬´-´-.´ good food
¹- ¹´- ¹´-¹ -. many people
¤º-*-
+ =⇒
¤º-·. ¤º-·. ¬ warm soup
´~¹*- ´~¹·. ´~¹·.¯¯. a famous school
¬~- ¬". ¬".´·. an expensive liquor
c G. Shin 2003 91
º16 ¯.
16 ´ ~·¨.¢·~.
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Describing where we live
• Housework
• Adjectival clauses
THIS IS WHERE I LIVE.
In this unit we learn how to talk about where we live – our accommodation and our neighbourhood.
We also take an important step forward in increasing our powers of expression in Korean by learning
how to describe actions, situations and states using adjectival clauses.
1 This is my room.
·¯`-·³.´.¢·~. ·
³.´.·`-³.¹*¯·´-¨, ¹´,
¹¨¢´.·~. ·.¯÷`.*~
´.·~. ¢³.·³.·ª-.¯¹¢¨-
·'-¯~.
¢, ·¯`-ª.¨´.¢·~.
·¯`-`~´.¢·~. ´¨.¹, ~¯-,
´-¢´.·~. ¹¨¯·`-¯¯
´.·~. ¯, ´,~.'~. ¯¯·.¯.
*´.·~?
LANGUAGE NOTE: The pattern “... VST - ¢/·/· · ·¯- ¹” conveys the meaning: because ....
(We’ve in fact met this pattern already in `-· ¹¤´.^.·¯(Sorry I’m late) in Page 4.) Thus,
¢³.·³.·ª-.¯¹¢¨-·'-¯~in the text means “Because I did the cleaning this morning, my
room is very clean.”
92 c G. Shin 2003
´~·¨.¢·~.
2 Rooms and Places
³.´. bedroom `~´. kitchen
¯´. family room ´¹ dining room
´-.¨.´. sitting room ·.\dB entry (of a house)
(`-)´-´. bathroom =¯· garage
'-´. laundry room ¨Eá garden
3 More Rooms, Places, etc
¬ room 2¯-¨.(SK) two-storey house
´-´.¬ room with under-floor heating ¨.' house/flat rent
¹.¨כ· balcony (¨.'ª-.) ·- pay the rent
¢¯¯. apartment, flat ¢´¨. the house next door
¤¹ (back)yard ¢´¨.¹-. next door neighbour
4 Some Description Verbs
·'-*- clean ¨´-.*- quiet
¯².- dirty ¯כ.- nearby
¹!.².- noisy ¹.- far away
LANGUAGE NOTES: Distances from a point
When we want to say how far one location is from another we use -·¹as follows.
¨.¢´·¹¹.·~? Is the house far from the station?
´~׬´-´-^.·¹¹.·~? Is the post office far from the bank?
We can, of course, just as easily ask how near they are to each other.
¨.´-´·¹¯¯´-~? Is the house near the station?
´~׬¢´-^.·¹¯¯´-~? Is the post office near the bank?
c G. Shin 2003 93
º16 ¯.
5 Furniture and Fittings
³ .¹ bed ´- dining table
´-¨ wardrobe ·.".÷. (standing) lamp
³.¨ cupboard ¹´ desk
´¨.¹ kitchen sink ¹¨ bookcase
6 Household Appliances and Equipment
¹ ¨¯· refrigerator ¨.¹ plates, dishes
¯.¯- electronic ´¯'³¯ dishwasher
¯.¯".¯ microwave oven, electric stove '-¯ washing machine
¯·.".¯ gas stove ¯·¤ iron (appliance)
~¯- oven ³.·¯ vacuum cleaner
7 Some Action Verbs
' -(´¬.) *- wash clothes, do the washing ³.·(ª-.) *- clean, dust
¯-.¨.(´¬.) * - do the ironing ¨Eá¯'¬¯(ª-.) *- do the gardening
´.¨¢(ª-.) * - wash dishes, do the washing up `-´-(´¬.) *- have a bath
8 How Often ...?
Next are ‘adverbs of
frequency’, words that tell us
how often things are done, some
of which we’ve studied already.
On the left is a scale 100 – 0 to
give you a very general idea of
frequency, where 100 indicates
all the time and 0 never.
Note that ¹.¨, ¨-.=-.and
¯.¹are always used with ´., ie
they occur in a negative
sentence. For example, we say
¯.¹-.´-³.·ª-.¨-.=-.´.
¯~(He/she rarely cleans
his/her room).
100 ´.º· always
75 `'· usually
50 ¯¨- often
25 ¯¨. sometimes
10 ¹.¨(+ Negative) not especially
5 ¨-.=-.(+ Negative) rarely
0 ¯.¹(+ Negative) never
94 c G. Shin 2003
´~·¨.¢·~.
You’ll also find useful to know the following expressions. (For how to refer to periods of time, see
Page 76.)
¹.¤¯ everyday ¹כ.··.¹. once every third day
¤´. everyday ´.¨-´.··.¹. once a week
¤¹. every month ·.¹.··.¹. once a month
¤¹. every year ´.¹.··.¹. once a year
¢ª-.··.¹. once every second day ´.¹.·'-¹. twice a year
9 Telephone INSA
Using the telephone can often seem like the most daunting of tasks in a new language. However, the
following phrases might at least help you to get to first base.
The standard phrase in answering the telephone, equivalent to ‘Hello.’ is:
·`'~. Hello.
If you’re calling a private number, then you’ll want to ask for the person you’re calling:
·`'~ , ¨.¯·.`.¹.¹.z'~? Hello, is Mr Kim Gi-Hyun there?
Or, if you feel fairly sure that you’re already speaking to Mr Kim you can confirm this by saying:
·`'~ , ¨.`.¹.¹.¢'~? Hello, is that Mr Kim?
If you’re coming through a switchboard you can ask to be connected to an extension number by
saying:
·`'~, 1, 2, 3, 4¹.¢~(SK). Hello, (connect me to extension) 1234, please.
Or you can ask for the individual concerned:
·`'~ , ¨.¯·.`.¹.¹.¨-.¬'¬¨-'~. Hello, please connect me with Mr Kim Gi-Hyun.
We’ll deal with other possible situations later on in this course, but it’s worth mentioning that Korean
telephone etiquette may seem rather abrupt compared with, say, Western phone etiquette. When the
conversation finishes, for example, you may observe people simply hanging up without any ‘Goodbye’!
You may from time to time hear people saying ¨··~, which literally means I disconnect the line.
10 Korean Addresses
Following is the address of Yonsei University, written in Korean. Note that in contrast to Western
practice it works from the broadest unit to the most particular. That is, where we would use the order
house number – street – suburb – city – state – country, Korean would use the reverse order. In order,
the units in a Korean address are generally -÷(province), -¹(city), -¬(district), -´-.(ward), followed
by a house or apartment number. Street numbers are rarely referred to. Thus Yonsei University is
located in Seoul (¹´.'-¹ .¹– the official administrative title for Seoul), Seodaemun (‘West Gate’)
District, Sinchon (‘New Village’) Ward, Number 134.
/ÕoéÙgæ]*Õ¹/IŸe´¯¬ócÓ¤ÅçÐwí134òÓ´ôÓ¹IŒÉ›+
c G. Shin 2003 95
º16 ¯.
11 Adjectival Phrases and Clauses
We’ve already seen how we can modify nouns using description verbs (see Page 91):
¨´-¹-. a good person º¤´.`-¢¢¯ an interesting story
¯´·· a hot country ¹´.`-´-.´ a delicious food
Now we see how Korean uses action verbs in the same way.
Completed Actions
When modifying a noun with a completed, or perfected, action:
AVST - (~.)NOUN ...
EXAMPLE
¯ -
+ =⇒
¯. ¯.¬·. the bus that has gone
~ - ´- ´-´·¹. the guest who came
¬ .-
+ ´-=⇒
¬.´- ·¯¬.´--.¯ the letter I received
´ ÷- ´÷´- ·¯´÷´-¹ the book that I read
Sentence building
´- clothes
¤¢¯`.´- The clothes that Mia bought ...
¤¢¯¹ª.¨.·¹`.´- The clothes Mia bought in the department store ...
¤¢¯¹ª.¨.·¹`.´-´-¢¨-¹´.·~.
The clothes that Mia bought in the department store are very stylish.
Current Actions
When modifying a noun with a current action:
AVST - `-NOUN ...
We’ve already seen phrases like ¹.´-¯~¯ `-¬·.(see Page 68), where the verb ending -`-
corresponds to ‘which is (go)ing’ in the translation ‘a bus which is going to the Folk Village’. While
English uses a variety of relative pronouns: who, whom, that, which, when, etc, Korean simply applies
the relevant verb-endings, depending on whether we are referring to completed, current or potential
actions.
EXAMPLE
¯-
+ `-=⇒
¯`- ¹´.¯`-¯= the train that goes to Seoul
-¨.- -¨.`- ·¯-¨.`-¹-. someone that I don’t know
¹- ¹`- ¹ ´~¯`-¹`-´-.´ the food that Tae-U can’t eat
´÷- ´÷`- ´.·¯´÷`-¹ the book that my elder sister reads
96 c G. Shin 2003
´~·¨.¢·~.
Sentence building
¹ book
·´-.¹.¢´÷`-¹ The book that my younger sister’s reading ...
·´-.¹.¢¬·¹´ ÷`-¹ The book that my younger sister’s reading in her room ...
·´-.¹.¢¬·¹´÷`-¹´-¢¨-º¤´.·~.
The book that my younger sister’s reading in her room is really interesting.
Potential Actions
When modifying a noun with a potential action:
AVST - (~.)NOUN ...
EXAMPLE
*-
+ =⇒
^. ^.´. something to do
~.- `-. ·´.'.¹¯. the exam that I’m going to take tomorrow
¬.-
+ ´¬.=⇒
¬.´¬. ¯´ -.¨-·¬.´¬.´- the money that I’m going to receive next week
¹- ¹´¬. ~¯ ·¹´¬.´-.´ the food that I’m going to eat in the afternoon
Sentence building
´-.´ food ...
¹´ ¬.´-.´ The food we’re going to eat ...
·´.¯¹¤¹´ ¬.´-.´ The food we’re going to eat tomorrow evening ...
·´.¯¹¤¹´¬.´-.´´-' .¯·¯·~. The food we’re going to eat tomorrow evening is Bulgogi.
Language Notes
• An action verb whose stem ends in requires a special attention: the drops before -(~.),
-`-or -(~.)ending is attached. Consider the table below.
• In the table below, notice also how the verb stem ´-.- changes when -(~.)or -(~.)ending is
attached. We suggest you treat the verb ´-.- as irregular, as indicated by the regular ‘conjugation’
pattern of resembling verbs such as ¬.- and ~.-.
Stem (Meaning)
Adjectival Phrases/Clauses Polite Informal Polite Formal
Completed Current Potential Present Past Present Past
´.- (know) O[e... UNK´... ½g... ´.¢~ ´.´.·~ ½i¹I ´.´.´-.·¯
¹.´¬.- (make) L[eOK´... L[e¹NK´... L[eÐlé... ¹.´¬.·~ ¹.´¬.´ .·~ L[eÐlë¹I ¹.´¬.´ .´-.·¯
´.- (live) N[e... /NK´... ¼g... ´.¢~ ´.´.·~ ¼i¹I ´.´.´-.·¯
¹.- (earn (money)) òÓ... ¹NK´... ]#Õ... ¹.·~ ¹.´ .·~ ]#×¹I ¹.´ .´-.·¯
´-.- (listen, hear) Ðlé¢K´... ´-.`-... ÐléÕlé... Ðléu´ Ðlé+ùáu´ ´-.´-.·¯ Ðlé+ù álë¹I
¬.- (receive) ¬.´-... ¬.`-... ¬.´¬.... ¬.¢~ ¬.´.·~ ¬.´-.·¯ ¬.´.´-.·¯
~.- (write, use) ´-... ~.`-... `-.... '´ 5áu´ ´-.·¯ 5ál ë¹I
c G. Shin 2003 97
º17 ¯.
17 ´.¤ª -.¹÷´-¯¨.¢~.
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Describing people and things
• Colours and clothing
SHE LOOKS LIKE HER MOTHER.
In this unit we learn more about how to describe people and things, and also how to make
comparisons.
1 It seems/looks like ...
¯.¯¨.¢~. ¬'-¨.¢~.
¨÷¨.¢~. ¹¹ª-.*`-¯¨.¢~ .
¯¢`ª-.=`-¯¨.¢~ . ¯=ª-.¯`-¯¨.¢~.
98 c G. Shin 2005
´.¤ª-.¹ ÷´-¯¨.¢~.
2 Clothing and Accessories I
¬¯ pants, slacks ´.¨ glasses
³.¬¯ jeans ¯¨. wallet, purse
=¤ skirt `-¨.¢ necklace
¯¯·· jacket ¨-¨.¢ earrings
·.¯¯. skirt ¹.¯ ring
·.¢¹. business shirt ¹z watch
¯¹. T-shirt ´-´- underwear
¬'- (leather) shoes ´¹. socks
¹¯¢ necktie ´'- suit
-¯ hat, cap ·.'- Korean clothes
LANGUAGE NOTES
• 7¨rrefers only to the Korean traditional upper outer garment • ,ê- is a Sino-Korean
expression, meaning blue • ô6;= neck • ƒeB^derives from the verb ƒeB-, to hang, and thus means
literally a hanger • ö¶;= inside • -õ i;= set of clothes
3 Clothing and Accessories II
·.º-¯ sweater ¨¨. gloves
¯° jacket `.¹. shoes
~¬/¨כ¯ . coat, overcoat ´´-.ª. sneakers
÷.··. dress "÷´-¬ ¯ shorts
E᯷. one-piece dress ··. underwear
'~¯·. two-piece dress ¯.'- school uniform
·.¯¨. scarf ´-´'- swimming suit
LANGUAGE NOTES
• When referring to a coat, you say either ´bor ·=.(not ´b·=.) in Korean • °mכª<l7
seems straightforward; also frequently used for shorts is -_l7• ¨.in ¨.õi;is obviously from *.¨.
c G. Shin 2005 99
º17 ¯.
4 Action Verbs: Wearing Things, etc.
PUT ON ... TAKE OFF ...
´.- clothes
¹-
~.- hat, glasses
`.- footwear
*- necktie, scarf, necklace, earrings
LANGUAGE NOTES: Korean Verbs of ‘wearing’
• It would be useful to know at this stage that for -_7(ring) and ¹ç,¯m_(gloves), you use P- (fit
in/into) in case of putting it on, and =- (take out) in case of taking it off. Note also that with '7
(watch) you use J- (attach, fasten on) and (Ë{- (take off ).
• All the verbs in the list indicate the process of ‘putting on’ or ‘taking off’ something, and thus
you use them with the perfect tense marker -´./-´./· · ·ªif you want to say that someone is/is
not wearing something (see Examples below). This is to indicate, as it were, that we are
describing the outcome of a process, rather than a state in itself. To say that someone was wearing
something at a point in time in the past, you use the perfect tense marker -´./-´./· · ·ªtwice (see
Examples below).
EXAMPLES
~`-.´-³.¬¯ª-.´.´.·~. He is wearing blue jeans today.
*¯¹.· º` -"÷´-¬¯ª-.´.´.´.·~. But he was wearing shorts yesterday.
¢´·.- ¯ª -.".·~. She is wearing a strange hat.
´´-.ª.ª-.` .´.·~. He’s wearing sneakers.
`-¨.¢`-´.ª·~. She’s not wearing a necklace.
´.¨´¬.¹´.·~. He’s taken off his glasses.
¹.¯ª-.· ·z".·~. She’s wearing several rings.
¬".¹ zª-.³.·~. He’s wearing an expensive watch.
5 Colours
¹ /¹כ. colour, tint ¯²- blue
¯¹- black ´·¹ green
¨.- black, blackish ¬.¹ brown
*´- white ª.¹ grey
ª.- white, whitish ¯¯-¹ pink
'.¨- red -¨.¹ pink
`²- yellow ~".¯¹ orange
100 c G. Shin 2005
´.¤ª-.¹ ÷´-¯¨.¢~.
LANGUAGE NOTES
• ·`.and `-´-both mean Which ..., and are very close in meaning. We met ·`.in the context
of ·`.··¹-.¢·~? (Which country does he come from?), and basically it asks the
listener to designate one of a number of alternatives – equivalent to the English Which one?. On
the other hand, `-´-, eg -¯`-`-´-¹¢·~?, seeks a descriptive answer – equivalent to
What type of ...?.
• Verb stems ending in (*´¬) are irregular. If you want to say something is black, white, red,
etc, you ‘conjugate’ the verb as follows. (1) Drop the stem-final , (2) change the vowel =to
>, and (3) add ~. Thus, “The trousers are black” will be ¬¯¯¯¤~in Korean. Note also
that when used as a modifier, (1) the stem-final drop, and (2) (·´-) will be added. Thus,
‘black trousers’ will be ¯¹.¬¯.
• How do we use those colour terms ending in the expression ¹(colour)? As modifier, they will
simply be placed in front of the noun they modify. Elsewhere, they’ll be used with the verb ¢-
(is, are). Thus, ‘a green hat’ and “The hat is green” in Korean will be ´·¹-¯and -¯`-
´·¹¢·~, respectively.
6 Some Description Verbs
¨÷- be young (animate, post adolescent) ¨.- big
··- be young (animate, pre-adolescent) ¯¯¨.- tall
`-´.- be old (animate) ¨- small
¹÷´.- be old (inanimate) ¯¯¨- short (in height)
¹÷´.- resemble/take after (in appearance) ·*.- pretty
¨.¹.¨.- be handsome ¢´-.¹.- beautiful
¨.`-¹.¨.- be ugly "÷- short (in length)
~·¯.´.- old-fashioned, timeworn (inanimate) ¨.- long
LANGUAGE NOTES
• Note that some of the verbs above, chiefly related to processes involving growth and the ageing
process, uniformly take the perfect tense marker ´./´.-/· · ·ª-. This is to indicate that we are
describing the outcome of a process, rather than a state in itself.
EXAMPLES
¯.¹-.´-`-´.·~. He’s old.
¯.=`-¹ ÷´.·~. The car’s old.
¢¯¯¨.¹ .¨.·~! What a handsome (lit. well-shaped) child!
¯`-·.^.¢¬¯ª-.¹÷´.·~. I’ve taken after my (maternal) grandfather.
c G. Shin 2005 101
º17 ¯.
7 More Useful Expressions
´ .·`- try on clothes ¹Eá¯`¢- (looking) refreshing
´.¯·¯·- go around wearing ¹.".¯`¢- (looking) slim
ª.¨´¬.*- put on make-up ¨÷·`¢- (looking) young
¯¯´. design -.´.¯`¢- (looking) comfortable
`--. a pattern, figure ´~¢*- elegant
8 Making Comparisons: the Particle `¯
When we want to compare things, eg A is better than B, we use `¯as follows.
A - ¯B - `¯(¯) ¨¢~.
EXAMPLES
'.¯.¹¢¯ ¯ -¹`¯¯¨¢~. Red is better than pink.
¬¯`¯=¤¯¯·¤~. Skirts are prettier than trousers.
´.´`.´-¯ · `.`¯¢´-.¯´-~ . Seorak-san is more beautiful than Jiri-san.
¹¬`¯`~`.¢¯~. Busan is bigger than Daegu.
9 More about Negatives
We’ve already met the negative adverb ´., which precedes the verb stem. This has another form:
• ¹.~¯´.¯~´-~. = ¹.~¯¯ -.¯´¢~.
• ··`-¨.=ª-.´.¹·~. = ··`-¨.=ª-.¹¯´¢~.
• ¯`-´.¯~. = ¯`-¯¯´¢~.
• ¯`-´.¯¨.·~. = ¯`-¯¯´¨.·~.
´.VST and VST-¯´- are almost identical in meaning, though the VST-¯´- construction is
slightly more emphatic in effect.
10 It’s rather ...
Likewise, when we want to be less forthright we can say
... DVST - (~.)-.¢·~. NOTE: -.= side, aspect
EXAMPLES
'.¬·`-¨-.¯~´-.¢·~. Canberra is a bit on the cold side.
¢¨.=`-¨-.¤´-.¢·~. This kimchi’s rather hot.
´´-`-¯ ¯°--.¢·~. Yongsu’s rather tall.
¢¯¯´.¤ª-.´.¹÷´--.¢·~. The baby looks more like her father (than her mother).
102 c G. Shin 2005
´.¤ª-.¹ ÷´-¯¨.¢~.
11 IT SEEMS AS IF ...
With Actions
When we are conjecturing about a state of affairs we can say
... AVST -









(~.)
`-
(~.)









- ¯¨.¢~.
NOTE: For completed actions, use AVST - (~.)
¯¨.¢~; for uncompleted actions, AVST - `-¯
¨.¢~; for potential actions, AVST (~.)¯
¨.¢~.
EXAMPLES
¬¯´-¯¨.¢~. It seems to have rained.
¬¯~`-¯¨.¢~. It seems to be raining.
¬¯´.¯¨.¢~. It seems as though it’s going to rain.
With Descriptions
When our conjecture involves description verbs, we can say
... DVST -



(~.)
(~.)



¯¨.¢~.
NOTE: to refer to past or on-going experience, use
-(~.)¯¨.¢~; when conjecturing what
something/someone might be like, use -(~.)¯
¨.¢~.
EXAMPLES
¢¨.=`-¨-.¤´¯¨.¢~. This kimchi seems a little bit hot.
¢¨.=`-¨-.¤´.¯¨.¢~. This kimchi may be a little bit hot.
¬¯¯¨-.°-¯¨.¢~ The trousers seem a little bit big.
¬¯¯¨-.-.¯¨.¢~. The trousers may be a little bit big.
With the verbs: ¢-/¢·- and ´.-/´,-
Note that ¢-, ¢·-, ´.- and ´,- combine with ¯¨.¢~as follows.





¢-
¢·-





becomes either





´.¯¨.¢~
¢-.¯¨.¢~





or





´.¯¨.¢~.
¢¹.¯¨.¢~.










´.-
´,-





becomes either





´.`-¯¨.¢~
´,`-¯¨.¢~





or





´.´¬.¯¨.¢~.
´,´¬.¯¨.¢~.





EXAMPLES
¯·´¢´.¯¨.¢~. It looks like a cat.
¯·´¢´.¯¨.¢~. It’ll be a cat, I guess.
z¯¢-.¯¨.¢~. It doesn’t look like a dog.
z¯¢¹.¯¨.¢~. It doesn’t look as though it’ll be a dog.
¯.¹-.´-´-¢´,`-¯¨.¢~. He/She seems to have no money.
~`-.´-¹ ¯.¢¨-.´.´¬.¯¨.¢~. It looks as though I’ll have time today.
c G. Shin 2005 103
º18 ¯.
18 ·¯¹´.¯·~?
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Goods for Sale, Shops, Businesses, etc
• Talking about the Act of Giving/Receiveing
• Future time words
• Introductory Statements
• I’ve come to ...
• If ...; If you want to ...
WHERE WILL YOU GET IT?
Going shopping is of course a basic human activity, and one that requires interaction and possibly
negotiation with shop staff and others. Various facets of our previous study are brought to bear on this
topic, eg using Korean numbers (Units 5 & 6), asking questions such as ‘How much is it?’ (Unit 8),
finding out where places are located (Unit 9), getting around on public transport (Unit 12), basic Insa
(Unit 1), and describing things (Unit 14). In this Unit we also learn how to describe the acts of giving
and receiving.
1 Conversation
Annie is talking to a shop keeper.
Shop Keeper: ·¹~'~.
Annie: ´.¹*'~. ¯¹.` -.´¬.¹·.oP`-¹~.
Shop Keeper: ·, ¬¨*'~.
Annie: ¯¯.-.´.¤"¢·~?
Shop Keeper: ·`.¯~?
Annie: ¯¯÷¯¯´·´.`-¯.-.´¬.¢~.
Shop Keeper: ·, 8,000 Eá"¢·~.
Annie: 8,000 Eá¢~? ¢¯ .´.¤·~?
Shop Keeper: ¯.¯÷·.z·8,000 Eá"¢·~.
Annie: ¨-.¬".¹~. ¯... ··zª-.¹¹.¨,´¬.¨-.~z¯¨-'~?
Shop Keeper: ¹z¹´.¯·~?
Annie: 'z´.¯·~.
Shop Keeper: 'z~? ´-.... 22,000 Eá¨-'~.
Annie: \`-¬~~. ·.z ·6,000 Eá"~.¨¨-'~.
Shop Keeper: ¯.¯.´.¯.~, ´·¹..
Annie: ¯.-., *·¹.¨-'~.
Shop Keeper: ·, ·¯´.·~. ¯ .·¯·¢¯¬¯¯¯'~. ¹¬·.·~.
Annie: ¨.¹^.·¯. ´-¯·* '~.
104 c G. Shin 2003
·¯¹´.¯·~?
Language Notes
• ´.¤"...?: When we want to
know the price per unit of goods
we use ", which means ‘per
unit’. Thus the question
´.¤"¢·~? (How much
each?) is answered in the
dialogue by 8,000 Eá"¢·~
(8,000 won each).
• ··...: ··means several,
and indicates a general plural
number. Two of the most
common usages are ··¯, ...
when address a group of people,
and ··¯¯(several kinds)
when indicating that a certain
item comes in a variety of
forms.
Translation
Shop Keeper: Welcome.
Annie: Hello, I’ve come to buy some souvenirs.
Shop Keeper: Sure, look around.
Annie: How much are those pictures each?
Shop Keeper: Which ones?
Annie: Those ones next to ceramics.
Shop Keeper: Right. 8,000 won apiece.
Annie: 8,000 won? How much are these ones?
Shop Keeper: They’re 8,000 won apiece too.
Annie: That’s a bit expensive. If I buy several, will
you make them cheaper for me?
Shop Keeper: How many will you take?
Annie: I’ll take three.
Shop Keeper: Three? Hmm ... 22,000 won.
Annie: Too expensive. 6,000 won apiece.
Shop Keeper: That won’t do.
Annie: Just give me one, then.
Shop Keeper: OK. There you are. And here’s a bag with our
compliments.
Annie: Thank you. Goodbye.
• ~z¯¨-'~?: You’ve probably noticed that Korean has no clear equivalent to the English
Please .... In fact, the sense of Please is indicated by adding the verb ¨-- to VST - ¢/·- or to
¯-. Thus ~z¯¨-'~means literally Give me (the favour of) doing it. We cover this
grammatical construction in detail later on in the course.
• ¹¬·.·~.: Many shopping transactions in Korea conclude with the customer being offered
some little extra item as a gift. ¹¬ ·.·~literally means It’s (part of our) service, or in English
... with our compliments.
2 Goods for Sale
`.¯. goods =´ toothpaste
¨, price ³´. toothbrush
¯¹.`-. souvenirs `¯. notebook
÷¯¯ ceramics ¨-.¢ paper
¯¬ furniture ´.¯. doll
¯¬ bag, case ¯÷ map
¨% flower ´`-. food items
¨%¬ vase ¨-.¨. toys
ª.¨`-. cosmetics ¯.-. picture
¬'÷ soap ´~`. umbrella
´ medicine ´~- stamps
c G. Shin 2003 105
º18 ¯.
3 Shops & Businesses, etc
´ ¯ shopping centre ¨%¨. flower shop
¤¨Eá beauty shop º¨. bread shop
´-¯z clothing store `¬¬¨. stationery shop
¹¯.\dB photo studio ´'-¨. tailor
¹¬ book shop ´¨¨. dressmaker
´¬ pharmacy ´`-.¨. grocery store
¬'-¬ shoe shop ¨´-¨. butcher
PC¬ ‘PC Cafe’ ¯¬¨. furniture shop
Language Notes
For some shops there may be a
difference between the way we
refer to them in conversation
and the way they are referred
to in the written language - on
actual shop signs, for
example. The following
written forms are presented
for your information.
SPOKEN FORM WRITTEN FORM TRANSLATION
¤¨E á ¤´-.´. beautician
º¨. º¯.¨. cake, confectionery shop
¨%¨. ª.Eá florist
¹¬ ¹-./¹¨/`¯· book shop
´¬/´¬ ´¬ chemist/pharmacy
¬'-¬ ´ª.¨. shoe shop
`¬¬¨ . `¬¬/`¬ stationery shop
4 Some Verbs
· -´¬.*- go shopping ´´¬.¹- take medicine
³- look for ´-¢´¬.- cost money
¯¯·- wait ¨.¢¨- good quality
¯¯¯- take (items with oneself) ¹´.- stylish, good looking
¯¯~- bring (items with oneself) -.~*- necessary
-.- sell -.·*- handy
5 Some More Expressions
~ z cheaply ..." per unit, each
··¯¯ several kinds `.`. present(s)
··¹. several times º´. the most/best
... ·¤·¹ according to ... ´.*- work
106 c G. Shin 2003
·¯¹´.¯·~?
6 Talking about the Act of Giving/Receiveing
When we have given something to someone we can say:
...





·.¹
·z





... ´¬./ª-.¨-´.·~.
...· ... ´¬./ª-.÷.¯.·~.
EXAMPLES
¹´~·.¹`.`.´¬.¨-´.·~. I gave a present to Tae-U.
·¯··`.`.´¬.÷.¯.·~. I gave a present to Mother.
³.¬·z¹´¬.¨-´.·~. I gave a book to my friend.
´.··.¹ÿm®¨-´.·~? What did you give to your (elder) sister?
And when we have received something:
...





·.¹ ¹
·z ¹





... ´¬./ª-.¬.´.·~.
NOTE: -·.¹¹is more informal than
-·z¹but they are generally
interchangeable. -·.¹/-·zhave the
honorific form ·, but -·.¹¹/·z¹have
no honorific forms.
EXAMPLES
³.¬·.¹¹¹.´.·¹´¬.¬.´.·~. I received a book from my friend on my birthday.
·¯··.¹¹´-´¬.¬.´.·~. I received money from Mother.
´.··z¹`.`.´¬.¬.´.·~. I received a present from my (elder) sister.
¹.´-.¹.·.¹¹ÿm®¬.´.·~? What did you receive from your (younger) brother?
7 Future Time-Words
In a week, if today is Tuesday:
Tuesday ~`-.
Wednesday ·´.
Friday ¢¹..~´.
Saturday ¢¹.¯~´.
Sunday ¢¹.´.~´.
Monday ¯´-.¨-m®~´.
Tuesday ¯´-.¨-ª .~´.
NOTES: Saturday and Sunday together =
¢¹.¨-¹.this weekend
In a year, if this month is October:
September ¢¹.¹.
October ·¹./¯´-.¹.
November .¹.11m®
December .¹.12m®
January ·¹.1m®
February ·¹.2m®
c G. Shin 2003 107
º18 ¯.
8 INTRODUCTORY STATEMENTS
When we walk into a shop, or when someone answers our phone call, we usually feel the need to
make a preliminary remark explaining our purpose, such as I saw a nice bag in the window ... or, in the
case of the phone, This is so-and-so speaking ... We do this in Korean by using · · ·¹, which may be
described as a ‘scene-setter’ This is a form that announces, as it were, what follows is related to the
preliminary remark: I saw a nice bag in the window (– how much is it?) or, This is so-and-so speaking,
(– is Tae-U there?)
When the introductory statement is essentially a description of states:
PRESENT STATE: · · · DVST - (~.)¹, · · ·
PAST STATE: · · ·



DVST - ´./´ .
· · ·ª



- `-¹, · · ·
EXAMPLES
¢¯¢¨-·ª-¹, ´.¯~? This one’s very pretty – shall we buy it?
~`-.´-¬*.`.¹, ·´.~'~. He (respected person) is busy today – please come tomorrow.
¯.-¯Æs¬³´.`-¹, ^.´.´.·~? That hat was good – why didn’t you buy it?
·º`-¯~qº`-¹, ~`-.´-¤º-¯~ . Yesterday was cold – and now today it’s nice and warm.
When the introductory statement pertains actions:
PRESENT ACTION: · · · AVST - `-¹, · · ·
PAST ACTION: · · ·



AVST - ´./´.
· · ·ª



- `-¹, · · ·
EXAMPLES
¬¯~`-¹, ´~`.´¬.¯¯¯'~. It’s raining – take your umbrella.
¬·.¯´.~`-¹, -¹ª-.¯¯·¨.¹¯. The bus isn’t coming – let’s take a taxi.
´¬ºª-.´.ª`-¹, ·¹z^.¯~? I haven’t done my homework – what shall I do?
¯.¹-.´¬.¹.¹.`-¹, ... ·, ¢¨-¢´·.¹-.¢´.·~.
I’ve met him – yes, he was a strange person.
We can make a · · ·¹clauses into a complete, Polite Informal sentence by adding ~. This gives a
mild exclamatory effect, and, because it is a preliminary remark only, it gives the listener the
expectation that something more is to be said – perhaps another remark, an invitation, or simply an
implied invitation for the listener to respond.
EXAMPLES
¯.¯³.¨´-¹~. That’s really good.
¹.~¯³.¨´-¹~. The weather’s really nice.
¬¯.oP`-¹~. It’s been raining.
¬¯~`-¹~. It’s raining.
108 c G. Shin 2003
·¯¹´.¯·~?
9 Come/Go ... in order to ...
When we want to explain why (ie in order to do what) we have come or gone somewhere we can
say:
· · · VST - (~.)·· · · LOCOMOTIVE VERB
NOTES: Locomotive Verbs = verbs such as ~-, ¯- and ¯·- that show motion from one place to another; -·
corresponds to English in order to.
EXAMPLES
·.¬·ª-.÷.`~*··.¬·.oP·~. I’ve come to Korea to learn Korean.
³.¬ª-.¹.··¯¯´-.·¨.·~. I went to the coffee shop to meet a friend.
`.·~'~. Drop in on us some time. (Lit. Come and relax (with us). – a standard Korean invitation.)
´-¯´¬.¤´~·¯Eá·¯\~. He/She attends a Hagwon to learn Maths.
10 IF ...
When we want to link two clauses with ’If ...’ we can say:
· · · VST - (~.)¹., · · ·
EXAMPLES
¬¯~¹., ÷.Eá·´.¨.¯·~. If it rains we won’t go to the park.
¹.~¯¨~.¹., `.·¨.¯·~. If the weather’s good, we’ll go to the mountains.
·¯·¯¨,¢¬~¹., ¯.¯¯·¯ª-.´.¯·~. If the beef is too expensive, we’ll buy pork.
'.¯.-¯¯´,~.¹., `-.-¯ª-.¹'~. If they don’t have a red hat, buy a yellow one.
11 If you want to ...
When we want to give guidance to people in this way we can start by saying
· · · VST - (~.)·¹., · · ·
NOTES: -(~.)· = expression of intention; ¹.= if ...
EXAMPLES
`.¯.´¬.~z¹·¹.¹.¹`¹¨·¯'~.
If you want to shop cheaply, go to Namdaemun Market.
¯·¯ª-.¹·¹.¨´-¨.·¯'~. If you want to buy meat, go to a butcher.
·.¬·ª-.¨.*·¹.·.¬³.¬·.´.´-.´¬.¹¢*'~.
If you want to do Korean well, practise with your Korean friend a lot.
¬^.¯-ª -.¹·¹.·^.¹·¯ '~. If you want to buy an airplane ticket, go to a travel agent.
c G. Shin 2003 109
º19 ¯.
19 ¯ ¯¢·¤~?
IN THIS UNIT ...
• Describing feelings, emotions and reactions
• Why ...?
HOW DO YOU FEEL?
We’ve learnt a number of basic descriptive verbs that enabled us to describe how we felt about food,
learning Korean, sports, neighbourhood, and so on. Now we become more personal, and in this unit we
start to learn how to describe our personal feelings and reactions – being happy, sad and so on. We also
look at ways of describing other people – are they clever? thick? nice? not so nice? We also start to
learn how to show the causal relationship between sentences, asking and answering Why ...? questions.
1 Some Examples
¯ ¯¢¨¢~. ¯¯¢·¤~. `~·´-~. ¨¨´¬.¯ ~.
`.¢¹ .·~. '.´.¯~. `~!.·´-~. ·.¨´-~.
`-¹´-~ . `.².·~. ¹.¹.¯~. ª.¯¹ .·~.
110 c G. Shin 2006
¯¯¢·¤~?
2 Feelings and Emotions
¯*.- joyous, happy ¹.¹.*- feel frustrated
´-.¨.- very sad ¨.¨.*- feel frustrated
´.´.*- sad ¨.¢·- feel afraid
¯¯ mood, emotional state ª.¯·- feel angry
¯¯¢¨- be in a good mood, feel good '.´.*- feel uneasy, nervous
¯¯¢´.¨- be in a bad mood, ¨¨ worries
¯¯¢·*.- be dissatisfied, down in the dumps ¨¨´¬.* - feel worried
`~².- feel envy `.·- feel surprised
`~!.².- feel shy, bashful, shameful `.¢·- feel elated, on top of the world
·.´·.- feel lonely ¯.².- miss someone/something
Language Notes: Describing how other people feel
When we are describing, and asking, how other people feel, we attach to the descriptive verb stem
-¢/-·/· · ·¯*- (Literally, appear, act, manifest the sign of ...), as shown in the table below.
DESCRIPTIVE VERB STEM DESCRIBING THIRD PARTIES MEANING
`~!.².- `~!.·´-*- appear, act shy
¨-.¨.- ¨-.¯´-*- appear to enjoy
`~².- `~·´-*- appear envy
´.´.*- ´.´.¯*- appear, act sad
´-.¨.- ´-.¯*- appear, act sad
¯*.- ¯¤*- appear, act happy
Note, however, that the expression -¢/-·/· · ·¯*- is not used when we ask about the feelings and
emotions of the second person, ie you. Thus,
¯¤~? Are you happy?
¹´~~¯`~·´-~? Do you envy Tae-U?
Language Notes: the Verb ¯.².-
As is the case with the verb `~².- (Lit. be envied) in the above, the verb ¯.².- (Lit. be missed) is a
description verb that is inherently ‘passive’ in meaning; Korean lacks the counterpart of the verb to
miss, which is semantically an ‘active’ verb. To express that you miss a person, a place or a time, you
simply say that a person, a place or a time is ‘missed’ in Korean, ie, the person, the place or the time is
marked with the particle -¢/-¯, not -´¬./-ª-..
EXAMPLES
`.´~¯¯.·´-~. I miss Seon-Yeong. (lit. Seon-Yeong is missed (by me).)
·.¬¢¯.·´-~. I miss Korea.
¹¯¯.¤¯¯.·´-~. I miss my university days.
´-.¯¯.¤³.¬´¬.¢¯.·´-~. I miss my friends in my primary school days.
c G. Shin 2006 111
º19 ¯.
3 SHOWING SYMPATHY/EMPATHY
Here’s a simple but effective way of showing sympathy for someone. The expression corresponds to
“You must be ...” in English
... VST - (~.)¹ - ¯.·~.
NOTES: VST = verb stem, (~.)¹= honorific; when
the verb stem ends in a consonant use ~.¹, ¯.=
presumptive suffix, ·~= polite, informal verb
ending.
EXAMPLES
´-.¨.¹¯.·~. You must be sad (about that).
¯¯¢¨~.¹¯.·~. You must be happy (Lit. feeling good).
¯*.¹¯.·~ . You must be happy (about that).
¯¯÷.*¹¯.· ~. You must be tired.
'.-.*¹¯.· ~. That must be inconvenient (for you).
·.¨´~¹¯.· ~. You must feel lonely.
4 You must have been ...
And when we are commenting on the ‘then’ feelings of the the person we’re speaking to, we can say
... DVST - (~.)´.- ¯.·~.
NOTES: (~.)´.= (~.)¹+ ´.= honorific + PAST;
when the verb stem ends in a consonant use ~.´., ¯.=
presumption, -·~= polite, informal verb-ending.
EXAMPLES
¯-.¨ -··.¬·¨.¯.oP·~. I went to Korea last week.
¯.·~? º¤´.´.¯.·~. Really? That must have been interesting.
5 Describing People, Situations
¯ · head z~.¨.- be lazy, indolent
¯·¯¨- be clever z~.´-.¹.¢ a lazy-bones
¯·¯·*.- be stupid '-¨.*- be complicated
¤´-. mind, spirit `-¢¤¨.- be thirsty
¤´-.¢¨´-¹-. a good-hearted person ¤¯¯·¨.- be hungry
¯ª-¤´-.~.¨ in a happy frame of mind `~¯ rich person
¤´-.·´¬.- be pleasing, be to one’s liking `~¯·~ ‘He/She’s rich.’
³.¨.*- be kind, polite `~¯¯¯.- get rich
´.´.**- do something wholeheartedly ¯-.*- be poor
´.´.* earnestly ´¢¨- be lucky, have good luck
`~¯÷.*- be hard-working ¯.¢´,- be listless
112 c G. Shin 2006
¯¯¢·¤~?
6 Why?
To express this, we can say









^....?



^.¯.· ~?
^.~?












NOTES: ^....? = why ...?, ^.¯.·~? = why is that
so?, ^.~? = why?
7 Since/Because ...
When we want to explain the causal relationship between two sets of information we can say
...



VST1 - ¢/·
· · ·¯



- ¹, VST2 ...
EXAMPLES
¢¯¹¬Eá·¨.·~. I was sick so I went to the hospital.
´´-¢´ .·¹¹·¨¯~. I’m going downtown – I’ve got an appointment.
\`-¬~¹´.´.·~. I didn’t buy it – it was too expensive.
¨-·ª-.`.·¹`-¨.·~. I couldn’t go because I didn’t know the address.
Three points to note:
(1) The tense marker comes after the VST2 – there is no tense marker after VST1:
\`-¬~¹´.´.·~. (correct)
\`-¬".¹´.´.·~. (incorrect)
(2) We often shorten the second clause (i.e. the VST2 clause) by substituting it with the phrase ...
ˆ8x§, or simply attaching x§to · · ·"X. So
\`-¬~¹´.´.·~. = \`-¬~¹¯."·~.
= \`-¬~¹~.
¨-·ª-.`.·¹`-¨.·~. = ¨-·ª-.`.·¹¯."·~.
= ¨-·ª-.`.·¹~.
(3) It’s a good idea to bear in mind the full range of meaning for this grammatical structure. Look at
these sentences.
¹¨·¯¹¨÷ª-.´.·~. I went to the market and bought some grapes.
´,¢¹¯¯·'~. Won’t you have a seat and wait?
Sentences like these show that

VST - ¢ /·
· · ·¯

itself doesn’t indicate ‘because’ etc – it simply
indicates that the following action took place in the circumstance indicated by VST1. Thus \`-
¬~¹´.´.·~. actually means “It was too expensive, and that being the case, I didn’t buy it.”
c G. Shin 2006 113
º19 ¯.
8 Some Nouns and Verbs
´.- open `¯·~- forget to bring, leave behind
¹.- close `¯·¯- forget to take, leave behind
¹- stand, come to a halt ³.-. blackboard
·- happen, break out ¤ stomach
·¯- go out ¯·¨.- hungry; lit, empty
· ~- come out `- throat
`- put, place something somewhere ¤¨.- thirsty; lit, dry
EXAMPLES
102 ·¢¯ª-.´.´.·~. I opened the book to Page 102.
`´¬.¹.~.'~. Close the door, please.
¯=¯´·¹´.·~. The train came to a halt at the station.
°-´.¹.·~. Something (bad) has happened!
`.´~`-´ ~` .´¬.`¯·¨.·~. Seon-Yeong has left her umbrella (here).
¤¯¯·¯~. I’m hungry
`-¢¹ .·~. I’m thirsty.
9 In the process of ...
When we want to stress that an action is in the process of being carried out we can say
· · · AVST - ¯·´.·~.
EXAMPLES
¯´.·`-¯ .-.¯ª-.~.¯·´.·~. Kylie’s writing a letter now.
¯·´¢¯`°-·¹¨.´¬.¯¯·´.·~. The cat is sleeping behind the door.
·.¯ª-.~ ¨-.´.´.*¤´~¯·´.·~. I’m learning hard Chinese characters these days.
¹´~`-· º¯¹·´¬ºª-.*¯·´ .´.·~. Tae-U was doing his homework yesterday evening.
10 Compound verbs: VST ¢/·/· · ·¯´.-
When we want to focus on a state that results from an action we can add -¢/·/· · ·¯´.- to certain
verb-stems.
VST MEANING -¢/·/· · ·¯´.- MEANING
¹- stand ¹´.- be standing
´,- sit ´,¢´.- be seated
~- come ·.´.- be here
114 c G. Shin 2006
¯¯¢·¤~?
Compare these sentences:
··¯¯.´.¨´¬.·.oP·~. Annie came into the classroom.
··¯¯.´.¨´¬.··.´.·~. Annie came into the classroom (and he’s still there).
¹´~¯·.¯·´,¯·´.·~. Tae-U is (in the process of) sitting down in the chair.
¹´~¯·.¯·´,¢´.·~. Tae-U is sitting down in the chair.
11 MORE ABOUT -¯.-
¯.- is usually described as signifying presumption on the part of the speaker. Because presumption
usually (though not always, as we’ve seen above) emerges in discussions of future activities it often
appears as similar to the future tense in English. The following notes are not intended for immediate
practical application, but rather are intended for you to refer back to as you observe -¯.arise in various
contexts in future Units.
The meaning of -¯.can often be rather elusive to English speakers, and that is why we prefer to
introduce it in this Unit in the context of the specific function of expressing sympathy –
¯¯÷.*¹¯.·~and so on, rather than in more general contexts.
When referring to actions involving oneself – that is, in the first person, -¯ .indicates a determination
or conviction that what is planned will occur. It is not emotionally neutral like the verb ending -(~.)
¯·~, which we use when making matter-of-fact statements about future actions, but rather suggests
an emotional commitment - hence a determination, or commitment to carry out the planned activity.
For this reason its flavour can’t always be captured in single sentences out of context but, for example,
5¹·¯¹~¯.·~. I’ll come again at five.
implies that one is committed enough to the objective of a visit to come back later at a more convenient
time, perhaps.
Similarly
º¯*¯.·~. I’ll do it.
communicates a willingness and sense of motivation not to be found with º¯^.¯·~.
When asking other people – that is, in the second person, -¯.carries the same implication, that the
person concerned is committed to a planned activity. Thus
·´.¯ ¹¯.·~? Are you going tomorrow?
carries an overtone of “Are you set on going tomorrow?”
Finally, when used with third parties, -¯.changes meaning, because logically we cannot impute
conviction or determination to other people; they are, after all, inner states that only the person
concerned can know the reality of. Therefore, when referring to third parties -¯.conveys the
presumption of the speaker. Thus
¨.`.¹.¹.¢·´.¯¹¯.·~. Mr Kim will go tomorrow.
conveys an overtone not of “Mr Kim’s set on going tomorrow.”, but of “I guess Mr Kim’s going
tomorrow.”
c G. Shin 2006 115
º20 ¯.
20 ·.¬·¹´ .¯¯·¤~?
WHAT’S IT LIKE LIVING IN KOREA?
In this Unit we learn to say what the weather’s like, what it’s like to study Korean, on so on. We also
look at how to form an adverb out of a verb, how to use pronouns, and what to say if we want the
person we’re speaking to to agree with what we’re saying.
1 Weather & Climate
¹ .~ weather ¯¯ climate
'-. spring ·´-. summer
¯´¬. autumn ¯´-. winter
¬ rain ¬¯~- It rains.
` snow .·- cloudy
z¨. season ¨¤³. rainy season
¬-. wind ¬-.¢'-.- windy
2 General
´ ª. movie, cinema ¨= scenery
`-. body `-.·¨¬- good for the body
¯· head ¯·¯¨¬- bright, clever
^.´. things to do ¢¨- very
\`- too (much) `-.*~ of course
¹.¨(+ neg) not especially ¯.·¯· ... And then ...
¯.²¯¹. ... But ... ´÷·*- dislike
³.¨.*- kind `~¯÷.*- diligent
¨.- same ¯¨.- different
¤¨.- fast, quick
3 Learning Korean involves ...
¹ .*¯ speaking ´-.¯ listening
´÷¯ reading ~.¯ writing
¬.¢~.¯ dictation ¹.´-. pronunciation
116 c G. Shin 2005
·.¬·¹´ .¯¯·¤~?
Eating, studying, working etc
In fact the suffix -¯, attached to the verb stem, is a productive device; it makes an ‘-ing’ noun from
a verb.
Some examples:
¯- ¯¯ going ´.- ´.¯ living
`- `¯ looking ÷.`~*- ÷.`~*¯ studying
¹- ¹¯ eating ¤¹- ¤¹¯ drinking
It’s easy to ...
When we want to say that we find certain activities easy we can say
... VST-¯(¯) ^-´-~. NOTES: The use of the subject particle is optional.
EXAMPLES
·.¬¹.´-¤ ´~¯¯^-´-~. It’s easy to learn Korean.
¯´¹.·`-´.*¯¯¯.´¬.·~. It’s hard to work on hot days.
¬·.¨¯¯`-'-.-.¯~. It’s inconvenient to go by bus.
·.¬¹.´-¯·¯¹÷.`~*¯··´¯¨.¢~. It seems studying Korean by myself is hard.
I like/dislike doing ...
When we want to describe things we like, or dislike, doing we can say
VST-¯(ª-.) ¨¬¢¯~/´÷·¯~. NOTES: The use of the object particle is optional.
EXAMPLES
¨-¹.·³ .¬*¯·`·¬·¯¯ ª-.¨¬¢¯~.
I like going to Noraebang (karaoke) with my friends on weekends.
¹´~`-¹ ´÷¯ª-.¨¬¢¯~. Tae-U likes reading books.
¢³.·´ ."´.··¯ª-.´÷·¯~. I dislike waking up early in the morning.
·.¬·¨¹ .*¯`-¨¬¢*¯¹.~.¯`-´÷·¯~.
I like speaking in a foreign language but I don’t like writing in it.
We would like you to do ...
Another context in which you’ll hear the VST-¯regularly is in the construction ... *¹¯
¬².·¯. Public announcements – in airplanes, airport terminals and other public places, for example,
usually request people to follow instructions in this way. ¬·- means desire, want.
4 Adverbs
There are various ways to describe HOW an action was/is performed. Note that Korean use of
adverbs of manner extends not only to the way in which an action is performed but to its outcome as
well.
c G. Shin 2005 117
º20 ¯.
• We can add -zto DVST ending in ´.-:
º¤´.- be interesting º¤´.z interestingly
¹´.- delicious ¹´.z deliciously
• We can add -zto DVST ending in or I:
·*.- bad ·*.z badly
F.- easy F.z easily
·*.- pretty ·*.z prettily
¹.¨.- glad ¹.¨.z gladly
".- (chili) hot ".z with a lot of chili (’hotly’)
• With DVST that end in *-, we replace the *- with *-:
³.¨.*- kind ³.¨.* kindly
`~¯÷.*- diligent `~¯÷.* diligently
• With DVST that end in or ¨., we replace the /¨.with -·:
¤¨.- fast, quick '.· quickly
¹.- (is) far ¹.· far away
• There are also rules that cover other DVST, but examples of their use are so few that it’s usually
better to simply commit the adverb form to memory.
`-- late `-z late
¹- many ¹¢ a lot/copiously
¨.- be same ¨.¢ together
Some examples:
¹´.z÷.'~! Enjoy your food!/Bon appetit.
·´-.¬¯´¬.º¤´.z¯¹.·~. I had a good time in the summer holidays.
¯¹.´¬.¢¯.´-ª-.·*.z¹.ª·~. The students spoke poorly of the professor.
´~·`-¹ ¨· ¹´-´¬.~z´.·~ . We bought our clothes cheaply in the market.
·¯·`-¨ .= ª-.".z¹.´¬.´.·~. Mother made the Gimchi hot to the taste.
`.´~`-· .' -´¬.´.º··*.z´.·~. Seon-Yeong always wears Hanbok beautifully.
`-z·.¹¤´.^.·¯. I’m sorry I came late.
¹¯.´,·~. '.·¨.¹¯. We haven’t got much time. Quick let’s go.
¹¢÷.'~. Bon appetit! (Lit. ’Take a lot’.)
5 Personal pronouns
As you have noticed already, we usually don’t put personal pronouns in a Korean sentence if the
context is clear, ie, if you, the speaker, think that the hearer knows who you are talking about. If you are
going to use personal pronouns, then you’ll need to take note of the fact that, broadly speaking, Korean
makes three kinds of distinctions in deciding which pronoun is appropriate.
118 c G. Shin 2005
·.¬·¹´ .¯¯·¤~?
Personal Pronouns
SINGULAR
HUMBLE NEUTRAL EXALTED
I ¯/º ·/·(I)
II \/·(you) title/kinship term, eg, `.¹.¹.
III ¢/¯./¯¹-.(he/she), ¢/¯./¯¯
¢/¯./¯ ¯(or ¯) (it)
PLURAL
HUMBLE NEUTRAL EXALTED
I ¯ª.(´¬.) ´~·(´¬.) (we) title/kinship term plus ´¬.
II \ª.(´¬.) (you, pl) ··¯
III ¢/¯./¯ ¹-.´¬.(they), ¢/¯./¯¯´¬.
¢/¯./¯¯´ ¬.(they, non-human)
Distinction A: whether the speaker is being self-deprecating and thus humble
In referring to ourselves ¯is used, ºbefore the subject particle ¯. Note also that ºis the
possessive form, ie, my, of ¯.
¯`-` .´¢·~. I’m Seon-Yeong.
º¢´-.´-¢`.´¢·~. My name is I Seon-Yeong.
º¯ª·~. I did it.
¯ª-.¹.·¯·´·ª·~. He wanted to see me.
We can’t refer to others in self-deprecating mode of course; they must be referred to in terms of
neutrality or honour.
Distinction B: whether the speaker is striking a neutral tone
In referring to ourselves and others neutrally, that is, showing neither respect nor disrespect, we use
the following pronouns.
First person
We use ·, and ·before the subject particle ¯or when used as the possessive pronoun, ie, my.
·`-` .´¢·~. I’m Seon-Yeong.
·¢´-.´-¢`.´¢·~. My name is I Seon-Yeong.
·¯ª·~. I did it.
·ª-.¹ .·¯·´·ª·~. He wanted to see me.
Second person singular
We use \, · before the subject particle ¯or when used as the possessive pronoun, ie, your.
\`-¹ .¹´.·? Have you eaten?
·¯¯¯.·¯·? Are you going to school?
Second person plural: \ª.(´¬.)
\ª.´¬.´-¹ .¹´.·? Have you eaten?
Note that the ending -·is a question form used in the intimate speech style, called panmal (¹.¹.).
Panmal, which we meet later on in this course, is used when the speakers have a well established, close
personal relationship. We mention this here because \, ·or \ª.would always be used with panmal.
c G. Shin 2005 119
º20 ¯.
Third person
We use ¢¹-., ¯.¹-.and ¯¹-.for humans, and ¢¯, ¯.¯and ¯¯for inanimate objects.
¢¯, ¯.¯and ¯¯are often shortened in everyday speech to ¢¯, ¯.¯and ¯¯– we met ¢¯
already in Unit 6. Note also that when ¢¯, ¯.¯and ¯¯are used together with the subject particle
-¢, they become further shortened: ¢z, ¯.zand ¯z.
¯.¹-.´-' ÷ ¬·~? Who is he/she?
¯.¯´-¨ -·~ ? What is it?
¢¯¨-·~? What’s this?
¢z¯¨¬¢ ~. This is better.
Distinction C: whether the speaker is showing honour to the person being referred to
Second person singular
Korean lacks a pronoun for you, respected person. We use a status referent, appropriate to the person
we are talking about, such as `.¹.¹., -~etc. In most cases, this is the same expression that we would
use when addressing the person (to catch his/her attention). Regarding the usage of -~, we normally
use the person’s full name with -~(eg, ¢`.´~), but we can use the person’s given name with -~if
we feel that the person is close and familiar (eg, `.´~). It would be taken as rude to just say ¢~.
¨.`.¹.¹.´-´.º~`.·~? When did you (Mr Kim) come?
¢`.´ ~`-´.º~`.·~? When did you (Miss I Seon-Yeong) come?
`.´~`-´ .º~`.·~? When did you (Seon-Yeong) come?
Second person plural: ··¯
··¯´-¯ .¨-÷.`~*'~? What do you (many respected people) study now?
Third person: ¢¯, ¯ .¯, ¯¯
¯.¯´-' ÷¬· ~? Who’s that (respected person)?
6 ... isn’t it?/don’t you think? etc
In conversation, VST-¯~, pronounced with a rising intonation, invites the person being spoken to
agree with a comment on a third party. It softens the direct effect of a plain statement, and is similar to
the English tag questions ‘.., isn’t it?’, ‘.., won’t you?’ etc.
VST-¯~?

EXAMPLES
·.¬¹.¢·¯.¯~?

Korean is difficult, don’t you think?

·.¬¢¨¬¯~?

Korea’s nice, don’t you think?

¯.´ª." -.¯ ~?

You’ve seen the movie, haven’t you?

·.¬´-.´¢".¯~?

Korean food’s hot, don’t you think?

But when VST-¯~is pronounced with falling intonation it doesn’t invite agreement, but expresses
confidence that the person being addressed sees things the same way. People usually don’t disagree
120 c G. Shin 2005
·.¬·¹´ .¯¯·¤~?
when others make observations such as
EXAMPLES
¯-.¯~?

Cold, isn’t it?

º¤´,¯~?

Boring, isn’t it?

~¨-.¬ *.¹¯~?

You’re busy these days, aren’t you?

´¹ª¯~?

You’ve eaten, haven’t you?

¢¢¯´¬.´.¯~?

You heard the story, didn’t you?

¨.·¹¨ .¯~?

You went on foot, didn’t you?

Again, this reflects the practice in English, where a falling intonation on tag questions presumes
agreement.
7 Making exclamations
In listening to people speaking Korean you may often hear them adding extra emphasis to what
they’re saying by using the verb ending -· (~). Look at the following examples.
¹´~¯º-.·~! Well, well – so Tae-U’s come!
¹´~¯~·~! Well, well – here comes Tae-U!
¹´~¯~¯.·~! Well, well - Tae-U will be coming!
~`-.¹ .~`-¹.·~! It’s really hot today!
You will also hear from time to time -¯¬ .(~) in place of -·~. This ending is generally seen as
forceful and masculine in tone.
¹´~¯º-.¯¬.~! Well, well – so Tae-U’s come!
¹´~¯~`-¯¬.~! Well, well – here comes Tae-U!
¹´~¯~¯.¯¬.~! Well, well - Tae-U will be coming!
~`-.¹ .~`-¹.¯¬.~! It’s really hot today!
The extent to which you use these verb endings will depend on the extent to which you feel
comfortable in using them. For our purpose, we’re introducing them here to help your listening skills,
rather than suggesting that you use them actively yourself.
c G. Shin 2005 121
º20 ¯.
8 Some Useful Expressions
^.·*¹., ... The reason is that ...
¹´.´-... In fact, ...
·ª-.´¬.·¹... For example, ...
¯.z¢··... That’s not it./That’s not the point.
·, ¹¢~. Yes, that’s right.
·, ¯.÷.- ´ ¢·~. Yes, it seems to be that way.
¹.÷.¹¯.²¯`-´¢~. Not necessarily so.
··¯¯¢´~¨... For various reasons ...
·`.¯¹.¢· ~? Which one do you mean?
'-* especially
¯-¹... By any chance ...
¨-·¨-·¯÷... Whatever one says [about it] ...
9 Cultural Notes: Korea’s Climate
In this Unit we learn some ways of talking about weather and climate, so if you’re not very familiar
with Korea’s climate the following notes may be of interest.
There is relatively little internal variation in Korea’s climate, and so while our description applies
specifically to Seoul, it applies to all the significant population centres on the Peninsula as well.
Korea has a temperate climate, marked by hot, humid summers and long, cold winters. It is also a
continental climate, with the majority of its weather patterns the result of slow, stable development over
continental North Asia. The day-to-day variation in weather patterns that most Australians, especially
those who live on the east coast, are subject to is by and large absent from Korea’s weather.
Running through the calendar year, the New Year finds Korea in the depth of winter. By and large
the winter climate is clear and sunny with occasional snow, but although much of Korea is on the same
latitude as the Mediterranean Sea, the winters are, by Australian standards, quite cold. This is mainly
due to the continental climate pattern which brings in masses of cold air from west and north of the
peninsula. Average temperature ranges for January would be about minus five to one or two degrees,
and when the wind is from the north the chill factor can take the temperature down to minus twenty and
further.
There is little real change in this pattern until March, when things begin to warm up, although cold
snaps can still occur in late March. These snaps can often kill spring buds, and so are called ‘the cold
that envies the flowers’ - ¨·¹.¯~´-. In April the weather warms up rapidly, and by May the daily
temperature range is about fifteen to twenty-five degrees.
By late May the daily temperature is quite high, and for the next two months conditions remain hot
and humid - low thirties in the day, mid twenties at night, with little in the way of relief, day or night.
This is part of the build-up to the annual rainy season that usually lasts for three weeks or so, spread
over June and July. After another burst of heat, temperatures begin to fall in mid September and the
humidity subsides.
The height of autumn lasts from mid September to the beginning of November, and is generally
regarded as the finest time of the year, with cool, fine, crisp days and mild nights. Winter weather then
begins to appear in November, and snow showers can occur from mid November onwards. By
December winter has set in and sub-zero temperatures are regular.
122 c G. Shin 2005

õ ¼ q -i-e-yo. Here are some notes. First, with names that end in an r sound, eg Barber, Miller, Taylor, etc, Koreans don’t pronounce the final r. These names are then seen to end in a vowel sound within the Korean sound system. This is why Kylie Walker in the picture chooses -ye-yo and says: Ka-il-li wo-keo-ye-yo (not Ka-il-li wo-keor-i-e-yo). What happens if your name ends in an l sound? You will use -i-e-yo since your name ends in a consonant, but the final l sound in your name will be changed to r. Suppose your name is Debbie Bell. You will then introduce yourself in Korean: De-bi ber-i-e-yo (not De-bi bel-i-e-yo). When reading foreign names that end in a consonant sound such as p, b, t, d, k and g (linguists call them non-nasal stops), Koreans generally add a schwa-like vowel sound, represented here as eu, to the final consonant. Names such as Hart and Hind will be pronounced as Ha-teu and Ha-in-deu in Korean, which of course means that they are to be treated as names ending in a vowel. Thus, we say: Ha-teu-ye-yo and Ha-in-deu-ye-yo (not Hat-i-e-yo for instance). The same goes for names ending in s, f, th and their voiced counterparts (linguists call all these fricative sounds). If your name is Harris, you will say: Hae-ri-seu-ye-yo. With names such as Bush, Dash and George (the final consonant of each is called a palato-alveolar sound), Koreans add the vowel i at the end. Thus if your name is George, you will say: Jo-ji-ye-yo. Ask your instructor, if your name is outside these notes. Pleased to meet you. When we meet people for the first time, we can also say: Ban-gap-sseum-ni-da (Pleased to meet you). The literal meaning is I’m pleased. Here the reason why you are pleased (ie to meet you) is implied. The usual reply would be to say ne (yes) and echo the expression: Ne, ban-gap-sseum-ni-da (Pleased to meet you, too), which means Yes, and I’m pleased too. Welcome. Come in. You’re now visiting a Korean family. Upon arrival, you’ll be greeted by the family with an expression such as: Eo-seo o-se-yo (Welcome). Here the literal meaning is Come (in) quickly. This may sound pushy, but it is an indication that your host and hostess are so happy to see you that they want you to come in without delay. Another common welcome is: Deur-eo-o-se-yo (Come in).
TX ¦V§ #" x;x. Eo-seo o-se-yo. Š ÷T¦V§ ¤#x;x. Deur-eo-o-se-yo. PÜ ´ÄV§ q€ ;x? An-nyeong-ha-se-yo?

‡TŒ ´ë† o¡B. Ban-gap-sseum-ni-da.

3 ´ë† 6, o¡B. ‡TŒ Ne, ban-gap-sseum-ni-da.

c G Shin 2006

3

=1» V Î Good-bye. See you again. When someone is leaving, we say: An-nyeong-hi ga-se-yo (Good-bye: literally, Please go in peace). But if it is we who are leaving, we say: An-nyeong-hi gye-se-yo (Good-bye: literally, Please stay in peace) to whoever is staying behind. We can of course add: Tto man-na-yo (See you again: literally, We meet again).
PÜ ´Ä V§ q€ 5;x. An-nyeong-hi gye-se-yo.

3 ´Ä V§ 6, q€ ;x. PÜ ¦ ´§ € nx. P Ne, an-nyeong-hi ga-se-yo. Tto man-na-yo.

Sorry I’m late. For minor indiscretions, we usually say: Mi-an-ham-ni-da (I’m sorry: PÜ ´ÄV§ †TX ´‹ q€ ;x? =#" q".  P® An-nyeong-ha-se-yo? literally, I’m upsetting things). Neuj-eo-seo mi-an-ham-ni-da. To respond, we say: Gwaen-chan-a-yo (It’s OK). ¬ª s˜§ FˆV§ Æ"x. :x;x. ` S ® F‹ 3". To show our appreciation, Gwaen-chan-a-yo. Gam-sa-ham-ni-da. Anj-eu-se-yo. we say: Gam-sa-ham-ni-da or Go-map-sseum-ni-da (Thank you: literally, I’m grateful). The two expressions are interchangeable. It might be useful at this stage to know how to apologise to your teacher for being moderately late to Korean language class. This is not to encourage you to be late! But if you happen to be late, say: Neuj-eo-seo mi-an-ham-ni-da (Sorry I’m late). Here, Neuj- means being late, and -eo-seo because. In the picture, upon the student’s apology, the friendly Korean teacher says It’s OK, and offers a seat by saying: Anj-eu-se-yo (Take a seat). The student then says Thank you. It is part of Western etiquette to acknowledge even minor services, such as the dispensing of tickets or even the giving back of change, with a brief Thank you or equivalent. By contrast in Korea, expressions of this type are not used as often. They are usually reserved for acts of individual thoughtfulness, rather than actions performed as part of one’s job. c G Shin 2006

4

t and k sounds in s clusters are tensed consonants – such as spot. no script can ever fully describe the actual sounds of any given language. phonetic script called Hangeul. or RRK. when you say: Ban-gap-sseum-ni-da. pp. This works well. This is because the way words are spelt in English does not reflect the way they are actually pronounced. RRK romanises the  letter as d when it is followed by a vowel. Korean is written in its own very simple. b. however please note the following points.õ ¼ q 2 Romanisation As you probably already know. 3 RRK and pronunciation Generally speaking. respectively. as a transitory means. if you are not clear what tensed pronunciation entails. We shall look at pronunciation more closely in subsequent lessons. many street signs in Korea are given not just in Hangeul but also in the Roman Alphabet. while Hangeul renders the sounds of Korean in a remarkably accurate way. Ask your instructor for a demonstration. dare. Thus. developed in 2000 by the National Academy of the Korean Language in the Republic of Korea. Currently. quick flap of the tongue against the alveolar ridge – the inward projection of the gums between the upper teeth and the hard palate. As briefly mentioned above. you should not read it in the same way of naming the English letter c but as she. The process of writing Hangeul in the Roman alphabet is known as romanisation. Notes for Consonants In the list below all the Korean consonants are given in Korean alphabetical order. that is. For example. Thus. All the consonants appearing in RRK are basically the same as in English. and as t elsewhere. note that Korean r is a ‘flap’ r. Another warning is that. and it is the RRK that is predominantly adopted here. when you read si. However. There are a few romanisation systems available. you should know r is produced by a single. Although replacing r with English r does not bring about a meaning change. c G Shin 2006 5 . indicates tensed pronunciation. stop and sky. jj or kk. For instance. A doubled consonant. as we explain below in more detail. ss. it is not used for any other sounds which the letter a may represent in English. you should pronounce the underlined d as t. dame and dam is pronounced differently in each case. Also. for instance. the Hangeul letter  is pronounced as d when it occurs between two voiced sounds. This is a situation where the  letter is romanised as d but is pronounced as t. t. the letter a is consistently used to represent the English a sound as in arm. Romanisation is a convention whereby we standardise pronunciation by assigning constant values to each letter. k and ch. the p. tt. However. and t when it is followed by another consonant or when it forms the final sound of a word. but the one that we follow here is ‘The Revised Romanization of Korean’. and thus pronunciation should not be a serious problem. Ask your instructor. the sounds of Korean will be familiar to the English speaker. Within RRK. except when they occur sentence-initially. For example. except when the  letter occurs sentence-initially and is followed by a vowel. and ingenious. s and ss in RRK shall be pronounced respectively as sh and ‘tensed’ sh (ie sh with a stronger hiss) if they are followed by i or y. By convention. you should pronounce the underlined d as d. the a in arm. Korean expressions in the first lesson have been written in the English alphabet. you should not take romanisation to be the same as spelling in English. In English tensed consonants do not constitute separate sound categories for distinguishing between words. In this case they are pronounced as p. but when you say: Deur-eo-o-se-yo. g and j are pronounced the same as in English. d. but tensed consonants do exist.

6 c G Shin 2006 . We suggest you treat the equivalents as a preliminary guide only. u is a high. In order to develop accurate pronunciation. in the spoken language. Note also that the distinction between oe and we is not obvious in standard spoken Korean. The list is in Korean alphabetical order. For example. Next is a common figure used by linguists and language teachers to demonstrate this. it is a high. The marked zones indicate the relative positions of the highest point of the tongue when a speaker is properly pronouncing the single Korean vowels indicated. front vowel – the point at which articulation occurs is high up and in the front of the mouth. But note that.=1» V Î Consonants g kk n d tt r/l m b pp s ss ng j jj ch k t p h a ae ya yae eo e yeo ye o wa wae oe yo u wo we wi yu eu ui i Vowels as in part as in cable as in yard as in yabby as in pot as in pet as in yonder as in yet as in port as in wonder as in wag as in wet as in your as in do as in wobble as in wet as in weeds as in few as in urn Say Ernie without the n (and without moving the lips) as in feet as in sky as in stop as in spot as in sing Notes for Vowels In the list above all the Korean vowels are given with approximate Australian English equivalents. Some of these eight vowel sounds combine with either w or y (the semi-vowels) to form composite sounds. It is a cutaway side view of the mouth. when you pronounce i. Some people find it easier to relate to vowels if they know the approximate point of articulation in the mouth. There are a total of twenty-one different vowel symbols in Hangeul. pay close attention to your instructor and to the language tapes or CDs that accompany this course. back vowel. On the other hand. only eight vowel sounds occur.

Read.. Koreans use punctuation marks.. Try (it). ¾ûÁ ¥N M4 . Da gach-i .. 3 W 6.. Once again ...’.x.... (Strictly speaking. Sseu-se-yo. eg An-nyeong-ha-se-yo?. It can be inserted.x.. Jal ha-syeoss-eo-yo. I don’t get it.. 7 c G Shin 2006 . You’re welcome. All these are reflected in the Romanisation system.§ © ¤xVx.ÃB.. § x. Å NTTî#§ :#!ÞTx. Tta-ra ha-se-yo. Repeat.x. when you practise reading.’... ë utÃ#x. A-ni-yo. Listen closely. Ð óˆV§ ¨x. Once more .x. They’re not intended for you to learn by heart in this unit (some of them we study more closely in Unit 7). Ij-eo-beo-ryeoss-eo-yo. no space is given between the stem and suffixes and between the noun and particles. Thus.  V§  .. and ‘?’. Cheon-man-e-yo. No.. ‘-’. jal mo-reu-gess-eo-yo. Da-si han beon . ‘. such as ‘. Àˆ Ì óë óT§ ©s ¨#x? %T§ Ã#x? Ì 3 ë%T§ 6. In RRK the usage of the dash symbol is somewhat arbitrary. Seon-saeng-nim ../Ye. ‡õ R Ì ë îT§ © Þ#x. eg a word. A-ni-yo. Mr/Ms .. All together .õ ¼ q More Notes The dash symbol. © Ì  ¦V§ B v.. (Note that suffixes or particles such as case markers are all attached to the stem or the noun concerned in Korean. å̌ õP Ö´V§ n<x.  ë  ¡ .) Broadly stated.. . . õõ ÖÖ  . Any questions? Do you get it? Yes. They also use a space as you do in English after an independent expression..) 4 More expressions Here are some more Insa expressions and some classroom instructions you may hear your instructor using. Write (it). ¦ %† € . (Your Name) +   RŠ ë ÷ˆ. Z  ´   w ½ . for example. that is./<. No. Yes. but their use can help to give a more Korean ‘feel’ to classroom procedure... ¨Ã#x.. Ì Hope to see you again.. Ne. Hae bo-se-yo. al-gess-eo-yo. in the romanisation stands for what we loosely call syllable boundary within an independent expression. Ilg-eu-se-yo. I’ve forgotten. where there is the possibility of confusion in pronunciation. ˆV§ ¤.. Well done! (Please speak) slowly. + ssi Jal deur-eu-se-yo. this is not part of RRK conventions.. Jil-mun iss-eo-yo? A-si-gess-eo-yo? Ne. Cheon-cheon-hi . . We will study this part of grammar in more detail later in the course. the rhythmic structure of a Korean sentence is such that you can take one syllable to have one beat. RÌ § R ¦ˆ%T§ x... Tto bwoep-gess-sseum-ni-da. it might be an idea to clap five times while saying the whole sentence.. in very much the same way as you do in English. Teacher. I get it.

and that most people find it easy to learn and interesting to use.. Look at the examples of countries’ names written in Hangeul and see if you can read them using the guide below. they did so in alphabetical order – Korean alphabetical order.  u   s f b  g. as you go through this unit.. • Reading and writing Hangeul • More about pronunciation H ANGEUL – THE KOREAN A LPHABET When you finish studying the next two units you should know how to read and write words using Hangeul – slowly at first. Meanwhile. k n i b. always remember that Hangeul is a highly consistent. p r. 1 Hangeul: Introduction One of the most exciting and important events in modern Korean history was the 1988 Seoul Olympics. but getting faster and more accurate all the time. When the 150 countries in the 1988 Seoul Olympics marched into the Olympic Stadium for the opening ceremony.=2» V Î 2 w¢ (1) ‡W ´í I N THIS U NIT . l eu s e ae h a  . phonetic script.

¦ˆˆRó xw|8¨ AUSTRALIA À (O-seu-teu-re-il-li-a)  ? CANADA (Kae-na-da) ó*ˆ ¨?s THAILAND Àõ ÁŽ ßÚ IF CHINESE HONG KONG (Hong-kong) 8 c G Shin 2006 (Ta-il-laen-deu) . however. n i    a [ ]. ng m j u o t k d. When written at the end of a syllable. t  GHANA  (Ga-na)  GUYANA  (Ga-i-a-na) S F 3 THE GAMBIA (Gam-bi-a)   NIGERIA (Na-i-ji-ri-a) ­ Œ ROMANIA (Ru-ma-ni-a) ˆó v© BRAZIL À (Beu-ra-jil) Note that when written at the beginning of a syllable. is a ‘dummy’ – it has no phonetic value at all. it is pronounced ‘ng’.

Yet another characteristic of Hangeul almost too obvious to be worth pointing out is that it transcribes the Korean language. individually-spaced letters as in English. but this is not always the case. clusters of consonants are made to look and sound ‘less foreign’ by inserting the vowel eu between consonants. look at the examples of Guyana and Nigeria. Hangeul was originally devised to complement the use of Chinese characters.reil. If a syllable has no initial consonant then we indicate that by inserting an initial zero consonant. and str. Although it has only two letters. the Korean word for child is a-i. For example.        Gaiana           Naijiria The reason for this is again related to the fact that Hangeul is written in syllables. read the Cultural Notes on Page 13. both front and rear consonants are present. if we were to write Hong Kong in Hangeul letters but according to ÁŽ ßÚ the conventions of written English. Secondly.lia c G Shin 2006 9 .  If you are not clear at this stage on the terminology consonant. the letter indicates this.and so on.becomes seu-teu-r. If you want to know more about this. For example. One particular point of difference is that the Korean language doesn’t have many clusters of consonants.becomes seu-t-. note from the examples at the beginning of this unit that where there is no initial consonant. and in Chinese a single character represented a single syllable. not in single. o o ng ng The shaping of Hangeul was influenced by culture as well as linguistics. and so the word is written in two syllables. In this process st. Look again at the example of Hong Kong. For example. both are vowels. each Hangeul syllable consists of a vowel with optional surrounding consonants. vowel. whereas in the Hangeul system it is actually written: IF. Both syllables have a central vowel. Front Consonant 1st Syllable 2nd Syllable H K Vowel o o Rear Consonant ng ng In this case.‡W ´í w¢ (1) Looking at these examples can tell us a lot about the way Hangeul is written. notice how it is written in syllables. and syllable. Front Consonant 1st Syllable 2nd Syllable – – Vowel a i Rear Consonant – – Thirdly. if we were to write Chinese Hong Kong according to the individually-spaced letter style of the English alphabet. with front and rear consonants. So the Hangeul characters were not written in their individual spaces. and so when it transcribes foreign sounds it transcribes them as the Korean ear hears them. On the other hand. some vowel sounds might appear different from those that the native English speaker might expect. how Australia is written in Hangeul. Thus when we write the Korean word for child (a-i) it comes out as: . it might be wise to stop and consult a suitable reference book. Firstly. Note. it would look like this: H K . it would look like: i i (Hong Kong). Thus. for example. in a foreign-language transcriptions. Thus in the examples above. but were grouped in syllables. ¦ ˆ x w Oseu- ˆ R ó   | 8 ¨   À teu.

d (yae) and h (ye): the distinction between d and h is likewise being lost in standard spoken Korean. k (wae). depending on context. l and p. b (ae) and f (e): the distinction between b and f is being lost in standard spoken Korean. standard spoken Korean does not normally distinguish between k. i or e. 1. We have learnt already (see Page 6) that the distinction between l (oe) and p (we) does not obtain in standard spoken Korean. Note the following points on pronunciation. 4. Check the romanisation pronunciation given in Unit 1 (see Page 6). 10 c G Shin 2006 . 2. It might be helpful to use a squared paper – such as graph paper. We’ll learn more about this in a later unit.=2» V Î 2 Writing Hangeul The vowels For most people the easiest way to learn Hangeul is through practice in writing while reading aloud. 3. t (ui) can be pronounced ui. l (oe) and p (we): as a result of loss of distinction between b and f. The table below shows the prescribed stroke order for writing all the Hangeul vowels. listed in Korean alphabetical order.

‡W ´í w¢ (1) The consonants The nineteen consonants are shown below with their stroke order. Note that .

, and  can also be written as

, and . In this case their prescribed stroke order will be as follows.

Writing Hangeul in syllables Each Hangeul vowel letter consists of a basic long vertical or horizontal stroke, from which other shorter strokes are drawn. On the basis of their shapes, we can group all the Hangeul vowel letters into three groups as follows. The grouping is important because when consonant and vowel letters are placed together to form a Hangeul syllable, their vertical u a e b f c g d h proportions within the writing square vary according to the horizontal s i n m r shape of the vowel. The basic principle is this: a Hangeul mixed t l j k q o p syllable always begins with a consonant letter. When the vowel in the given syllable is vertical, it is written to the right of the syllable-initial consonant, and when it is horizontal, it is written below the consonant. If the vowel is a mixed one, it is written in such a way as to fit under and to the right of the consonant. It is important to observe this principle, otherwise your writing could appear very unnatural and difficult to read. Let us look at some examples. c G Shin 2006 11

=2» V Î Vertical Vowel Further Examples: Example: a-(i) = child 


si 

ha

V ;
se

W <
ye

X "
seo 

hi

Horizontal Vowel Example: O-(seu-teu-re-il-li-a) = Australia

Further Examples:

§ x
yo

¦ €
tto

ˆ x
eu

­ 
u

¬ t
ryo

¶ –
hyu

Mixed Vowel Example: Gwa-(il) = fruits

Further Examples: 

ö
wo

Ô Â
ui 

Û
swae

í ñ
dwi

ê ó
mwo

Ñ
gwe

A Hangeul syllable can have up to two consonants after the vowel. The position for the syllable-final consonant(s) is the lower portion of the writing-square, below the combination of the syllable-initial consonant and the vowel. Here are some examples. Vertical with a Final Consonant Example: Han-(geul) Further Examples:

õ ¼ q
in

V F 9
sang

‡ ´ o
ban

T ë ¡
gap

` F :
anj

˜  ª
chanh

Horizontal with a Final Consonant Example: (Han)-geul

Further Examples:

Š ÷ ¤

 † =

Œ † B

© Š 
ol

ˆ ó w
jon

ˆ Ù u
seun

deul neuj seup

Mixed with a Final Consonant Example: Gwaen-(cha-na-yo) = It’s OK.

Further Examples:

D • '
gwal

¬ o c
oen

® š )

¬  

¬ F Q
wen

á  H
win

doel gwon

12

c G Shin 2006

as far as modern scholars can tell. But. they could at least be helped to understand them when heard. Hangeul came into its own as a very effective instrument of modern mass literacy. Chinese characters needed to be complemented because there were areas where they were ineffective – the most important of these being the simple and accurate representation of the sounds of the Korean language: native Korean place names. Hangeul is essentially phonetic. Interestingly. while the traditional Korean social order survived (with its systems of education and government so firmly founded on Neo-Confucian principles). simple to master and innately appealing in its ingenious simplicity. the script was simply written. etc. There is really no substitution for being able to read the Hangeul script itself. This was why when Hangeul was first unveiled in 1446 after many years of study and deliberation it was called not ‘Han-geul’ (which is a modern name) but ‘Hun-min-jeong-eum’ – Correct Sounds for the Instruction of the People. Hangeul was barely used. Understanding why something was designed helps us understand how it actually works. of course. although a number of systems of Hangeul romanisation exist. are surprisingly identical to those first developed under Sejong. and unambiguously. But for reasons that are still not entirely clear. the acquisition of Chinese character literacy was not open to all. simple and well conceived that they could be adapted readily to modern needs. for language students they are only really useful as transitory aids. By now the Korean language contained many Chinese words with Koreanised pronunciation. evolved a good deal over a time span of five hundred years. onomatopoeia. Chinese writing possessed immense prestige as the instrument of a sophisticated system of government. what has arrested the attention of countless scholars since then is the astounding ease with which this simplicity is capable of rendering clearly. or even to many. makes transcription of Korean into European alphabet letters superfluous. however. law and administration was full of these words. and students are strongly encouraged to devote attention to this from the outset. a simple and effective means of writing Korean. these areas had been represented by an elaborate tradition of using Chinese characters for their phonetic values. this system had largely fallen into disuse by Sejong’s time. and had been adopted and adapted from China over hundreds of years: to abandon it would have been unthinkable. very consistent. something as intricate as the sound system of the Korean language. This resulted in people without an inability to read Chinese being beyond the effective reach of government.‡W ´í w¢ (1) 3 Cultural Notes: Hangeul The Korean alphabet is known as Hangeul (literally: Korean Writing). and is also important for understanding its principles. Language used in government. For students of Korean. grasp their meaning. In support of this purpose. Hangeul was designed. and song transcriptions. However. almost completely phonetic. not to replace Chinese characters but to complement them. Moreover. both in the Republic of Korea and in the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea. and easy to remember. The Korean language had. Thus. the existence of Hangeul. Hangeul was first developed early in the 15th century under the active guidance of King Sejong (reigned 1418–1450). upon pronouncing them. as the old order fell into final decay late last century and a strong push for modernisation began. In fact the Hangeul symbols in use today. For many centuries. If people could not be taught to read and write Chinese characters. personal names. c G Shin 2006 13 . but the principles of Hangeul were so clear. This was at a time when the written language of Korea was Chinese. if a simple phonetic script to represent Chinese characters could be developed. The background to its invention is in itself an interesting story. Thus it was an important function of Hangeul to give people who were illiterate in Chinese a simple phonetic script with which they could pronounce words and.

• More about Hangeul • More about pronunciation H ANGEUL – THE KOREAN A LPHABET Let us continue studying Hangeul.=3» V Î 3 w¢ (2) ‡W ´í I N THIS U NIT . Vowels Names    <    < T # V < U # W < ¦ x    Ü   § x ­   ö ë   ö ®  ˆ x Ô Â   a ae ya yae eo e yeo ye o wa wae oe yo u wo we wi yu eu ui i Consonants ß ½ î Names gi-yeok ssang-gi-yeok ni-eun di-geut ssang-di-geut ri-eul mi-eum bi-eup ssang-bi-eup si-ot ssang-si-ot i-eung ji-eut ssang-ji-eut chi-eut ki-euk ti-eut pi-eup hi-eut c G Shin 2006         .. as currently standardised in the Republic of Korea. 1 Korean alphabetical order and names of Hangeul letters Alphabetical order for consonants and vowels. is as shown in the following boxes.. and some of the very basic pronunciation rules. In this unit we learn the alphabetical order of Hangeul letters and their individual names.

     14 V ½ F î Dß Þ v ˆ S < V V V FS D< ÷ © Š ¹ C ‹ ¹ C Œ V Œ F¹ DC ø v À V À Fø Dv ¹ C Ž ¹ C  V  F¹ DC ÷ ©  ¹ C ‘ ÷ © ’ ¹ .

C “ ÷ © ” a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u .

. These compounds are of course themselves presented in alphabetical order. the prefix D. For tensed consonants.. i.  O F O F then j.e.(ssang-: double) is added to the respective normal consonant. The vowels V F are referred to as the individual sound they represent. . . .compounds. followed by all the 3. i. followed by all the compounds whose first syllable is .and so on. and .‡W ´í w¢ (2) To refer to the consonants themselves. use the names provided in the box below. sufficiently). .. and . P ´ The tensed consonants. The next entry would be 3. are placed at the conclusion of the respective normal consonant entries. for  ( ©) is alphabetically the last consonant and u  ÷ ” () is alphabetically the last vowel. and so the final entry under  in a standard concise dictionary would be  (fully.e. Alphabetical order is followed letter by letter in units of one syllable. Thus the first entry in a Korean dictionary is . .

In dictionaries. words which begin with vowels are ordered under ‘zero-initial’ consonant (C). .entries. ¹ Ž and thus before .entries and precede . That is.entries follow the entire ..

V F 3  ¬  ‡„ µq > O F 8 < O [ Ž ‚ B Á í ß E á  Á N : ¨ ‘ ­ ’ â õ   5 À ó ¡ ® Œ ‡ ´ o X " Ž † B U #  ö V F . ¹  V À Fø Some examples Consider the following list of Korean family names as an example of Korean alphabetical order in action. (C) and after (Dv).   O F > Á ß I „ q Á N 3 û  K V F 8 ¾ ¥  ¾ ¼ p õ ¾  ®  õ ½  õ ¼ r õ ¾  } C 4 [ O <   Ä î Ü  : ¾ ¥ ­ Á N 9 Á î ß ˆ ì v Ä í à   A : ' S F 4 ˆ ë s  L ô Ä ¶ Þ P ´ q ¦ x ‹ ¹ C V =  > ‡ ´ w † ‰ œ r   õ ¾  œ w V G : ‡ µ C   Vë =¡ R õ Ö  Š } @ < [ Q ¦ s n ¾ ¼   u ˆ ó # T  ­ õ ¼ q y ¦ % Ä ) d c G Shin 2006 15 . If you picked up a Korean telephone book. the names would be in this order.

 is pronounced as l. ò F keul-leop club c G Shin 2006 ÷ *R ª8 Chil-le Chile R ëR ¥8 Mal-le-i-si-a Malaysia . or dummy. romanised as ss) ø À V À Fø are pronounced respectively as sh and ‘tensed’ sh when they occur in front of the vowel i. 8p Ró ˆ Re-ba-non Lebanon ´ m ‡ I-ran Iran ˆˆ ss Ma-deu-ri-deu Madrid ÷Ä 4N Ð9 Hel-sing-ki Helsinki 3R 6ë ­ Ne-pal Nepal When the syllable-final  (©) is followed by another . listen and practise. ‘retroflex’ l. Listen to the language tapes or CDs and practise reading the following examples. ‘flap’ r ÷ Š (see Page 5). except that your tongue tip should be placed on the hard palate. ˆ ¦ˆ <ø ¦Oˆ s xw Vv u"w ˆ Si-deu-ni Sydney The letter (C) ¹ Ž o-a-si-seu Oasis Si-e-ra-ri-on Sierra Leon Mo-ri-syeo-seu Mauritius RÙ 9u ˆ Me-i-seun-ssi Mr Mason The (C) letter doubles as a silent. Now. the two s shall be pronounced as retroflex l. and study more points on reading syllable-final consonants. ÷ 1Rõ Î8 ½ tel-le-bi-jeon television 16 À¾ óÙ ­? pil-leum film Š. listen and practise. mostly as to how we pronounce vowels and syllable-initial consonants. not at the back of the upper teeth. Now. wherever possible. romanised as s) and (Dv. that is. ­ˆÎ t» U-reu-gwa-i Uruguay The letter  (©) ÷ Š ¦R xA o-pe-ra Opera Ä ¦ˆ N}t 9 Sing-ga-po-reu Singapore A Ž µ Ga-bong Gabon ˆF w6 V Seu-ri-rang-ka Sri Lanka When  (©) occurs as the syllable-initial consonant it is pronounced as r. Now. listen and practise. country/city names around the world and common English loan words. or a ‘y-combined’ vowel (see Page 5). when you have two s between ÷ Š two vowels. (v. If it occurs as the syllable-final consonant. which should not be regarded as foreign words but rather as Korean words of foreign origin. You produce a retroflex l sound in the same manner as you do an l. however. For our reading practice. consonant when it is the initial consonant in a ¹ Ž syllable. we draw examples from. more precisely. and ng when it is the final consonant in a syllable (see Page 8). The letters and Despite the romanisation convention. more precisely.=3» V Î 2 Reading Hangeul In the first two units we made a few important points about Korean pronunciation. Let us review them.

tensed and aspirated consonants Recall that. (ß). despite the romanisation convention.  ½ î S V Normal Tensed Aspirated (C) and .‡W ´í w¢ (2) Normal.  (<).

form series of three in Korean. t. t. tensed and aspirated dal ttal tal (more precisely. geun kkeu keun In fact. moon daughter mask while s also has both normal and tensed forms. The normal series are . in which they have normal (more precisely. partially aspirated). (C) are pronounced ¹ Œ ¹  respectively as k. p and ch when they occur sentence-initially (see Page 5). these four consonants. p root string big and ch. heavily aspirated) forms. . ie k. . .

 (. bul ppul pul and (v). V ½ F î V V FS V Œ F¹ V  F¹  (DC).  (D<). and the aspirated series as  V À Fø ja-yo jja-yo cha-yo ( C).  ( ©). while the tensed series are ø À fire horn grass represented as  (Dß). (DC) and (Dv).

Notice in particular that normal forms.” “It’s cold. listen and practice reading the country/city names below. Listen and practise “I buy. ie . .” ( ©). ÷  The distinction is to be made clearly when these consonants occur sa-yo ssa-yo syllable-initially.” “It’s cheap. Now. The focus here is on the distinction between normal and aspirated forms.” reading the Korean words in the table on the right.C) and  ¹ ‘ ÷ ’ ¹ “ “I sleep.” “It’s salty.  and .

By contrast. are pronounced as romanised – g. ie . tensed forms. respectively – when occurring after a voiced sound. ie . . and . are not used in representing foreign loan words in Hangeul. is constant. . d.. b and j. eg a vowel. . pronunciation of aspirated forms.  and . (Incidentally.) U ¹ o R ë £ Š  § U ¹ } R ë ° Š  ² ˆ Ù y R ë ¬ ½  ® § x § x § x § x x §   Ga-na Ghana ˆ t Ka-ta-reu Qatar Ž ڄ Fq Kong-go Congo ¦¯ u{ Mo-na-ko Monaco H÷¼ §m Šõ Deo-beul-lin Dublin N ' Teo-ki Turkey  ? Kae-na-da Canada Š  ¦ Mol-ta Malta ˆó v© À Beu-ra-jil Brazil ˆ6ˆ }Fw V Peu-rang-seu France Š ˆ ¦v Mol-di-beu Maldives ˆ«w }tˆ Ki-peu-ro-seu Kypros R 9 Ja-me-i-ka Jamaica s ˆ Cha-deu Chad c G Shin 2006  .

 Pi-ji Fiji S F¨ =•  Kam-pu-chi-a Kampuchea 17 .

 (Dß) and  ( C) are all ½ î V ½ F î ¹ ‘ pronounced as unexploded k. (ß). and  (C) and  (.  (<) and  ( ©). Likewise.=3» V Î Unexploded consonants When occurring in the syllable-final position.

and “the cat pulled .. You will find that the underlined k (represented as c). p and t sounds are not exploded as in.”.C). (Note that  (D<) and  (DC) do not occur as a syllable-final consonant in modern Korean. Now. opt. listen to the tapes or CDs and practise reading the following words..) V V FS V Œ F¹ If you are not sure of unexploded sounds. say act. back. ß ½ î gi-yeok Name of ] ë ¦ bak outside ¹ C ‘ ki-euk Name of  S < V di-geut Name of  ÷ © ’ ti-eut Name of  ¹ C Œ bi-eup Name of  “ . are to S V ÷ ’ ¹ Œ ¹ “ be pronounced respectively as unexploded t and unexploded p in the syllable-final position. top and cat. for example.

(Dv). .¹ C pi-eup Name of  Also. the letters (v).

 ( ©) and  ( ©) are all pronounced as ø À V À Fø ¹  ÷  ÷ ” unexploded t when they occur in the syllable-final position. listen and practise. ø v À si-ot Name of Ì  2 eot Past-tense marker ¹ C  ji-eut Name of . (C). (Note that (DC) does not occur as a V  F¹ syllable-final consonant in modern Korean.) Now.

ƒ NN H  ©6? ½ ŠÁ½ nek-ta-i necktie ol-lim-pik olympics ôõ ˆ N¾w aek-syeon-seu-ta action star ‡ õ µˆ¼ >|m dok-teu-rin doctrine ˆ½õ óN p?¾ non-pik-syeon non-fiction Â ó ¬ tip tip  ó © jip-si gypsy RˆÂ 9¡ 2 me-i-keu-eop make-up TŽ ë‚ ­B pap-song pop(ular) song H ó § ri-deo-sip leadership °  ú Ti-bet Tibet «ø tt À ro-bot robot ˆà ¡ µ keu-ri-ket cricket  µ à ra-ket racket ¦ s à do-neot doughnut The vowels f and b The distinction between these vowels is being lost in standard spoken Korean (see Page 10). p and t. It would be useful to know that when writing a foreign loan word in Hangeul. (v) – not  (<).  and are pronounced as unexploded k. respectively. nor  ( ©) – appears to be the most preferred letter for a syllable-final t ø À S V ÷ ’ sound (for an unclear reason). In the examples below the underlined . ÷ ©  chi-eut Name of  ÷ © ” hi-eut Name of  Let’s continue. 18 ôõ ¾ N aek-syeon action ô B ñˆd ™wõ ek-seu-maen X-man ¾ Áˆ ­¡ Den-ma-keu Denmark ¾ B b daen-di dandy c G Shin 2006 .

these variations are relatively slight. p. and in ? it is followed by a ±  vertical vowel: ± “ (Cuba)  ? (Canada).‡W ´í w¢ (2) The vowels l. Once your eye adjusts to them. as in English. Look at the different proportions of the  ( C) letter in the following two words. here are eight different fonts which give the characters different looks. and k The distinction between l (romanised as oe) and p (romanised as we) is not made in standard spoken Korean (see Pages 6 and 10). So why don’t Hangeul characters appear to be written the same way. Not only are there variations in individual handwriting. while others write across the page. Again. Others don’t use any. As an example of the latter. both of them are pronounced we as in wet in English. ±ˆ “ë| Ku-we-i-teu Kuwait Á Nˆ . For example.vë Jim-ba-beu-we Zimbabwe Š } < cham-oe yellow melon Fý Â9x S» oe-sam-chon maternal uncle x ܧ? wae-yo “Why?” 3 Some FAQs Are there several different Hangeul scripts? No. Also note there is another source of variation – that caused by the different inner proportions of the writing square. there is only one. it depends on the prevailing conventions. There are no separate sets of cursive. across the page. depending on the conventions of the particular field of writing. Listen and practise reading the following examples. Is Hangeul written down or across the page? Predominantly. the distinction between p and k is likewise being lost in standard spoken Korean. Despite the romanisation convention. Hangeul can be written down. In addition. they are never a source of confusion. Even so. ¹ ‘ This is because in “ the  is followed by a horizontal vowel.000 Chinese characters. Some South Koreans newspapers use upwards of 3. as a result of loss of distinction between f and b. However. some of the major South Korean magazines are written down the page. In North Korea Chinese characters are not used at all. but there are also print stylisations and different fonts. Is Hangeul written in conjunction with Chinese characters? Yes and no. c G Shin 2006 19 . lower and upper case letters.

“Annie”. In this unit we learn how to respond to such questions.  • # · · ·? (eo-di): Where . that is. ¨. • Telling people where you are going • Some basic verbs • Using the Polite Informal verb endings • More about pronunciation W HERE ARE YOU GOING ? When you run into friends or fellow students... ó }…V § À † ¾Ä ¥î ˆ§ ¦ }…V § ë § ß:  8x? s @q< x. also ¦ • ¡ (ga-chi): together. We suggest that in addressing your fellow students by name. Often. • @q (hak-gyo): school † }… • · · ·< (e): to V •  8x? (Geu-rae-yo?): Is that so? ˆ§ •  (na): I  • · · ·s (do): too. etc) unless they are very close friends. note that the  Z ë ( ©) in ¡ is not pronounced as t but ch.x. # x? À ¨: @q< x. usually indicates that no particular personal relationship exists with the person being addressed. you say hello. ¨: q€ .? T • x (ga-yo): go. a foreign student in Korea. † Z Translation Kylie: Seon-Yeong: Kylie: Seon-Yeong: Hi. Really? So am I. ÷ ’ Z ë Notes for Conversation • · · · (ssi): In Korean. or status referent. to someone’s name. Rather.. see § below. Don’t be surprised.  is a somewhat matter-of-fact title that  20 c G Shin 2006 .x?”. 1 Conversation Kylie. Kylie. The question is rarely meant to be inquisitive. “qÜ . ¾ß (Seon-Yeong). Let’s go together. It is simply asked after the initial greeting to indicate polite interest in someone’s doings. you will PÄ ´€V§ then notice you are asked where you are heading. and study a bit about using Korean verbs to describe a range of activities. ¡ x.=4» V Î 4 # x? T § I N THIS UNIT .. you likewise add . for further information.x? ó ´ÄV§ À PÜ ¾Ä qÄ ¥î P€V§ ó T § ß: ´Ü . it is part of Korean etiquette to add some sort of title. Hi. Where are you going? I’m going to school. but is simply part of a routine Insa in Korea. and so here ß adds  to Kylie’s ¾Ä ¥î  name. we almost never  address someone by just their name (“David”. has just met up with a Korean acquaintance. ¥Ä î in the street.

. T # x? § @q 7}… † † }… @q qó …§ À V À FÔó 3§ ¦"\ sXd B ƒ ..T § # x? 2 Where are you going? I am going to .

out of context. ie either of I. it can mean T § “Where do you/does she/do they go?” etc. ¦Xd< § s"\V x. whenever you see a subjectless sentence. she. I’m going to the city. Similarly. The word-on-word translation of the question # x? is in fact “Where go?”. Language & Culture Notes Where are you going? I’m going to school. but for the moment you can safely assume that. We deduce the subject from the context of the sentence. It may take a while for you to get familiar with this way of saying things.. he. I go/I’m going If we want to ask people where they are going we can say: T § # x? and to answer we can say: PLACE NAME . q§ means classroom. and. V § EXAMPLES T § # x? † }…V § @q< x.< x. • Although @q means school. it and they. the English counterpart of the ‘missing’ subject will always be a pronoun. it also identifies any educational establishment from a primary † }… school to a graduate school. referring to a classroom in any …ó À educational institution. B 1V § 6< x. c G Shin 2006 21 .B Œ ­ZQ >< T where do you go?/are you going? university school classroom lecture room (in university) library coffee shop post office ˆû Þ¸ vT Xí "à Á †û ½V } NF @M 95 †û } @M ½V NF 95 Â ó © 1 6 -< V x. and exactly what the pronoun is will be worked out from the context.. § bank bookshop student dining hall student dining hall. I’m going to the library. you. restaurant house. • A Korean sentence is complete without the overt grammatical subject. home downtown to .

not gyo-sil-e. For instance. The  is pronounced as if it occurs in the syllable-initial position of the next character (see Page 16.  ó according to the rule we learnt in the previous unit:  (C) is pronounced as unexploded p in the ¹ Œ syllable-final position (see Page 18). which we learn later in this Unit. when © is followed by a character which begins with  ó (C) as in ©< (to a house). the  is not pronounced as unexploded p but as b. Liaison is important because it can bring about sound changes. We thus say ji-be. not jip-e. it is indeed the source of many discrepancies between spelling and pronunciation. This is the prototypical example of the process which we call liaison. (However. Listen to the language tapes or CDs and practise reading the following examples.=4» V Î Pronunciation Notes: Liaison (1) When a Hangeul character has the syllable-final consonant and there is no syllable-initial consonant in the following character. that is. the syllable-final ¹ Ž consonant of the first character is pronounced as if it occurs in the syllable-initial position of the second character. q§< (to the classroom) is to be pronounced as …óV À gyo-si-re. there are further complications involving  …ó À (©). EXAMPLES Â ó © .) While q§ is pronounced as gyo-sil (the syllable-final  ÷ Š …ó À is pronounced as l. The same applies to q§ (classroom). It is pronounced ¹ Ž  óV as if it occurs in the syllable-initial position of the next character. However. and also Page 3). as explained in Page 16). © (house) is pronounced as jip. when the second character begins with (C).

B ƒ Œ ­>< ZQ T …ó q§ À VÔó F§ 3 À jip keo-pi-syop u-che-guk gyo-sil gang-ui-sil  óV ©< ƒV .

. theatre market Namdaemun Market bus terminal Gangnam Express Bus Terminal railway station (Seo-ul-yeok) Seoul Station airport Incheon International Airport 22 c G Shin 2006 .B< Œ =⇒ ji-be keo-pi-syo-be u-che-gu-ge gyo-si-re gang-ui-si-re to the house to the coffee shop to the post office to the classroom to the lecture room ­ZQV ><< T …óV q§< À V À FÔóV 3§< 3 More places where we go . V S ˆ V FëF 47s.. TˆNë !w'¢ R VS FFNë 34'¢ R ½ î ß Xî "©ß Š½ [ O} <@ õõ[ ¼ÖO} q<@ cinema. F . 5  ¦  x5 ©N (µ à ©N ( Äá îE Ý ‹½Á ¹Ní C9à ô*í Èà L Á À ô Á ýL*í r7LÈà < [á OE corner shop video shop supermarket corner shop hospital restaurant (bae-kwa-jeom) department store Lotte Department Store park TV SF <.

or Äá îE family doctors.  (b) or .  }… † ˆ ë • 34'¢ (Gangnam Bus Terminal) is Seoul’s only express bus terminal for buses to all parts VS FFNë R of Korea. • 47s. >.  (d).east. ie (g). ginseng. and refers to w3 V F ‡V ´F (han-gang: the Hangang River) which runs across Seoul. jewellery. the same 7. 47ë and >7s (Dong-dae-mun) refer to the ‘Great South S s Fˆ Ž ˆ µë Gate’ and the ‘Great East Gate’ in Seoul. are the places to go S ˆ V FëF Ž ˆ V µëF for bargains in Seoul: cheap clothing. (Namdaemun Market). and s gate. • q<@ (Incheon International Airport) is the major gateway to Korea. (Dongdaemun Market).great (see also Page 20. and so on and wonderful local food from street stalls. 4. Pronunciation Notes À ý7 • The letter in ( and rL is to be pronounced as unexploded t.appears in 7@q). It is both a subway station and the rail-transport X©î ½ hub for long-distance trains to most of Korea. Luggage can be stored in lockers for 24 hours.T § # x? Language & Culture Notes • (µ generally refers to a large Western-style supermarket. respectively. Here 3 literally means river.literally means south. ©Nà µ • Liaison (2): When a Hangeul character ending in a partially aspirated consonant. tents. Can you guess where Gangnam Bus Terminal might be located? • "Šß (Seoul Station) is in the centre of Seoul. Here. located 35 km õõ[ ¼ÖO} southwest of Seoul. • Ý indicates a hospital or clinic. silk. In Korea there is no widespread system of neighbourhood. and people tend to go to the hospital outpatients division to obtain prescription. S F Ž µ  7. as explained in Page 18. and >7s. while ( is the name many ©N à ©N small local shop keepers choose – a derived name from (µ (with perhaps the connotation ©Nà  of ‘Mini-Mart’). It can be reached easily by subway.

each of the twenty verb endings can be identified as Polite Informal Statement. ie where  occurs. Twenty may sound a lot. and so once you know one class of ending you can automatically use it with all the verb stems.  (p) or  (ch). ie ‘-’. the  is not pronounced as a separate sound. Thus. not as seo-u-ryeok. Polite Informal Question. are in their stem forms. which we call Polite Informal. informal. The verbs in the list below. c G Shin 2006 23 . x (yo) or   U § ® (yu). respectively. and in this Unit we learn to attach the endings in order to ask simple questions and make simple statements. or intimate way. resulting in a heavily aspirated sound. To use these stems we need to learn a number of endings. but we use these endings to express another kind of meaning as well: the speech ‘style’ (or level). It is worth observing at the outset that Korean verbs are extremely regular. formal. and so on. particularly when the syllable-final  (l) is followed by a vowel combined with the semi-vowel y. but is ‘blended’ with the preceding partially aspirated consonant. (The same is true when  (h) occurs as a syllable-final consonant and is followed by a partially aspirated consonant. The stem gives the meaning.  (t). ô Á *í • Liaison (3): Note that the  in "©ß (Seoul Station) is to be pronounced as l. and the ending shows what function the verb performs. Xî Š½ 4 Using Korean Verbs (1): the Polite Informal Style Korean verbs come at the end of clauses and sentences. and Written. ie  (k). We need to recognise at least four grammatically distinctive speech styles in Korean. Polite Formal. ie  (ya). To reflect this we’ve romanised LÈà as bae-kwa-jeom. The Xî Š½ liaison rule (1) we introduced in Page 22 is not applied. not r. Intimate. They have two components: a stem and an ending. There are about twenty verb endings we use to show whether we’re making a statement or asking a question (or expressing commands or suggestions). # (yeo). Polite Formal Question. We’ve thus romanised "©ß as seo-ul-yeok. marked with a dash. is followed by  (h). (j). ie whether we are speaking to the hearer in a polite.) This heavily aspirated consonant is then pronounced as if it occurs in the syllable-initial position of the second character. Polite Formal Statement.

both of the consonants are pronounced (see Page 25). and when you start to use Korean-English dictionaries you will see all the verbs are listed in this form. consisting of the verb stem plus the suffix - (-da). we concentrate on using it in this book. The Polite Informal § style is appropriate when we talk to people we feel close to. The Polite Formal also carries somewhat masculine connotations. See the following page for details.verbs. amongst the family members. Some basic verbs & expressions ¦ x O <­ [Ž    ½ íÜ  ½ N 9 ‡= „ BV õ ½* È Ð ó¨ go come do study have a chat eat drink have a meal do homework telephone. As the label suggests. rather than to offer a list of rules at this stage. and thus we Ð ó ÷ Š read ik-. We assess that the Polite Informal is likely to be of much greater use to most students than the other three. No.. using it in your talk will give an impression that you are reading aloud some written piece. and to strangers perhaps after an initial phase of formality or to just manifest our inclination to be polite but informal to them. Otherwise. write meet see take an exam sleep play exercise. or by an adult speaking to a child. § x. as in ¨. using the Intimate style towards someone that you don’t know very well can make the situation very awkward. We will study these two styles in the next volume.?/are you doing . So while it can be used by women. -#x and. in the case of · · · . The Written style is used in literary works. However.. may refer to the dictionary form. We will study the Polite Formal in Unit 7. § T§  Bx. this often occurs only when the women concerned are performing roles commonly associated with men – exercising authority in an office situation. We judge that these double consonant syllables are sufficiently rare for us to note the pronunciation when individual cases come up. and so in the  vocabulary lists in this book you see just the verb stems. there are rules that apply to ¹ Ž determine which of the two are pronounced. ring (ik-) read ˆ ¤P ´ n¦ vZ¦ åvø S F . A small number of Korean syllables end with two consonants. the  (©) falls silent. even when they are older or of higher social status. it is as if you pay the hearer the compliment of regarding him/her as being of a social status superior to yours. especially if he or she is a native speaker.. We mention this because your instructor. ie when followed by a syllable that begins with the letter (C).=4» V Î The Polite Informal style features the verb endings -x..? Yes.(to read). When you use it. this form is non-functional in spoken Korean.Š  £ˆŽ ëµ v> ê ó § Bx? 3 6. 24 c G Shin 2006 . Traditionally Korean verbs are listed in what is called their ‘dictionary form’. When the Ð ó consonant cluster is followed by a vowel. In the case of ¨-. with varying intonation patterns attached. The Polite Formal style is widely used in formal situations. Thus. work out what do you do . the Intimate style is used between very close friends.

sseo-yo) No. we attach the ending as follows.   EXAMPLES Š  £S F .+ ½ í Ü. § § EXAMPLES Ð ó ¨. Note § also that this rule is not applicable to the verb stem . [ O­§ c G Shin 2006 Yes. no-ra-yo) Yes. § íT§ ½ A: <ŽBx. (Ne. EXAMPLES Q: x? § Q: £§? Š x Q: ¨#§? Ð óTx Q: "§? Ox Q: ó Bx? ê § Is he going? (No-ra-yo) Is he playing? (Il-geo-yo) Is he reading? Is he drinking? What’s he doing? A: 6. 3 § A: 6. and (2) in case of stems ending in s. however.x P ´§ nx ¦ x. 1. he’s playing. § h§ A: x.+ T§ #x = T§ #x = ¨Tx Ð ó#§ ÜTx ½ í#§  .. thus gx.+ ˆ ¤. a Korean sentence is complete without the overt subject and the English counterpart of this ‘missing’ subject is a pronoun. make a statement. See 3 below. (1) the - is omitted from -x if the preceding verb stem actually ends in a. he’s eating. the i is written in combination with the ensuing a. -x. As mentioned above. If the last vowel in the verb stem is = or E.+ ¦ v. meo-geo-yo) No.. T§ Note however (1) in case of stems ending in u. we drop s and add ex. and  § (2) in case of stems ending in i. 25 . as in English. In the examples below we are only assuming the pronoun to be he. we add -x..T § # x? Do you .(to do) and stems ending in -. and say with a falling intonation when we ask a wh. Verb stems ending in - (to do) becomes -Bx.  § EXAMPLES  ‡ „V B=   [ O­ <Ž- =⇒ § Bx ‡Vx „=B§ B  § Bx [ O­x <ŽB§ ½ N 9 õ ½* È ˆŽ ëµ v> - =⇒ ½ N§ 9Bx õ*§ ½ÈBx  ˆŽ 뵧 v>Bx Secondly. £x.+ ø ax = § ax = § ax = § § Âx § Àx Z§ åÀx ø 2. he’s going. 3 § Š A: x. To ask and respond to this question in the Polite Informal style we attach the -x/-#x ending to § T§ the verb stem with an appropriate intonation pattern. thus jx. the u is written in combination with the ensuing e.. (A-ni-yo.+ Z¦ åv. Firstly. § Note.=⇒ + ex = § ex = § Ox "§ hx -§ 3.? Yes. we say the verb with a rising intonation when we ask a yes–no question.question. For all other final vowels in the verb stem the ending is -#x. (A-ni-yo.P ´ n- + + + + § x § x § x § x = = = = Š § £x x § S F§ . he’s writing. or answer to a question. x. I do . He’s studying. Ü#x.

or italicising.. ŽE TX ¦V§ ‚2: #" x.. I haven’t got (any) . (implying. we don’t have grape juice. words in English: “We don’t have any grape juice.. • Could I have a ... but we do have other fruit juice. we do...?.... Have you got (any) . = ‘.. }s ‘wp 2#x.=5» V Î 5 = ‘. She’s talking with the waitress...)” ‡ ‚ = (nok-cha): green tea ˆí  Û. We have orange juice. then. x® ‘w ¨#x. DÂá Ì   í ‚ ¨V§ <: ˆÛ. Do you have grape juice? I’m sorry... could I have green tea. We also learn how to offer people refreshments. In addition we take our first look at the Korean counting system.x. -p/-v (neun/eun): This is the topic particle.? ..x (ju-se-yo): Please give me .. #x. ‡ ‚ ¨V§ I N THIS UNIT . Do you have green tea? Yes....x.. The effect is similar to stressing.. . waitress. and ŽÂá ‚E other similar employees in the service industry • }s (po-do): grape ¦¦ • ‘w (ju-seu): fruit juice ¨ˆ • . ¨#x? (i-sseo-yo. see Page 27 for Ì óT§ • • • pronunciation note): Is there (any) . another foreign student in Korea. DÂá P‹ ˆ× õ Ì ‡ Ì  ‚ óT§ <: = ¨#x? ŽE 6 óT§ ‚2: 3... please? • Please have a ...x. please? • • Notes for Conversation • D2 (jong-eo-bwon): waiter. Well. (eop-sseo-yo: See Page 27 for ×T§ 2 pronunciation note): There isn’t (any) ..? 26 c G Shin 2006 . .. Can ¨V§ I have . Á ‡ Translation Waitress: Annie: Waitress: Annie: Waitress: Annie: Welcome. has just walked into a coffee shop. (Geu-reom): Well. 1 Conversation Annie. ˆ ˆ Ù Þ It indicates that the previous word is being specifically drawn to the other person’s attention. ¨#x.. ‘. then.. PLEASE In this Unit we learn ways of asking for goods and services – specifically food and drink. • Counting in Korean (1) G REEN TEA . DÂá  ¦¦ ¨ˆ óT§ <: }s ‘w ¨#x? Ì ŽE ´" ¦¦ ¨ˆÙ T§ ¦Ú ¨ˆ óT§ ‚2: q®. Á .

2 Drinks & other expressions Š  ¦ ¹ C¬¨ ‹t Š " ¬ R¦3ˆ 8u6s   ¨w ‘ˆ  Á ß I ‡ ‚ = õS ¼F q9  .‡ ‚ ¨V§ = ‘.x.

to have there isn’t/aren’t . • 9B is a traditional drink made from fermented rice and powdered malt. however.. This is  probably due to some quirk in the circumstances in which lemonade was first introduced to Japan before being introduced in Korea. It is generally served as ½ Nc a dessert. water drink. It is made from dried persimmons (<3: got-gam).. beverage cola lemonade lemonade juice tea (in general) black tea green tea ginseng tea coffee ­®  ½ Nc 9B ¨íÎ à» Ä Š  ¨ ¨ / -‘ ô ¨ K‘ ¦¦¨ }s‘ œ¨ w‘ Ì ó ¨×  2¨ ‘U # milk (traditional) rice nectar (traditional) fruit punch liquor beer wine distilled hard liquor ‘there is/are .’. ¨íÎ Ä \S OF ginger (M3: saeng-gang). • à» is another traditional Korean drink.’. 8u6s is seemingly more used. R¦3ˆ • I literally means red tea in reference to the colour of what is called black tea in the English Á ß speaking world. cinnamon (5. ‘to not have’ to give here Language & Culture Notes •  doesn’t mean cider. but lemonade.. Currently. as one might expect. as it does in Japanese..

beverage): the  (©) in t is to be pronounced as ‹ ¹¬ ÷ Š ¬ n. and tastes a F ûV  W  little bitter yet sweet. • The hyphen in -‘ (liquor) indicates that it is a bound form. and honey (°: kkul). the syllable-final Ì óT§ × T§ consonants (Dv) and ¹ (¹v) are pronounced as they’re spelt: i-sseo-yo and V À Fø Œø C À eop-seo-yo.(see Page 18) and eop. œ¨ Pronunciation Notes • Notice the pronunciation of Ct¨ (drink. and is very popular in Korea. as is the case with the following K‘. whereby a ½ Nc partially aspirated consonant becomes heavily aspirated when followed by  ( ©).are pronounced as it. ie a form that can only be used when ¨ it is part of a compound. when followed by a vowel as in ¨#x and 2#x. not r. ÷ ” • The verb stems ¨.: gye-pi). • 9B (rice nectar): This is another example of the liaison explained on Page 23. (However. ô ¨ • w‘ is a vodka-like spirit made from grain or potatoes.) c G Shin 2006 27 .(see Page 24) Ì ó ×  respectively.and 2.

U ÌT§ ¨ Soju.=5» V Î When we buy things . here it is. œ¨ ¨V§ B: 6. Yes. rather than about the general existence of green tea in a given context.. Do you have any beer? No. That is. U ¨#x. × To ask for things. 28 c G Shin 2006 . (6. Ì The negative response will be: § T§ x.’ (for singular) or ‘There are/aren’t . § T§ × Do you have any cola? Yes.x. Ì Is there any green tea? Yes. the shopkeeper may say: A: w‘ ‘. One is where the appropriate English Ì óT§ × #§ expressions would be: ‘There is/isn’t . Ì Do you have green tea? Yes. ó#x. ¨#x. Á ß ¨V§ B: # ó#x. Language Notes: the verb ¨#x and its negative counterpart #x Ì óT§ ×T§ 2 The Korean expressions ¨#x and 2Tx have two uses. I’ll have a tea. we can say: NOUN ¨#x? Ì óT§ The affirmative response will be: EXAMPLES A: ¬ ó#x? Š ¨ " ÌT§ B: 6. Here it is. etc? and Yes. in your shop. Although the English version of this question/answer sequence does not use is (or are).) here it is or here you are. 3 # ÌT§ ¨ which means (Yes. at home. we do.. etc. For example: ‡ ¨ ‚ ÌT§ = ó#x? 3 óT§ 6.x. 3 # óT§ Ì A: I ‘. ¨#x. we do. we can say: EXAMPLES NOUN ‘.. A second use of the Korean ¨#x and 2#x is where English expressions similar to those in the Ì óT§ × T§ following question/answer sequences are used: ‡ ¨ ‚ ÌT§ = ó#x? 3 óT§ 6.. 3 ÌT§ ¨ A: K‘ ó#x? ô ¨ ¨ ÌT§ B: x. 2#x.’ (for plural). ¨#x and 2#x are also used for Ì óT§ × T§ talking about possession by whoever you is. restaurant. Here the question is concerned with the existence (or non-existence) of the thing concerned in some particular circumstances..x. To ask about availability in a shop. 2#x. ¨V§ When actually handing things over. please. there is.. please.) U ó#x. we don’t. there is. ¨#x. the sequence is nonetheless similar (even sometimes identical) in meaning to: Is there any green tea in your possession. 3 óT§ 6.

3 Fruits.‡ ‚ ¨V§ = ‘. refreshments and other expressions Îó »¨ À Î »  : ¦s }¦ ¦Ú x® õ W  ¢ ¨8 F O ¨ ‹ ‡Ž µ„ AB R ë ° S F 3 fruit apple pear grape orange mandarin watermelon plum peach strawberry persimmon Š } <  ö ¼ü .x.

When you say > 2#x. Thus. 9§ ‘w. give a brief pause between U T§ n× U > n and 2#x. ó À • n (mat) is taste. while liaison happens in n ¨#x (ma si-sseo-yo). Note also that.q<® õ ½ ó ¨ˆ 9§ (‘w) À Î » F > V ˆˆN w¡6 Á Š ÷ ¤UÌ >ó n ¨U× > n 2` F :- yellow melon kiwi pineapple plum juice biscuits sweets ice cream to take. and n 2#x ‘(It) U > UÌ > óT§ U× > T§ UÌ > óT§ doesn’t have a taste’. is a relatively recent but very popular soft drink in Korea. ó À ó ¨ˆ À often known simply as 9§. × T§ • :-: The syllable-final consonant cluster ¬ (vC) is pronounced as n. green in colour and smaller and harder than a ‘usual’ plum. The . take hold of (ma sit-) to be tasty (mad eop-) to be unpalatable (an-) to sit Language. Culture & Pronunciation Notes • 9§ is a kind of plum. the literal meaning of n ¨#x is ‘(It) has a taste’. it U T§ n× doesn’t in > 2#x (mat eop-seo-yo).

¬˜ which means “No. we can say: 3 F" 6. I’m OK. 3 F" 6. S ‹ Have some tea. Îó sV§ »¨ ˆ. When we offer refreshments to people we can say: NOUN s.x. thank you. I’m OK (not to have any).x. 3®... (C) falls ` F Þ¹ ˆ  ¹  silent here. ƪx. À § s"§ x. No. we can say: To decline.”  ˆV§ s. 29 . ¬˜ c G Shin 2006 Have some fruit. ˆV§ To accept food and/or drink offered to us. ƪx.x. Yes. S ‹ EXAMPLES § s"§ x. 3®. When offering food and drink .

x.. (An-jeu-se-yo) Take a seat. and Gam-sa-ham-ni-da (Thank you). for essentially abstract counting such as mathematics. Study. (Il-geu-se-yo) Read. fractions. • In Korean. ´" q®.x Vx . Sino-Korean numbers are used for all larger numbers and.x. add x if the verb stem ˆ ends in a consonant. t and k) becomes nasalised (thus become m. drop the  before we add ÷ Š Š ÷ -(x). and k to ng may seem strange at first sight. such as ¤. Ban-gap-sum-ni-da (Nice to meet you). pronounce the verb with a falling intonation.=5» V Î Pronunciation Notes • In Unit 1.x.x = = = = = ¨V§ ‘. but here it is pronounced as m.. V§ . Please give me . if you say them slowly. these expressions are as follows.x. Note that. h tends to be silent (more precisely. you will see that these pairs of consonants have the same articulation points. This is particularly noticeable when the speaker speaks at a normal speed.x. t to n. Also.x ˆV§ x. 30 c G Shin 2006 . S ‹ F" 3®. not as ¬" sª§ gwaen-chan-ha-yo. the syllable-final  is to be pronounced as ‹ " Œ † an unexploded p. Thus.§ V§ .x = V§ . Drink. Pure Korean numbers exist only for the numbers 1 – 99 in modern Korean. distances and money. [ O­V§ <Ž . The changes from p to m. When written in Hangeul.(x). This is in fact part of the general assimilation rule within the Korean sound system whereby a non-nasal stop sound (eg p. This is why we say s. all the Korean sentences in the example are essentially polite – the Polite Informal ending has been employed. As we studied in Unit 3 (see Page 18). you should pronounce Ƙx (“I’m OK”) as gwaen-cha-na-yo.x = ˆV§ s. decimals.x ˆV§ x.x. but.x. (Deu-se-yo) Have some! (No-se-yo) Have fun! 5 Pure Korean Numbers (exist only for 1–99) There are two sets of numbers in Korean: Pure Korean and Sino-Korean.(to take. and are mainly used for the counting of relatively small numbers of objects or people. Ð óˆV§ ¨x. we learnt Mi-an-ham-ni-da (I’m sorry). verb stems that end in  (©). ˆ V§ EXAMPLES ¨ ‘ [ O­ <Ž Ð ó ¨` F :- + + + + + V§ . n and ng respectively) when it occurs in front of a nasal sound.x. while some of the English translations may sound impolite. ` FˆV§ :x. Let’s study Pure Korean numbers first. weakly aspirated) when it occurs between two voiced sounds. P‹ ‡TŒ ´ë† o¡B. ˆ V§ ˆV§ Š ÷ ¤Š  £- =⇒ =⇒ ˆs œr + + V§ . in general.x. take hold of ). Notice the discrepancy between spelling and pronunciation involving the syllable-final  (C) ¹ Œ in ® and B.x. œV§ r. VST . 4 Using Korean Verbs (2): Asking people to do in Polite Informal style When we ask people to do things in Korean we can say Notes: VST = verb stem. By contrast.

• Finally. and ¨| as i-reun. The same applies to numbers from twenty-one to ninety-nine. We thus romanise 2  as yeo-ra-na. 2I (nineteen). twenty. • For numbers from eleven to nineteen. and | (ninety) ¿ è » è » as a-hop. you can disregard the h in each case. ie. • 2a (fourteen) is pronounced as yeol-let. ten-two. While the spelling has changed.x. while we have romanised ß I (nine). not À  yeol-ha-na.  (five). • Note also that the syllable-final consonant cluster ² (©C) in #. and thus the n assimilates into the preceding l. the 2 in 2# and 2#.(eight) is ÷¹ Š Œ Uý Ò pronounced as l. the  ( ©) is regarded to not be ÷ ” there and subsequently liaison happens. not À» óè il-heun. À thirty. ma-heun. not as yeo-ril-gop. liaison does not happen ÷ Š when the syllable-final  (©) is followed by a vowel combined with the semi-vowel y. the pronunciation assumes the same rule applied in pronouncing 2a (fourteen). you simply say ten-one. Àà  not yeol-net. etc. variation is a part of language. h tends to be silent in between two voiced sounds. Don’t get embarrassed. • As mentioned above.‡ ‚ ¨V§ = ‘. and a-heun respectively. etc in the table. replace 2 (ten) with other tens.  Wæ <u ˆ À» óè ¨| UÞ #q ˆ è | » twenty thirty forty fifty sixty (i-reun) seventy eighty ninety • The syllable-final (v) in ± (three). and ¨| À ¿ ß À» óè (seventy). You may find it interesting that in pre-modern Korean seven was ‘¢<’ ÀY óO (nil-gop). Pronunciation and Language Notes one two (set) three (net) four (da-seot) five (yeo-seot) six seven (yeo-deol) eight nine ten From one to ten   Š  ¤ ú  ± à  a   à U # à ÀY óO ¨< Uý #Ò ß I ¿ À 2 From ten to nineteen À 2 À  2  ÀŠ  2¤ Àú  2± Àà  2a À à  2 À à U 2# ÀÀY óO 2¨< À ý U2#Ò À ¿ ß 2I ten (yeo-ra-na) eleven twelve thirteen (yeol-let) fourteen fifteen (yeol-yeo-seot) sixteen seventeen eighteen (yeo-ra-hop) nineteen The other tens ˆ w¦ Š Xã "r » è | » ¬ . as you see in the table. ie  (ya). ten-three.  U § ® Thus. In 2  À  (eleven). a ø À ú  à  (four). | (forty). • Notice also the pronunciations of 2# À à U (sixteen) and 2#. It is difficult to pronounce n immediately after l within the Korean sound system. # (yeo).does not À À à U À Ò Uý change to yeo-r· · · but remains as yeol-.(eighteen). As we À Ò Uý explained on Page 23. • By the same token. The  (C) falls silent ¹ Œ here (see also Page 24 for a note on the syllable-final consonant cluster). x (yo) or  (yu). and # (six) is to be  à U à pronounced as ‘unexploded’ t (see Page 18). Àà  c G Shin 2006 31 . some Koreans around you may pronounce 2¨< (seventeen) as ÀÀY óO yeol-lil-gop.

She’s talking with the shop owner. À à P 5 ‘q: 6.x.. . that (near you) and that (far from both of us) • Using counters (or unit noun) • Counting in Korean (2) • Asking/telling prices of things H OW MUCH ARE THESE ? Having learnt the names of a few goods..=6» V Î 6  2<x?  W§ À I N THIS UNIT . we might venture into buying things using Korean at a local shop.  x®p 2<x? À  ¦ÚÙ W§ õ ˆÀ 5 ‘q: w 5<  <x. . 6. let’s study how to ask for prices... ‘ n ¨#x. (If you’re outside Korea.. ó  êW§ ¨:  ó<x? À 5 ‘q: 9B<x. 1 Conversation Kylie Walker has just walked into a small corner shop in Seoul. including how to use demonstratives. w< G Ct<x.  ¨¼ NcW§ õ ½ ó Nc§ Îó ¨ˆW§ ¨: 9Bx? »¨ ‘w<x? À ½ À 5 ‘q: x.  ¨¼ 3 õ ¦Ö EV§ õá 32 c G Shin 2006 .. x <x. 9Bp .  ¨¼ ˆí§ ¨ > óT§ õ Á UÌ ó  ´ ¨V§ ¨:  5n ‘. • This.) For this task. and ways of asking availability in a shop.  ¨¼ ´ V Ö EV§ õ ‡ õá ó > óT§ ¨: n ¨#x? À UÌ 5 ‘q:  Ûx.. Pure Korean numbers. Sino-Korean numbers and counters.. you may try a Korean grocery shop.  ¨¼ § NcÙ ´Q ½Õ ¹¬¨W§ õ ½ ˆ ‡T õÁ ‹ ó  3 ¨: .

... See Page 23 for more explanations. õ <x. What is this? (That)/It is a pear. Similar to “Oh. W§  2<x? À Translation Kylie: Shop owner: Kylie: Shop owner: Kylie: Shop owner: Kylie: Shop owner: Kylie: Shop owner: What’s this? It’s Si-kye. 33 c G Shin 2006 . thing. . similar in function to item in. (over there)   ˆ   \ $ êW§ ó<x? this thing/object that thing/object (near you) that thing/object (over there) What is it? Q: ó<x? êW§ A: K‘<x.  íÎW§ Ä Q: $ ó<x? \ êW§ A: ($) ­<x... Oh. ˆ :W§ Q:   ó<x? ˆ êW§ A: () ¨à»<x. They taste very nice.. if you want to say “It’s . (cheo nwo-ni-e-yo): It’s/they’re Öá  EV§ one thousand won.  is the Korean currency. (ie near you) What is that? (ie near you) (This)/It is Sujeonggwa. object that . Do they taste nice? Of course. and    Š ú à  becomes w.” À W§ 2<x? (eol-ma-ye-yo): How much is it/are they? ‡ ´ V w 5< (han gae-e): per item. • 9Bx? (Si-kye-yo): Did you say ‘Si-kye’? ½ Nc§ When you want to make sure that what you • • • think you heard. eg an item of furniture. w 5 means an ‡ ´ item. Can I have five of them please? Sure. and 6 when used before a ‡ ´ ¨ V 3 counters (see below). (geu-reom-yo): Of course! Á à ´  5n (da-seot gae-man): only five (of  P them) 2 What’s this/that? Korean has two ways of saying that: one for things far from the speaker but near the hearer.”. I see. a Korean traditional drink. traditional ½Á Õ ‹ ¹¬¨ Ct (eum-nyo-su): As explained on Page 27.. ¤.. then don’t give any demonstrative. How much are these oranges? One thousand won each. geu-. it’s .. • • • • • Notes for Conversation • ‘q (ju-in): owner ¨¼ õ •  (i-geo): this (thing)  • 9B (Si-kye): Note the pronunciation. 6. eg a word. (near you) that .  - ˆ  \ $EXAMPLES this . (a.. jeo-. -5 is a counter  for things (in general). eg it.. á E ˆí§  Ûx... ‹. then give an appropriate demonstrative. The ½ Nc (ß) in 9 and the following  ( ©) are not ½ î ½ N ÷ ” pronounced as separate sounds but are pronounced as a ‘single’ consonant – a heavily aspirated k. ne): This expression indicates that you now understand what has been said. I see. That’s five thousand won.. the  (©) in t is pronounced as n. ÷ Š ¬  3 .”. Thus. If you choose to say “That’s . repeat the word and add -x (or -x if the word ends in a § § consonant) with a rising intonation. As explained on Page 21... ±. (ie over there) When answering to the question “What’s this?”. and one for things far from both the speaker and the hearer.” in Korean. \ ®W§ What is it? It’s beer. What is that? (ie over there) (That)/It is Milk. please. . The Pure Korean numbers . õG (jeon-tong): tradition.” or “It’s . Korean sentences are complete without the subject and the English counterpart of the ‘missing’ subject is a pronoun. as you do in English. not r... . ô ¨W§ Q:  ó<x?  êW§ A: ( ) <x... Si-kye? Is it a fruit juice? No. is right. you can say “That’s ..

it is not obligatory for a noun to carry information as to whether it is singular or plural. Á Õ G ¬   counter for machines counter for animals counter for paper box.. glass.=6» V Î 3 How many . à  ¬ 34 c G Shin 2006 .. gate window ¼ r õ  5 „G q: V õ ½* È ¶ý –7{ » ÷ 1R½ Î8 õ ˆ ø q photo dog cat telephone mobile phone television money Language & Culture Notes For mobile/cell phones. • We insert a space between / and the following counter.. we write / 5. You mention the thing in your mind first. eg  . an interesting term. are there? Some useful words ô ¸ P Šõ Ú §· õÀ ¾ó ­ Â Ô ¸F P9 ôV ˆ ë s ˆ }ë <s book ball-point pen pencil chair desk door.” can mean “There is a book. õs{ (haen-deu-pon: literally hand phone). not 5.. also counter for boxes/containers counter for books Pronunciation & Language Notes • / is always used in conjunction with a counter or a unit noun. and functions as a question word: Æ ‘how many (items)of . also counter for bottles cup. container.” or “There are books”. eg “P   ¨#x (There are five books)”.PK Number . you use a Pure Korean number with an appropriate counter. Notice the word order here: ô Ã¬Ì ¸   óT§ NOUN . ¶ý » Some counters and unit nouns Æ /  5 Ý Ä î r ‡ ´ ­ Œ How many . Æ Æ  Æ / Likewise. a sentence such as “P ó#x. • In Korean. ô¨ ¸ ÌT§ When it is necessary to show how many books there are.? counter for things in general bottle. also counter for cups/glasses counter for long/thin things  7   V F ..?’ Note also that the syllable-final  ( ©) in / is to be pronounced as ÷  Æ unexploded t. That is. For instance. is \ » mˆý widely used in Korea in addition to –7{ (hyu-dae-pon). we insert a space between a PK number and the following counter. unless liaison happens.. and then specify it.Counter.

 ÌT§ ¨ NOTE: When adding a counter to Pure Korean numbers. Œ . ‡ ´  óT§ Ì More counters and unit nouns How many pears are there? There are three. ‹ Ý. r. 3 6 thus ‡ ´  ´ î ´ ´ ´ ­ w 5. Sino-Korean numbers are used for all larger numbers (recall that Pure Korean numbers exist only for 1 – 99). w r. 3 and 4 as follows. 6 r. Ä ‡ EXAMPLES Q: : /  ¨#x?  5 óT§ Æ Ì A: .. and for abstract counting such as mathematics. for reading off numerals. but with Sino-Korean numbers. . 6 Œ . 4 Sino-Korean Numbers As mentioned earlier. 5 ó#x. How many glasses of juice are there? There are two.. 2. Ý. Ä ‡ 3  3 î 3 ´ 3 ­ 6 5. c G Shin 2006 35 . ..Ì Q: ‘w / r ¨#x? ¨ˆ ´ óT§ Æ‡Ì A: ‹ ´ ¨#x.. 3 V óT§ . ¨ ‡ óT§ rÌ Q: q: /  ¨#x? „G  óT§ V Æ Ì A: w  ¨#x. À ó« «t N ' ' N kilogram litre metre á E  Š R  ëN § / £ õ ڈ ±| won (Korean currency) dollar cent NOTE: Counters of foreign origin are not used with Pure Korean numbers. fractions. decimals.. ¨#x? ¼ F óT§ õÆVÌ A: 6 F ¨#x. ‹ Œ . V  ÌT§ ¨ Q: r / . w Ý. w Œ . See Page 37 for examples. ‹ r. How many cats are there? There is one.. distances and money.. . we shorten the numbers 1. How many photos are there? There are four. Ä ‡ V  V î V ´ V ­ . substitute a Pure Korean number for /. W§  2<x? À How many are there? To ask this question we can say: Æ  ÌT§ / 5 ó#x? ¨ To name the things we’re interested in we say: NOUN / 5 ¨#x? Æ  óT§ Ì To answer. 5.. 6 Ý.   Š  ¤ ú  ± à  a becomes ‡ ´ w ¨ ‹ V . Note also that we use Sino-Korean numbers in counting money. which we learn below. Æ PK 5 ó#x. ‡Ä ‡‡ ‡ ¨  ¨ î ¨ ´ ¨ ­ ‹ 5.

ÂR óë Â ó† • Notice how §C (16) is pronounced: sim-nyuk. etc. you say two-hundred. With the assumed presence of an r. § (si-bi) and §x (si-bo).000 (sim-man) 100.000. 30. one thousand.000. § (sip-sa). §À  ó Â ó¦ • But the  (C) in § is pronounced as unexploded p (see ¹ Œ  ó Page 18) in §9 (sip-sam).000. ten-two.000 is expressed in separate term in Korean: n P ´ (man).000.000 100. 100.000.=6» V Î From zero to ten Pronunciation and Language Notes 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 [ O < À ó ¨   S F 9   ¦ x ‡ ¸ C ÷ * ª R ë ­ † ‰ Â ó § From ten to nineteen Â ó § ÂÀ óó §¨  ó § ÂS óF §9  ó § Â ó¦ §x ‡ ó¸ §C Â÷ ó* §ª ÂR óë §­ Â ó† §‰ 10 (si-bil) 11 (si-bi) 12 13 14 (si-bo) 15 (sim-nyuk) 16 17 18 19 The other tens • For numbers from 11 to 19. ´ ôP SôP F´ 9Ln (three-hundred-man).000 and 10.000 (baeng-man) 1.000 10. À ó • A few examples for liaison (see Page 22) are in the list: Âó ó¨ (si-bil). etc. unlike in English. note the sound changes occurring in §n (100. etc §n (twenty-man).000 10. ie it becomes m. and 20. The same applies to numbers from 21 to 99. 9§n (thirty-man). etc are Ln (two-hundred-man). we don’t need to prefix these numbers with ¨ (il: 1). Thus. Thus. P ´ õ Ö 2. or k is followed by an r. and ½ í prefix §.000. you simply say two-ten. three-ten. the sound rule applied here is: when the syllable-final p.000. P SP F´ 300. 3. Larger numbers ó §  S Fó 9§ ó §  ¦ó x§  ‡Â ¸ó C§ ÷ *ó ª§ R ëó ­§ †ó ‰§  36 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 ô  L õ Ö  P ´ n ÂP ó´ §n ôP ´ Ln õP Ö´ n ½ í ß c G Shin 2006 100 1.000). two-thousand. you simply say ten-one. §­ (sip-pal) and §‰ (sip-gu). ten-three. and one ‘ten thousand’. n. • For 100. and at the same time the r is pronounced as n. 30.000.000.  ô ó  õ Ö • The numbers §. ß (eok). • Finally. etc.000. three-hundred.000. L and  for even larger numbers.000). you use a different term. etc.000). the syllable-final consonant becomes nasalised. etc. etc will be ´ n (two-man). • Note that 10. 20.000.000. ÂP ó´ ôP ´ Ln (1. etc. 20. This is ‡ ó¸ another example for an unchanged pronunciation from pre-modern Korean (see also Page 31).000. one  ô õ ó  Ö P ´ hundred. See Page 30 for explanations. §ª ÂS óF  ó Â÷ ó* (sip-chil). or ng.000. Counting larger numbers has the same story.000. t. 300.000. ó´ ÂP SÂP Fó´ • n can be prefixed with up to  (cheon: 1.000. 1. where the Sino-Korean six was pronounced as ryuk. etc. and 200. 3. For 200. 9n Ö´ õP SõP FÖ´ (three-thousand-man). etc. 2. 9n (three-man). for 10. 30.000. ie. • For numbers in tens. etc.000 n (two-thousand-man).  and n are by themselves ten.000. L. Thus.000 . three-thousand. etc.

and  ˆ \ the following noun. SŠ Âõ They’re 1. Note. not $Â. õP á À ó NV Ö V§ ¨ '<  E<x. (eg wine) They’re 230. P õ ´¦Ö áV§ Q: = 2<x? ‡ À ‚ W§ A: xn E<x. (eg petrol) They’re three dollars and fifty cents a kilo. (eg ornaments) They’re 7. you use SK numbers with counters of foreign origin.000 won for two. ÂP á À ­V *Ö EV§ 2 Œ< ª <x.000 won each. How much is this/are these? It’s/they’re 15. or $ (that (over there)).000 won. we use á E Š  § (or £) and if necessary ±| as well. (eg cars) They’re 1.000 won for ten. eg «t (kilogram). á EV§ EXAMPLES NOTE:  is Korean unit of currency. V áV§  They’re SK won for PK (items). we omit the space when \ Ô \Ô writing  (this thing/object).000. (eg a series of books) They’re 10.   (that (near you)). ' (litre).   (that thing/object (near you)).000 won. ná  V óF´ EV§  < §9n <x. and ' (metre). ÷õ á ‡Ä ´ îV ¦P EV§ w Ý< x´ <x. and thus: SK § (or SK R ëN õ ڈ Š  R ëN £) SK ±|<x (It’s/they’re SK dollars and SK cents. we can say: À Wx 2<§? To name the goods we’re talking about we say: NOUN 2<x? À W§ To answer we say: SK <x. (eg pens) They’re 50. EXAMPLES NOTE: PK 5< = for PK number of items. õá ÀÀ ó ó«V F  xó ڈW§ ¨ «t< 9 § ¦§ ±|<x.000 won.000 won a bottle. P ´ áV§ Q:  2<x?  W§ À A: nx E<x.) õ ڈW§ Q: 2<x? À W§ A: n E<x. ¦´ V§ Pá Q: $  2<x? \ Ô W§ À A: §xn E<x.  P ó¦´ áV§ How much is it/are they? It’s/they’re 10. However. ì ÂSP á ‡ ´ V ´ EV§ w 7< Ön <x. and $ (that thing/object (over there)).000 won a litre. V however. (eg vegetables) c G Shin 2006 37 . W§  2<x? À 5 How much is it/are they? To ask the price of goods.  ˆ \ Sometimes we hear people say when giving the price of things: PK 5< SK E<x. À ó« N N ¨ V ó´ EV§ ‹ 5< §n <x.000 won.000 won for five. How much is the green tea? It’s 50. Thus we write $  (that chair over there). How much is that chair (ie over there)? It’s 150. If the price is in dollars. NOTE: We insert a space between the demonstrative  (this).

G ª cN< . ¨! O‰ ó À ó 3 ¨: 6. . and F Annie are playing a ‘guessing’ game. above all. 9 is V F­ holding a picture table. Kylie. the table is given below for your reference. we take Korean to be the means to achieve our goal. (However.. The majority of the people there are not (at least for the moment) fluent speakers of Korean and. cN< . However. In this unit we study expressions that are frequently used in teaching and learning a foreign language. Korean is the object of study.. John.. we can make our classroom close to a real-life situation if.  . a list of the Korean words for all the pictures in the table.. ˆ 'J  oéV  óT§ ó: G ª cN< 5 ¨#x? w ú Š ¬‡ Ì V F 3 9­: 6? ˆ 'J  oéV  óT§ ó: G ª .. by asking ‘yes-no’ questions only..®x? . which has not been shown to the other three...) The three are given instead. 5 ¨#x? w ú Š ¬‡ Ì V F­ 3 9: 6. • Classroom management language • Using the Polite Formal verb endings KOREAN C LASS The classroom you are in is not a place where Korean is spoken naturally. 3 § V F  F"§ 9­: . We also study more about Korean politeness. ˆ Š Š ˆ ó J  ëLV  óT§ w: ¤G ª v7< .. ..=7» V Î 7 w<# q§ ‡T ´QT …ó À I N THIS U NIT .. À  'J  oéV ú Š ¬‡ „G óT§ q: ¨#x? V Ì V F § 9­: x.. 9 V F­ can say only 6 or x.. Their task is to find out. 1 Conversation V­ 9. which picture is in which row and in which column.. wherever possible.

 J  ¦ãéV ¸ óT§ <: ±G ª xrN< P ¨#x? ú Š »‡ ô Ì V F § 9­: x. 38 c G Shin 2006 . ¨#x? Ì V F § 9­: x. ó J  ëLV Ú óT§ ¨: ¤G ª v7< §· ¨#x? À Š Š ˆ Šõ Ì V F 3 9­: 6.

... is there a cat? No.. In the middle of the second row . now invites you.. becomes a heavily O F aspirated k in combination with the following ... • .‡T ´QT …ó w<# q§ À Translation Sang-U: Kylie: Sang-U: John: Sang-U: John: Sang-U: John: Sang-U: Kylie: Sang-U: Annie: Sang-U: OK. the speaker. shall we start? . Kylie! Oh. .. (ja): an interjection used to indicate that  I... yes. On the left of the first row . is there a coffee? No. here the stem is . the hearer.. F O and the ending -(x)x (shall we do ... On the right of the third row ... is there a book? No. to do something (that is good to you).(to start... .. • • • Notes for Conversation •  . Note also the pronunciation: the (unexploded k) in ."x? (si-ja-kal-kka-yo): Shall we F‰§ O® start?... is there a dog? Yes... is there a pen? Yes.. On the left of the first row is there a dog? Sorry? On the left of the first row .). We ˆ § will study this ending in detail later in the • • • • • course. begin). In the middle of the second row . Umm .

here G means the first. you do not use it when you talk about yourself or  c G Shin 2006 39 . since - is an honorific title term. (a): an interjection similar to Umm in English.  ¾ûÁ ¥N M4  Z  ë ¡ the Korean language Hangeul name Ladies and Gentlemen! Mr/Ms . Teacher! All together!  ´   w ½ ‡õ 3 6? õõ ÖÖ  R ë ± ˆ ¡5 H    Once again! Sorry? Slowly! Fast! Loudly! more all Language.. on or in which something is. It indicates that the speaker is taking time to figure out what. Culture & Pronunciation Notes • The literal meaning of #t (yeo-reo-bun) is many respected people.. So. -< here is used to indicate the place V at. »‡ ¦ãé xrN means the right side »‡ 2 Classroom management language Some useful expressions ‡T ´QT w<# ‡W ´í w¢ Ù ? ¾ UNë #t ˆ .(go). here cN ¬‡ oé means the left side.. while -< V there was used to indicate the place to which we are going. ú ª 'J Š G  (cheot-jjae jul): the first row. I beg your pardon? Š Š J  ¤G ª (dul-jjae jul): the second row. (h) in (see Page 23).. Bear in mind that. UNë ˆ • As mentioned earlier (see Page 20). and how. 3 6? (ne): Sorry?. ±G ú J means the third ¦ãéV xrN< (o-reun-jjo-ge): on the right.. row. Š J ¤G means the second v7< (ga-un-de-e): in the middle ˆ ëLV ú Š J  ±G ª (set-jjae jul): the third row. The function of #t is self explanatory: attention getter. your instructor will be very likely to use - (ssi) after your  name when addressing you or when referring to you for the benefit of your fellow students. Note however. you are kindly requested to look at your teacher. if ˆ ë UNë ˆ you hear your teacher saying #t. and -< is the particle we V learnt in Unit 4 (see Page 21) in conjunction with the verb . Note also the pronunciation: Liaison happens here (see Page 22). ú 'J Š ª ¬‡ oéV cN< (oen-jjo-ge): on the left.    .. to say. where # means UNë ˆ UN many and t respected people. and  line.

there’s a cat. G (cheot-jjae: the fifth). You can use it with expressions such as ± (ppal-li: fast) and ¡5 H R ë ˆ (keu-ge: loudly). xrN (o-reun-jjok) and v7 (ga-un-de) respectively. thus: w  (once). à J ÃJ  and so on. ¤G (dul-jjae: the second). ¤ (two).  ë Z   means all. • ¥<" (mi-te-seo) consists of ¥ (mit: bottom) and -<" (e-seo: from). •  (deo) means more. row the left side the right side v7 ˆ ëL -< V È ó ¥ -<" VX F 7 O the second last line the middle in.=7» V Î when you mention your name. and ¡ together. we say G ª cN< q: ¨#x (Cheot-jjae jul ú Š ¬‡ 'J  oéV „G óT§ V Ì oen-jjo-ge go-yang-i i-sseo-yo: literally. Culture & Pronunciation Notes • Ordinal numbers in Korean are G (cheot-jjae: the first). ± (three). . • When you address your teacher. at the bottom from the last. ‹. etc. Z ë •  w  (da-si han beon) means Once again!. the end ú Š ¬‡ 'J  oéV G ª cN< È óVX J  ¥<" ¤G ª Š Š on the left side of the first line Language. V oé ¬‡ ¦ãé »‡ ˆ ëL Assuming that we are looking at a table with three columns and a few rows where a cat is on the left column of the first row. where  means again. As explained on Pages 18 and ø À 23. However. the syllable-final (v) is pronounced as unexploded t unless it is followed by a vowel. • If you want to say that something is on the left. if you say 6 while raising the intonation. The most appropriate expression to  use is “M4 (seon-saeng-nim)”.. V½ õ • We learnt 6 is yes. in naming dates of a month as we do in English. F  OŠ 40 c G Shin 2006 . for example. Here. on. and a (four) become w. and w  (once). not da ga-ti. and 6 respectively when they occur in front of a counter (a grammatical marker for 3 indicating number properties). • The very last line/row can be referred to as 7 ª (ma-ji-mak jul). attach the particle -< to cN (oen-jjok).). The counter for times is  (beon). ø À Note also that ordinal numbers in everyday Korean are used only within the context of finger counting – they are not used. eg the second last line: ¥<" ¤G ª (mi-te-seo È óVX J  Š Š dul-jjae jul: literally. The first line on its left. H ë R H ˆ Some expressions for Classroom Activities ú 'J G Š J ¤G ª Š  ¬‡ oé cN ¦rN xãé »‡ the first the second line. aG (net-jjae: the fourth). • Despite the spelling. This expression È óVX È ó VX will be very useful if you want to say. M is a noun that refers to the profession of teacher. and in the middle. on the right. as in  ± (faster)  ¡5 (more loudly). and ¾N ¥ûÁ ¾û ¥ Á N 4 an honorific suffix. It is a short but very useful expression to know at this stage. Note the pronunciation of the syllable-final (v). ú 'J Š J ú J ±G (set-jjae: the third). the second line from the bottom). you don’t use - however.  ´ ½ ‡õ  ‡õ ´½ We saw in the previous unit that  (one). you are asking the hearer 3 3 to repeat what he or she has just said.  (three times). you pronounce  ¡ (All together!) as da ga-chi. ‹  õ ½ ‡õ ´½ ¨½ õ (twice).  Š  ú  à  ‡ ´ ¨ V .

I’ve forgotten. Listen well! • When you want to know the meaning of a particular word. and thus the whole R ë RŠ ë ÷T ¦V§ sentence means. ˆ ‡T Ù ´QT« T ëB§ Ê R T: #Ê5 means how. and -xt elsewhere. You did well!). ÷ Š ˆ« • When you are looking for a translation of a sentence.x.  ¦V§ B v. is the topic particle.  . The particle indicates that « ˆ Ù ˆ Þ the previous word or words are being specifically drawn to the listener’s attention (because the speaker is going to talk about it). and the expression B v. literally.v/p ß#t #5 ¥Bx? ˆˆÄ Þ Ù îT« TÊ ë§ : R W F§ 7x? ¦ˆ%T§ utÃ#x. by.. and B v. © ¤# F.  R ë§ • If you are making good progress in learning Korean. Ì ¨ § ‘ ªx. -t. you will very likely hear the last two sentences. in English? Is it correct? I don’t know. or -xt (euro). in English? How do you say . .  ¦V§ You will perhaps hear your instructor saying them many times. if you hear ‘ © Þ#x (A-ju jal ha-syeo-sseo-yo). don’t be puzzled.x is  ¦V§ typically to invite you to have a go. eg ± (ppal-li).. Secondly. many ¨ § ” R Ì ë îT§ times. You use -p if the previous word ends in a vowel.. Very good! Well done! (You did well!) Language Notes • The first four sentences.x (Listen carefully!) means well. You use -t after a noun ending in a vowel or the « consonant  (©). etc. and ¥Bx do you say?. Àˆ Ì óë óT§ ©s ¨#x. The same © is used in © Þ#x (literally.‡T ´QT …ó w<# q§ À Some more useful expressions F..x (Try it (yourself)!). . We saw © (jal.x will be FV§ O said when you are about to do some exercises or group activities.x (literally: Listen well!). Start (it)! Repeat after me! Listen carefully! Try it yourself! I have a question. Vx (Start (it)!). Here.. What is . -p.x (Listen carefully!). O  V§  . Firstly. RŠ ë ÷T ¦V§ © ¤# v.x (Repeat after me!). ” R Ì ë î#§ © ÞTx. . ‘ means very. R ë R Ì ë îT§ Incidentally. well) above in © ¤# ¨ ” x R ë RŠ ë ÷T ¦V§ v. It ¨ ë îT§ R Ì means You did extremely well! c G Shin 2006 41 .x.§ . ie ‘ ªx (A-ju jo-a-yo) and © Þ#x (Jal ha-syeo-sseo-yo). for instance.. you can say ‘Repeat after me’p w<#t #:5 ¥x? (How do you say ‘Repeat after me’ in Korean?). Its English « ˆ« equivalent would be by means of. are all commands (see Page 30). Ì Å NTTîT§ :#!Þ#x.v/p ß#t ó<x? ˆˆÄ Þ Ù îT« êW§ . is the instrument particle.. eg Repeat after me.x.§ O  V§ RŠ ë ÷T ¦V§ v. • The expression © (jal) in © ¤# v. or v (eun). and ª§ (It)’s good. you can say R ë ‘±’p ß#t ó<x? (What is ± in English?). ie . Vx.. and -v if it ˆ Ù ˆ Þ ends in a consonant. Two things we should note here: -p R ˆÄ ë Ù îT« êW§ R ë ˆ Ù (neun) and -t (ro). in.

On the next page is a table showing both formal and informal Insa. our individuality. But Koreans will not be seriously offended. then a more formal style would be appropriate. two close adult friends might use Polite Formal endings in a business meeting (and of course switch to Polite Informal or even to Intimate outside the meeting room). the greater the possibility that formal speech forms would come into play. -B?.  ó¦ ˆó¦   -?. then informality would be appropriate. The age of the students should also be taken into account: the older the students. as people who are extremely tolerant.  ó¦ VST-x§x. you will make many mistakes. at least in part. Polite Formal endings are also used between friends in a formal situations. when a younger person speaking to someone who is substantially older.x ˆV§ Asking a Question Issuing a Command Politeness cannot be reduced to mechanical rules. you will have to determine in consultation with your instructor what level of speech is appropriate. The age of the instructor is not the only variant.  VST-B. some of which we have studied already. ———. and -§x/-x§x (-sip-si-o/-eu-sip-si-o) to issue commands. As far as your classroom is concerned. In summary: Polite Formal Polite Informal Making a Statement VST-. If the instructor is young. these Insa expressions exhibit highly consistent patterns (VST plus an appropriate ending). except for the pair € . As you can see. they will not be hyper-critical of your performance. As a beginner. this often occurs only when the women concerned are performing roles commonly associated with men – exercising authority in an office situation. ˆó¦  VST-x/#x. § T§ · · ·Bx. 42 c G Shin 2006 . So while it can be used by women. or when two people who do not know each other very well are conversing. when a student speaking to a teacher. and -x§x   ó¦ Œ † † Œ ˆó¦  when the stem ends in a consonant. They are used. We use -. For instance. § VST-x/#x? § T§ · · ·Bx? § VST-. Polite Formal endings are used when there is a feeling of distance between people. You will find different people have different ideas about what is appropriate – indeed this difference highlights. for example. V§ VST-x. and -§x when the verb stem ends in a vowel.=7» V Î 3 Using Korean Verbs (3): the Polite Formal Style The Polite Formal style uses the endings -/-B (-m-ni-da/-seum-ni-da) to make  † Œ statements (and to respond to questions). which indicates that no appropriate expression is available. -?/-B? (-m-ni-kka/-seum-ni-kka) to ask  † Œ questions. the Polite Formal also carries somewhat masculine connotations. Œ † VST-?  VST-B? Œ † VST-§x. of course. friendly and supportive towards foreigners. when a person of more junior rank or status is speaking to someone more senior. and -B. They are more likely to be delighted that you are trying to use Korean and. We suggest that you avoid being inhibited by the fear of being too informal or formal.x.ÃB and € nx (See you again) and where ¦ %† å̌ ¦ ´§ P marked with a long dash. As mentioned above (see Pages 23 and 24). If the instructor is middle-aged or beyond.

x. Come in. ¦ ´§ € nx.  `  Fˆó¦ :x§x. (to person leaving) Good-bye. Not at all. See you again. § x. TX ¦V§ #" x.  Š ÷T¦ó¦ ¤#x§x. W <. · · ·¨. It’s O. Pleased to meet you. Good-bye. TŒ ——— ¬˜Œ s"† ƪB..  ó PÄ ´€ ó¦ qÜ §x. õP Ö´V§ n<x.‡T ´QT …ó w<# q§ À Meaning Hello. ` FˆV§ :x. ó ¢.  ´" q®.  TX ¦ó¦ #" x§x. Welcome. P‹ PÄ ´€V§ qÜ .ÃB.. Thank you. „ë† q¥B. ¦ %† € . 3 6. ´§ qBx.  PÄ ´€ ó¦ qÜ 5§x. No. Thank you. P‹ S ‹ F" 3®. PÄ ´€ V§ qÜ 5. (to person staying) I’m sorry. Polite Formal Polite Informal PÄ Â ´€ó qÜ §? ‡TŒ ´ë† o¡B. P c G Shin 2006 43 .x? ‡ ´ § oöx.x. P ——— „§ qöx. ¬˜ s"§ ƪx. · · ·<x/<x. Š ÷T¦V§ ¤#x. Sorry I’m late. Yes. V§ W§ PÄ ´€ V§ qÜ . I’m .x. Sit down.K. P  †TX ´§ =#" qBx.x. å̌  †TX ´" =#" q®.x.

3 ´ÄV§ ¨ 6. Yeah. 1 Conversation ¨.=8» V Î 8 ¦µ< ´ óT§ x–V j ¨#x? PÌ I N THIS UNIT .. .... Ji-su. • Fixing times to meet people • Telling and asking the time • Days of the Week • ‘Shall we . thanks. . a Korean student. x– ‹  #Dx? W ím§ ¢Fx. q€ . ¬ª ˆí V V Pë§  Û.. and talking about the things we do on a daily basis. sorry – I’ve got classes. ªx.... We assess that they should not be necessary by now. is trying to find a time to exchange language lessons with David..?’ • Using Negatives A RE YOU FREE THIS AFTERNOON ? In this Unit we continue to look at ways of asking for basic information in Korean. What about two in the afternoon? Mmm. fine. p #Dx? V Ù TJ§ ˆ V  s˜§ . David. < ´¢x? Á nR 3 § 6. xv q ×x.x? .  ¨ : Lˆ 7s: ¨ : Lˆ 7s: ¨ : Lˆ 7s: ¨ : Lˆ 7s: ¨ : Translation Ji-su: David: Ji-su: David: Ji-su: David: Ji-su: David: Ji-su: PÄ ´€V§ 7ˆ qÜ .. :B ¦½Þ ´ é§ G‚ õˆ P O‡ Ì óT§ ¦µ ¨  TJ§ ¨#x. PÜ \ $.  Æ"x.. Well then. especially fixing times to meet people.. Er. x£ x–< j ¨#x? ¦ò ¦µV ´ óT§ Š PÌ ´" ¦Š ¦µVÙ ´ T§ ¨2 q®.. xò x–<p j 2#x. Â P‹ £ ˆ P×  Ì óT§ 1óÞ TJ§ ¨#x. are you free this afternoon? Not this afternoon. What about tomorrow? The morning’s no good – I’ve got an appointment. ” Hi.. . 44 c G Shin 2006 . . What about three? Three’s OK. Note also that from this Unit on we do not provide romanisations for Hangeul. .x? Ls. .. 6¨v #Dx? Àˆ  .?’ and ‘Let’s .’ • ‘How about . shall we meet at three? Sure.. how’s things? Hi.

¦µV ´ óT§ x–< j ¨#x? PÌ Notes for Conversation
• $, ...: This is a polite form of hesitation, similar \ to Er ... or Um ... in English. • x£: today ¦ò Š • x–: p.m. ¦µ • x£ x–: this afternoon. Notice the ordering ¦ò ¦µ Š ¦ò ¦– x£ xµ, not x– x£. Š ¦µ ¦ò Š • j: period of time, hour ´ P • 2: class ¨  • 6¨: tomorrow 1ó À • x: a.m. ¦½ õ • , ...: This expression indicates that the speaker  is deciding what to say. It’s similar to Um .... • q ×x: · · · is no good. This is the standard P ´ é§ phrase to indicate that some course of action or arrangement won’t work. • :B: appointment, date O‡ G‚ • ¢Fx: This expression indicates that the W ím§ speaker is hesitant to accept – it is similar to we-ell. • #Dx?: How (is it)? TJ§ •  Û, ...: well, then ˆí Á • n¢x?: Shall we meet?; here the stem is PR ´ë§ P ´ n- (to meet), and the ending -(x)x ˆ § (shall we do ...). See below. • ªx: Good. This indicates that the speaker is ” § happy to accept what’s been said – similar to Sure. • v/p: Topic Marker. During this course, we’ll ˆˆ ÞÙ gradually become familiar with the particle ˆˆ ÞÙ v/p. Instead of just explaining its grammatical function we prefer to show you how it works in context, so that you can develop a feel for it. In asking when David was free in the conversation, ¨ ’s question specified this afternoon. What David wants to convey by saying x£ ¦ò Š ¦µVÙ x–<p is that although this afternoon isn’t ˆ possible, other times are. So he gives special emphasis to the ensuing phrase 6¨v ..., 1óÞ Àˆ where the particle v invites  to focus away ˆ Þ ¨ from this afternoon to other times. Likewise, when David would prefer three o’clock to two o’clock, he reacts non-committally to , and ¨ then invites  to focus on three o’clock – ¨ hence he says ; p .... V Ù ˆ

2

Fixing Times to Meet People

Some Useful Words

¦ò x£ Š 1¨ À 6ó ¦ õ x½ ¦– xµ S < X -  Æ 
/  ...?

today tomorrow a.m. p.m. now o’clock What time ...?

-t ˆ ë - õ ½ ‡ ´ o ´ j P ¨ 2  ‡T ´QT ¨ w<# 2  O‡ G‚ :B

minute before half hour, time class Korean class appointment, date

Asking and Telling the Time: Hours and Minutes To ask the time in Korean we can say:
NOTES: < = now; / = how many;  = o’clock S X Æ
 

S
W§ < / <x? XÆ
To answer:

PK <x. or W§ PK  SK t<x.  ˆ ëV§

NOTES: PK stands for Pure Korean Number, and SK Sino-Korean Number.

c G Shin 2006

45

=8» V Î Examples We use Pure Korean numbers for the hours and Sino-Korean numbers for the minutes. (See the Cultural Note below on Page 49.) Notice that - in “< / <x?” is a counter. While in English  S
W§ XÆ we say: What time is it?, the Korean equivalent is literally: How many points in time (of the clock) is it? We thus shorten the numbers  (one), ¤ (two), ± (three) and a (four) to w, ‹, ; and 6  Š  ú  à  ‡ ´ ¨ V 3 respectively when adding - to these Pure Korean numbers (see Page 35). 

‡ ´   ëV§ w  ó t<x. §ˆ
not   § ë <x.   ó ˆ V§ Ât

¨  ó ˆV§ ‹  § ë<x. Ât
not ¤  § ë<x. Š   ó ˆV§ Ât

V W§ ; <x.
not ± <x. ú  W§

3  ó ˆV§ 6  § ë<x. Ât
not a  § ë<x. à   ó ˆV§ Ât 

  ëV§   ó t<x. à §ˆ

U   ëVx #  ó t<§. à §ˆ

If the time is half past three, you can say either It’s thirty (minutes) past three or It’s half past three by adding o (half ) ‡ ´ to the hour. That is:

V  9§ ë<x. ;  Fó ˆV§ S t or ;  o<x. V  ´V§ ‡

V  ´V§ ;  o<x. ‡

No equivalent expression for quarter is used in telling the time in Korean. If the time is a quarter past three, you simply say:

V  ó¦ ˆV§ ;  §x ë<x.  t V  §x ë<x. ;  ó¦ ˆV§  t
Also, if the time is 12:45, you say:

À
¨  óx ëV§ 2‹  §¦ t<x.  ˆ
Alternatively, you can say:

‡ ´  ¦ ë½V§ w  óx t<x. § ˆõ
which means literally It’s ‘fifteen minutes’ to one. Here õ ½  means before. The same goes for any minutes between 31 and 59. 46 c G Shin 2006

À
¨  ó¦ ëV§ 2‹  §x t<x.  ˆ or w  §x t<x. ‡ ´  ó¦ ë½V§  ˆõ

¦µV ´ óT§ x–< j ¨#x? PÌ Days of the Week

® À m§ó x¨  À ®§óV mx¨< *§ó Èx¨ À ¨x¨ §ó À ‡ À µ§ó @x¨

Monday on Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday

X À S§ó <x¨ «§ó |x¨ À À À ó§ó ¨x¨

Friday Saturday Sunday on Sunday one p.m.

À À ó§ó xµ V ¨x¨ ¦– 1< ¨ëV ‘¥< R

on the weekend

Pronunciation Notes: The liaison rule applies when you say ®x¨ and ¨x¨; they are pronounced m À §ó À À ó§ó respectively as wo-ryo-il and i-ryo-il. Note also that @x¨ and <x¨ are pronounced as mo-gyo-il ‡ À µ§ó X À S§ó and geu-myo-il respectively.

Shall we ...? When we want to propose doing something we can say:

VST - (x)x? ˆ § ® À m§ó xµ ´ V ´ë§ x¨ ¦– w < n¢x? ‡ PR  F"§ , ;®x? O‰  ´ ´ ó§

add x.. 3 6ó ´ë À PT B2: 6. and thus female speakers tend to use: ˆ  3 6. let’s . VST .. 3   3 ˆ§  Shall we go to a movie tomorrow afternoon? Yes. Yes. you put x– first and then w .. We-ell . ˆ  Yes. ˆ Shall we meet at one o’clock Monday afternoon? OK. 1¨ n¢. we meet tomorrow.) We can also give a short answer as follows. add x. Shall we start? Shall we have a cup of coffee? Shall we sit here? NOTE: Unlike in English.< ¡x? 1ó xµV SFV ë§ À TV R B: 6. it is polite to use a non-committal expression such as below to show hesitation. or 6. And to say No. let’s meet tomorrow... ˆ The -(x) ending carries masculine connotations. w r §x? ‡‡ À U F÷§ # :©x? `Š If we want to respond positively.. VST . ¦µ ‡ ´ 3 6. ˆ.. to say one p. we . A: 6¨ ¦–< <.(x). 3 6ó ´§ ÀP or Yes. not the other way around. (Literally: Yes. let’s do that. 1¨ nx.  8x.m. let’s meet tomorrow.. § T§ § A: 6¨ n¢x? 1ó ´ë§ À PR B1: 6. rather than giving a direct refusal. we can say: NOTE: If the VST ends in a consonant. Shall we meet tomorrow? Yes. c G Shin 2006 47 . NOTE: If the VST ends in a consonant.x/#x/· · ·Bx... W ím§ ¢Fx .

as we’ve learnt. Monday three p. the negative counterpart of the verb ¨. How about Wednesday? Wednesday’s no good. ® À m§ó ¦µ V  sª§ ¬˜ B2: x¨ x– . ® À m§ó ¦µ V  § ” A: x¨ TDx? ¨§ó #J§ À B: x¨ q ×x. And to respond negatively.m.) You use the particle  - with a noun that ends in consonants. ó  48 c G Shin 2006 .(there is/are.. U ׌ Do you have time? No.(to be) and .m. is OK. There are three points we should bear in mind. it’s not tasty. Second.? or Monday three p. I don’t have time.  ªx. ¬˜ s"§ § ” NOUN is OK / good. we can say: NOTE: The question literally means How is/are NOUN? How about Monday afternoon? How about eleven tomorrow morning? How about now? How about a beer? NOUN #D§? TJx EXAMPLES How about NOUN? ® À m§ó xµ TJ§ x¨ ¦– #Dx? 1ó x½ ´  TJ§ 6¨ ¦ 2w  #Dx? À õ À‡ S #J§ < TDx? X ô w‡ ¨ ‡ ´ #J§ K‘ ´ r TDx? To respond positively. is good.   We suggest you treat them as exceptions. we can say: NOUN q éx. Note also that <x/<x and <x change to ¨ W§ V§ V§  ó and ¢ in Polite Formal statements respectively.? When we want other people to consider what we have in mind.  Æ"x. P ´ ק EXAMPLES NOUN is no good.m.  V§ <x takes a grammatical complement that is optionally marked with the particle - or -. j 2#x. to have) is 2. (As V§  we will study in Unit 10.  #Dx? ® À m§ó ¦µ V  TJ§ B1: x¨ x– . - and - are two variant forms of the Subject marker. P× U ̌ > ó† n ¨B? W ím§ > † ¢Fx. we can say: NOUN ƪx / ªx. ‘to not have’)..  Note that the verbs . ¨§ó ´ é§ ¨ óT§ ÀP ÂÌ 3 Using Negatives How about Monday three p. A: x¨ x– . Is it tasty? Well.=8» V Î How about . I’ve got classes. Unlike its positive counterpart. Ì ó ×  EXAMPLES ´ óT§ j ¨#x? PÌ § ´ T§ x. First. n 2B.(there isn’t/aren’t.(‘to not be’) don’t follow the rules we studied on Page 25. and - with one that ends in a vowel. the negative counterpart of “NOUN-<x/<x (am/are/is a NOUN or NOUNs)” is W§ V§ “NOUN-(/) <x (am/are/is not a NOUN or NOUNs)”. 2 ¨#x.

technology. ‡ ô ¸V§ P<x? § ¸ V§ x. No.  P ´  EXAMPLES  óV § ©< x? § óV ´ § x. R ˆŽ P S ‡QT O­" < ´<# <Ž®? X wT [ ‹ § S ´QT O­ ´ ‹ x.   =  <x. it’s not a book. ‘¥< v> q Bx. I’m not going home. whereas in referring to the minutes of the hour – a unit of measurement that can only be reckoned with reference to a relatively sophisticated measuring device – we use Sino-Korean numbers. such as art. Is it a book? No. they seeped in over the centuries and were adopted by a people who were strongly attracted to the grandeur and sophistication of many aspects of Chinese civilisation.  P ¨ëV ˆµ§ ‘¥< ë>Bx? R vŽ § ¨ëV ëµ ´ § x. Although the Chinese had a colony in the northwestern part of the peninsula between the first century BC and the fourth century AD. they were not spread among the people of the peninsula by force. Classical Chinese. although Korean has two sets of numbers. However. is there any doubt about which set to use. weight and quantity in the Western metric system. more precisely. ô  Is this green tea? No.(to do). Note that with verbs ending in . The influence of Chinese culture on Korea over the centuries has been profound and perhaps nowhere is this more apparent than in the spoken and written language. Rather. ô ô ¸ó P¨? § ¸ ó x. it is clear from the depth of the Chinese borrowings that there were many areas. c G Shin 2006 49 . it’s not a book. and religion. just as Australians are nonetheless Australian for responding to the attractions of much of European civilisation. P ¢. the q is placed directly in front of the -. ‡ § ˆ ‚ V§ x. In practice. you add the negative adverb q with a space P ´ before the verb. if ever. The co-existence of two sets of numbers in Korean reflects the co-existence of these two major spheres in Korean culture – the native Korean and the Sino-Korean. Is it a book? No. statecraft. it would be that in referring to the hours of the day – a unit of measurement that can more or less be reckoned with a tilt of the head up to the sun in the sky – we use Pure Korean numbers. science. X ‡T [ P ® 4 Cultural Note: Numbers Are you going home? No. We know very little about the shape of Korean civilisation prior to the penetration of Chinese culture into the peninsula. to say I/you/they etc don’t do such-and-such. The norms of Chinese civilisation did not enter Korea through invasion. rarely. metaphysical and aesthetic accomplishment and strove to apply Chinese norms to their own environment. The Sino-Korean system is used in referring to units of distance. < w<# <Ž q ". Of course. where almost 50% of the total Korean lexicon is derived from Chinese. Third. Do you exercise on the weekend No.   = <x. If we were to describe the difference in a nutshell.000 years ago. in which the Koreans recognised technological.¦µV ´ óT§ x–< j ¨#x? PÌ EXAMPLES  ‚W§  = <x? ‡ § ˆ ‚ V§ x. P <x. I don’t exercise on the weekend Are you studying Korean now? No. I’m not studying Korean now. ©< q x. a process that began in earnest about 2. that’s not green tea. As we saw above (see Page 35). that’s not green tea. they were nonetheless Korean for avidly responding in this way. this theme of technology extends to all foreign units of measurement.

is buying pens in a small stationery shop near her Korean university... ~‘ s<x. ~‘<" o#x...x......x. x.#x? P T P ¦ ³¨VX PT§ x.#x? <<" . € x. . ôá ¨ ­ ¨V§ ‹ Œ ‘..x? õ P õ BT V§ ˆí§ BT ë ë§  Ûx.. • Countries and People • Where do you come from? • Using Description Verbs • Where is it located? W HICH C OUNTRY A RE YOU FROM ? In this Unit we learn to exchange personal information about ourselves. PÄ 3 ¦ ¦V§ 6.#x? s<" S ³¨ TX oT§ ˆVX P P oT§ . .. ~‘ #" . @M<x? †û }V§ 3 6? . in particular. 6.#x. . @M<x.  3 6 }V§ †û ê O­§ ó <ŽBx? [ ‡T [ ´QT O­§ w<# <ŽBx.  §· 2<x?  Ú W§ Šõ À ‡ ´ ­V ¦ EV§ w Œ< xL <x.. 3 6. j!<x. . Shin 2006 . n. j! .#x. ³¨§ ³¨ FV§ ~‘x? ~‘ 6<x? .x.#x? Tˆ VX oT§ P In this Unit ..  . 1 Conversation Annie Brown.. . j!<" . Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: 50 P€ ´ÜV§ qÄ .  3 . .x? . õ  3 .. 6. s‰ q ¡ .  <x.. . 6.... Á õ RR õ ¼†„ ë ¤T§ Z … ˆˆR¼ ¹` W§ vw:q o% <x? õU 3 6? . Ì ¨¦§ ³¨ ¨¦Ù ˆ W§ sx? ~‘ sp s <x? ˆ ¦ BTW§ x.. c G. j! © ¨x. = ¨#x. ..... w<# #öx? ‡T ´QT TO§ 3 ¦S TO§ ´  óT§ 6. qÜ 5.#x? ¦ BTVX oT§ x. ! §õ # ¨#x.  . 3.. an Australian exchange student to Korea. y< #öx. .  · U óT§ Ö EV§ ŠÚ Ì õá S ® F‹ ´€ V§ 3". ˆ ¦ jTÙ  ³¨ ¨¦W§ B ˆ  s U ¹`V óT§ o%< ¨#x... õ!p . asking and telling people where we come from.=9» V Î 9 #r <" . X P Ì Tˆ VX oT§ QVX oT§ #r <" . a middle-aged man... She is talking with the owner of the shop.

....  3 • w<# #öx?: Is Korean difficult? Note that - (or -) is the Subject marker.. it’s near Sydney... • € x. Are you a student? Pardon? ..x?: Do you know Canberra? The stem of .. Did you say that Canberra is the capital city of Australia? Isn’t the capital Sydney? No. I once went there with my friends. Well. No. s is the capital city. ˆí§ Á ˆíx Á • s‰: friend(s) õ ¼† • - q ¡: together with . Australia’s capital. Bye. the capital is Canberra. But. Oh! Yes! Yes. I’m from Canberra. How much are these pens? They’re five hundred won each..#x: I visited .. I see .. in the vicinity of Brisbane ˆˆR¼ ¹` õU • <x?: Isn’t it ..? W§ • ~‘ s<x.< ¨#x: It’s located in/at/on .Tˆ VX PT§ #r <" . it’s . Use - ‡T ´QT TO§  after a noun ending in a vowel. it’s interesting.: It’s Australia’s capital.... V óT§ Ì • !: an interjection used to signal that the speaker is about to offer something good to the hearer. Can I have two.#x?: Literally.#x? o Translation Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Annie: Shop Owner: Hello. I’m from Australia. I see. ´ P • = ¨#x: It’s interesting....... What do you study? I study Korean. 6: Similar to “Oh.. That’ll be one thousand won. Thanks. thanks. umm . Bye. Language Notes • 6?: I beg your pardon? 3 • . ³¨§ • ~‘ 6: an Australian ³¨ F S • #" = #<": From where TX TVX • j! .. „ ë Z • . Did you come . … ¤T§ ¦ • vw:q o%: Literally. • y<: a little bit ¦S X • n: But . The verb stem of #öx is #Â-. Is Korean difficult? Yes. Shin 2006 51 .. c G. The stem is v. please? Sure.. Isn’t it near Brisbane? Pardon? . I’m a student.. I see. See Page 54 below. go and see).. Where abouts in Australia are you from? Are you from Sydney? No.(literally.. I do.. and - elsewhere. Australia? Are you Australian? .(to know.. .x is ¨.  or about to invite the hearer to do something that the speaker thinks is good to the hearer.. . to know about). ³¨ ¨¦W§ ¨¦ • . . is/are difficult. It is a  TO§ TÞ  description verb.. a little bit.x: Literally.. See Unit 10 for Past Tense. which means that . Canberra is .. P oT§ • <: the US Q T • ~‘: Australia ³¨ • ~‘x?: Did you say ho-ju? See Page 45 for more explanations.. Do you know Canberra? Of course..” See Page 45 for more information. Umm . õ BT V§ V§ ë R •  Ûx: Of course! Note that  Û§ is a ‘full’ sentence on its own... Which country are you from? Are you from the US? No.  óT§ Ì • #r : Which country .? See Unit 10 for Past Tense.... . “Please come again!”. This is a standard Insa from shop keepers to ¦ ¦V§ customers who are taking their leave. here are your pens. Tˆ  • -<": from VX • .

=9» V Î 2 Some Countries and Continents /-<  Q T w< ‡T ´Q ‡‡ ‡ ·´ · Aw/A ¦¥ y ¾ Àˆ óø ¨t D< ŽT „Q 7n ´ P Ž µ„ @q :|4 RˆF S Q @< T ëR ¥8 R ¼¦3 qs6 õ ¼¦ ¼ qs/q õ õ ˆ´ .

 ® . during the period of encroachment into China. The names for Korea The term w< (Han-guk) refers to the Republic of Korea. for example. ‡‡ ·´ · ‡ y (Jo-seon) was the first kingdom of Koreans which was believed to exist until 108 BC in the ¦¥ ¾ South of the Liao He river and the northwestern part of the Korean peninsula.  R 9 ˆ } Q Â< T Tˆ #r · · · -<" VX Australia Germany Russia France Italy Spain England. y¥ (Jo-seon-mal) ¦¥ F ¾ S ¦¥ë ¾R when referring to the Korean language and so on. such as Australia. Major Western Powers. Countries encountered later during the Japanese Colonial Period (1910-1945). reflect Chinese practice at the time. UK USA Asia Oceania Europe America Africa overseas which · · · from Korean names for countries Korean names for countries usually reflect the historical period in which Korea first encountered those countries. Shin 2006 . literally ’the North’. nation Korea (ROK) North Korea Korea (DPRK) Japan China Taiwan Mongolia Vietnam Thailand Malaysia Indonesia India Pakistan Iran Iraq ³¨ ¦ˆˆRó ~‘/xw|8¨ À ‡À µó >¨ N  ˆFˆ ´X }6w/§m" V Š‡ ë  ¬/@ R ˆR¼ wAq õ ÄT îQ ß< Q < T   ¦V x. and the name was also used by Yi Dynasty which ruled the entire Korean peninsula from 1392 to 1910. or Great Han ´¼Q ‡¾T Republic. So Korean terms for England and the US. 52 c G. for example. and was originally revived in the late 19th century. literally ’Northern Han’ or A (I-buk). wu ‡ ´ m ‡ ˆ ¡ country. North Korea usually refers to South Korea as 4y S ¾ F¦¥ (nam-jo-seon). The South Koreans usually refers to North Korea as either Aw (Puk-han). are named according to Japanese practice. were first encountered in the mid to late 19th century. South Korea (1947-). ‡T ´Q The full official title of the Republic of Korea is 7wn< (Dae-han-min-guk). Han is an age-old term denoting the inhabitants of the central and southern part of the Korean Peninsula. In the post-war era there has been an increasing tendency to simply name countries phonetically – the countries listed in Units 2 and 3 are examples of this. by South Koreans. and appropriate changes would need to be made in a North Korean context: y 6 (Jo-seon sa-ram) when referring to Korean people. These days y is ¦¥ ¾ still in general use in North Korea.

The Expression w.in w<. ". for example.. 4 Some More Useful Words R ë ¨- q „ · · · o%< U ¹`V -(x)t Ü ˆ « ®î Ä UN  #  v¦ a ë ¥½ í à° p T #Þ know and.. Chinese herbal medicine.E Á Ù ÀÁ óÙ ¨E ÆÁ ÙV / E< .#x? o 3 More Geography and Culture Words Ž µ X S · >. West.? toilette 53 . but each is written with a different Chinese character. Thus w<¥ (pronounced as Han-gung-mal) – the Korean language – is literally Korea language. -# is usually employed when referring to languages T such as English which are widely known in both their spoken and written forms. A 4 ‡ >: ŽV µG ": XG V D> ŽŽ „µ >A Ž‡ µ· >4 ŽS µF FR 49 S s ¨¦ 6/-q F ¼ S õ R ë T ¥/-# East.in w (han-ja) doesn’t have the same meaning as the w. alphabet Chinese characters Korea/Korean There is no special adjectival form for Korean nouns – they combine freely with each other. is w: (Han-yak). North the East the West Middle East Northeast Asia Southeast Asia South America capital city person language. S ‡T ´QT w<# and w<¥ ‡TR ´Që ‡TR ´Që w<¥ (Han-gung-mal) refers to the spoken language.. The ‡O ´G pronunciation and Hangeul are the same. and by association with a major Chinese dynasty this term often means Chinese in Korea. In fact it is the same ‡ ´ ‡ ´ ‡ ´ ‡T ´Q Han as in the Chinese Han Dynasty.. w< ‡TR ´Që ‡T ´Q F 6 (Han-guk-sa-ram) – a Korean person – is literally Korea person and so on.§ VÀ c G. (together) with in the vicinity of · · · be famous for many countries visit (Literally: go and see) be numerous be small (in number) be easy be difficult  ý -¿ × EÞ ~ À  ó = ¨Ì   = 2× ¦S y< X SK Number . F.in w ‡ ´ ‡ ´ The w.? *Fó È. words Ä îT ß# Š T §# ‡ µT ># ˆR¼T wAq# õ ëT ¤# T RˆT At# Àˆ óøT ¨t# ŽT „QT D<# W í ¢ ‡ ´ w English French German Spanish Arabic Persian Japanese Chinese letter. w<# (Han-guk-eo) tends to refer to ‡T ´QT the language in both its spoken and written forms. South. Shin 2006 be hot be cold be (nice and) warm be interesting be boring a little (bit) n-th floor Ground Floor On which floor .Tˆ VX PT§ #r <" .

etc. See Page 42 for more explanations. and can be judged from  the context.is used. It’s boring. E. 54 c G. the same rules apply. (See Page 23 for Polite Informal endings.(be pleased eg. ½ ‡ „V   can form the final syllable of description verb stems. We use - (for statements) and -/-§ (for questions) when the verb stem ends in a vowel.’ but rather makes an object statement ‘It’s hot/cold.(be famous). It’s hot. ‡ë oT „ë T Consider the following list of verbs. changes to n.(be hot).(to do homework).changes to x Ä B§ Þ ~ À =⇒ ®î§ ÜBx Ä Þ§ ~Bx À They’re famous.   ó  When the stem ends in consonants. It’s (nice and) warm. It’s cold.(be warm). Ü . to see you) and q¥. and Page 42 for Polite Formal ones. The counterparts in Korean of English adjectives are actually verbs: we will call them Description Verbs.(to telephone). add -#x T§ =⇒ We’ve already seen how . T§ We have met two such verb stems already: ´¡.(be grateful). if the final vowel in the verb stem is a or i we add -x. B= . a ë ¥½ í à ó = ¨Ì   = 2× add -x § =⇒ a ë§ ¥x ½ íT§ à#x  óT§ = ¨#x Ì  T§ = 2#x × They’re numerous. ®î Ä Þ À Whether the .(be cold) and ~ . eg.(to study). verb stems ending in . the  changes to n. and from the grammar of the sentence.(do) can transform nouns into Action Verb stems. That is. ~ .  p°  then add -#x T§ ý ¿ ×E =⇒ ‡ ´ § oöx „§ qöx TO§ #öx íöx õ§ Höx § ­öx ’§ I’m pleased. I’m thankful. But this is not the only way . With the verbs -. etc.transform to Bx.=9» V Î 5 Using Description Verbs Korean lacks the class of description words we call adjectives in English. To describe something we simply add the appropriate verb ending to the relevant description verb stem.) With Polite Informal. to which we then add -#x.’ As for the Polite Formal style. Consider the following description verbs.verb is in fact an action or a description verb is usually clear. Shin 2006 . It’s interesting. It’s easy. just as we do with the verbs we studied in previous units.(be warm). . ®î  Ü . Bear in mind that. ‡T ´ë o¡„ë q¥T T #Þ.  [ O­ õ* È . It’s difficult. adding the appropriate ending is indeed straightforward. with verb stems ending in . note that Korean doesn’t describe  ý ¿ × Þ À a personal reaction with temperature. by saying ‘I’m hot/cold. for all other final § vowels the ending is -#x. eg <Ž . Of course. They’re few. we use -B (for statements) and -B/x§ (for Œ † Œ † ˆó  questions). Look at the T§  § following list to see these rules in action.

. c G.? by saying: Àˆ óø #X oT§ ¨t T" ..#x? P ŽT „QVX PT§ D<<" o#x. VX and will be covered in Unit 10. we can use: Tˆ  #r  .. And where in Japan .<" . ie.. What country is (the) language (from)? It’s Persian.#x? P 7 Which/What Country Are You from? Where in Japan does she come from? If we want to ask specifically which country someone or something comes from. ie. What country is (the) person (from)? He’s/She’s Japanese. In normal conversation. ¥ 8 Where Is It Located? To ask this question we can say: What country are you from? I’m from China.. This aspect of <" doesn’t concern us at the moment. And we can ask.. Where’s the video shop? It’s near the station. " (from there. Shin 2006 55 . VX oT§ P U X #" (from here). the < is dropped when preceded by V To answer we can say T # (where).? EXAMPLES Tˆ <X oT§ #r V" .#x? o 6 Where Do You Come from? NOTES: When followed by x.#x.Tˆ VX PT§ #r <" . When <" is followed by an action verb that does not indicate motion it \ X VX indicates the locality of the action indicated in the verb. We can ask this question by saying EXAMPLES ®¯ˆ TX oT§  {Ù #" .#x? p P Àˆ óøVX PT§ ¨t<" o#x. .  (there. \ TX PLACE .v/p T< ¨#x? ˆˆ Þ Ù #V óT§ Ì To answer we can say: -v/-p = Topic Marker . ¨ ¦ Ù TV óT§ x 5p #< ¨#x? ˆ Ì ½U î ¹`V ÌT§ ß o%< ó#x. V ÌT§ ¨ EXAMPLES  "Þ TV óT§  ®v #< ¨#x? ‰ˆ Ì õ ¼¦V ÌT§ qs< ó#x. for example. Tˆ  FV§ #r  6<x? S Àˆ S óø FV§ ¨t 6<x. Where does Yukiko come from? She comes from Japan.#x? P preposition ‘from (a place)’ in English.< ó#x. X and $" (from there. Use -v after a noun ˆ ˆ Þ Ù ˆ Þ ending in consonants. # (here). ie. Tˆ  RV§ #r  ë<x? ¥ RˆRV§ Atë<x.(or indeed any other ¦ verb that indicates motion) <" is equivalent to the VX TX oT§ #" . and -p after a noun ending ˆ Ù in a vowel. far from us). and thus #" (from where). near you) U and $ (over there)... near you). .. ¨ Where’s Taj Mahal? It’s in India. .

.  ­ @: ó ¨: À ­ @: ó ¨: À ­ @: ó ¨: À TV ê ÿT§ #= ó †#x?  TV§ #=x? . • Things we do on a daily basis • More time expressions • Talking about the past • Dates: year. ¨<  ˆ ÀY À ^ ÀY ‡ ´< …Nü ÿT§ ˆ„ ß V oV <9¥ †#x. object and topic markers W HAT TIME DID YOU GET UP ? In this unit we look at ways of talking about the things we do on a daily basis with reference to time.  q I < ø½ ½  ¿ ^ ¿ ‡ õ ½ † }qV ëT§ ß  ´V U X ¼†ü @…< ¡#x. . UN  ÿT§  ¨ ëT§ ‘ ±#x? ^ W ím§ ¢Fx.... month and day • Subject. I  o< #" s‰¥ Z ½ Ì À V P¢ ´^T§ ë ü îT§ në#x. 1 Conversation @­ and Kylie are talking at the university canteen.. and also about things we did in the past.= 10 » V Î 10 Æ V óTëT§ / < ¨#¢#x? À ^ I N THIS U NIT .. ¨< < ¨#¢#x. #  †#x... ¡ .  ¥®x?  ë"§ R‰ 3 6? Ù TV óO V óTëT§ óO  p #= .

. . 3.#x.  q 2‹ Ž' ‹  À ‡T ´QT ¨ ó2T§ w<# 2 ¨#x...  q 2w  o< .¥ Þ#x... #. . 6 Ž' w j >q  3 ­N ´ ´ µ´ ‡ P ŽP ˆ> ëŽÿT§ ¼†„ ë ëµÿT§ vµ†#x..< B=¥ €½ ½ Uý V „Vü Ò ‡ ½ OÿT§ ˆ„ ´  ´V FëT§ F†#x.©#x. . Shin 2006 . õ Z ˆŽ   ´V óV ŠoT§ óO V   o< ©< .. 2 < ¦"dV ëT§ ¦XdVX ¨ ´ µ´ sX\< ¡#x. À‡ ‡ S^ ­  6 @: . #q... ¨< < à ‡  ¤ P ÀY \Ü Nü ÿT§ $½ 9¥ †#x. s"\<" ‹ j >q B ^ B P ŽP [  OŽÿT§ ˆ„ ¨ ­N ¨  <­†#x.. .. ‘ © ÞB! TÞ ¨ ë î† ‹ˆ R ̌ 56 c G. s‰ q ¡ v>†#x. . à99p ‹  ÌÌ ÁÁ½ ˆ íNNÙ ¨ < ÿT§ V †#x.

I left for . any way! Tae-U: Notes for Conversation • ó †#§?: What did you do? ê ÿTx  • #=x?: Did you say ‘yesterday’? We’ve met a TV§ similar example already... gosh! . Started homework at eight.. Ì ó2T§ • à9 9: lunch ÁÁ ½ íN N • v>†#x: I exercised.. à9 (lunchtime) and $Ü (evening) are times when one normally eats breakfast.. or There was/were . ¦½ õ ¦µ … < (morning).. Well done.) refer to the time before and after the midday respectively. . I did with my friend. (coming) this Friday (coming) this (coming) weekend ago one hour ago last year this year For how long (Lit. À ^ óTëT§ • < 9¥ †#x: I had breakfast. .©#x: I slept.....†#x: I began my homework. or ‘darkness’. daytime night one day in one day/per day this . By comparison.) • $Ü 9: dinner \€ N ½½ • B=¥ .. whilst 4 (day) and 8 (night) take ‘brightness’.. last Monday last weekend to have breakfast to have breakfast lunchtime.. And went to bed at half past eleven..) and x– (p. • # : various/many (kinds of) things UN  • ±#§?: Were you busy? ëTx ^ • : all  2 Time expressions (1) TV #= … < ø … N ü  < 9(¥) ø½ ½ … ÷ í <(©) ÜøŠ ½ ÁÁ íN à9 \½ $€ Ü W F 4 S F 8 Œ ­ ­V Œ< Æ P ´ / j .. dinner day.? last . And went to university at nine. ‡ ½ O „Vü FÿT§ • .? yesterday morning. Had breakfast at half past seven.. îT§ Ì • s"B<": in the library ¦X\VX d • ‹ j >q: for two hours ¨ ´ µ´ P ŽP • <Ž†#x: I studied. Met a friend at half past nine here. Were you very busy? Well. this is the first person singular pronoun in  Korean • ¨#¢#x: I woke up.... see 9Bx? on Page ½ Nc§ 33. . I did various things. .. Went to the library at ten.Æ V ÀTëT§ / < ó#¢#x? ¨ ^ • ¥‰x?: Shall I talk? R" 뮧 • : I. V ëT§ ^ • #": here/in this place U X • s‰: friend õ ¼† • n¢#x: I met.... shall I tell you everything? Pardon? Yesterday I got up at seven.. lunch evening.m.. Studied for two hours in the library. W F S F c G. (so that I was V oT§ Š P physically in ... ˆŽ ëµÿT§ • s‰ q ¡: together with a friend õ ¼†„ ë Z • -< ¤. Shin 2006 57 .. From four I exercised for one hour. I had lunch at two. breakfast õ ½V = .. P^ ´ëT§ • ¡: together Z ë • Þ#x: I drank.... Then I had Korean class from twelve to two.ç X¾ S <ç When . … Nü ÿT§ ø½ ½ •  q: And ˆ„ • -< ¡#x: I went to .#x: I came back . . At half past five came back home.? NOTES: x (a. as the point of difference.m.? ´ k (+ time word) P ´ §ó k mx¨ P® À ´ ‘ë k ¨¥ P R ½  (+ time word) õ ½ X§ó  Sx¨ õ< À ½ ‘ë  ¨¥ õ R - õ ½ ‡ Põ ´ ´ V w j ½< O¾ F . lunch and ø ÁÁ íN \€ ½ dinner respectively. how many hours) . [  O­ÿT§ • ‹ Ž': from twelve o’clock À¨ ­N 2 • ‹ : until two o’clock ¨  • ¨Ì#x: I had .. Had dinner at seven. Had coffee together... Oh... S^ FëT§ • #‹q: Anyway TÞ ˆ Translation Tae-U: Kylie: Tae-U: Kylie: Tae-U: Kylie: What did you do yesterday? Yesterday? ...

How many times do you eat (Lit. Page 25). the u is Ì T§ written in combination with the ensuing e.© x.#x. ^Ì ë T§ · · ·†#x. ½½ q ´ ‘ëV ëµ ´ ÿT§ k ¨¥< v> q †#x. and #x is attached.we choose †#x. to which we add e and #x.  ^ ëT§ When the VST actually ends in a we simply add #x. when the stem actually ends in i we T§ add a to i and then #x.© x? ­V ´ F÷ § Æ P SŠ A: ¨< j . When the verb ends in . For all other final vowels in the VST the ending is -2#x. Š¨ FV F ¨ ëëT§ . P R ˆŽ P  TVÙ ÞÿT§ #=p ~†#x. have meals) a day? I eat three times a day. There were many people in the market. : counter for times P õ ½ How many hours a day do you sleep? I sleep seven hours a day. -#x and Bx (see Unit 4. This rule is applicable to § T§ § both Action and Description Verbs. Shin 2006 . ÀY P SŠ óO ´ F÷ § Q: Œ< /  9Bx? ­V ½ N§ Æõ½ A: . ˆ À Have you done your homework? I haven’t had dinner. º 58 Did you read this book? Have you drunk all the milk? Tae-U was our friend. ® À m§ó„ ¨§óV óT§ À Ì 3 Talking about the past When do you have Korean classes? We have on Mondays and Wednesdays. ø… I played in the park.   ÿT§ EXAMPLES ‡ „V  T§ B=  ÿ#x? † \€ N P ÿT§ $Ü 9 ´ †#x. When did Tae-U go? We had an exam an hour ago. When the VST ends in u. Q: Œ< / j . It was very cold last year.= 10 » V Î How many hours/times a day do you · · ·? ­V ´ õ Œ< / j/ · · ·? Æ P½ EXAMPLES ´ j: counter for hours.ç<p ¨ ’#x. when the VST ends T§ in . When we want to talk about things that have happened in the past we can say ···    VST – ¨/2#x. c G. I didn’t exercise last weekend. we add -¨#x. V S a^ ­Ù V ëT§ @p ½= ¡#x? ˆõ ^ ‡ Põ ´ ´ V Z¤T§ w j ½< å. ˆ õ Ì O¾ ˆ FVÙ ‘ ­qT§ .as shown above) or i. V ½ N§ õ½ The question word = (when?) õ ½V EXAMPLES Q: w<# 2 = ¨#x? ‡T ´QT ¨ ½V óT§  õ Ì A: x¨ q x¨< ¨#x. -2#x and †#x according to ^ ëT§ T§ Ì  ÿT§ the final vowel in the verb-stem – just as we did to get the present tense -x. the  changes to n. T§ EXAMPLES  ¸ óTx  P ¨2#§? ô ÐÌ ­®  î#§   ÞTx? Ì ­Ù  ¼†îT§ @p ­ s‰ß#x.  9Bx.  ÿT§    NOTES: We choose from -¨#x. It was warm yesterday If the final vowel in the VST is either a (except for . thus g. T§ EXAMPLES [á OEVX ^T§ <<" £ë#x.< 6 ‘ ¥¨#x.

Æ V ÀTëT§ / < ó#¢#x? ¨ ^ 4 Dates To say the date in Korean we combine the relevant Sino-Korean number with year. respectively. we can say: õ ô  ¾ À® ÀÀ ֆ†ó¦ óm óó ‰L‰§xç ¨ ¨¨ õ ô ¾ ®  À ֆ¦ó ®m ó¦ó ‰Lx§ç  §x¨ õ ô  ¾ R®  À ֆó¦ ëm ó¦ó ‰L§xç ­ §x¨ ÖF m Fóó 9ç  9§¨ õS¾ ® SÂÀ ¦òÞ m *V§ x£v / Uª<x? Šˆ Æ® ÷ · · · · · ·¨<x ® óV§ m À 5 Some useful expressions ûÀ ó M¨ ûÀ ó M¨. month and day. but note: MORE EXAMPLES 1/1/1995 or 1 January 1995 25/6/1950 or 25 June 1950 15/8/1945 or 15 August 1945 30/10/2003 or 30 October 2003 What date is it today? To ask what date it is today. · · ·ç · · · · · ·¨ ¾ ® ó  m À EXAMPLES Year 1985 2002 January July June Day the 1st the 28th Month õ ôR ¾ ֆëó¦ ‰L­§xç ֍ ç õ ¾ À® óm ¨ ÷® *m ª ®m  (not C) ® ‡® ¸m ÀÀ óó ¨¨ óëó §­¨ ÂRÀ 1998 2016 February December October the 10th the 31st õ ô ÂR¾ ֆ†óë ‰L‰§­ç Öó¸ §Cç õ‡¾ m  ®  ® óm § m  (not §) ® ® óm ÂÀ óó §¨ SÂÀÀ Fóóó 9§¨¨ For months we use SK numbers.

? people (another counter for people) six people a lot a little live. customer Uª = /¨.? c G. Shin 2006 get up sleep late/sleep in go back come back learn practise usually frequently who .... take out / and put in the month and the day. reside 59 . Æ À óT ¨#S †F =. literally. õ ¼† s‰ ˆÁ óN u4 -Ü Ä î U î # Ü ÃÄ ¥ a ë y< ¦S X ë §R birthday birthday party friend guest. how many days ÷ ÆÀ * ó To answer..Š  ¤Š ¦ ¤x­ :õŒ ¾† B ¦Õ vG Á ¨ ‘ ž† Š‰ .

= 10 » V Î The adverbs ‘ (frequently), and vG (usually) ¨ ¦Õ Á In talking about the frequency of particular activities, events, etc, you can use these adverbs. EXAMPLES

Q: s"\< ‘ x? ¦XdV ¨ § B Do you go to the library often? A: x, ‘ q x. ¨‘¨< w  x. § ¨ ´ § ó¨óV ´ ½ § P À À ‡õ No, not often. I go there once a week. Q: @q< ½V x? † }…V õ= §  A: vG < 10< x. ¦Õ … V § Á ø
When do you go to university? Usually 10 o’clock in the morning.

Together with ... To indicate that you perform an action with somebody else, you can say:

NOUN – q (¡) · · · „ ë Z
EXAMPLES

NOTES: In this expression ¡ is often omitted. Also, despite Z ë the spelling, ¡ is pronounced as ga-chi, not as ga-ti. Z ë
I learn Korean together with my friends. I studied in the library with Seon-Yeong.

õ ¼†„ Z ´QTü § s‰ q ë w<#¥ :öx. ¡ ‡T ½ ¾Ä ¥î„ sXdVX O­ÿT§ ß q ¦"\<" <Ž†#x. B [ 

The particle <X (at, in, etc) V" If we want to indicate the location wherein an action, such as eating, meeting, studying, etc, takes place, we use the particle -<". VX EXAMPLES

Q: #" NBx? TX ½§ 9 A: @M 95<" 9Bx. † ½V }û NFVX N§ ½ Q: #" ´¢#x? TX PëT§ n^ A:

B<" n¢#x. ƒVX ´ëT§ Œ P^ [ ˆ© O­Ù ÂVX ¾†Þ }…VX § <Žp ó<", Bv @q<" Bx õŒˆ †

Where do you eat? I eat in the student canteen. Where did you meet? We met in the coffee shop. We study at home, and practise in the class.

There’s no special preposition in English to indicate the location of an activity, so you’ll have to pay careful attention to the verb to determine whether or not you should use <". VX

6 Time expressions (2) ŽP µ´ >q w j >q ‡ P ŽP ´ ´ µ´ ¨E À½ óN
EXAMPLES
for ... (duration) for one hour early

 † =5 À h 0N ; + NEG ½

late already not yet

1ó óN xV§ 6¨ ¨E ¦;x. À À½ ¨V ë † oT§ 2< 30t =5 .#x.  ˆ P À h m<§ 0- 6Vx. ® ‡ „V N ´ ÿT§ B= ; q †#x. ½P TVÙ #=p 10 j >q ;©#x. ˆ ´ µ´ FëT§ P ŽP S^
60

Come early tomorrow. I came to class thirty minutes late. It’s already June. I haven’t done my homework yet. I slept for ten hours yesterday.

c G. Shin 2006

Æ
V ÀTëT§ / < ó#¢#x? ¨ ^

7 Subject, object and topic markers
Let us learn about the particles / and ©/¥. The former is what we call the subject marker, and  Š½ ÷ü the latter the object marker. We use  and © after a noun that ends in a consonant, and  and ¥ after  Š ÷ ½ ü a noun that ends in a vowel. The simplest definition of the subject is that it is the answer to the question Who ...?/What ...? etc asked before the verb; the simplest definition of a direct object is likewise that it is the answer to the question Who ...?/What ...? after the verb. Suppose our answer to the question Who likes Korea? is I like Korea, then the subject here is I and the object Korea, for example. Like v/p, ie, ˆˆ ÞÙ the topic marker, / and ©/¥ have no clear equivalents in English.  Š½ ÷ü

ûÀ õ ó VW§ M¨ ½=<x? † }… ÄT« êW§ @q î#t ó<x? ß ¨F÷ ½T§ 8© í2#x. OŠ ÜÌ ü îT§

not that some further comment is  following on the word(s). but in a different manner – we’re indicating that the word(s) in front of / add to what you know already. Before /. whether you understand the distinction at this stage is not. What we are actually doing is announcing that what follows in the sentence relates to the word(s) indicated by the topic of conversation. ½q Ì The 3rd of March is my birthday. My birthday is the 3rd of March. in our view. and  (I) becomes 1. when these markers are present. it is very likely that what follows / is what you know already. I didn’t drink (any) juice. I didn’t drink. as you have noticed. Usually the first question asked by students is: What’s the difference between v/p and /? In ˆˆ ÞÙ  fact. Let’s contrast these points. ® À m ó V óV§ ûÀ ¨ˆÙ P îT§ ‘wp ´ Þ#x. Most students acquire a sense of the difference with time and exposure. or It’s juice that I didn’t drink. c G. I drank coffee. We’re picking out one of a number of possible items for your attention and then making some statement relating to it. ž  6 ž†ü § Š‰¥ ªBx? ½” ž § Š Âx?  ½ § È ü ªBx? ¥” § 1 ü § x. then the following note may help you.¥ Þ#x. I like Jihui. ® Àˆ m óÞ V óV§ ûÀ 3 3¨ = M¨<x. Shin 2006 61 . or The 3rd of March. The Korean subject and the object markers are often left out. But if you are concerned about gaining an understanding of this distinction now. A final note about / is that it gives rise to the following two variant forms. however. Thus. ˆq Ì ¨ˆü P îT§ ‘w¥ ´ Þ#x. in the course of fluent. 3 3¨v = M¨<x.  With /. Š‰   ž† (who?) becomes Š. or The juice. ½ Ì When’s your birthday? What is hak-kyo in English? I ate watermelon. a matter of great importance when we think of all the other fundamental aspects of Korean you need to come to grips with. it’s my birthday. 6 È¥ ªBx. If you recall what we’ve already said about v/p you’ll recall that v/p gives emphasis to the ˆˆ ÞÙ ˆˆ ÞÙ word/words in front. we’re also involved in emphasis. informal speech. or It’s the 3rd of March that is my birthday. ½” Whom do you like? Who’s coming? Is Jihui fond of me? No. The  Š½ ÷ü same thing can be said about ©/¥. If you look back to the Language Notes to the Unit 5 (Page 26) and Unit 8 (Page 45) Conversation Pieces you’ll see a detailed explanation of this point. they are probably best thought of as a form of mild emphasis or as an indication that the speaker tries not to confuse the hearer. Thus. I didn’t drink the juice.

¥ H s. 1 Table Insa . Food. We’ve prepared nothing. © ½ÌŒ UÌ > óT§ n ¨#x. thanks. There are a few more toasts in Korean. • Table Insa • A Korean meal • Common ingredients used in Korean meals • Buying food and meals • Some common Korean dishes • Shall we . or for one member of a party to suggest to the others that they begin..? B ON APPETIT. ‘’ is an interjection commonly used  to encourage an action from the hearer which the speaker believes would give pleasure.x? 3 ” ½" N®.. Let’s take..x.. Here. Lit. Lit. Here’s cheers. help yourself. See also Page 39. Your only defense then might be to say this expression politely – literally. it means No... ¦ ë íT§ a ½Ì R í† ë Ü2B. I’ll eat well. an expression used when you start to eat It’s tasty! Lit. ¾  ¹ Œ R í%† ë ÜÃB../Take some.x... If you are being entertained in a very traditional Korea way. ¼ s ´ õ¾× P a ˆV§ ë s. an expression used by the host/hostess when inviting you to help your self Bon appetit. Shin 2006 . 9 ‹ s:!/>. ¥ Ü2#x. There is flavour (in this food). Note that this expression has masculine connotations. but these are the standard suggestions to raise a glass of alcohol. Looks good! Lit. © ½ÌŒ 62 c G. This is the standard compliment about the quality of the meal.. eg.  ˆV§ m  2n . clothing and shelter are the three basic material necessities of life – and food is surely the most talked about. I’ve eaten a lot. In this Unit. a standard invitation from the host for a guest not to hold back Have some more. a ˆV§ ¥ I N THIS U NIT .x. I’ve eaten well..x. s.. we learn about Korean food and eating habits so as to extend our ability to interact with Koreans socially.  ˆV§ Á  V§ N ª. an expression used when you finish eating x. We strongly advise you commit it to memory and use it often for the pleasure that it will give your hosts..= 11 » V Î 11 ë s. an exhortation in the middle of the meal for the guest to refill the plate Do you like Gimchi? Let’s eat! This is the standard way for a host to invite a guest to begin a meal. No more. Lit. but . Take a lot. your hosts may continue to press food upon you. a drink.

is an irregular verb to the extent that  changes to n when followed by the -#x ending. when it’s harvested it’s ². such as eating. Therefore.x.vs Ü-: When referring to a small number of basic human activities.. 3 T ë¨V§ 3 Common Ingredients of Korean Meals (1) „ q wq (w) œ„ œ é„ ×q (×) é £q (£) b ë„ b ë G„ :q (:) V V G meat beef (cow. Thus. in the shop or on the plate. of course.can mean use as well as write (see Page 25).x. À ø • }. we have one word for rice whether it’s in the field. bull) pork (pig) û¾ ¥ M  B¦ Š RR ëì £¡ Ž Ú F ¨­ ‹Ž fish seafood egg beans tofu chicken . For the Korean language learner the challenge is simple: when someone uses .a ë ˆV§ ¥ s. or sleeping.x? in addressing you. whether or not there is a b ë b ë following vowel. and it’s the same in Korean. when the verb stem ends in ˆ ˆ the vowel s.meat (chicken . BF© s Ü#x (I can’t À ø VŽŠ À ½ FÚ÷ ø íT§ À ø P ´ eat peanuts). the s drops out when attaching Polite Informal ending -#x. In English. as we saw on Page 25. . ©.bird) lamb. speaking. B6 q 6© T§ ‰ O „ F„ # F÷ ú OŠ h§ -x (We use spoons and chopsticks). In English we often say I couldn’t do it when we really mean I didn’t want to do it. is preventing us from doing À ø something we can place the negative adverb s before the verb.. allergy. ©.. T ë In Korean.. if it’s in the field it’s !.. try to like to dislike to prepare a meal to cook • ¦: cooked rice. T ë¨V§ 3 ½ íT§ Ü#x and avoid saying 6. mutton (sheep) • The pronunciation of £: The  in £ remains silent in Modern Korean. it’s best to under-use q and over-use (or so it P ´ may seem to you) s. T ë¨ ½ í giving. • s: When we want to say that something out of our control. For example. The ù ù T§ gimchi is a bit hot will be 3  D 9öx. you need to have the mental agility to reply with 6. c G. Shin 2006 63 . Korean speakers use special verb forms to indicate that they regard the person they are referring to as being of a higher social status (see Unit 14).. . The difference between s (cannot) and q (do not) is the difference between being prevented from doing something and deciding not to do something.) Á N ‚ § ‹ • ©. (See also Page 54. we can never use these verb forms in referring to ourselves. and when it’s cooked it’s ¦. 2 A Korean Meal & Some Related Expressions ‹½ ¹N C9 ë ¦ T Q < T  5 os ‡‡ ´´ ‰ O „ F B6 ú O # F 6 ˆ ¤À ø s µN –9 ½ food cooked rice soup hot-pot style of soup side-dishes spoon chopsticks use cannot dessert ¦ˆ }¡ ˆ } ù ù } T ë¨ ©½ íT¦ Ü#v”  ª Ö óT §# ‹½Š nŠ ¹N÷ P÷ C9© ´¤§ x - fork knife be hot (in taste) be salty eat (respect form) taste. than a deliberate non-performer. U R ë T ë • ¤-: ¤. Thus. Since it’s always more polite to be a victim of circumstances. eg.

= 11 » V Î 4 Common Ingredients of Korean Meals (2) >  :’ ­ ¨  V F­ 9’ < S X ¦ x úÉ ãó n¨ VŽ FÚ BF vegetables Chinese cabbage white radish lettuce spinach/greens cucumber sesame leaves peanuts „­ q’  .

the French word for bread. Spare ribs cooked in a similar manner to §q. Š ¾ } Ù <? chili peppers shallots garlic sauce soy sauce chilli sauce soybean paste sesame oil 5 Buying Food and Meals § x „Q§ D<x ŽT ŽT‹½Á „Q¹Ní D<C9à À½Â óNó ¨9© ‡½Â ´Nó w9© }. sesame seed and sesame oil. for instance. ò £ Š -. cooking Chinese cuisine a Chinese restaurant a Japanese restaurant V F C V Fó C©  í ܽ ¨ë ‘s ˆ ˆŠ ø÷ 1 q© 6  - bread bread shop. ¦F V 95 ½V NF V½Â GNó Rw«F :9©/8ˆ|6 V cuisine. „­F q’. It is then cooked over a charcoal or gas fire. bakery to buy to buy meals (Lit. V ¬V oF ^. spring onion. Pork Galbi (× ¡) is also served in more informal Š „ é ë R settings. ¦ N Á Small dumplings with meat filling. garlic. When we say just 3 we mean cabbage Gimchi. therefore. cucumber Gimchi. It would take a little while to explain how two or three Portuguese words got into Korean. Shin 2006 . similar to pain. would be x 3 . V F PV ´F j. on a perforated metal dish with a raised centre or on a gridiron. Thus. Continued on next page 64 c G. The meat – usually beef but in more informal settings pork is also used – is marinated in various condiments including soy sauce. sugar. usually eaten with a soy and vinegar sauce. we Á N name the vegetable. but any book on Japan’s history will tell you the tale of the Portuguese in Japan. If we want to specify a non-cabbage 3 . in much the same way as ice cream is presumed to Á N refer to vanilla ice cream unless we specify otherwise. 6 Some Common Korean Dishes Š „ §q R ë ¡ Á N 3 P ´¨ n‹ Korean barbecue. buy and eat) order (eg food) pay be cheap be expensive a traditional Korean restaurant a Western-style restaurant a street food stall food court • C: if F sounds a little familiar it’s because it has reached the Korean language from Portuguese via Japan V C F V and is.

topped with a fried egg.   Š ¬V oF  The suffix ú3 on the names of dishes indicates that the food is being deep-fried in light batter in a N Á similar fashion to Japanese tempura. and then sliced it into bite-size pieces.  úN Á This suffix indicates a noodle dish. which   doesn’t! Don’t get alarmed if you see $5 ó<x.v/px?: What (or How) about · · ·? ˆˆ Þ Ù§ The expression “· · · . Á N 3 is dried green seaweed (laver). pickled radish. R V ëF 7 Some language notes About the question 5 ó<x?: What’s this?  êW§ By now. sunny side up. EXAMPLES Q: . carrots. The ingredients are then combined together by vigorous spoon action. The main difference is this. fish. 5 is the  êW§  combination of  (this thing) and  (Subject marker). the difference between   the two questions is in fact very slight. Thus > 3 is mixed vegetables deep-fried in batter. It allows us not to repeat the whole question as in the examples. Thus 3 5 is a hot soup where the most prominent ingredient is Chinese cabbage Gimchi. such as J – the cold noodle dish of North Korean origin which is a ľ Hõ summertime staple. Steamed rice served in a bowl with a number of side helpings of finely-chopped Bulgogi. At best. which we learnt  êW§ in Unit 6 (see Page 33). etc. Grammatically. you wrap around. mushrooms. Á N  More examples include: B¦ 5 (seafood Jjigae). and meaning-wise. T ë ©> Në 8¦ ÁT ÁT Në 3¦  5 N ú3 Á - ¾ õ -</-> T V Q F Sweet potato noodles and finely-chopped beef and vegetables stir-fried together. meat.  ¾ This indicates a soup. It has the Subject marker after all. you can take 5 as carrying a mild emphasis in line  with what we explained in Unit 10 (see Page 61).a ë ˆV§ ¥ s. etc.v/px?” can be very handy.x. the most common of which are Manduguk (n‹<: dumpling soup) and Galbitang P T ´¨Q (¡>: beefy. cooked rice ÁT Në Á N and finely chopped/sliced carrot. and “5 ó<x?”. spare-rib broth). ^. etc. The suffix 5 on the names of dishes indicates that the food is cooked ‘hot-pot’ fashion – in a soup over  high heat. or õ – the ever-ready instant noodles. spinach and bean sprouts. 5 (soybean paste Jjigae). and eaten with chili sauce and a side soup. you might wonder what the difference would be between “ ó<x?”. with a thin layer of 3. To make 3¦. when we’re asking a kind of contrastive ˆˆ Þ Ù§ questions that involve more than one persons or things.  5 ó<x. $5 and  5 are $ and   plus \ êW§ ˆ êW§ \ ˆ \ ˆ the Subject marker respectively. The expression · · · .

I do. Shin 2006 65 . "x. = p (")x? ‡ ˆ ‚Ù O § A: q "x. @p ( Œ< / j w<#¥ <­B)x? ­Ù ­V ´ ´QTü OŽ § ˆ Æ P ‡T ½ [ A: Œ< F§ t <ŽBx. Q: = px? ‡ ˆ ‚Ù§ What about Green Tea? cf. ­V ‡ ´ O­§ w P[ I do one hour per day. "x?  O§ Do you drink coffee? A: 6. Q: îp Œ< / j wQ#¥ <ŽBx? ¾ß ˆ ¥ÄÙ ­V ´ ´TTü O­§ Æ P ‡< ½ [ Seon-Yeong. Q: @px? ­Ù§ ˆ How about you. ­V Só ë O­§ 9 ˆ [ I do thirty minutes a day. 3 O§ Yes. Tae-U? cf. how many hours per day do you study Korean? A: Œ< ´ j <ŽBx. c G. P ´ O§ I don’t.

It’s not surprising. From its temperate climate and surrounding seas. it is a simple and wholesome way of grabbing an inexpensive quick bite. which tend to feature soups based on beef and chicken stocks with accompanying rice and side dishes. for soups. but nevertheless it contains a lot of pleasant surprises. often representing regional traditions of cooking. and offer a richer. but for the most part it’s difficult to find a restaurant in Korea offering food from more than one style. Pine nut broth. Palace food has a very complex. and greatly modified since then to satisfy with the demands of the Korean palate. People normally order a set menu based on price. For Australians who are usually familiar with Cantonese or Szechuan cooking the resemblance will be rather less than more. Korean food shares a number of dishes with Japanese cuisine. To start off. bell flower roots. Shin 2006 . of course. precise tradition of food preparation. with an occasional meat or fish dish. and even simple instant noodles. chicken and. this is the tradition of royal cooking – Korea’s haute cuisine.= 11 » V Î 8 Cultural Notes: Korean Food Korean food perhaps lacks the variety to become known as one of the world’s great cuisines. Palace food consists of an amazing variety of flavoursome wild plants. as a small geographical area with little internal climatic variation. The food served within will resemble Chinese food more or less depending on what tradition of Chinese cooking you’re used to. Overseas Korean restaurants usually offer a kaleidoscope of Korean dishes drawn from a variety of these different cooking styles. chili. salt. everyday food. 7D C9: Literally the food of the masses meaning ordinary. more diverse array of Korean dishes. requiring years of training and a good deal of labour in its preparation. pork. spring onion. it draws the inspiration for a rich tradition of pickling or drying fresh foods for later use. Korean food is also broadly similar to Northern Chinese cooking though. mushrooms. The most common methods of cooking are slow simmering. then. but. but Hansik restaurants in Korea are more up-market than ordinary restaurants. Ž „* § DÈ x: A sign written in Chinese characters on a protruding signboard decked out with scarlet strips of plastic and cloth usually announces the humble and ubiquitous Chinese restaurant in Korea. For most visitors to Korea this will be the best way of getting an idea of what Korean cuisine is really capable of. fish. fruits and seafood. at its best. or else broiling over a hot charcoal fire for beef or pork. the food served in D< C9à is descended from regional cooking brought to Korea ŽT ‹½Á „Q ¹Ní nearly a hundred years ago from the Shandong region adjacent to Korea. that there are few palace food restaurants. soy sauce. For most people. People use Chinese restaurants like 66 c G. The most common meats in Korea are beef. and garlic. These are mostly to be found in major hotels in Seoul. fermented bean paste (Doen-jang). [Ž ‹½ Q„ ¹N <D C9: Literally palace food. and from its long winters when fresh food is hard to come by. however. Characteristic seasoning tends to be sesame oil and seed. It is protein-rich and relatively fat-free. In some cases they overlap. gingko nuts. ‡½ ´N w9: The title simply means Korean food. but is generally more robust and pungently flavoured. the experience of eating in one will be unforgettable. By way of quick comparison with its neighbours. and are extremely expensive. Korea lacks important sources of the culinary variety enjoyed by China. Korean restaurants offering bland versions of Korean dishes are widespread in Japan. Basically. and get a number of courses. You’d be most unlikely to find any strong flavours like chili or garlic here – only the very subtle use of condiments to enhance the natural flavour of a predominantly vegetarian cuisine. abalone mushroom are typical ingredients in a cuisine which offers one of the most striking examples of the deeply rustic. At its worst it is like canteen food. This is what you get at „ ¹N Ž ‹½ small restaurants typically around universities. white pepper. ethereal strain in Korean aesthetics. nuts and berries. Korea draws a wide variety of vegetables. perhaps we’d better list some of the main styles of Korean cooking.

agricultural. in which people traditionally contrasted their settled. We’d advise you to observe Korean attitudes to drink carefully rather than just accept this reputation at face value.x (Eat plenty of meat!) to counteract any tentativeness the guest might „ ë ë¨V§ a T feel. for guests beef is often laid on in abundance. In fact. Beef is the prestige meat in Korea. To begin with. unless otherwise specified. but is still õ ½ ¼@ ‡R ‚ë not very high in Korea. relative to pork and chicken (the other two major meats). in a very traditional mode of hospitality. Attitude to meat The Korean attitude to meat is different to the Australian attitude in a number of ways. The idea of a quiet. Interest in foreign foods is growing slowly.a ë ˆV§ ¥ s. rice and Gimchi. breakfast tends to be a hearty meal. It „ is therefore expensive. so q tends to mean beef. even when pressed by their hosts. Most cite the smell as the main reason and. although this is changing particularly in cities like Seoul. Shin 2006 67 . the use of alcohol is socially and ceremony-bound. and to the onlooker there may seem little distinction between the meals in terms of the food eaten. mutton-eating and milk-drinking ways of the Mongols and other northern barbarians. Also behind the attitude seems to be a deep-seated cultural reflex. just as Á N 3 tends to mean just one kind of Gimchi. with strongly flavoured soups. almost all non-Korean restaurants outside the major international hotels are either Japanese. Foreign visitors will lose no respect by displaying a similar degree of self-discipline. this is perhaps not surprising. though sitting down and having round after round with work colleagues is more common. and business colleagues are unlikely to risk losing their inhibitions until they are very familiar with the company they are in. Attitude to alcohol Koreans have acquired something of a reputation as drinkers over the years. Other restaurants: There are various other types of restaurants in Korea specialising in particular dishes. There are also more elaborate Chinese meals at up-market establishments usually found in the major hotels and in expensive neighbourhoods. and it is considerably more expensive than pork. c G. shared with the Japanese and most Chinese. and the evening meal is moderate in quantity and generally eaten early. and in the course of a normal household meal it is rarely eaten in the amounts that Australians are familiar with. In formally entertaining foreigners Koreans will rarely hit the bottle. a host might say to a guest q ¥ ©. relaxing drink or two after work is not common. moderate attitude taken by most people in Korea. as is consuming considerable amounts of alcohol on weekend group picnics. It’s not as if the Chinese. the dietary reflex seems to persist. green pea S V FF P ´ flour pancakes (o7ç) or pigfoot (D¦). Lunch is usually little more than a snack. it is extremely rare to find a Korean who does not express a strong distaste for lamb. of course. In cities. These might include ginseng chicken (95>).x. and. catching a cheap unpretentious bowl of noodles or dumpling in the Northern Chinese style. Meals of the day Koreans eat three meals a day. Buddhist vegetarian dishes (p>). beef-eating ways with the nomadic. pastoral. As befits a people with strong agricultural roots. and this reputation can obscure the very careful. But since the constant threat of northern invasion was a major theme of their respective histories in pre-modern times. fast food outlets. Above all. Japanese and Koreans continue to look down on their northern neighbours. since getting drunk together is an expression of close friendship. seeing that no distinction seems to be made between mutton and lamb in Korea. highly indigenised Chinese or else Western-style fast food outlets. However.

´ ´† ñO§ P ‡‹ À ¨VX ¼‚ýÙ§ E<" nBxpx? á ¾‡» ˆ W ím§ ¢Fx.. nBx<p #5 x?  t x. about asking people where they come from.. and describe our own travel experiences. 6. Now we bring these two themes together again to learn how to find out basic travel information. nBx< ¡x? ½ ¨ëV ê § ­ ¼‚ýV ë§ õ R ¾‡» R ¾B» ¼‡ý§ n‚xx? . ­ … V XîŠ ë® ¼‚ýVX . 30 tN +¤ <x.. à9<p ¡¥ íC. ” § ªx.  q <" ¨ˆ « § ˆ„ ¨EVX E p ÷ á ¾‡» ¼‚ýÙ Tˆ« § ¨Eî ëVÙ ¼‚ý Ù Tˆ nBxp !wt x. ” ¨EÞ ë«¦ ®îx ë V§ v ¡ts ÜB§.. áÙ  4t x. • Transportation and Travelling • What number bus do you take? • How far is it? • How long does it take? • Locations • The Emphatic Particle -s ¦ D O WE GO BY TRAIN .. Á ÁÁ ˆ R ½ ܌ c G.  q x–<p á© ‰Ø®. < 8 < "©ß÷ «¦". 3. ªx. ß ¨<p nBx p !w ˆ á½ [ ˆ ¾‡» ˆ a ë§ ¥x. 1 Conversation ­ @ and Kylie are talking about going somewhere this coming weekend. ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: 68  ‘¥< ó Bx? .  6 . ªBx. ´ †I§ ˆ„ ¦µVÙ ¨÷ †I‹ P Ä ˆ EŠ Ä" 3 § 6..= 12 Î V » 12  t x. p 2 +x? ¨EÙ  ñO§ á ˆÀ À 1 j oN +x. ” ˆí íNVÙ ëü ½¹  Û. .x? ሠR Ä R ” 3 § 6.. ˆ‹ ÀÀ ë† ñó W§  3 . !wt x? « § Tˆ« § I N THIS U NIT . OR BY BUS ? In Unit 4 we started learning how to identify places. and where places were located..  7. The Folk Village ¥<x? R ëV§ 3 6. in Unit 9 we learnt a bit about the countries of the world. nBx<" 10 Ž' ø Š½© ½R‹ ¾‡» ­N 2. . ¡ ª . Shin 2007 . ˆ½L ¼‚ýVÙ T: § õ ¾‡» ˆ Ê « § Tˆ« § !wt x? û « § Tt x... ¸ 3 6? ŽS ‚FV§ =5<x. . 3 j ‰ØBx.

It often means that. that’d be nice. . that’ll be really nice. We go by subway to Suwon. Mm. !wt x? « § Tˆ« § Translation ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: Kylie: ­ @: Kylie: @: ­ Kylie: @: ­ Kylie: @: ­ Kylie: @: ­ Kylie: ­ @: What are we doing this weekend? Shall we go to the Min-sok-chon? Min-sok-chon? You mean the Folk Village? Yes.? ˆˆ Þ Ù§ • ¢Fx: We-ell W ím§ • VST . Then we’ll have two to three hours at the Village. Oh. view scenery.. or do we go by bus? This is an « § Tˆ« § ‘A-or-B’ question in Korean. ˆ„ • 2. set off ½R ë •  q: And . About how long do you think it’ll take to get to Suwon? About an hour and half. Let’s set off from Seoul Station at 8. Then. • · · ·v/px?: What about . then .. ŽS ‚FV§ • -: up to  •  4: subway  ÷ • · · · ¨<: in front of · · · [ ëV • nBx p !w: bus going to the nBx ¾‡» ˆ ¼‚ý Ù Tˆ ¾‡» ¼‚ý • 2 Àx?: How long does it take? À  +O§ ñ • -N: about..?. rather than actually good in its own right... how shall we go – by train or bus? We go by plane. .(x) <x: is going to VST . ˆ½L õ • #:5: how T Ê •  : train  •  t x. More precisely. to the number expression ‹ † concerned. about 30 minutes perhaps? I see. Shin 2007 69 . And to the Folk Village from Suwon? Well. ˆí Á c G. • T: airplane ¸ û • =5<x: I’m just kidding. !wt x?: literally. • The Folk Village ¥<x?: Do you mean ‘Folk Village’? You use the construction · · · R ëV§ R ëV§ ¥<x? when you need additional explanation of what has been said.. Do we go by train. you provide the · · · as an additional explanation and ask the hearer to confirm it. Literally. 3 j (‹. j): two to three hours ´ ¨ V ´ P P • ‰Ø -: watch an event. But.. let’s have some kalbi for lunch. where two questions are juxtaposed... take a look †I Ä • -s: an emphatic particle meaning also ¦ •  Û: Well. . • 6... •  7: By the way. and then by bus to the Folk Village.. Suwon is also famous for Galbi.. Language Notes • : we ­ • The nBx (the Folk Village) is a large tourist park some thirty kilometres south of Seoul in ¾‡» ¼‚ý which many aspects of traditional Korean village life are on display. This is a future tense marker (see Unit 14). x: ªx can be relative rather than absolute.. Lots of buses go there from in front of Suwon Station. given the 3 ”§ § ª ” alternatives. How about . Do you like Galbi? I sure do. I see. something is preferable and acceptable. It’s a joke. not prefixed. Pardon? Just kidding.00. t x. approximately Note that it is attached. and in the afternoon let’s have a look at Suwon. ˆ W§ • «¦ -: depart.

ship aircraft train urban electric train the subway tram. street car car ½  õ Tˆ !w „‚ Tˆ qB !w ‡ bicycle bus express bus for inter-province travels [ O}Tˆ ¨¼Tˆ <@!w / r!w õ limousine bus to and from the Airport ¦« x| -(x)t ˆ« motorbike by (means of). with 6 !w .= 12 Î V » 2 Means of Transportation  : ¸ T û  /  À 2 õ÷ ½ 4   4 ÷ õ ½  µ > Ž Buses in Seoul boat.

We go to school by bus. ÷« ë  t ¡. I’m writing with a pencil. > µ Ž     4 ÷ õ ½  self-move-vehicle steam-vehicle ground-under-steel electricity-vehicle ½  õ À  2 û T ¸ õ÷ ½ 4 self-rotate-cart line-vehicle fly-travel-machine electricity-steel Of course. 4 T 70 I eat Korean food with chopsticks. However. a lengthy one. or a means of transport as in the examples below. Let’s go by subway. EXAMPLES ‡T ‹½ˆ ú O ´Q ¹NÞ # Fˆ« íT§ w< C9v 6xt Ü#x.F Tˆ V «? !w zÕ Tˆ º œ6 !w rF Tˆ V RF Tˆ ë3 !w ±V ‘Blue Bus’ (urban bus travelling between Seoul CBD and outer Districts) ‘Green Bus’ (urban bus travelling between a subway station and the nearby District) ‘Yellow Bus’ (urban bus travelling within a District) ‘Red Bus’ (urban bus travelling between Seoul CBD and a Satellite City) ‘Guessing’ the meaning of words The task of learning enough vocabulary in a foreign language to enable you to function in most situations is.means by itself and mobile means moving. this happens in English too. Shin 2007 . The instrument may actually be an implement. µ Ž where auto.(x)t to indicate the instrument by which we accomplish something. and the counterpart in English for > is automobile. † }…V Tˆt § @q< !w« x. ½ õÀ ¾ót h§ ­« -x. and more and more we come to recognise these. of course. c G. you’ll find as time goes by that this task is made easier by the fact that Korean vocabulary items are often composed of common elements. The Instrumental Particle: -(x)t ˆ« In Korean we can use . In this unit the literal meaning of some vocabulary items is as follows. The ˆ« x is inserted before all consonants except  – note the case of ­t and  4t in the examples ˆ õÀ ¾ó« « ÷ below.

!wt x? « § Tˆ« § 3 Travelling BH d: \' BH½ d:J \'G U¸ #T û U¸ #T û ¸ ¢ ¸ Ù î ¢ . t x.

(x)t B" to indicate ‘by a route that ˆ « X passes through . we usually add <" (just " before vowels) before the  Ž' to indicate that it is a physical location that is the starting point..(x)t B" ˆ « X get on. get into.’. EXAMPLES 6 Ž' 9  <ŽBx. ( ¥) q -/xü „ ½ ¦ DESTINATION p !w ˆ Ù Tˆ travel pass (Lit...(<)"Ž' V X­N . set off commute (Lit. off a vehicle go on foot.. we use . go to .  .Ž' ­N .p o ˆ ¸ ¸ T¢ û  ¢ ¸ -. V F ´¸ j¢ P     > l U  ¢ W tourism tourist trip. X<X ­´ ¸ ü „ § "©V" Žp T¥ q x. ­N  O­§ [ We study from 6 to 9. ½ À ^ We walked from here to the station. Š P û ½ Ÿ¶VXŽN ½¥ˆ« X « ëT§ ŠC<"­' xt B" t ¡#x. the beginning point in an order of precedence... transport card) from (a time) from (a place) to (a time/place) via The difference between “@q< §” and “@q< x” † }…V 0x † }…V § From .. and ­N VX X - shows a limit. À † U X­' î ñTX ë#§ #"ŽN ß +#" ¡Tx. and in fact the ensuing Ž' is ­N ­N often omitted... Shin 2007 71 . charge the seaside the countryside ( ¥) ü  ½ 1 6À ñTX +#" ¦} s< † ½R ë «¦  SK ½ !w õ  Tˆ …Õˆ qG s Á . ‡ õ¾ ^ c G.. We’re going from Seoul to Busan by plane.. token ticket counter plane ticket train ticket (counter for tickets) timetable distance fare. to . a bus going to . With distances. Note also that in talking about our trips..... catch a vehicle ride get out of. We went from NY to Rome via London. regularly) Bus No . In Korean -Ž' shows a starting point in time... ® À m§ó­' «§ó }…V § x¨ŽN |x¨ @q< x. walk arrive depart.... voyage travel agency ticket... however. We go to school from Monday to Saturday.

éx? = does it amount to? ק To answer. ‰ õ !w¥ q Âx. I take the number 3.. -¥ = object marker.  = up to/as far as. 2 = V X ­N   À  about how much?.?. How far is it (from the place we’ve been talking about) to here? It’s 10 kilometres. 3 bus. 9  !w¥ x. ½ † }…V * O †  Tˆü „ § @q< ª. õ  Tˆü § ½ EXAMPLES Æõ  Tˆ½ § / ½ !wü x? ¥ SôSÂS õ FFóF  Tˆü § 9L9§9 ½ !w¥ x. substitute a Sino-Korean number for /.(<)"(Ž') PLACE B .  2 ×x? V X ­N    é§ À NOTES: -(<)"(Ž') = from (a place). you can read the number digit by digit. Shin 2007 . PLACE A ..  = number.. ÷ [ ½ ½ 6 How Far Is It . !w = Æ õ ½ Tˆ bus... 3.. x? = do you take? ½ ü § NOTES: When the SK number is greater than one hundred... 5 What Number Bus Do You Take? To ask this question we say: ƽ õ Tˆü § /  !w¥ x? ½ NOTES: / = How many . substitute 2 with the relevant distance. So . By the way ..  = subject particle. (between sentences) But . ½ S 9 Sõ F S F ½ Tˆü § 9.. To answer.. À«N ק « How far is it from the station? It’s 4 kilometres... 72 c G.= 12 Î V » 4 Words for Expanding Sentences ˆq  „ ´ n P ˆX  8" And .  = distance. F. ¾  õ ˆ½L  7 õ Or . À  EXAMPLES U X­N ß   é§ #"Ž' ½  2 ×x? How far is it from here to the station? î À 2 «t' éx. Æ SK ½ !w¥ x. ½ îVX   é§ ß<"  2 ×x? À 4 «t' éx. I go (Lit come) to university by bus number 709. À ó«N ק It’s 2 kilometres (from here).. <. À ó«N ק U    é§ #  2 ×x? À 10 ót' éx.? To ask about distances in Korean we say: What number bus do you take? I take the number 333 bus.

00. When we are referring to time in the context of casual or social arrangements. It’s about 5 kilometres from here.N ‹ † Æ / = How many . Æ It takes PK hours. N corresponds to the English practice of adding about in similar contexts ‹ † – Come about 7. Š P ˆ P‹ À U X­' î  #"ŽN ß  5 «t'N ×x.?.. ´ ñO§ PÀ Time/Distance . See you about 3. substitute a Pure Korean number for /. !wt x? « § Tˆ« § 7 How Long Does It Take? To find out how long something takes we ask: Æ PÀ ´ ñO§ / j +x? PK j +x. ‹ Come again around 3 pm.00. ¦µ †  ¦V§ x– 3 N  x.x. t x. It takes about 6 hours from Seoul to Busan. ½ À ó«N† é§ ‹ It’s about 5 kilometres from here to the station. N often follows the ‹ † time (or distance) concerned.. X<X ­´Ù ´† ñO§ "©V" Žpp 6 jN +x. etc. 8 Some Locations ] ëV ¦< [ ëV ¨< É V 2< outside in front of next to P ´V q< íV ñ< Wˆ õ FÞ ¾V 7v < inside behind opposite EXAMPLES ŒÞ î ëV óT§ . Àx? = does it take? ´ P ñ +O§ To answer. j = hours.

pŠ ½” Š ½” Ji-Su likes Bulgogi. Tae-U likes Bulgogi too.  óVX \€÷ íT§ ¹NíVX¦ \€÷ íT§ ©<" $Ü© Ü#x. ½Š ½ ‹½Á ½Š ½ R ë« ®Ä§ œ¨«¦ ®î§ ¡t îBx. ¨t<s x. v/p and ©/¥:  ˆˆ ÞÙ Š½ ÷ü T ë § ´¨¦ ”§ ©> ªx. -<" and -(x)t: s V VX ˆ« ‡T ´QV § óøV¦ § w<< x. -<. It’s opposite the station. Bˆ ½ [ Ì ‹½Áˆ <á É Ì ¹NíÞ [E V óT§ C9àv O 2< ¨#x. ¦ is added to any other particles. *Fóˆ î ´V óT§ È. VÀv ½ P Ì 9 The Emphatic Particle s ¦ The coffee shop is in front of the station. It replaces /. It’s also famous for Soju. eg. Shin 2007 73 . Àˆ I’m going to Korea. Ü Ä I eat dinner at home. Àˆ [ However. The toilet’s inside the station. w‘ts ÜBx. ¨ˆ „ ü § ­¦ „ ü § Ù §q¥ ªBx. @s §q¥ ªBx. ” P ª Japchae is nice. I’m going to Japan too. ¦ s is an emphatic particle with the meaning too/also. c G. ‡T ½ < ´QTü [­§ óøT¦ O­§ w<#¥ OŽBx. I study Korean.§Þ ß q< ¨#x. C9à<"s $Ü© Ü#x. I eat dinner in restaurants too.ƒv ß ¨< ¨#x. The restaurant’s next to the park. I also study Japanese. ¨t#s <ŽBx. n‹s x. It’s famous for Galbi. Mandu is nice too. ½ Wv õ Ì î Fˆ ¾V óT§ ß 7Þ < ¨#x.

.  q 4>M ÙÞ F ˆ„ FµÔ ¾ˆ V SŽû ?v à<x. the little one that says “C (miaow)” V F µ Ž µ Ž ¨ È OÄ Fî 8Ü= Ä ÜC %îµ Ä‡ O F­ FF Fì Fí­ 8@ 89 8v 8à OV Oˆ OÄ 74 c G.= 13 » V Î 13 D ‡ ‚ I N THIS U NIT . • x: elder brother • õ: elder sister • 4>: „ ¦ ½  SŽM Fµû younger brother • -Â: ’s (Possessive Case Marker) • ?: name • : daddy (endearment form) • ß: mummy Ô Ù ¾  Á í (endearment form) • Þ@: (respected person’s) name • ®!: grandfather • -: (for a respected person to) Ċ ¶} ‰ "T Š  ¤ die. 5 5„ „G óT§ Ô V Ì ?v 3.. puppy • C: Lit. ˆŠ Ì Š  ¼   ìT§ ¤p  3ç ½2#x. ˆ v3 ‚V§ ‡ ­u4» "N 5q.. ÙÞ µW§ ¾ˆ Ž Language Notes • -6: ’s (when used with a personal name) • D: family • Žu4: parents • -»/- = q: NOUN and NOUN • 3 ‡ ‚ ­¦N Á Î  „ ‰ "  ®N: grandmother • VST-(TENSE)-q: SENTENCE. We also learn to make ‘longer’ sentences. ފˆ ‰ "TÙ  îT§ ®!p ¤Þ#x.. FV§  ë ë§ S Z R .. • 9‰: family members • -n: ˆ  ìÌ 2 ½ N† ´ P SENTENCE.  q q: ÙÞ F ˆ„ „GÔ ¾ˆ V V ?v C<x. • Family members • Periods of Time • Using the Possessive Case Particle -Â Ô • Using the Comitative Case Particle -Â/-»  Î • What’s your telephone number/name? • “How long has it been since .. but . ¾ ¾ Ì ˆ3 N†Ù ¦¨ óO ì6 9‰p u‹ ¨< v ½ ˆ ÀY 6<x..  xÔ ¾Þ ­„ ½Ô ?ˆ õ ?v 9. using a couple of conjunctive endings.  q.  q ®N ć ‰ Ä}Þ ¨W§ ¶@v È<x. Ž¦NÎ ‰  „ Á ® ¦ . In this Unit we start to gain a feel for this complexity as we acquire a basic vocabulary for describing family members.  ˆ„ ¼VÙ ´ õ ˆ× P  q q: ¨#x.?” • Making longer sentences using -q (and) and -n (but) „ ´ P FAMILY The Korean family unit is an extended family unit whose complex inter-relationships contrast strongly with the Western nuclear family system.. 4>M ¨#x. • 3. and ...  ¡ §x. pass away • VST-(x)  TIME PERIOD ½-: It’s been TIME WORD since . x ½ Fµ óT§ õ SŽû Ì ¦ Ùv @q. 1 Yun-Mi’s family ì6 D<x.  Þ@v ÙÞ í­W§ Ô ¶}Þ ¾ˆ Ä ÄŠˆ Oî„ íÔ ¶}Þ FÜ=q ß Þ@v 8Ä Á Ċˆ %îµWx ˆ„ "  ÄÜC<§. Shin 2003 . r<p 2n.

6 S   /<   /< Tã #r » U # S F 4 ¼ <q õ S õ F ¼† 4 s‰ U ¼† # s‰ õ  4 ˆG V family family members a family of five all together a total of 3 people baby child adult woman. Siblings. y ° R relative TÔ A ! å (married) û ˆ ÙTÔ 1 y! 6 TÔ Fµû ! 4> (married) SŽM Oˆ FÞTÔ 6 . you can use the expression  4 as in “ 4 s‰<x (He/She is just a friend)”.v! Oˆ FÞT  .v#N S» Fý 9x Fý Â9x S» „¦ ÂBu ‡ ¦ u ¦­ uŽ „¦ qu „¦­ quŽ ý x » ¦ ¦ë y . female man. niece Language Note: To say so and so is just a friend of mine.. Shin 2003 75 . ˆG V ˆG ¼†W§ Võ c G..v! 1 TÔ AV ! å= (unmarried) û T Ô ¦ FŽû #N x. as it is õô ¼Z sá ˆ ÙT y! ˆ ÙT  y#N Oˆ FÞT . dad dad. (maternal) grandfather (maternal) grandmother husband wife son daughter 3 Other People D ‡ ‚ ½ N† 9‰  N†  9‰ ý ¦¨ u‹ ¦¨ V F u‹ . daddy parents (a male’s) elder brother (a female’s) elder brother (a male’s) elder sister (a female’s) elder sister younger sibling younger sister younger brother û AV å=  9 ‰ "  ®N ‰ "T ®! ¦­¦N yŽu4 Á  Â"T ®! ‰ "  ®N ‰ Sõ F¾ 4 1 6 ÷ ¤ Š R ë ° brothers sisters grandmother grandfather grandparents maternal . #> ŽM „¦Ô F qu 4õ S¾ cousins nephew. sweetheart boyfriend girlfriend simply. mum mum. 4µ S>M FýÔ 1 Â9x 6 S» T Ô ½ UŽû #N . rather than your boy/girlfriend. mummy father. male lover. #µ õ >M ¦Ô F u 4õ S¾ TÔ ž Uµû ! Š. Spouse & Children T  #N ß Á í T !   ­¦N Žu4 Á û A å x ¦ ž Š õ ½  >M Žû µ Uµ #>M Žû 4>M SŽû Fµ mother. Grandparents.D ‡ ‚ 2 Family: Parents.

. 9 ¨.. l. ­ (two days). ¯ ­ ü ½ ½  (three days).  ¨.. get divorced ‘re-marry’ move in (ie to one’s current address) move away (ie to a new address) pass away (for a respected person to die) 5 Periods of Time: Summary Here is a summary for how to refer to periods of time in various ways. To ask: Æ ˆ ŽP ë µ´ / t >q . c G. Thus.) ´ µ´ V P ŽP 5 ¨ >q (x) À ŽP ó µ´ ¦ 7 ¨ >q (ª) À ŽP ÷ ó µ´ * for 4 minutes for 10 minutes for 2 hour for 3 hours for 5 days for 7 days for 1 week for 6 weeks for 1 month for 8 months for 4 years for 9 years LANGUAGE NOTES • More traditional expressions for days are Œ (a period of one day).? Æ R ŽP ë µ´ / £ >q . etc.? ÷ ŽP * µ´ To answer: How many minutes? How many hours? How many days? Æ À >P ¨ó Ž´ / ‘¨ µq . Shin 2003 76 . ‡ À ´ ¨ó ¨ ¨ó V ¨ó 3 ¨ó À À À • Note also that the forms Þ£ for . £ (three months) and Ù£ for 6 £ (four months) also ½R ¶ë Vë R ½R ë 3ë R exist. period of time for how long . nine. . PK numbers can also be used.. get married divorce.. don’t be surprised if you hear Koreans mentioning w ‘¨.) À • In talking about weeks.. ‘¨.? for SK years move house ‡ „ Dì ½Ù ? ¾ Ċ ¶} Þ@ ¨œ ‘w õ õ ½*½³ È~ O» G :| À» ò +|  | »  =| » die be done.. etc.? Æ P ŽP ´ µ´ / j >q . x ¨. etc.? SK ‘¨ µq ¨ó Ž´ À >P PK £ µq R >P ë Ž´ SK ç µq ¾ >P  Ž´ 1 ‘¨ µq (¨) ¨ó Ž´ ó À >P À 6 ‘¨ µq (C) ¨ó Ž´ ¸ À >P ‡ 1 £ >q (w) R ŽP ‡ ë µ´ ´ 8 £ >q (#-) R ŽP ë µ´ Uý Ò 4 ç >q () ¾ ŽP  µ´  9 ç >q (‰) ¾ ŽP  µ´ † How many weeks? How many months? How many years? SK t >q ˆ ŽP ë µ´ PK j µq ´ Ž´ P >P SK ¨ >q À ŽP ó µ´ EXAMPLES for SK minutes for PK hours for SK days for SK weeks for PK months for SK years 4 t >q () ˆ ŽP ë µ´  10 t >q (§) ˆ ŽP Â ë µ´ ó 2 j >q (‹) ´ µ´ ¨ P ŽP 3 j >q (. (five days). become name (a respected person’s) name address telephone number be engaged to marry. say...   ½ U > ÀÀ óó ó Fó  À SÀ À ó ¦ó ¨. (These are instead of ¨ ¨. but seemingly only up to. ¯ (four days).? Æ ¾ ŽP  µ´ / ç >q . 6 ‘¨....= 13 » V Î 4 Some Useful Expressions #@T  „~ q@  ŽP µ´ >q 2 >q ...? À ŽP  µ´ SKç µq  Ž´ ¾ >P   ¦ x ¤Š   be born grow up home town for.? Uª >q .. ‹ ‘¨.

Z I do my homework with my friend.. p û „¦­Ù q¦Ô F¾V§ quŽp „u 4<x. W§ V§  ó c G.. ­. The pronunciation of the syllable  can vary according to context. Note that this runs counter to the practice with other particles. We use -  Î  after a vowel. ˆ ÙT y! is one’s father’s elder brother.: the Possessive Case Particle -Â Ô When we want to say that such-and-such belongs to so-and-so. and then we give the following numbers individually using Sino-Korean numbers.x? Ê To answer you simply give your name and -<x/-<x or -¨. ‡ˆ À» Susan married George.x is a more polite form for ×x. we can say: Ù T é§ ? #:5 ×x? ¾ Ê or NOTES: ½.’. ‡ ˆs „VÙ õ† ë § B=p ¼‰Â ¡ Bx. however.. T Ê é§ ì T§ is it done/shaped? To answer.. Shin 2003 77 . meaning ‘in (the prefix V area) . Note also that in V normal colloquial speech  is usually omitted.’. There’re many dogs and cats in my (Lit. ª.. it is pronounced as though it were in fact written /</.. and when it is Ô Ô the Possessive Case Particle. we usually give the district digits as one number followed by <.  ˆ V a Ì 8 What’s the Phone Number? To ask this question we can say õ õ ½*½³ T é§ È~ #:5 ×x? Ê NOTES: #:5 = How .)  Î „ When referring to marriage. Ċ ¶} T ìV§ Þ@ #:5 ½. ôˆ Á¾ûÁ ô ­Ù îÔ ¼†W§ @p ¥ß s‰<x. we give the numbers individually using SK numbers. ×x? = ½. 7 Doing together with . Ô EXAMPLES  ¸Þ ߥNÔ ¸V§  Pv IM4 P<x. ˆ Sõ This book belongs to Mrs Hong. „¦­ quŽ is one’s father’s sister’s husband. in contrast to the English ‘A married B. which we’ve learnt already. ­ óVÙ  „G ë óT§  ©<p 5 q: ¥ ¨#x... Î where the forms of the particle which have initial consonants follow preceding vowels.?. we can link the item concerned and the owner using -Â. ‰. (In general -Â/-» are interchangeable with - q. our) house. Thus 3456 6789 will be 9Lx§C< C. You ìV§ é§ use ½. ˆ ‡ À» George married Susan.’ EXAMPLES ¨´Þ y ò|ÿT§ rv ¦ +†#x. note that Korean says ‘A married with B.+ #x = .x when the person you speak about is a ìV§ respected one. ˆ ¾Ä õ ˆ ÙTˆ TÔ AV§ y!Ù ! å<x. Tae-U is Seon-Yeong’s friend. ¦Ù ´Î ò|ÿT§ yp ¨r» +†#x. Sõ ô ‡ ‡ ÷ R Fց¦ó¸V ¸ * ë † With Mobile Numbers..: the Comitative Case Particle -Â/-»  Î When we want to indicate that we’re doing something with a person we can use -Â/-». and -» after a consonant. 9 What’s Your Name? To ask this question (not in an abrupt way).D ‡ ‚ 6 It belongs to .

78 Tae-U studied English. ìÌT§ 2 º pT§ To answer: VST . We eat Korean-style food with spoons and chopsticks.. · · · VST2 .. It’s been five months since I started Korean. but Ji-Su studied French. Two sentences. [  ¨EÙ « „ ¨E<X p  4t q. ˆ  ½T§ Ì EXAMPLES ³¨V ¦¼   ìT§ ~‘< xp  2 ½2#x? ¾ À Ì How long have you been in Australia? F  ë´  ë ºT§ 7   «¦w  30 t p#x. Gimchi’s a little hot but tasty. ÃRº 11 Making longer sentences . complementary meaning-wise.q.· · · „ EXAMPLES ‡T ˆ ´QTÙ =ó„ ¨ p† w<#p ¨q ‘ B. Shall we go to Su-won by the subway. ‡½ˆ ú O ‰ O ´NÞ # FÎ „ Fˆ« í´ w9v 6» B6xt Ün. ­Ù QVX O­ÿ„ ¨Ù @p <<" <Ž†q. Ì °Œ ¦Ô ÙÞ ­„ Ô ¾Þ x ?v @q. Shin 2003 . ½2#x? = .· · · ´ P EXAMPLES ­Ù ÄTü O­ÿ´ ¨Ù @p î#¥ <Ž†n. p ˆ T [  ˆ ÄT îQVX O­ÿT§ ß<<" <Ž†#x. øŠ ܈ ‡ P‹ Ì It’s been an hour since I had breakfast.n. and Ji-Su in the UK.  = about. Korean’s difficult but interesting. ‡T < ½ O‡ ´QT [­ü F´   ë pT§ w<# OŽ¥ ..? To ask this question in Korean we can say: VST . Tae-U studied in the US.(TENSE) . p ˆß ½[  P ˆ Š ½[  Tü O­ÿT§ §#¥ <Ž†#x.(TENSE) .(x)  2 ½2#x? ˆ   ìT§ À Ì LANGUAGE NOTES • v/ = noun modifier form. V" á ˆ ÷ á ¾‡» ¼‚ýÙ Tˆ« ë§ nBxp !wt ¡x? ˆ R Korean is interesting and very easy. O ½R‡ ˆ“ …÷ ½Þ  ´ ´† ìT§ <© ív  w jN ½2#x. and then from Su-won to the Min-sok-chon shall we go by bus? However.. but we do Western-style food with forks and knives.(x)/  TIME PERIOD ì2#x. when we want to combine two seemingly contradictory sentences we can say: · · · VST1 . Ì Á ˆ‹ù PUÌ NÙ ‚ }´ > óT§ 3 p D ùn n ¨#x. My elder brother’s name is Tae-U. and my elder sister’s name Sang-Mi. ½ P V½ˆ GNÞ ¦ˆ ˆ« íT§ :9v }¡Â }t Ü#x. ½ ‡T ˆ  P ´QTÙ #´ óT§ w<#p TÞn =¨#x. can be combined into one as follows. · · · VST2 .. c G. õ Ùv ¾ˆ ½ ?ˆ V FW§ 9<x.w   £ “#x. · · · VST1 .= 13 » V Î 10 How long has it been since .. has been ˆ Þ  À   ìÌT§  done/completed? • ½#x is often shortened to “#x.  = since. 2 = How much (time). It’s been thirty minutes since the last train departed.

Thus eldest sons continued to live in their VF . and the family is typically an extended family that includes cousins. Discussing the Korean family system is a vast and fascinating topic. It may be true that fathers (and. Korean society has passed through a rapid period of social change since the Korean War (1950–53). In contrasts to the Western pattern of a nuclear family of independently-minded individualism. c G. side of the family. women who seek to challenge or extend the conventional role of women meet with formidable obstacles. However. We suggest you take the opportunity of discussing it with any Koreans you may know. the sons left to establish their own households.D ‡ ‚ 12 Cultural Notes: the Korean Family The traditional Korean family typically consisted of three generations living under the one roof – the grandparents.S parents’ house after marriage. The eldest son was the sole inheritor of his father’s property. As a result it is hard to generalise about the modern Korean family. for that matter mothers as well) are generally more pleased if they have a son than if they have a daughter. while the other children left home at. While families may vary in terms of what they actually arrange. When we look at the formal roles ÂP ó´ played by men and women in Korea it is easy to focus on the subservient role of women. but a debate that concentrates on such negatives finds it easy to overlook the enormous informal power wielded by Korean women. male dominated. their eldest son and family. The position of head of the household passed from eldest son (called F4) to eldest son. The Korean family unit is. and unmarried younger children. Shin 2003 79 . rather than as an individual. ancestors whose names were recorded in a clan genealogy register held by individual households known as a Jok-bo (Dv). or soon after. Korean women exercise a decisive influence in the rise and fall of families. you should gain a much greater insight into how the Korean family functions than is possible from merely reading about it. including interaction with their children and responsibility for the household finances. but often the terms of those choices have long been set by the women of the household. not only taking care of household finances but also investing any surplus in a bewildering range of formal and informal financial institutions. and to some extent the mother’s. uncles and aunts from the father’s. who can call upon a wide range of social services and benefits. while pooling its financial (and other) resources to a far greater degree than its Western counterpart. It is customary for Korean men to hand over their entire pay packet to their wives and then draw an allowance. while women deal with the household. it may be true that the oldest male member of the household has the final say over a good many family matters. marriage. In short. The eldest son provided the link to line of ancestors that may go back hundreds of years. Family members become used to thinking and acting as a unit. and the daughters to live in the household of their husbands. and through their financial acumen. The wives are then responsible for handling the rest. and that. In modern Korea the family remains the key unit of society. Through their constant interaction with their children and with other female members of the extended family. and aware that they belonged to such-and-such a branch of a clan. Talking about the doings of family members is a very natural topic of conversation for most Koreans. and provided the questions are not too intrusive. The accepted Korean male role is to deal with the ‘outside world’. children growing up in a Korean ‡ ‚¦ household became familiar with their family’s ancestry. As a matter of course. like the Korean society in general. In practice this means that men practically exclude themselves from household matters. like their Western counterparts. the vast majority of Korean children today are still raised in a system that continues to have many elements in common with the traditional system. it is still a principle in Korea that upon marriage the daughters leave the household for their husband’s household and the children of the marriage belong to the husband’s clan. (Perhaps ‘clan’ in modern Korea can be ©q). this extended Korean family determines many key aspects of the shape of its members’ lives. and was the only person who could perform the rites of clan ancestor veneration.

= 14 » V Î 14 I N THIS U NIT .... Shin 2003 .. • The Particle -n (only) P ´ ½< ó<x? õ[ O êW§ W HAT ’ S YOUR MAJOR ? In this unit we learn to talk about our educational experiences. and so we learn how to express these as well.. 7 § D á Š ^ R ®E÷ „ «¹}…V  ©  q z>@q< አŽ† R ë J «¹}…ü Ž† ½ † ó}ÿT§ ¨@†#x. † ½ ŠÂ‰ ⇐ ⇑ ⇓ 80 c G. • Before/After . p 6 ë D ˆ § ®EV ÷TëT§ ë J  < ¤#¡#x... >† † 19 § D q>@q¥ ª2 q R ë J „¹}…ü „ Ž† ½ ŠÂ }…V ó}ÿT§ 7@q< ¨@†#x. This often involves talking about our likes and dislikes. 22 § D † † R ëJ }…ü " W§ 7@q¥ ª2® <x. • Education • I’m going to . looking back to the past. 13 § D z>@q¥ Š2 ÂÿT§ ˆ„ „}…V ª†#x. • I want to . 16 § D D@q¥ R ë J „}…ü Ž† ½ ŠÂ „ „Ž}…V ó}ÿT§ ª2 q q¹@q< ¨@†#x...  ⇒ ­W§ @­Ù R J @<x.  q D@q< Ž† † ó}ÿT§ ¨@†#x.. 1 A story about @­ . but also looking to further study and graduation.

< ¨@ V ó} † . appear. we usually say (x) = inserted if VST ends in a consonant..... VST .. D J 10 § D R ëJ . situation. à  W§ <x = is. arrive come in go in. enter an ‘entrance’ ceremony Ž†û „} D@M „¹} q>@M Ž†û } 7@M †û }E 7@M †áû ŠÂû  ª2M †û ó} ¨@M a middle school student a high school student a university (undergraduate) student a postgraduate student a graduate a new student testamur. Shin 2003 81 .. R ë J }…ü " W§ † ½ ŠÂ‰ c G.. õ R ôŠ Њ ‡T ˆ õ R ´QVÙ V ë W§ w<<p ½= ¡ <x? 1V ´QTü O­" Wx 6ç< w<#¥ <Ž® <§.(x) <x. finish junior high school (Years 7 – 9) senior high school (Years 10 – 12) secondary school graduate school school entry graduation graduation ceremony Vocabulary Expansion: Guessing the meaning of words  ¦ xŠ ÷T¦ ¤#xŠ ÷T ¤#†½ ó}N ¨@9 ŠÂV F ª2... years old the time when . matriculate go into graduate come out of complete.. When are you going to go to Korea? I’m going to study Korean next year.©/¥ ª2 Š ½ ŠÂ ÷ ü  .. ˆ W§ EXAMPLES ½ ‘ëV ¸÷ ó÷ W§  ¨¥< P© ¨© <x. leave a place come out of. When we want to talk about our plans for the future.. I’m going to graduate from (my) university at the age of twenty-two.  = ˆ indicates potential state..< ¤#V ÷T Š ..õ[ ½O êW§ < ó<x? 2 Education: Some Basic Expressions ®  á E «¹}… z>@q Ž† Ž† „}… D@q „¹}… q>@q Ž† Ž Ž† „„¹}… Dq>@q }E 7@ †á † ó} ¨@ ŠÂ  ª2 ŠÂ½ N ª29 kindergarten primary school PK § R ë .©/¥ xŠ½ ÷ ü ¦   - .. at the age of ten attend (school..©/¥ Š½ ÷ ü  .  =  = thing. etc) enter school. I’m going to read books this weekend. a diploma of graduation a primary school student 3 This weekend I’m going to . «¹} z>@M Ž†û go out of... ¾ ‡T ½ [ ‰ 22 § D 7@q¥ ª2® <x.

..? mid-term/semester examination do well in an exam not do well in an exam school holidays a major a minor subject of study Language Notes (Some Irregular Verbs): The verb >. 2. B© ‡ ‡Â B ‡ „ ˆˆ t| ¨Ù u .ç [ 눫 ¨xt before that after . before PK hours before SK days 82 c G. fail (a subject) receive an education overseas student boarding.. V ·÷ ÷T§ @Š Š Language Notes (School Years): We refer to a person’s year of schooling as follows. etc (Lit. after PK hours after SK days after that this year last year in the future private academy. dorm part-time work Which . To make a Polite ‰ ¹ ε÷ ¹ ‡Š ‰ Informal statement. 2. we say . class year) semester/term (1. or ask a question.. Shin 2003 .literally means to listen.. etc) end of semester Ľ ¶í Þà †Á }í @à (. we change the syllable-final  to  and add #x.. run an organisation first of all before . with this verb stem.. »µ© ¤#x (I undertake three subjects). get a job earn money ˆ ½V   < õ -–< µV PK j µ< ´ –V P SK ¨ µ< À ó –V ˆ µV   –< Š  ©B O¾ F .? ˆ marks..in »@© >. ½ ˆŠ À ø÷  q© 0†á }E @ ÄĊ Iî÷  Øß© õ ½\ $ -< õ ½V PK j < ´ ½V Põ SK ¨ < Àõ ó ½V enter the workforce... results credit points undertake ..= 14 » V Î 4 Education: More Expressions SK @ç †¾ } (SK) @ † } @¥ † R } ë ŽP ø „´ Z Dj å Z÷ ë ¦ å© © vøŠ R Z÷ ø v å© s ¦øŠ À V† F} 8@ õ[ ½O < ­½O Ž< õ[ ε »@ ‡ Year 1. «¹}… † ¦ z>@q 5 }ç (x) Ž† @¾ «¹}… † ¸ z>@q 6 }ç (C) Ž† @¾ ‡ Ž† „}… } ó D@q 1 @ç (¨) †¾ À Ž† „}… }  D@q 2 @ç () †¾ year 1 of primary year 6 of primary year 2 of junior high year 2 of junior high „¹}… † ó q>@q 1 }ç (¨) Ž† @¾ À „¹}… † F q>@q 3 }ç (9) Ž† @¾ S }… † ó 7@q 1 }ç (¨) † @¾ À }… †  7@q 4 }ç () † @¾ year 2 of senior high year 3 of senior high year 1 of university year 4 of university 5 General N ø. »@©) ¹Îµ÷ ‰ ‡Š > †Á q }í P ¦ @à ´ x…¸÷ Q qC© F‡Š 8 ®}û @M † „ „ó B. T§ Thus. coaching college operate.. boarding house university hall.

P ´  Š ½ ÷ ü ¦dVÙ ­´ ëT§ s\<p @n ¡#x. Arts Faculty Business Faculty Faculty of Education teaching department the Korean department English Language & Literature History political Science Economics Business Studies Law Education Philosophy 7 The Particle -n (only . Some other forms of ut. ˆ ˆ and (3) add -x (or -x).include “¦¤#x (I didn’t know)”. The verb stem is ‘ut-’. we say “¦x” in Korean. and § N§ Š§  ¦ˆ this is how we arrive ‘¦x’. I don’t learn Japanese..å ½ ø 1 @ † } entrance exam (school) end of semester exam graduation exam entrance exam (company) Semester 1 }… S} J 7@q F@ç D † 9†¾ X¾ S <ç 1 6ç ¾ Å NTT :#!¦ˆ ut- at Year 3 of university this year next year forget not know Language Notes (Some Irregular Verbs): When we make a statement. To say “I don’t know”.) ´ P The particle -n (only) replaces -/- and -©/-¥. Studies Korean Studies Language Studies Literature Linguistics Î} »@ † õˆ † ¼ëÎ} qs»@ -Î} È»@ † ¾Î} »@ õ † [† O} <@ ¨} @ † Ô} Â@ † -7@ } † ˆ ëÎ} s»7@ † ÄÄ † Iî} Øß7@ …¸} qC7@ ‡ † -» Î ‡T† ´Q}Î w<@» Science humanities social sciences natural sciences Engineering Mathematics Medicine Faculty of .. or ask a question. ˆ ¨ˆ ½ P ‡T P Ù ÂVX´ O§ . Faculties -@ † } w<@ ‡T† ´Q} #@ T} † ˆ† ë} s@ õ † ½T} #@ ß#ßs@ Ä Äˆ† îTîë} ß@ ½ † î} à @ Ä † í} Ä † IV} Ø=@ ÄĆ Iî} Øß@ † } 0@ …¸} qC@ ‡† ÷† } 4@ . w<Tn :öx. \Ù ÀøTü ´ § ´Q#´ § $p ót#¥ q :öx. Š § ¦ˆ ŠëT§ ^ 6 Subject of Study. if the verb stem ends in t and the syllable immediately before t ends in a vowel. but is added to other particles.õ[ ½O êW§ < ó<x? Vocabulary Expansion: Guessing the meaning of words † å ó}ø ¨@Z † R å } ëø @¥Z ŠÂ ø Z ª2å NZ ø.. I only learn Korean.... we (1) drop I. (2) add  to the preceding syllable. B ˆ P^ Only Tae-U went to library.

x. Shin 2003 83 . …óVXˆ ´Që«´ óëV§ q§<"Ù w<¥tn ©s . Ask questions only in Korean in the classroom.p ó<"n "x. I drink beer only at weekends. ˆ© P I drink coffee only at home. À p ‡TR P Àˆ c G. ô ˆ R P ¨Ù ‘ëV´ O§ K‘p ¨¥<n "x.

When we want to express a strong desire we can say: VST . ˆVX „¹}…ü ¼ ‹V s<" q>@q¥ s ¹< Ž† ½ õ C After I finished my high school in Sydney I moved to Melbourne. Ž† ½ Ì ½ N V ¨ ´ ´ TJ§ 9  ½< K‘ w r #Dx? õ ô ‡‡ How about having a glass of beer before we eat? 84 c G. õ ôŠ ÐÌ Before drinking water I read a book. Ji-Su wants to marry Seon-Yeoung. õ ‡TRŠ ‹ Š ½V ´Që÷ ‚  W§ ÷ » 1T㈫  Ç!rxt  < õ ½V Before moving to Melbourne.(x) C< . ˆ ˆŠ a À É Tae-U wants to earn a lot of money. ½‰ After I graduate I’ll get a job. ^ ŠÂ‡ ‹ ´ ¹V N" W§ ª2w C< ø.q ó#x. Seon-Yeoung. Kylie wants to try Korean dishes. À| Ɍ (· · ·v/p) VST . ˆ ¾Ä À» É 9 AFTER .q §#Bx. ÷ » 1T㈫ ëT§ Ç!rxt ¡#x. õ V EXAMPLES ŠŠ ÷  ½V ¸÷ óT§ ¦©  < P© ¨2#x. I want to visit Korea next year.. Another way of linking a sequence of events is as follows. After I learn some Korean I will go to Korea.. É ¾Ä ¥î +»„ ó† ß ò q §B.= 14 » V Î 8 I want to ... ˆˆ ÞÙ „ óT§ É EXAMPLES I want to earn a lot of money. ‡TRŠ ‹ ˆ ‹ ‡T ¡ ´Që÷ ‚ ë ¹V ´QV R W§ w<¥© D :v C< w<< ë <x. But when talking about other people’s desires we say: ­Ù ø÷ ë „ óT§ @p q© ¥ 0q §#Bx. „ ÉT§ § EXAMPLES ˆŠ a À É ø÷ ë „ óT§ q© ¥ 0q §#x. I want to marry you. After reading a book I drank water. óÙ wQ ¹N÷ íT¦„ óT§ ¨p ‡< C9© Ü#vq §#x. ˆVX „¹}…ü €T§ s<" q>@q¥ Ü#x... ¾ ‡T É ‡T ‹½Š ½ ´Q ¹N÷ íT¦„ óT§ w< C9© Ü#vq §#x. 1V ´QV ¦„ óT§ 6ç< w<< vq §#x.. I want to try Korean dishes. VST . 10 Before . À ˆ ´T ‹½Š ½ É ¨Ù î ò„ óT§ p ¥ß +| q §#Bx. ‡T ´QV w<<  < w<¥© D :© <x. VST . ˆ ¹V ‹ EXAMPLES ôŠ ¨ˆ ‹ ŠŠ Ì ¸÷ ÐÞ ¹V ÷ îT§ P© óv C< ¦© Þ#x. I’ll learn some Korean before I go to Korea. Shin 2003 ... ½< .® <x. I attended a high school in Sydney. ¾ ‡T É They want to visit Korea next year. 1V ´QV ¦„ óT§ 6ç< w<< vq §#Bx.. When we want to describe a sequence of events we can link them as follows.

or "©7 for short). political or religious issues. Korean language. usually revolving around social. courses comprise of mass lectures and no tutorials. There are some significant differences between Korean and Western university life. Alongside the undoubted down-side to the pressure.õ[ ½O êW§ < ó<x? 11 Cultural Notes: Education The South Korean education system follows a 6-3-3 pattern. As huge demand for tertiary places in a predominantly private system produces huge class sizes. but come under the supervision of the Ministry of Education – as. and the sense of attachment to alma mater is very strong. or 7 for short). or Žp7) in Pusan. Other prominent institutions include Yonsei University (. with parents and other family members taking special care to ensure their children obtain the best possible result. successful Korean graduates approach working life with a strongly disciplined and well acculturated background. comprising six years of primary school (z>@q). Most leading Korean universities and other institutes of higher education are private institutions. physical education. where more specialised vocational training (agriculture. 96% of middle school graduates were going on to high school. social studies. While it is not always helpful to compare institutions. Shin 2003 85 . and tend to be the first choice of intending students over rival private institutions. there is in general little in the way of intellectual contact between staff and students. at least in the social sciences and humanities SNU is universally regarded as pre-eminent. c G. and ¾V}… õ † õ ¾ „O}… † „ Sogang University ("37@q. and Pusan National University XF}… V † XF V (Žp7@q. industrial trades etc) is incorporated into the curriculum. academic high school for further general education and vocational high school. and the country’s economic transformation could hardly have been achieved without the cohesive and talented professional class that this system has produced. of course. Primary ® E and middle school education is compulsory and more or less free. education and the public service. often depriving the students of any real social life. «¹}… Ž† Ž† „}… „¹}… Ž† Kindergartens or pre-schools ( á) are not regarded as part of the formal education system.7@q. not in the education it imparts. Korea University (q7@q. Middle school students are usually aged between twelve and fourteen. The effort usually involves the whole household. Public universities. three years of middle school (D@q). and three years of high school (q>@q). For the final three years of secondary education. Students form their own little study groups. or q7 for short). mathematics. Particularly noteworthy in this regard is Seoul National University ("©7@q. There are two types of high school. For several years before high school graduation the life of the Korean student is dominated by the need to prepare for university admission examinations (=å). or "37 for short) in Seoul. extra-curricular activities assume greater significance. It is often observed that the achievement of the Korean education system is to be found. In the mid-1980s. The exams mostly involve multiple ¨†ø Ž Z choice-type answers to questions across a curriculum so broad as to require many hours of daily study during this period. the system is frequently criticised by Korean educationalists because of this. Upon completing primary school students enter middle school for Years 7–9 of their secondary education. operate one to each province of the country. and the rate has been steady ever since. or National Universities as they are known. fishing. The pressure for entering a good university is intense. natural science. X}… Š † XŠ  whose graduates all but monopolise leading professions such as law. The university thus becomes the centre of student social life even on weekends and in holiday periods. banking. Also. art and a foreign language (English). but in the socialisation process that Korean students go through (which is in part responsible for the intense pressure for entering a good university). In science and technology institutions such as the Korean ­´}… P † ­´ P Advanced Institute of Science and Technology (KAIST) and Pohang Institute of Science and Technology (Postech) are also highly regarded. and the curriculum includes subjects such as moral education. music. but the country remains locked into the system. do the primary and secondary schools. A good deal of energy is also poured into sporting and hobby clubs and societies. it should be mentioned that while there are more than a few casualties. students enter high schools.

¦S ë§ XR Q: > R ‹.? • The Auxiliary Verb: VST .. Hobbies. W ím§ ë ø ê§ RÀ Q: r8 © .. 3 ë§ R Q: E« Š ¨x? ¾½ ª R ×  ë§ A: y< ¨x. ¨x.. activities. ¦ ø § À Q: ¢ ª .= 15 » V Î 15 †"  ë§ ‰® ª ¨x? ‰ŠR I N THIS U NIT .? Q: E‰® ª ¨x? º ‰ŠR ׆"  ë§ A: 6. • Using Description Verbs: Modifying Nouns C AN YOU PLAY BASEBALL ? Talking about the sports. ¦x. Games and Pastimes • Do you know how to .? • Would you like to .. 3 ¨ x ” Q: s £® ª ¨§? ˆ "  ëx Š ‰ŠR A: x... s Bx.§? ] ” ë Vx A: 6. © s ñx...x? · ë ¨V§ ‡© A: ¢Fx. ¦ § Š Q: . hobbies and pastimes we enjoy is another very basic way of communicating information about ourselves. In this Unit we learn to talk about these things.x? œ ë V§ R A: x./#/· · ·B vT ¦ • Have you (ever) . 1 Do you (know how to) . • Sports... ‘ ªB§.

N ø  ¤T§ ½À … 86 c G. Shin 2003 .#x.s  B .#x? ¦  ¤T§ … A: . s B .

Hobbies. Games and Pastimes † :‰ =‰ Ž ‚† † ‰ º ׆ E‰ O F† >‰ ¨î ß Ä ” ¬ ­ .†"  ë§ ‰® ª ¨x? ‰ŠR 2 Sports.

place.(¥) ‹play (Lit. hit) ping pong dance (a dance) õ ¼ q() óÌ ¨ ¼ ÷ ½ r(©) NõŠ E º ½ ׆ ü E‰(¥) ] ½ ë ü ¢(¥) ˆõ ë½ v - popular take photos play soccer go fishing drive sing (a song) play (Lit. put) Baduk play Janggi Vocabulary Expansion: Guessing the meaning of words Rˆ @w 9 E‰ N ׆ ½º ³¨N ׆ ~‘9 E‰ ½º ½ í Û ˆ ¡µ à ˆ w tennis American football Australian football rugby cricket skiing W ˆ ¢} ¦N v©6 ŠÄ ½  õ ˆ  s £ Š œ . ­¸ ¨ó ¢ ©  ‡ µX >" ] ë ¢ ŽP ¹´ >p Ä I Ø hobby game Baduk (Korean ‘Go’ game) Janggi (Korean Chess) stamp collecting reading fishing mountain climbing horse racing 3 Some Verbs O ½ F† ü >‰(¥) ¾Š ×÷ ­ E(©) ’œ ü  ­ˆ r8(¥) -/Žt½ · ÷ ¨ >(©) ‹‡Š V ½ F ü ¨ . strike.s  ¦ Ž † B volleyball basketball baseball football/soccer ping pong swimming boxing surf riding horse-riding  ø Š  £ · > ‡ V F .

r   golf bowling bicycling card game/cards piano guitar LANGUAGE NOTES: .

:sn (badminton). .(hitting the piano) œü  ½ Korean uses the verb . in talking about playing various sports and musical  Š  instruments.(do). Thus.(strike. or in the case of playing musical instruments with the fingers. Korean uses the verb . However.  W ˆ ¢} (golf ). generally speaking. in the case of sports that require. hit). not £. @w (tennis). the hitting of a ball.(play).r¥ .  (guitar). >‰ (ping pong).

Shin 2003 87 .. Rˆ O F† ˆ¼½ ¾õ  œ etc are all used with the verb -.r (piano). ie “.  Š½ ÷ ü ]§ c G..©/¥ %x”.

.= 15 » V Î 4 Do you know how to . VST .. we can say: .x? ‰Š œ *  V§ . When asking about activities requiring knowledge or training...(x) ª ¨x? ˆ ŠR  ë§ EXAMPLES † "  V§ ‰ ® ª .

.. ˆ ŠR  ë§ EXAMPLES 3 "  ë§ 6.x? ÷Š ‡ ½ŠŠ ´ü ò  V§ w¥ ³ ª . ‰ŠR œ *  ë§ . VST (x) ª ¨x. I know how to . .§ E«  Vx? Yes.r ª ª . To answer in the positive we can say Do you know how to play baseball? Do you know how to play the piano? Can you write Chinese? Can you dance? 3 6.. ® ª ¨x.x? ¾½ ª × Š ..

¾Š ½ Š R I don’t know how to .. Yes. œ *  § . ÷ŠR ‡ ½ŠŠR ´ü ò  ë§ w¥ ³ ª ¨x. ˆ ŠŠ  § EXAMPLES ½ ‰ŠŠ í "  § Û ® ª ¦x.r ª ª ¨x. And in the negative Yes.(x) ª ¦x. I know how to play the piano. ¦ x.. VST . . E© « ª ¨x.. I can dance. I know how to play rugby.. I can write Chinese. 3 ×÷   ë§ 6.

I don’t know how to play rugby. (He/She) does it R ë § well). À ø § R ë A definite declaimer of any ability in the field under discussion is “© Bx... I can’t do it very well). I don’t know how to play the piano. but we can use it to describe other people’s abilities. . (intending to mean Yes....(©/¥) ë Š½ © ÷ü R be good at/do something well do something slightly . . this in fact sounds a bit haughty in Korean...... Shin 2003 . possibly § because of its affirmative aspect.” Of course. 88 c G.. . VST . Other options .. y< ˆ ŠR  ë§ 3 ¦S X Bx. we can’t say this about ourselves without sounding boastful. A more standard.e. ÷ŠŠ ¦ ´ü ò  § x. you may be tempted to say: “6.. (Lit.. i. modest response would be: “© 3 § R ë s Bx.. w¥ ³ ª ¦x.(©/¥) y< Š½ ÷ ü ¦S  X In responding to ‘.. “6. Bx”. I can’t write Chinese. © is the key – without it you simply mean that you can’t. I can’t dance. However..r ª ª ¦x.” Here.(©/¥) ë s Š½ ©À ÷ü Rø .. be no good at all at . a little)”. (Lit.(x) ª ¨x?’ questions.(©/¥) ø Š½ s ÷ü À be not really good at . ‡ ½ŠŠŠ ¾Š ½ Š Š ×÷   § E© « ª ¦x. No..

. ‰ ¹ T§ ‹OŠ Š ¹F÷ ÷T§ 6 The Auxiliary Verb: VST . hard. and thus C:© ¤#x.indicates that we perform an action (as indicated by the ¦ preceding verb) while we are non-committal about the outcome. etc.(use) drops out when attaching the -#x ending. ½ íT ¦ Ü# v.#x? (Have you tried the Gimchi?)” which literally means Did you Á ½½ … Nü íT ¤T§ eat kimchi and see (what it was like)? Look at the contrast between the following pairs./#/· · ·B vT ¦ The verb v. the most .†"  ë§ ‰® ª ¨x? ‰ŠR 5 More Expressions [ O <  µ à  ¦ @s ¬ ¾ ¥¨  ¾ PÁ ¥¨´ N l/> " ® ‹ 7È ëµF v>.(listen to) changes to  when attaching -#x. ¦ ‘experience’. match sports tournament sports field contest/race » X |" Vó =¨ À øŠ …÷ @¤¾ˆ ¼ë ps T ë © õ ¾  ˆ ¤‹O ¹F C: ‰ ¹ >- by oneself first. and thus ¥ -x. the attached v. difficult newspaper magazine letter write music listen to Language Notes: • The vowel I in ¤. ˆ ¸÷ óT§   P© Ð2#x? ôŠ ¨Ì ˆ ¸÷ óT ¤T§   P© Ð# . In effect. adding some abstract sense of ‘trial’.as in “3 ¥ Ü# . We’ve already met such an example.#x? ôŠ ¨ … ˆ œü ÷T§   r8¥ ¤2#x? ½ ŠÌ ˆ œü ÷T ¤T§   r8¥ ¤# .(see) can be attached to another verb. ˆ T§ õ ½ ¾ü h§ • Also the  in >.#x? ½Š … ¦  ¤T§ .. ˆŽV Ø Ä I ball racquet Tae-Kwon-Do competitor team contest.

#x? … ¦ ÿT§ .s  B .

s  †#x?  7 The Expression .

s  ¦ Did you read that book? Did you have a look at that book? Did you listen to that CD? Did you have a listen to that CD? Did you have a try for surfing? Did you surf? There are a few ways of changing a verb into a noun. and the suffix -. as in in .

s .    ride riding ¦ ü . is one of ¦ them. It has a similar effect of attaching -ing in English.

s(¥) ½ ¦ .

ride waves) surfing (Lit.s  Do you like surfing? What’s surfing like? surf (Lit. for example: ¦ ü V§ . wave-riding) We can then say.

x? ½” ¦ .s ¥ ª .

s  #Dx? TJ§ ¦ Ù ó´ ‚ TO§ .

ˆ Ì P‹ ¦ ü  ¦„ óT§ .s p =¨n D #öx.

I’d like to try surfing. c G. Shin 2003 89 .s ¥ B vq §#x. ½ É Surfing is fun but is a little bit difficult.

A common way of suggesting things to other people is to say VST . ½ í À ó EXAMPLES ‡T ´QV ø ó óT§ w<<  ˆ ¨ ¨#x? tÀÌ ‡T‹½Š í ˆ À Ì ´Q¹N÷ ÜT ø ó ó§ w<C9© ½# t ¨ ¨x? N º†ü †I ø ó óT§ 9 ׉¥ ‰ØB t ¨ ¨#x? ½E ½ Ä ˆÀ Ì Á ½ nŠ ˆ ½ Ì Nü P÷T ø í óT§ 3 ¥ ´¤# t à ¨#x? Yes. Rˆ I F @w(Ø). we can simply say Have you ever been to Korea? Have you ever tried Korea food? Have you ever seen American football? Have you ever tried to make kimchi? 3 óT§ ¦ T§ 6. Ì × 10 Would you like to . 9 Have you ever .. .. I have / No. ÄV ¨îµ ßA ć ŠÁ½ NN 7©6? È ¬ ­" ”® ‹ º ׆" E‰® ‹ ó 9¨ À ¨ ‘ J X S À q « P 0t ´ · · · swimming pool swim wear Olympic Games boxing match soccer match everyday frequently. Ä V a solo sport a sport for two players a team sport ¨îF ß.../# T · · ·B     ˆÀ ø ó  óTx t ¨() ¨#§? Ì NOTE: à may be substituted for ¨.? A common ways to ask someone about their past experiences:    VST .(x)§x? ˆ ó8§ À EXAMPLES ¦ò $€ V ó§ x£ \Ü. / x. ¨#x.= 15 » V Î 8 Some More Expressions » X Ù ëµ |" p v> ˆ ˆŽ ¨ F Ù ëµ ‹ 6 p v> S ˆ ˆŽ UN F Ù ëµ # 6 p v> S ˆ ˆŽ † ¥¨´ ‰ l ¾ P Rˆ ¥¨ @w  ¾ ÁÄ ¾ ßî¦ ¥¨ IÜv  † I ‰ Ø Ä Ä V I F Ø. sometime not especially baseball team a tennis player ‘Competitor’ Hong Myung-Bo baseball tournament/match a sports arena tennis court Cultural Note: Hong Myung-Bo was an internationally famous Korean soccer star of the 1990s and early 2000s. I haven’t To answer. often occasionally. 2#x.

Shin 2003 . < §8x? Š ½ À ˆˆ  ¦ó§ t| B v§8x? À ˆí ¹ ‘V  ¦ó§  Û. Would you like to give me a cola?) c G. C ¨<  x§8x? Á ‹ À Š D § " ‹ ¨À§ ¬ ‚ ‘ó8x? 90 Would you like to go to a party tonight? How would you like a part-time job? Well then – would you like to come again next week? May I have a cola? (Lit.

Shin 2003 EXAMPLE ¬˜ˆ ø I"Þ Z ƪv å an ‘OK’ exam ”ˆ ‹½ Þ ¹N ªv C9 good food aˆ S ëÞ F ¥v 6 many people Þ´ T ~w Q warm soup À‡ < ®î´ }… Üw @q a famous school ć † ´  { ¨ an expensive liquor ‡Š 91 . as we do with action verbs.†"  ë§ ‰® ª ¨x? ‰ŠR 11 Using Description Verbs: Modifying Nouns We’ve learnt how to say in Korean.  changes to . ˆ Þ ¬˜ I" ƪˆ Þ ”  ª. It’s hot. we add p Ì ó ×  ˆ Ù UÌ >ó n ¨U× > n 2+ p =⇒ ˆ Ù  ó = ¨Ì   = 2× U ̈ > óÙ n ¨p U ׈ > Ù n 2p  ÌÙ = óp ¨ˆ  Ù = 2p ׈ EXAMPLE U ̈ ‹½ > óÙ ¹N n ¨p C9 tasty food U ׈ ‹½ > Ù ¹N n 2p C9 unappetising food  óÙ  = ¨p  interesting stories ̈  Ù  = 2p  boring stories ׈ 2.and 2-. It’s difficult. UÌ > óT§ öx. With description verb stems ending in ¨. ªx. eg It’s delicious. to which we ­ then add . ù ù }¿ × ET #Þ. etc.+  =⇒ Ä  - ¬˜v I"ˆ ÆªÞ ”ˆ Þ ªv aˆ ëÞ ¥v Þ´ ~w À‡ ®î´ Üw ć ´ { ‡ c G. With all other description verb stems (with minor exceptions) we add  after vowels. a difficult matter. #öx. We thus say n ¨#x. and so on. v after consonants. With description verb stems that end in . There are three rules to remember: 1. H§ TO§ § ” Let us learn how to use description verbs to modify nouns. as in a hot day. etc. We choose an appropriate description verb and attach endings. It’s good.+ v =⇒ a ë ¥Þ ~ À ®î Ü .drop  + v =⇒  ˆ ë ° F ‡T ´ë o¡- ë 9v ˆ ­ë ’v ˆ TOë #v ˆ íë õv ˆ ‡ ˆ ´ ë ov EXAMPLE ë Á 9v N hot Gimchi ˆ3 ­ë  ’v  cold country ˆ TOë ëµ #v v> a difficult sport ˆ ˆŽ íë »µ õv Î@ an easy subject ˆ ‡ ‡ ˆ S ´ ë F ov 6 a pleasing person 3.

 ¨#x. situations and states using adjectival clauses.. Âs ¦r Š» Ì óTx …V Zœü X ¨ ¨#§. P9. #p È. 6 ˆ øÀ øÀ ˆ ø …ó<Ù …„ øF ¸F <§Vp <7 q v.. H. xt. 1 This is my room.. ÀV ôV ôV Ì ¸F óT§ Ô¦ ý P. We also take an important step forward in increasing our powers of expression in Korean by learning how to describe actions. :x. 9¡7. . In this unit we learn how to talk about where we live – our accommodation and our neighbourhood. Z  U Ù *FóV§ .§<x.= 16 » V Î 16 ­ ©<x.x. . << áw¥ B" ‘ ø û ½ J¹B§ C}x. ˆ Ç Ä ˆ ½O Ì NF óT§ JF„Ù \ 9> ¨#x.  óV§  I N THIS U NIT . U Ù 1 …óV§ 1 #p 6 <§<x. • Describing where we live • Housework • Adjectival clauses T HIS IS WHERE I LIVE . ˆ VÀ U Ù ­V§ Nˆ ¦Þ #p Ž2<x.qp $ ÄV ˆ Ì óT§  FˆV§  ´ ´ ¨#x.

my ø û ½ Z room is very clean./#/· · ·B ."” conveys the meaning: because ..  †#X ´" P‹ …V Zœü X ¨ J¹§ << áw¥ B" ‘ C}Bx in the text means “Because I did the cleaning this morning. Shin 2003 . w r ` ‡‡ ó§ §8x? À LANGUAGE NOTE: The pattern “. VST .) Thus. T  X (We’ve in fact met this pattern already in =T" q® (Sorry I’m late) in Page 4...” 92 c G...

Places.>§ OÀ bedroom family room sitting room bathroom laundry room ­ Ž2 Ç ½V NF 95 õB âd \ „ q Äá íE à kitchen dining room entry (of a house) garage garden 3 More Rooms. etc V F 8 ˆŠV øF v¤8 R ë¯ ¦{ ˆ .  2 Rooms and Places øÀ …ó <§ § À ó ŽÂÀ ¹ó C3§ (@)C§ ‡ ‡À µ ¶ó VFó .­ óV§  ©<x.

 ˆ ª. (©. clean dirty noisy ¦¶ yC Ž ¯T ë À  /- quiet nearby far away LANGUAGE NOTES: Distances from a point When we want to say how far one location is from another we use -<" as follows. VX  ½ ó îV" T§ © ß<X /#x? À ­ZQÞ Þ¸VX T§ ><v vT<" /#x? Tˆ ˆû À ˆ ½ óÞ îVX § ©v ß<" öx? ­ZQ Þ¸VX § >< vT<" öx? T ˆû Is the house far from the station? Is the post office far from the bank? We can. of course.| F 5 V room 2E© (SK) Á Ùó  óV ©. Shin 2003 93 . Is the house near the station? Is the post office near the bank? c G. just as easily ask how near they are to each other.¥) 6 ½ óVü 1 ó v© Â ó F v© 6 Â S two-storey house house/flat rent pay the rent the house next door next door neighbour room with under-floor heating balcony apartment. flat (back)yard 4 Some Description Verbs J¹ C} Z H .

D%Û and À « ‚`í ‹ Á õ ½e ) are always used with q. dust do the gardening have a bath ÀÅ ½ ýH ü 1Ø(¥) . Shin 2003 always 75 usually 50 25 10 5 0 often sometimes not especially rarely never 94 .> O   û Zœ áw plates. ‡V ´F s.wash dishes. For example.. do the washing do the ironing û ½ Zœ ü  áw(¥) Äá íE † ü  à—(¥) ½ clean..q JV HF„ õ ½ õ õ ½Ú ® w® ˆÚ õ ¦Þ xt ˆ refrigerator electronic   3 ½ N VZ 9.á ô VF . words that tell us how often things are done. Ä Nˆ 9¡7 bed wardrobe cupboard kitchen sink ½O NF 9> ˆBˆ wks õ ôV ¸F P9 ôV ¸F P.= 16 » V Î 5 Furniture and Fittings ø …7 < ÀV øF v. dining table (standing) lamp desk bookcase 6 Household Appliances and Equipment Ä. dishes dishwasher washing machine iron (appliance) vacuum cleaner microwave oven. we say ˆ FÞ Zœü ‚`í ´   6v áw¥ D%Û q Sˆ û ½ ‹ Á P Bx (He/she rarely cleans § his/her room). some of which we’ve studied already.? Next are ‘adverbs of frequency’. electric stove gas stove oven 7 Some Action Verbs V>(©) . Note that 0t. do the washing up @C(©) ‡‡ Š µ¶ ÷  8 How Often . On the left is a scale 100 – 0 to give you a very general idea of frequency.F ÷  OŠ Nó ÷ 6©(©) ÁÀ Š wash clothes. ie P ´ they occur in a negative sentence. 100 õ ½V = ¦Õ vG Á ¨ ‘ J X S À « 0t (+ Negative) ‹ Á ‚`í D%Û (+ Negative) õ ½e ) (+ Negative) c G. where 100 indicates all the time and 0 never.

 You’ll also find useful to know the following expressions. 3 M4 D ý ‘. 3M4. hog* heŠ cÅw "ÕÙ][ "7Ÿ ó¤Ð 134ò] ô. 3 M4 5. The standard phrase in answering the telephone. ½§ õ Or you can ask for the individual concerned: Hello. Korean would use the reverse order. written in Korean.x. for example. However. 3. 2.) R ë ¢ ó 9¨ À ë 9£ R  9ç ¾ üV ´ ½ ­< w  ½ ‡õ everyday everyday every month every year once every second day V ´ ½ ¯< w  ½ ‡õ À À ‡õ ó ¨óV ´ ½ ¨ ‘¨< w  ‡R ‡õ ´ ëV ´ ½ w £< w  À¾ ‡õ ó V ´ ½ ¨ ç< w  À¾ ó V ¨ ½ ¨ ç< ‹  õ once every third day once a week once a month once a year twice a year 9 Telephone INSA Using the telephone can often seem like the most daunting of tasks in a new language. where we would use the order house number – street – suburb – city – state – country. Note that in contrast to Western practice it works from the broadest unit to the most particular. see Page 76. which literally means I disconnect the line. Á õ ¾ûÁ ‹ Hello. U¦Vx N â ¥N ‚ Ð ¨V§ #v. U¦Vx N â ¥N V§ #v.§. That is.x. Street numbers are rarely referred to. followed ¦  † Ž µ by a house or apartment number. 4x (SK). -‰ (district). you may observe people simply hanging up without any ‘Goodbye’! You may from time to time hear people saying °#x.x? Á¾ûÁ U¦V§ #v. but it’s worth mentioning that Korean telephone etiquette may seem rather abrupt compared with. (For how to refer to periods of time. We’ll deal with other possible situations later on in this course. Shin 2003 95 . Sinchon (‘New Village’) Ward. please. When the conversation finishes.§.x? Á õ ¾ûÁ U¦Vx N¥NV§ #v. f íT§ 10 Korean Addresses Following is the address of Yonsei University. please connect me with Mr Kim Gi-Hyun. the units in a Korean address are generally -s (province).’ is: U¦V§ #v. is Mr Kim Gi-Hyun there? Or. (connect me to extension) 1234. is that Mr Kim? If you’re coming through a switchboard you can ask to be connected to an extension number by saying: Hello. Thus Yonsei University is located in Seoul ("©G  – the official administrative title for Seoul). Seodaemun (‘West Gate’) XÙÀ Šº0 District.­ óV§  ©<x.7Œu éæÕ ´ Óçí Ó Ó  ɉ › c G. If you’re calling a private number.x. equivalent to ‘Hello. -> (ward). In order.§. say. the following phrases might at least help you to get to first base. - (city). Number 134. if you feel fairly sure that you’re already speaking to Mr Kim you can confirm this by saying: Hello. 1. then you’ll want to ask for the person you’re calling: Hello. Western phone etiquette.

which.. Completed Actions When modifying a noun with a completed... Shin 2003 the train that goes to Seoul someone that I don’t know the food that Tae-U can’t eat the book that my elder sister reads 96 . where the verb ending -p ¾‡» ˆ ¼‚ý Ù Tˆ ˆ Ù corresponds to ‘which is (go)ing’ in the translation ‘a bus which is going to the Folk Village’.p NOUN . ˆ Ù We’ve already seen phrases like nBx p !w (see Page 68). ô à P Àˆ úÌ The clothes that Mia bought in the department store are very stylish. depending on whether we are referring to completed.(x) NOUN . or perfected.. EXAMPLE ¦ˆ ut+ p =⇒ ˆ Ù ½ í ÜÐ ó ¨p ˆ Ù ¦ˆÙ utp ˆ ½ˆ íÙ Üp Ј óÙ ¨p X Ù  "© p  Š ˆ 1 ¦ˆÙ F 6 utp 6 ˆ S  s Üp C9 @­ ø íÙ ¹N À ½ˆ ‹½ õ ½ óÙ ¸  ¨p P Ј ô c G. current or potential actions. Korean simply applies the relevant verb-endings.. whom. ˆ EXAMPLE +  =⇒ ¦x Q F8 + v =⇒ ˆ Þ Ð ó¨ Sentence building P ´ j ˆ ø v Qˆ FÞ 8v Ј óÞ ¨v P ´ Tˆ j !w ˆ ˆÁ ø óN v u4 1 FÞ ¾ 6 8v  Qˆ õ 1 óÞ ¸ 6 ¨v P Ј ô the bus that has gone the guest who came the letter I received the book that I read À ø v clothes  P ø  ´ v The clothes that Mia bought .. etc. action: AVST . when. pÀ  *íVX P ø  LÈà<" ´ v The clothes Mia bought in the department store . While English uses a variety of relative pronouns: who..= 16 » V Î 11 Adjectival Phrases and Clauses We’ve already seen how we can modify nouns using description verbs (see Page 91): ”ˆ S Þ F ªv 6 Hë  v  ˆ a good person a hot country  óÙ  = ¨p  ̈ U ̈ ‹½ > óÙ ¹N n ¨p C9 an interesting story a delicious food Now we see how Korean uses action verbs in the same way. that. ô Á pÀ  *ÁVX ´ øÞ ¨ # óT§  LÈí<" p vv ‘  ¨#x.. Current Actions When modifying a noun with a current action: AVST .

 Sentence building ô ¸ P book Uµ óÙ ¸ #>M ¨p P The book that my younger sister’s reading .(live) À  0.....as irregular.changes when -(x) or -(x) ending is ‰ ¹ ˆ ˆ attached.. Qˆ FÙ 8p ...(x) NOUN .and ¤-. Õ # ] ...­ óV§  ©<x. ˆ g ½ . The food we’re going to eat tomorrow evening . Q F ˆ Stem (Meaning) R ë ¨. Qˆ FÞ 8v .(earn (money)) ‰ ¹ >. ˆÙ ¤p .(write.. use) Adjectival Phrases/Clauses Completed Current Potential Polite Informal Present Past R ë§ ¨x PŠ ´÷T§ n¤#x R ë§ §x À T§ 0#x R^ ëëT§ ¨¨#x PŠ2 ´÷ÌT§ n¤#x R^ ëëT§ §¨#x À2 ÌT§ 0#x Polite Formal Present Past e [ O .. Žû V ¨ˆ ô Uµ FVX óÙ ¸Þ ¨  óT§ #>M 8<" ¨p Pv ‘ = ¨#x. Shin 2003 97 . ˆ Ù ˆ • In the table below.. • An action verb whose stem ends in  requires a special attention: the  drops before -(x). QŠ F÷ 8© .. ˆ -p or -(x) ending is attached. e´ [K LO ... ´ QK !N . The food we’re going to eat tomorrow evening is Bulgogi.. ´ ‰ˆ ¹Ù >p .. ˆ EXAMPLE  +  =⇒ ˆ ¤Q F 8+ © =⇒ Š ÷ ½ í ÜSentence building ‰ " ® Š ò ³ QŠ F÷ 8© ½Š í÷ Ü© ‰À "ó ®¨ 1ó  Z 6¨ § å ÀŠ ø ‹ ¨V F÷ ø ¹ ‘< 8© q C QŠ ˆ ¦–V í÷ ¹N xµ< Ü© C9 ½Š ‹½ something to do the exam that I’m going to take tomorrow the money that I’m going to receive next week the food that I’m going to eat in the afternoon ‹½ ¹N C9 ½© ‹½ íŠ ¹N Ü÷ C9 1ó \€ J íŠ ¹N 6¨ $Ü D Ü÷ C9 À ½ ½© ‹½ 1ó \€ J í÷ ¹NÞ Š„ W§ 6¨ $Ü D Ü© C9v q<x... g ¼ . K N .. éé ll ÐÕ . Žû V Ј ôˆ Ì The book that my younger sister’s reading in her room is really interesting..... ´ e ´ [ŒK LwN .. K N . eé [l LÐ .(receive) ˆ ¤... é´ lK Т ... ˆ Ù € ...(know) PŠ ´÷ n¤.. notice also how the verb stem >.(make) R ë §... The food we’re going to eat ...... Žû Ј ô Uµ FVX ÐÙ ¸ #>M 8<" óp P The book that my younger sister’s reading in her room ..(listen. iV ½ eë [l LÐV iV ¼ × # ]V ‰Œ ¹† >B QŒ F† 8B Œ † M R^Œ ëë† ¨¨B PŠ2Œ ´÷̆ n¤B R^Œ ëë† §¨B À2B ̌ 0† é lQ¡ Ð#| Q F§ 8x éá lùQ¡ Ð+#| Q^ FëT§ 8¨#x éùë lál Ð+V Q^Œ Fë† 8¨B Q¡ -| á Q¡ 5#| ál ë 5V c G. Consider the table below. Ó  ò . e [ N . À ½ ½Š ‹½ˆ § Language Notes food .. Š ò ³ . We suggest you treat the verb >. Potential Actions When modifying a noun with a potential action: AVST . hear) Q F 8.... as indicated by the regular ‘conjugation’ ‰ ¹ pattern of resembling verbs such as 8...........

. I N THIS U NIT .. • Describing people and things • Colours and clothing S HE LOOKS LIKE HER MOTHER .= 17 » V Î 17 Á ¥ cˆ à Z í½ ëÞ  ë§ ßü £v  ¡x. Z ] ½ ˆÃZ ëü Ù  ëx ¢¥ p  ¡§.. 1 It seems/looks like . . Z ¦¦ ë§ }s ¡x. and also how to make comparisons. In this unit we learn more about how to describe people and things.. é ë§ × ¡x. Z †¨ ë§ ‰‹ ¡x.

r¥ p  ¡§. ü Ù  ë§ ½ ˆÃZ c G. œü Ù  ëx ½ ˆÃZ 98  ¥ p  ¡x. Shin 2005 .

meaning blue • ô = neck • ƒT derives from the verb ƒ-.Á ½ £ˆ à Z íü cÞ  ë§ ß¥ ëv  ¡x. 2 Clothing and Accessories I   û Z á   \„ $q ˆˆ w | Oˆ Â"z "z Oˆ †¨ ‰‹ ½ ƒ H  u ¦ pants.. purse necklace earrings ring watch underwear socks suit Korean clothes LANGUAGE NOTES • $zP refers only to the Korean traditional upper outer garment • . slacks jeans skirt jacket skirt business shirt T-shirt (leather) shoes necktie hat. and thus means . ¶ . i 3 Clothing and Accessories II ˆëN w'  µ à ¦T ¯| x!/{ˆ s8w ˆRˆ á Eˆ .is a Sino-Korean k  ê expression. to hang. cap PÄ ´I qØ ë ¡ T ‡À µñ @+ Óñ ï+ À ‡ ´ o  5 ‡À ‚ø Bv VR Gë :¥ V‡ Gµ :A ‡‡ ´µ wA glasses wallet. 6 B e B e literally a hanger • ö = inside • -õ = set of clothes .

w ­ˆ ”.

also frequently used for shorts is ºU • z in zõ is obviously from ‹z › ÿ Ž Ži . you say either ! or „È (not !„È) in Korean • mª U ¡e ؑ ¡eؑ ¯<  þ seems straightforward.¡ ¾R ¼ë p¦ ˆŽ ëµ* v>È dˆ ëÞ  ³v  1Ô 6 …µ qA ‡ ¨îµ ßA ć gloves shoes sneakers shorts underwear school uniform swimming suit LANGUAGE NOTES • When referring to a coat. overcoat dress one-piece dress two-piece dress scarf VT Fë . Ñ ÈŽ c G.w ˆˆ w } sweater jacket coat. Shin 2005 99 .

EXAMPLES ¦òÞ Zü óT§ x£v ᥠ¨2#x. earrings ú # - LANGUAGE NOTES: Korean Verbs of ‘wearing’ • It would be useful to know at this stage that for ºU (ring) and †~ (gloves). V‡ ½Ì She is wearing a strange hat. whitish red yellow ë . as it were. P ˆ dˆ ½ ÂÌÌ But he was wearing shorts yesterday. ´ ü "T§ { 5¥ ª#x. ‡À ˆ P  µñÙ ´ ÿT§ @+p q †#x. scarf.(fit › ÿ ¡m çŸ  in/into) in case of putting it on.(take off ). blackish white white. He’s wearing sneakers.. tint black black. Note also that with S4 g  (watch) you use . ‡ ½ ´ü #N  IT§ o¥ U 5 æ#x. This is to indicate. F´ uü T§ 9w ¦¥ <#x..(take out) in case of taking it off. fasten on) and (.(attach. Ì She’s wearing several rings. that we are describing the outcome of a process. ˆŽ ½ pÌ ëµ*ü ¾T§ v>È¥ ¼2#x. Šˆ û ½ ÂÌ He is wearing blue jeans today.. ´ #VÙ ëÞ ü óT§ n T=p ³v ¥ ¨22#x. She’s not wearing a necklace.. PĊ úÌ ´I÷ ##§ qØ© 2Tx. He’s taken off his glasses.  { Ë • All the verbs in the list indicate the process of ‘putting on’ or ‘taking off’ something. ‡ ½• He’s wearing an expensive watch. 5 Colours ô/M¯  ôR M ë ¥ë \ Á H Øì ¨\  ȱ¡R\ ëë œë r¤\ 100 colour. you use [. Â ó ¨ˆ ¤¾ ¼ p - TAKE OFF . you use the perfect tense marker -¨/-2/· · ·† twice (see ^ Ì  ë  ÿ Examples below). glasses footwear necktie. To say that someone was wearing something at a point in time in the past. clothes hat.= 17 » V Î 4 Action Verbs: Wearing Things. necklace. rather than a state in itself. PUT ON . and thus you use them with the perfect tense marker -¨/-2/· · ·† if you want to say that someone is/is ^ Ì  ë  ÿ not wearing something (see Examples below). and D. etc.

Shin 2005 blue green brown grey pink pink orange .¤\ «Õô z?M º Sô F 8M - ÈM ô ˆÁô ë߁ tIM Ä  Nˆô ?¡M ¦Ú x®M õ ô c G.

?. We met #r in the context Tˆ ¨Ù ˆ Tˆ of #r  6<x? (Which country does he come from?). On the other hand. and basically it asks the Tˆ  FV§ S listener to designate one of a number of alternatives – equivalent to the English Which one?.. and are very close in meaning.. seeks a descriptive answer – equivalent to ¨Ù ˆ ¦Ù ¨ˆ V§ ˆ uô What type of ..Á ½ £ˆ à Z íü cÞ  ë§ ß¥ ëv  ¡x. • Verb stems ending in . u. eg up Ù M<x?... LANGUAGE NOTES • #r and u both mean Which .

red. ÷ ” etc. ( ©) are irregular. white. you ‘conjugate’ the verb as follows. (1) Drop the stem-final . If you want to say something is black.

(2) change the vowel = to §  § >. and (3) add x. “The trousers are black” will be  9x in Korean. (1) the stem-final .. Thus. Note also that when used as a modifier.

Thus. F  . Thus. Þ ˆ ‘black trousers’ will be n . respectively. This is to indicate that we are ^Ì ë  ÿ describing the outcome of a process. timeworn (inanimate) LANGUAGE NOTES • Note that some of the verbs above. Elsewhere. are). uniformly take the perfect tense marker ¨/2-/· · ·†-. drop. they will simply be placed in front of the noun they modify. they’ll be used with the verb  (is. Shin 2005 101 . well-shaped) child! I’ve taken after my (maternal) grandfather. c G. ºô 6 Some Description Verbs Ñ  3T #ò £2šÌ ëë ¢¨b^ c^ ëë £¨ë ûI © ØR MÌ © s MØR À ûÌ ë ø I ¦ì x8½2Ì be young (animate.O Wˆ <Ùë ?£¾T d ë ³À ó ¡- big tall small short (in height) pretty beautiful short (in length) long resemble/take after (in appearance) be handsome be ugly old-fashioned. What a handsome (lit. chiefly related to processes involving growth and the ageing process. ´  P ô  • How do we use those colour terms ending in the expression M (colour)? As modifier. and (2)  (v) will be added. post adolescent) be young (animate. ‘a green hat’ and “The hat is green” in Korean will be z?M u and up «Õ ¦ ºô ¦Ù ˆ «ÕV§ z?M<x. ˆ ‰ ½ d^ He’s old. EXAMPLES ˆ FÞ òT§   6v £2#x. rather than a state in itself. The car’s old. Sˆ šÌ ˆ Ù ¢ëT§   p b¨#x. pre-adolescent) be old (animate) be old (inanimate) ˆ ¡ ˆ  ¡O F . ˆ ë^   © ûØ#x! R Ì ë MIT§ \Ù "Tü ëëT§ $p ®!¥ £¨#x.

10 It’s rather . Yongsu’s rather tall. B . ª ¦  H Wh§ v   <. ÀOPˆ ýF´Þ ´¦ Ùx 1:pv pv ?ö§. which precedes the verb stem.© VŠ ¼ q õ ¨Ô ¼ try on clothes go around wearing put on make-up design a pattern. ¦ A ..are almost identical in meaning. Busan is bigger than Daegu.construction is P ´ ë a ë a slightly more emphatic in effect. The baby looks more like her father (than her mother).x.(x) <x. ¦ H ”§ ª EXAMPLES RPô tIô 봁 ˆÁ¦ H ”§ ±jM ëßMv  x. Skirts are prettier than trousers. = $p  ¨Ã#x. P 9 More about Negatives Red is better than pink. though the VST- ¨. Á ˆ‹ ˆõ Ä ˆ î¨Ù Ù ¾V§ ߏp  y <x. ˆ õ ¾V§ EXAMPLES NOTE:  = side. This has another form: P q • ¢ ´ ’öx. aspect õ ¾ õ BTÙ ‚ ­ë ¾V§ j!p D ’v <x.= 17 » V Î 7 More Useful Expressions ÂT ¦ ó# v¨  ó„  ¨q *F÷  È. We’ve already met the negative adverb ´.v () x. Ù Áü ´ íT§ Ù Nü í ë§ ˆ3 ½P½ ˆÁ ½½ a • $p q x. = <p 3 ¥ Ü ¨x. when we want to be less forthright we can say . Seorak-san is more beautiful than Jiri-san. eg A is better than B. \Ù ´ %T§ \Ù  ë%T§ ˆP Ì ˆ aÌ q VST and VST- ¨. This kimchi’s rather hot. Shin 2005 .. = ¢ × ¨x. Likewise. ˆõ   ߥ q £v õ<x. P ¾ †¦ ­´ § 7‰v Žp x.. we use v as follows. = $p  ¨x. \Ù ´ § \Ù  ë§ ˆP ˆ a • $p q Ã#x.. ˆ‹ ˆõ  NÙ ‚ ë ¾V§  3 p D 9v <x. DVST . Á ½ P cˆ ¾ íü ´ ëÞ V§ Canberra is a bit on the cold side. figure E ¦ B vá Rõ ë¼ ¦ ¢{B vÑ T ¦ 3# võP ¾´ ¦ qB v­  - (looking) refreshing (looking) slim (looking) young (looking) comfortable elegant 8 Making Comparisons: the Particle v ¦ When we want to compare things. 102 c G. R ë P ­§ ë ¿ ë§ q R E a • <p N ¥ q Ü#x.

use -(x)  ˆ à  Z ë§ ¡x. DVST EXAMPLES    (x) ˆ (x) ˆ     ¡x.  ó  ë§  ÀÃZ     Ì ó ¨  2. It doesn’t look as though it’ll be a dog.. for potential actions.  NÙ ‚ ë  ë§  3 p D 9v  ¡x. Shin 2005 103 . AVST . ˆÃZ  ¦Ù  ë§  xp  ¡x. ¡x. The trousers may be a little bit big. V ÀÃZ  ¼  ë§ 5 k  ¡x.Á ½ £ˆ à Z íü cÞ  ë§ ß¥ ëv  ¡x. ÀÃZ ˆ FÞ ø Ù  ë§   6v q 2p  ¡x.    ¢  ¡x.. ÃZ  ë§ NOTE: to refer to past or on-going experience. V õÃZ „Gó  ë§ q:¨  ¡x. 11 IT SEEMS AS IF . AVST (x)  ˆ à  Z ë§ ¡x. use AVST .  ø  ë§  v  ¡x.          becomes either    õÃZ ¼  ë§  q  ¡x    k  ¡x  ¼  ë§  ¾ÃZ ̈ à Z óÙ  ë§ ¨p  ¡x ×Ù  ë§  p  ¡x  2ˆ à Z     or     ÀÃZ ó  ë§ ¨  ¡x.. The trousers seem a little bit big. use -(x)  ¡x. ŠÃZ With Descriptions When our conjecture involves description verbs. It looks as though I’ll have time today. Á ˆ‹ ŠÃZ  ‚ Ù  ë§  D y  ¡x ‹ˆÃZ  ‚ ò  ë§  D F  ¡x.. ׊ à Z ÷  ë§  2©  ¡x.(x) ˆ ÃZ  ë§  ¡x. Šˆ P ‹ ̊ à Z It looks like a cat. Á ˆ‹ ˆÃZ  NÙ ‚   ë§  3 p D 9©  ¡x. AVST . Sˆ ˆ ׈ à Z ¦òÞ ´ ‚ ó÷  ë§ x£v j D ¨©  ¡x.and 2. EXAMPLES (x) ˆ ˆ Ù p (x) ˆ          . when conjecturing what ˆ ÃZ  ë§ something/someone might be like.and ¨-/2  Ì × ó  Note that -. This kimchi seems a little bit hot.p  ˆÃ Ù Z ë§ ¡x. With Actions When we are conjecturing about a state of affairs we can say         . ˆÃZ    ë§  ©  ¡x. It seems to be raining..combine with  ¡x as follows. ÃZ  ë§ NOTE: For completed actions. ¾ÃZ  ó  ë§ 5 ¢  ¡x.  „G¼  ë§ q:q  ¡x.   ó Ì ×  à ë§ Z      . I guess. ‹ŠÃZ With the verbs: -/. This kimchi may be a little bit hot. It doesn’t look like a dog. for uncompleted actions. we can say .. It’ll be a cat. c G. It seems as though it’s going to rain. -.   . ×   EXAMPLES becomes either      or      ̊ à Z ó÷  ë§ ¨©  ¡x. He/She seems to have no money. It seems to have rained. ¨.

. Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: 104 TX ¦V§ #" x. ‰Ø . ‡ á½ ENˆ« ¨V§ ˆs ´ é§ óN   q ×x. 1 Conversation Annie is talking to a shop keeper. R V § ¹ . Various facets of our previous study are brought to bear on this topic.000 Dxt ‘.. and one that requires interaction and possibly negotiation with shop staff and others. ˆq  8 $. W HERE WILL YOU GET IT ? Going shopping is of course a basic human activity... "w<x. u4. asking questions such as ‘How much is it?’ (Unit 8)... ‹ á E ¨V§ /¨ § ´ 5V  x. 5x? C . eg using Korean numbers (Units 5 & 6).x. c G.. If you want to .x. and describing things (Unit 14). ¾P ˆÁ ˆí ´ ¨V§  Û. In this Unit we also learn how to describe the acts of giving and receiving.x. basic Insa (Unit 1).000 D<x. Businesses..= 18 » V Î 18 TX ë W§ #" § <x? R I N THIS U NIT . Üש  . getting around on public transport (Unit 12). # ¨#x.x? ½ õ iŠ ‹ Æ  ó W§ / 5 § <x? À V  ë W§ . 8... etc • Talking about the Act of Giving/Receiveing • Future time words • Introductory Statements • I’ve come to . Ì V S ‹ F" ¨„ V§ 3®. w < 6.x.x. • If . ÁHŠ €¾÷ N oÙL§ Pˆ 3 †IV§ 6. Shin 2003 . finding out where places are located (Unit 9). PÄ ´€V§ qÜ . Shops.p7x.. • Goods for Sale. n ‘..000 x? s 2<x? á E§  W§ ¾À ˆ ¦ ´V   s w5< 8. Á P 3 U óT§  „  F Y V§ XˆW§ 6.000  ‘. á½ ENV§ 8.. É Ìˆ ÁŠ 3 6. 5 § <x. q.x. 22. $ .x.x.000 D<x. à ‡ á½ ENV§ ‹ ‡ ‚ ´L§ \ UN ü ¾ ë÷ ‚   ¨V§ D {7x. # 5¥  ¡© D 5 B ‘. Ä \ ˆN NV§ $  6 2D<x? ÁÀ ½ Tˆ § #r x? \ ¦ V óÙ ˆN÷§ $ s 2< ¨p  6¤x.

.x?: You’ve probably noticed that Korean has no clear equivalent to the English   ¨V§ Please . 22.000 D<x á½ ENV§ (8. Right.or to ¨ T  B-. • 5 B ‘. Just give me one. We cover this   ¨V§ grammatical construction in detail later on in the course. There you are. • "w<x... look around. If I buy several.. Thank you. • # . OK. Hello. How much are those pictures each? Which ones? Those ones next to ceramics.. . 2 Goods for Sale Š¾ s ¦ i ë ¡ ÜH Á¾ €× ¦ s ‰ † 8 V F ] % ° ]Ä %î °Ý *F× È. 8.: Many shopping transactions in Korea conclude with the customer being offered XˆW§ some little extra item as a gift.H V¾ ž Š O G : goods price souvenirs ceramics furniture bag. or in English XˆW§ . In fact.: # means several.k3 ˆN  6 Á ­´ p P ­¸ ¢ toothpaste toothbrush notebook paper doll map food items toys picture umbrella stamps c G.. UN UN and indicates a general plural number. Goodbye. Two of the most common usages are #t. Translation Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Shop Keeper: Annie: Welcome.. Thus the question À ½ NV§ 2D<x? (How much each?) is answered in the dialogue by 8.to VST . I’ve come to buy some souvenirs. Three? Hmm ../#.?: When we want to À ½ N know the price per unit of goods we use D. 6. Shin 2003 105 . will you make them cheaper for me? How many will you take? I’ll take three.TX ë W§ #" § <x? R Language Notes • 2D .000 won apiece.000 won. which means ‘per ½ N unit’. That’s a bit expensive. the sense of Please is indicated by adding the verb ‘. Too expensive.000 won apiece.. "w<x literally means It’s (part of our) service. Thus 5 B ‘. and #  (several kinds) UN  when indicating that a certain item comes in a variety of forms.000 won each)..x means literally Give me (the favour of) doing it.. 8. That won’t do. And here’s a bag with our compliments.000 won apiece too. Sure.. case flower vase cosmetics soap medicine G : O úŠ F s¨ œˆ r| Ž ‚ D õû ¼A qå ¦ s ½¾ N× 9H VPS F´F ..000 won? How much are these ones? They’re 8. then. UNë ˆ when address a group of people. with our compliments.

Shin 2003 per unit. each present(s) the most/best work .. etc V F 9 FE ... confectionery shop *E È á florist XN Xí ë„ "6/"à/sq Á ½ˆ book shop OT GQ :< chemist/pharmacy V Á G*í :Èà shoe shop ˆV ˆ ëF† ë† s8‰/s‰ stationery shop shopping centre beauty shop clothing store photo studio book shop pharmacy shoe shop ‘PC Cafe’ ] %ó °© V Fó C© ˆV Á ëF†í s8‰à V‡Á Gµí :Aà VVÁ GFí :.= 18 » V Î 3 Shops & Businesses. good looking necessary handy 5 Some More Expressions 5  UN  #  UN ½ #  õ . SPOKEN FORM F . The following written forms are presented for your information.. Vá À ø  v5 ¼d r\ õB ôV ¸F P8 OV GF :8 †¨F ‰‹8 V PC8 V F Language Notes For some shops there may be a difference between the way we refer to them in conversation and the way they are referred to in the written language ..on actual shop signs.á VE V Fó C© ] %ó °© ôV ¸F P8 OV O< GF GT :8/:Q †¨F ‰‹8 V ˆV à ëF†Á s8‰í WRITTEN FORM TRANSLATION ¶ó C§ ŽÀ beautician VÎí =»à Á cake. < " V X 106 cheaply several kinds several times according to . for example. ..D ½ N ¾Š ¥ ¦ Vó =¨ À À ó ¨ c G.à ½¾Á N×í 9Hà ćÁ í¸í àCà ‰à †í Á flower shop bread shop stationery shop tailor dressmaker grocery store butcher furniture shop 4 Some Verbs ?© wN÷  Ċ Ž } < $Y $xY¦ R ë ­go shopping look for wait take (items with oneself) bring (items with oneself) sell OŠ ½ G÷ í :© ܈ Š ø ÷ q ¤À ” ó  © ªúÌ #ó  ¨À ó§ ­x õ ¾  - take medicine cost money good quality stylish.

... ©/¥ ‘2#x.. -w@/-<5 have the ‡ ´R V honorific form C. Š ½ Q^ ÷ ü FëT§   <"  V5X     NOTE: -w@" is more informal than ‡ ´RX -<5" but they are generally VX interchangeable.. I received a present from my (elder) sister.. ‡ ˆŠ Q^ õ ½VX ¥÷ FëT§ <5" ¦© 8¨#x. if this month is October: September October November December January February ¦ò x£ Š 1ó 6¨ À ½ S§ó  <x¨ õX À ½ «§ó  |x¨ õ À ½ ó§ó  ¨x¨ õÀ À ¹ ¨ m§ó C ‘ x¨ ‹ ® À ¹ ¨ ȧó C ‘ *x¨ ‹ À ½ ë  £ õR 1ë ¹ ë 6£/C £ R ‹R X¾ ® S m <ç 11 X¾ ® S m <ç 12 1 m 6ç 1 ¾ ® 1 m 6ç 2 ¾ ® NOTES: Saturday and Sunday together =  ‘¥ this weekend ½ ¨ë õ R c G. I received a book from my friend on my birthday. ¾ŠŠ Q^ SŽû‡ Fµ´RX m FëT§ 4>Mw@" ÿ 8¨#x? ® Q^ 7 Future Time-Words In a week. if today is Tuesday: Tuesday Wednesday Friday Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday In a year.  .. ‡ ¾ŠŠ Ì T b ¥÷ ˆîT§ #NC ¦© sÞ#x.... Š½ Ì ÷ ü ¨T§  <  V5  . ©/¥ 8¨#x. I gave a present to Mother... What did you give to your (elder) sister? . I received money from Mother. but -w@"/<5" have b ‡ ´RX VX no honorific forms. ûÀ ôŠ Q^ T ´RX ø÷ FëT§ #Nw@" q© 8¨#x. ¾ŠŠ Ì õ ¼†V ¸÷ ¨T§ s‰<5 P© ‘2#x. I gave a book to my friend. What did you receive from your (younger) brother? EXAMPLES õ ‡ ¼†´RX óV ¸÷ FëT§ s‰w@" M¨< P© 8¨#x. ©/¥ sÞ#x. ‡ ´@X wR" .C b .TX ë W§ #" § <x? R 6 Talking about the Act of Giving/Receiveing When we have given something to someone we can say:     ‡ ´@  wR  . Shin 2003 107 . ôŠ Ì õ ‡ ® Ì ½´R m ¨T§ w@ ÿ ‘2#x? And when we have received something:    I gave a present to Tae-U. Š½ Ì ÷ ü ˆîT§ EXAMPLES ­´R ¥÷ ¨T§ @w@ ¦© ‘2#x.

p© $ . and. an invitation... or simply an implied invitation for the listener to respond. x£v ~B§. We do this in Korean by using · · ·7. Pˆ  ¦ÙL§  xp7x.p7x. which may be L described as a ‘scene-setter’ This is a form that announces. P ˆ ô ½ T It’s raining – take your umbrella.x.(x)7.p7. It’s been raining. §x? ˆ R ¦òÞ ˆ¼L 1ó ¦V§ x£v p7. or when someone answers our phone call. ‘ 9w 62#x. such as I saw a nice bag in the window . ˆ ÙL    ··· ··· AVST .p7. or. EXAMPLES ˆ } ÞL§   < ªv7x. we usually feel the need to make a preliminary remark explaining our purpose. R¥ q ¡.p7... what follows is related to the preliminary remark: I saw a nice bag in the window (– how much is it?) or.. · · · ˆ ÙL  ¨ WÞL ë§  ‘ <7. it gives the listener the expectation that something more is to be said – perhaps another remark. We can make a · · ·7 clauses into a complete. ˆ L    ··· ··· DVST . This gives a L § mild exclamatory effect. Polite Informal sentence by adding x. #:5 ®x? Ê ‰ I haven’t done my homework – what shall I do? ˆ F÷ ´ëÙL   6© n¢p7. The bus isn’t coming – let’s take a taxi. It’s raining. Shin 2003 . 6.. This is so-and-so speaking. ˆ That’s really good. SŠ P^ˆ 3 ¨ F´ FT§ V‡ S Ì I’ve met him – yes. When the introductory statement pertains actions: PRESENT ACTION: · · · PAST ACTION: EXAMPLES AVST . This is so-and-so speaking . as it were. Šˆ ¾ À ˆ ¦ s"ëÙL  ´ ëT§   u ƪ¨p7.x. ‡ ½ P ˆ „Vü ´ ÿÙL T "§ B=¥ q †p7. Š ”ˆ  oÙL§  . · · · ˆ ÙL  ¦ÙL ­´÷ Y V§  xp7. The weather’s really nice. in the case of the phone. 6¨ x.¨/2 ^Ì ë · · ·†  ÿ    . Š ”ˆ R ë } ÞL§ ¢ < ªv7x. That hat was good – why didn’t you buy it? Yesterday was cold – and now today it’s nice and warm. ˆ ºp Šˆ À This one’s very pretty – shall we buy it? He (respected person) is busy today – please come tomorrow. because it is a preliminary remark only.¨/2 ^Ì ë · · ·†  ÿ    . he was a strange person. ˆ PŠ Tˆ ´ ¦ÙL ü „ ë !w q xp7.= 18 » V Î 8 INTRODUCTORY STATEMENTS When we walk into a shop. 108 c G. (– is Tae-U there?) When the introductory statement is essentially a description of states: PRESENT STATE: · · · PAST STATE: EXAMPLES DVST . . Ü q §#x? ¬˜^ˆ P^ TVÙ ­qˆL ¦òÞ Þx #=p ’Ù7.

TX ë W§ #" § <x? R 9 Come/Go . in order to . õ ½P ¼†ü ´N ƒV ëT§ s‰¥ n .. EXAMPLES ‡T ½ [ ´QTü O­N ´QV oT§ w<#¥ <Ž  w<< ...#x. When we want to explain why (ie in order to do what) we have come or gone somewhere we can say: · · · VST .and . - ¦  N corresponds to English in order to. ‡T P I’ve come to Korea to learn Korean.. .(x) · · · LOCOMOTIVE VERB ˆN NOTES: Locomotive Verbs = verbs such as x-.that show motion from one place to another.

.. ˆO õ ¾ When we want to give guidance to people in this way we can start by saying EXAMPLES Š¾Š s÷  O¾ Fë FV V§ ¦© 5  47s . Shin 2003 109 .. (Lit.x.’ we can say: · · · VST . Œ ^ I went to the coffee shop to meet a friend.  = if . RP ë´ ¦ ˆ¾ œ´ ¦ü V§ ±j u 2x. When we want to link two clauses with ’If . ¸ ¸½ O¾ U¸V V§ T¢ü  #T< .. practise with your Korean friend a lot. we’ll buy pork. go to Namdaemun Market. ×q¥ § <x. rm u¥ . · · · ˆ¾ õ EXAMPLES  ¦¾ OEV ´ ë W§  x. – a standard Korean invitation.. œ„ ë ¾ é„ ü ë W§ wq ¡ . go to a travel agent. õ ‡T õ õŒŠ a If you want to do Korean well.x. c G. p< ¡ <x.(x).x. Š N ¦V§ £ x. × õ ‡ ½ If they don’t have a red hat.B< ¡#x. †Š †á He/She attends a Hagwon to learn Maths. û ¥ õ û If you want to buy an airplane ticket. ½ õ ćÁ If you want to buy meat. buy a yellow one. · · · ˆ O¾ õ NOTES: -(x) = expression of intention. << q ¡ <x. Drop in on us some time. 11 If you want to . ” õ P R If the weather’s good. ‡T ½ R ´QTü ë O¾ ´Q ¼† ¾†÷ ë V§ w<#¥ ©  w< s‰Â B© ¥ . „ ü O¾ í¸íV V§ q¥  àCà< . õ [á P R If it rains we won’t go to the park.(x).x. õS ˆ V If you want to shop cheaply. · · · VST ..) ¨}÷ ­N }EV 0§ @© : @< x..x.. go to a butcher. Come and relax (with us). i õ ½R If the beef is too expensive. R ë ˆ¾ ´V ë W§ ¢ ªx. 10 IF .x. we’ll go to the mountains.< .

1 Some Examples t ªx. sports.... ˆ ” ë § t x. neighbourhood. Now we become more personal. TT ëë§ ££Bx. learning Korean. emotions and reactions • Why . ˆ ë § ­N§ Žöx. ¨Xx "ö§. Š^ ëT§ £¤#x.? questions. sad and so on. and in this unit we start to learn how to describe our personal feelings and reactions – being happy..= 19 » V Î 19 t #Dx? ˆ ë TJ§ I N THIS U NIT . We also look at ways of describing other people – are they clever? thick? nice? not so nice? We also start to learn how to show the causal relationship between sentences. and so on. asking and answering Why . ½ÄŠ Hí÷ B§ Øà© x..? H OW DO YOU FEEL ? We’ve learnt a number of basic descriptive verbs that enabled us to describe how we felt about food. ŠP ´§ §qBx. • Describing feelings. ­ˆN§ Žªöx.. * ^T§ È ë#x. «§ Âtöx. Shin 2006 . ¾ ¢ ¼ ^T§ p ë#x. ¢ 110 c G.

. bashful. you simply say that a person. Shin 2006 111 . how other people feel. act shy appear to enjoy appear envy appear. nervous worries feel worried feel surprised feel elated.  T  DESCRIPTIVE VERB STEM DESCRIBING THIRD PARTIES MEANING appear.  Š ½ ÷ ü EXAMPLES ¾Ä ¥î ˆ§ ß  öx. be missed) is a ­. as shown in the table below. which is semantically an ‘active’ verb.(Lit. c G. ‡T ´Q ˆ§ w<  öx. .(Literally.(Lit. that the expression -/-#/· · ·B . a place or a time is ‘missed’ in Korean. manifest the sign of .). and asking. To express that you miss a person.x? h§ ­ ­N§ @ Žöx? Are you happy? Do you envy Tae-U? Language Notes: the Verb  ¤ˆó  As is the case with the verb Ž. act sad appear. be envied) in the above. Ž† õ Š I miss Seon-Yeong. shameful feel lonely TT ëë ££ TT ëë ¡¡  ñ  + *  È ŠP ´ §q ½Ä Hí Øà ½ÄŠ Hí÷ Øà© Š  £¾ ¼  p ˆó  ¤Â feel frustrated feel frustrated feel afraid feel angry feel uneasy. the verb  ¤. Seon-Yeong is missed (by me). a place or a time.) I miss Korea. ie. ŠÂ òñ ª+­ Ž. ie you. the person. down in the dumps feel envy feel shy. act happy ­ˆ Žª. I miss my university days. we attach to the descriptive verb stem -/-#/· · ·B . emotional state be in a good mood. happy very sad sad mood. Õ Â?¿ joyous. act.is not used when we ask about the feelings and  T  emotions of the second person. † «¹}… J ¼†÷ ˆ§ z>@q D s‰¤  öx. act sad appear. (lit. be dissatisfied. appear. Â ýý 11 Š òˆ ¨}ˆ ­ˆN Žªö Š ò  ªö ­N Žö  ýý 11B Š òN ¨( . h Note. not -©/-¥. Korean lacks the counterpart of the verb to miss. feel good be in a bad mood.t #Dx? ˆ ë TJ§ 2 Feelings and Emotions ˆ Š òˆ ¨} ýý 11 t ˆ ë t ªˆ ” ë  t q ªˆ P” ë ´  t ˆ ë ˆ ­ Ž. Thus. I miss my friends in my primary school days. ­ˆ Žª. }… J ˆ§ 7@q D  öx. however..  ˆó  description verb that is inherently ‘passive’ in meaning. on top of the world miss someone/something Language Notes: Describing how other people feel When we are describing. the place or the time is marked with the particle -/-.

(x) = honorific.= 19 » V Î 3 SHOWING SYMPATHY/EMPATHY Here’s a simple but effective way of showing sympathy for someone. That must be inconvenient (for you). #x = polite. You must feel lonely. % = ˆ Ì Ã presumptive suffix.. Ì t ªxÃ#x. Š òˆ%T§ ¨}Ã#x. when ˆ the verb stem ends in a consonant use x.Ã#x.(x) . You must be tired. informal verb T§ ending. You must be sad (about that). The expression corresponds to “You must be . You must be happy (Lit. You must be happy (about that).... ˆ%Tx Ì î%#§ . feeling good). ˆ  %T§ Ì EXAMPLES NOTES: VST = verb stem. VST . ˆ ” ë ˆ%T§ Ì Ã#§.” in English .

ÌÌÌ 5 Describing People.#x.(x)Þ .Ã#x. ˆ î %T§ Ì Ì EXAMPLES NOTES: (x)Þ = (x) + 2 = honorific + PAST. Shin 2006 .. informal verb-ending.’ get rich be poor be lucky. we can say . Ì 4 You must have been .. spirit a good-hearted person in a happy frame of mind be pleasing. have good luck be listless 112 c G. Situations N  N ª  ” N  ˆ ¹ C ‹ ¹ Þ F C ªv 6 ‹ ”ˆ S  Cxt ˆ ‹ Þ ¹ˆ« ¹V ÷ C< ¤‹ Š õÀ ¼  s3 ÀÁ N  29 ÀÁ N 29 ­½ Ž õ head be clever be stupid mind. Really? That must have been interesting. polite do something wholeheartedly earnestly be hard-working ˆˆ 5xtˆÙ 5x?L ¾û ‡T µë A© ‡ µ ˆ @ t „ˆ : q}­ Ž ­W§ Ž<x ­ ì Ž ½k P ´ ˆ ” ë  v ªø × …  @ 2- be lazy. -#x = polite. indolent a lazy-bones be complicated be thirsty be hungry rich person ‘He/She’s rich. ˆî ˆ  Ì Ì when the verb stem ends in a consonant use xÞ. And when we are commenting on the ‘then’ feelings of the the person we’re speaking to.. DVST .o ÃTx. T§ I went to Korea last week.. be to one’s liking be kind. % = ˆî Ì Ì Ã presumption. Ì «­%#§ ÂtÃTx. P ‡T ^ P ˆ§  ó%T§  8x? = ¨2Ã#x. ´ ‘V ´QV ëoT§ k ¨< w<< ¡. U Ì Šõ ¾%#§ § ÃTx.

VST2 ....t #Dx? ˆ ë TJ§ 6 Why? To express this.. we can say   Ü            . X EXAMPLES X îEV ëT§ .. Üx? = why? § 7 Since/Because .?..? = why ../# T · · ·B     ... When we want to explain the causal relationship between two sets of information we can say    .. VST1 ."..?  ˆ8§ Ü  x? § Üx?             NOTES: Ü .. Ü  8x? = why is that   ˆ§ so?.

FV X ¦¦ü ëT§ . /¨ X ´ ëT§  " q §#x. I’m going downtown – I’ve got an appointment. So ˆ§ § X /¨ X ´ ëT§  " q §#x. and that being the case. I didn’t buy it. Sentences like these show that I went to the market and bought some grapes. Look at these sentences. /¨ X§ = ‘w¥ ¦"  |#x. ½Š À^ I was sick so I went to the hospital. ¨œü X ˆùT§ ½Š  = ‘w¥ ¦"x. Shin 2006 113 . Won’t you have a seat and wait? VST .< " }s¥ §#x. or simply attaching x to · · ·". Äá ^ O‡ ¨ G‚ ÌTX 1« § :B ó#" 6t x. Three points to note: (1) The tense marker comes after the VST2 – there is no tense marker after VST1: /¨ X ´ ëT§  " q §#x.” P^ c G. /¨ X ˆùT§  =  "x. ^ P^ (correct) (incorrect) (2) We often shorten the second clause (i. P^ /¨ ë" ´ ëT§  ²X q §#x.. V ½^ ` FX V§ :" . the VST2 clause) by substituting it with the phrase .. P^ ¨œü X ø ëT§ ‘w¥ ¦" s ¡#x./# T itself doesn’t indicate ‘because’ etc – it simply · · ·B  indicates that the following action took place in the circumstance indicated by VST1. I didn’t buy it – it was too expensive. I couldn’t go because I didn’t know the address. P^ ¨œü X ø ëT§ ‘w¥ ¦" s ¡#x. ½Š À^ =  "  |#x.e.x.  8x. Thus  /¨ X ´ ëT§ " q §#x." Ý< ¡#x. ¨œü X§ ½Š (3) It’s a good idea to bear in mind the full range of meaning for this grammatical structure. actually means “It was too expensive.

Rü T§ ½ ÀÌ ˆŠ Q ë÷ FˆV§ s© 5x. leave behind forget to take. empty throat thirsty.= 19 » V Î 8 Some Nouns and Verbs À 2Q F 5X "  x¦ ”  £EXAMPLES open close stand. lit.  „§ : q. leave behind blackboard stomach hungry. break out go out come out put.x. dry 102 A¥ 22#x.   ß<" 1#x. ¾Ä ˆ pŠ ” ^ ¥îÙ P÷ „ëT§ ßp ­´© £q¡#x. come to a halt happen.  îVX ýT§ ½ Ì ˆÀ ^ Ùó ëT§ y¨ ¢#x. lit. place something somewhere ” „¦ £qx” „ £q÷‡ *´ ªv  : „ˆ q}‡ µ @ ˆ t- forget to bring.

Shin 2006 .. I opened the book to Page 102. À ˆ <õ ½ Ì Kylie’s writing a letter now.x. When we want to stress that an action is in the process of being carried out we can say · · · AVST . The train came to a halt at the station. ‡ ¥ µ R§ @ ëx. V ˆ SŠ Ì ‡ ½ ‹ ÀÁ ´ü x† N ­„ óT§ w¥ §D 29 :q ¨#x.q ¨#x. please.© q ¨#x. Ì I’m learning hard Chinese characters these days. The cat is sleeping behind the door. ­Ù #V \€V „Vü „ ÌT§ @p T= $Ü< B=¥ q ó2#x.to certain T ó Ì verb-stems. ˆ ½ ‡ ½ ¨Ì 10 Compound verbs: VST /#/· · ·B ¨T ó Ì When we want to focus on a state that results from an action we can add -/#/· · ·B ¨. 9 In the process of . Something (bad) has happened! Seon-Yeong has left her umbrella (here). I’m hungry I’m thirsty. Tae-U was doing his homework yesterday evening. VST X "` F :¦ x- MEANING stand sit come -/#/· · ·B ¨T ó Ì Xó "¨Ì ` Ì Fó :¨ó Â¨Ì MEANING be standing be seated be here 114 c G. „ óT§ Ì EXAMPLES óÙ X ¾ü ˆ„ óT§ ¨p S ¥ ¤q ¨#x. Close the door. „G ë íVX F÷ „ óT§ q: s ñ<" ..

The meaning of -à can often be rather elusive to English speakers.#x. The following notes are not intended for immediate practical application. as we’ve seen above) emerges in discussions of future activities it often appears as similar to the future tense in English. À Š Ì ­ ÔV F„ óT§ @ Â< :q ¨#x. ` Ì ­ ÔV F óT§ @ Â< : ¨#x. Annie came into the classroom (and he’s still there). Because presumption usually (though not always. ` Ì 11 MORE ABOUT -ÃÌ % Annie came into the classroom. and that is why we prefer to Ì % introduce it in this Unit in the context of the specific function of expressing sympathy – . Ì % Ã. Tae-U is (in the process of) sitting down in the chair. but rather are intended for you to refer back to as you observe -à arise in various Ì % contexts in future Units.is usually described as signifying presumption on the part of the speaker. À Š P  …ó« ÷TóT§ < q§t ¤#¨#x.t #Dx? ˆ ë TJ§ Compare these sentences:  …ó« ÷ToT§ < q§t ¤#. Tae-U is sitting down in the chair.

It is not emotionally neutral like the verb ending -(x) ˆ <x. perhaps. -à indicates a determination Ì % or conviction that what is planned will occur. inner states that only the person concerned can know the reality of. Shin 2006 115 . communicates a willingness and sense of motivation not to be found with = ® <x.”. implies that one is committed enough to the objective of a visit to come back later at a more convenient time. rather than in more general contexts. Thus Á¾ûÁ N¥N 1ó %T§ 3M4 6¨ Ã#x. because logically we cannot impute Ì % conviction or determination to other people. which we use when making matter-of-fact statements about future actions. that the Ì % person concerned is committed to a planned activity. -à carries the same implication. 5<  xÃ#x. in the second person. À Ì Mr Kim will go tomorrow. when used with third parties. Similarly V %T§ = Ã#x. V " W§ ‰ When asking other people – that is. V  ¦%T§ Ì I’ll come again at five. but of “I guess Mr Kim’s going tomorrow. in the first person.o Ã#x and so on.” c G. but rather suggests W§ an emotional commitment . For this reason its flavour can’t always be captured in single sentences out of context but. after all. conveys an overtone not of “Mr Kim’s set on going tomorrow. î%T§ U Ì When referring to actions involving oneself – that is. Ì I’ll do it. Therefore. for example. -à changes meaning.hence a determination. they are. when referring to third parties -à conveys the Ì % presumption of the speaker. or commitment to carry out the planned activity. Thus 1ó %T§ 6¨ Ã#x? À Ì Are you going tomorrow? carries an overtone of “Are you set on going tomorrow?” Finally.

.4 F  6 §S Š climate summer winter It rains. cloudy rainy season windy 2 General Ä* îÈ ß @ ‹ µ N  ‰À "ó ®¨  /¨ À « 0t (+ neg) ˆ´  . how to use pronouns. kind same fast. quick Ä I Ø ‹ ” µV  @< ªN ª  ” ¨ ‘ Š» ý ¦r ˆ„  q Ö óT §# ­½ Ž õ ˆ t- scenery good for the body bright..n Ê P õÀ ¼ s3 Z ë ¡tˆ movie.. dislike diligent different 3 Learning Korean involves . what it’s like to study Korean..... 1 Weather & Climate R ë ¢ µ A ‹ © Š ÷   ˆ æ p  53 À F 6 S weather spring autumn rain snow season wind – µ UÙ #? ¾  © Š  ¦  xˆ ~V ÷ F ... clever very of course . We also look at how to form an adverb out of a verb.= 20 » V Î 20 ‡T ´QVX R w<<" ë #Dx? § TJ§ W HAT ’ S IT LIKE LIVING IN KOREA ? In this Unit we learn to say what the weather’s like.. on so on. And then . and what to say if we want the person we’re speaking to to agree with what we’re saying. R ë  ¥ ¨ Ð ó Fˆ 8¤ Q 116 speaking reading dictation ‰ ¹ > ˆ ¤ R‹ ë¹ ¦C c G. cinema body head things to do too (much) not especially . But . Shin 2005 listening writing pronunciation .

í§ It’s easy to learn Korean.. When we want to describe things we like. ­Ù P ó ü § @p ô ¨¥ ªBx.  ¦ v ½ í Ü going looking eating R ë §[ O­ <Ž  - R ë § [ O­ <Ž    living studying drinking When we want to say that we find certain activities easy we can say .. Shin 2005 117 . Public announcements – in airplanes. working etc In fact the suffix -. …V ÀN óT ü óT§ << óE ¨#¥ §#Bx. ‡TRˆ ´QëÞ :­ w<¥v  õöx. VST-() õöx. want. or dislike. I like speaking in a foreign language but I don’t like writing in it. Hë ëVÙ ó v ¢<p ¨  @¤#x..  4 Adverbs There are various ways to describe HOW an action was/is performed. Some examples: ¦ v½ í ÜIt’s easy to .. doing we can say VST-(¥) ªBx/§#Bx. Ù ¾§ ˆ Šõ It’s inconvenient to go by bus.means desire. it makes an ‘-ing’ noun from a verb. ø ¨½ À ½Ö I dislike waking up early in the morning. R s V ½” ü § I like going to Noraebang (karaoke) with my friends on weekends. T ¥ ˆ” P ˆÖ We would like you to do . QT« ë Ù ´ ˆ Ù óT§ Â<#t R p ª n ¤p §#Bx.‡T ´QVX R w<<" ë #Dx? § TJ§ Eating. ˆ¸Ð ½” Tae-U likes reading books. Tˆ« !wt p §Bx.. Note that Korean use of adverbs of manner extends not only to the way in which an action is performed but to its outcome as well. ˆR ˆÀ øŠ …÷T§ It’s hard to work on hot days. airport terminals and other public places. studying.   ¤. . c G. ‡TRˆ » ´QëÞ X O­ TOë  ë§ w<¥v |" <Ž  #v  ¡x. It seems studying Korean by myself is hard. is a productive device. ¨ëV õ†„ œFV ‘¥< ¼‰ q r88< ¥ ªBx. ½ ” ü § óT§ Ö EXAMPLES NOTES: The use of the object particle is optional. í§ EXAMPLES NOTES: The use of the subject particle is optional. attached to the verb stem.. Another context in which you’ll hear the VST- regularly is in the construction . ë T usually request people to follow instructions in this way. for example. [ ˆÃZ I like/dislike doing .....

we usually don’t put personal pronouns in a Korean sentence if the context is clear.  † =a ë ¥Z ë ¡Some examples: late many be same  † =5 a ë ¥ Z ë ¡ late a lot/copiously together UÌ > ó ˆV§ n ¨5 s. P‹ I’m sorry I came late. but examples of their use are so few that it’s usually better to simply commit the adverb form to memory.x! Enjoy your food!/Bon appetit. T Ù Á ü ù ´÷T§ #Np N¥ }5 n¤2#x. †ûŠ }÷ …¨ü ˆ ëÿT§ @M¤ q¥ 5 ¥†#x. ’Take a lot’.x.<" v© 5 §#§. Seon-Yeong always wears Hanbok beautifully. If you are going to use personal pronouns.) 5 Personal pronouns As you have noticed already. P× R T We haven’t got much time.with -:    õÀ ¼ s3 ­½ Ž õ kind diligent õÀ ¼ s3 ­½ Ž õ kindly diligently • With DVST that end in  or t. if you. broadly speaking. ¾Ä ˆ wAŠ õ ¥îÙ ‡‡÷ ½V Wˆ óT§ ßp ´µ© = <5 ¨#x. Shin 2005 . ± ¡. we replace the . then you’ll need to take note of the fact that. ˆ V ÀŠ ^ We bought our clothes cheaply in the market. UÙF}÷ ó óT§ #?8@© =¨5 z#x. 118 c G. we replace the /t with -: ˆ ˆ  ˆ tÀ  /fast. ie. ­Ù FVX ø÷  ëTx p . Quick let’s go. Korean makes three kinds of distinctions in deciding which pronoun is appropriate. think that the hearer knows who you are talking about. ½ R The students spoke poorly of the professor. ´ T§ ë ë j 2#x. the speaker. quick (is) far R ë ± À  / quickly far away • There are also rules that cover other DVST. a ë ˆV§ ¥ s. ¾V†Š Ì Ì I had a good time in the summer holidays.   † X ´" =5 Â" q®. Bon appetit! (Lit. ˆ 3 ½ ù PŠÌ Mother made the Gimchi hot to the taste.= 20 » V Î • We can add -5 to DVST ending in ¨-:  Ì ó ó =¨Ì UÌ >ó n¨be interesting delicious ó =¨5 Ì UÌ >ó n¨5 interestingly deliciously • We can add -5 to DVST ending in  or I:  ˆ ° F Wˆ <‡T ´ë o¡ù ù }bad easy pretty glad (chili) hot ˆ 5 ° F 5 Wˆ <5 ‡T ´ë o¡5 ù ù }5 badly easily prettily gladly with a lot of chili (’hotly’) • With DVST that end in -.

I did it.  \ü ´„ óTÿT§ $¥ nq §#†#x. ie. S  ˆ \ë / /$t ˆ  ˆ \ / /$(or ) (it) à PLURAL NEUTRAL EXALTED ­ ÷ (¤) (we) Š title/kinship term plus ¤ Š ÷ / ÷ È(¤) (you. / 6 /Ù T í p ë Ü2? ˆ ¦ ½Ì 3 }…V  6 @q< ? † Second person plural: È(¤) / ÷ Š Have you eaten? Are you going to school? /÷Þ ë í Ȥv T Ü2? Šˆ ¦ ½Ì Have you eaten? Note that the ending - is a question form used in the intimate speech style. 3 before the subject particle  or when used as the possessive pronoun. SŠ  ˆ \ë÷ / /$t¤ ˆŠ  ˆ \Š / /$÷ (they. ˆ ¥Ä V ÙÞ ¥îV§ = ?v ß<x. that is. Distinction B: whether the speaker is striking a neutral tone In referring to ourselves and others neutrally. He wanted to see me. non-human) ä I II III HUMBLE \V $/= I II III HUMBLE \ ÷ $È(¤) Š Distinction A: whether the speaker is being self-deprecating and thus humble In referring to ourselves $ is used. which we meet later on in this course. Shin 2005 119 . I did it. eg. ˆ ¥Ä 1 ÙÞ ¥îV§ 6 ?v ß<x. \ \Ù ¾îV§ $p ß<x. my. ie. ¾ˆ ¾Ä V ÿTx = †#§. called panmal (o¥). First person We use . My name is I Seon-Yeong. we use the following pronouns.  1 Ù ¾îV§ p ß<x. = before the subject particle . close personal relationship.  ‡R ´ë Panmal. ie. is used when the speakers have a well established. ¾ˆ ¾Ä 1 ÿT§ 6 †#x. My name is I Seon-Yeong. of $. 6 or È would always be used with panmal.‡T ´QVX R w<<" ë #Dx? § TJ§ Personal Pronouns SINGULAR NEUTRAL EXALTED /6 (I) 1 /3 /6 (you) title/kinship term. We mention this here because . M4 ¾ûÁ ¥N  ˆ \F / /$6 (he/she). and 6 before the subject particle  or when used as the possessive pronoun. He wanted to see me. my. showing neither respect nor disrespect. pl) Š UNë #t ˆ  ˆ \F÷ / /$6¤ (they). your. We can’t refer to others in self-deprecating mode of course. / 3 / c G.  ü P„ óTÿT§ ¥ ´q §#†#x. ½P É  I’m Seon-Yeong. We use . ½n É  Second person singular I’m Seon-Yeong. they must be referred to in terms of neutrality or honour. Note also that = is the \ V V possessive form.

pronounced with a rising intonation. ¾Ä ¥î  Á¾ûÁˆ õ N¥NÞ ½V ¦îT§ 3M4v = xÞ#x? Ì ¥ÄÙ V ¦îT§ îp ½= xÞ#x? ¾ß ˆ õ Ì ¾Ä ˆ õ ¥îÙ V ¦îT§ ßp ½= xÞ#x? Ì Second person plural: #t UNë ˆ When did you (Mr Kim) come? When did you (Miss I Seon-Yeong) come? When did you (Seon-Yeong) come? UNëÞ X ê O­V§ #tv S ó <Ž .   and $ – we met   ˆ à à \ à  ˆ \  already in Unit 6.     \ ˆFÞ Š‰W§  6v ž†<x? Sˆ ˆÞ óW§  v ê<x? È  êW§  ó<x?  H § 5  ªx. isn’t it?’. It softens the direct effect of a plain statement. haven’t you? Korean food’s hot. Regarding the usage of -. VST-x. this is the same expression that we would ¾MÁ ¥ûN  use when addressing the person (to catch his/her attention). People usually don’t disagree 120 c G. won’t you?’ etc...x? ˆˆ < [ Third person: t. In most cases. they become further shortened: 5. ß).   and $ for inanimate objects. ˆ5 and $5.= 20 » V Î Third person We use 6.  6 and $6 for humans. respected person. ” Second person singular Who is he/she? What is it? What’s this? This is better... ‡T‹½ ù ´Q¹N ù§ w<C9 }x? Korean is difficult. don’t you think? You’ve seen the movie. don’t you think? But when VST-x is pronounced with falling intonation it doesn’t invite agreement. Shin 2005 . ¾ß). don’t you think? Korea’s nice.   and $ are used together with the subject particle  ˆ \ -. isn’t it?/don’t you think? etc Who’s that (respected person)? In conversation. $t ë  ë \ë ˆ ˆ ˆ What do you (many respected people) study now? ˆëÞ Š†W§  tv ž‰<x? ˆˆ 6 . but we can use the person’s given name with - if  î ¥Ä  we feel that the person is close and familiar (eg.   and $ are often shortened in everyday speech to . VST-x? § EXAMPLES ‡TR ´Që T§ w<¥ #Þx?  ‡T ” ´Q § w< ªx? ˆ î* …§   ßÈ ¤x? Ä . Note also that when . we normally  use the person’s full name with - (eg. but expresses § confidence that the person being addressed sees things the same way. appropriate to the person we are talking about. ‘. and is similar to the English tag questions ‘. invites the person being spoken to § agree with a comment on a third party. We use a status referent. It would be taken as rude to just say . such as 4. F ˆF S S \F S à ˆÃ   \à  . and . - etc... Distinction C: whether the speaker is showing honour to the person being referred to Korean lacks a pronoun for you. ˆt.

Shin 2005 121 . well – here comes Tae-U! Well. where a falling intonation on tag questions presumes agreement. well . didn’t you? Again. 3§ ­ o3§ @ . ­ o᧠@ . well . Look at the following examples. didn’t you? You went on foot. For our purpose. well – so Tae-U’s come! Well.6x! P ­ ¦3§ @ x6x! ­ ¦%3§ @ xÃ6x! Ì ¦ò RÙ ý3§ x£ ëp -6x! Š¢ ˆÂ Well. rather than suggesting that you use them actively yourself.Tae-U will be coming! It’s really hot today! You will also hear from time to time -o(x) in place of -6x. we’re introducing them here to help your listening skills.ox! PU ­ ¦Ù᧠@ xpox! ˆU ­ ¦%᧠@ xÃox! ÌU ¦ò RÙ ý᧠x£ ëp -ox! Š ¢ ˆ ÂU Well. well – so Tae-U’s come! Well. c G. haven’t you? You heard the story. This ending is generally seen as U§ á 3§ forceful and masculine in tone.‡T ´QVX R w<<" ë #Dx? § TJ§ when others make observations such as EXAMPLES ¿ ק Ex?  § = 2x? × §† ˆ§ xD x? ‹ ½  Nÿ§ 9†x?  ÷§  ¤2x? ŠÌ À ñTX ^§ +#" ëx? ¡ Cold. this reflects the practice in English. isn’t it? You’re busy these days. 7 Making exclamations In listening to people speaking Korean you may often hear them adding extra emphasis to what they’re saying by using the verb ending -6(x). aren’t you? You’ve eaten. isn’t it? Boring.Tae-U will be coming! It’s really hot today! The extent to which you use these verb endings will depend on the extent to which you feel comfortable in using them. well – here comes Tae-U! Well.

. This is part of the build-up to the annual rainy season that usually lasts for three weeks or so.p ¨x. 3 F§ 6. crisp days and mild nights... That’s not it. so if you’re not very familiar with Korea’s climate the following notes may be of interest. . . W 3 ˆ½ uVV§ 6. õ : ‡ ´ˆ ˆÙ ë§ os  ... Yes.. when things begin to warm up. Yes. spread over June and July. There is little real change in this pattern until March.. that’s right. with cool. The height of autumn lasts from mid September to the beginning of November. with little in the way of relief.... with the majority of its weather patterns the result of slow. mid twenties at night. the winters are. êê ¦ óó Bs . Tˆ ë<§ #r ¥Vx? ÃR º Ù G º ß I . Winter weather then begins to appear in November.. 122 c G. by Australian standards. day or night. and so are called ‘the cold that envies the flowers’ . are subject to is by and large absent from Korea’s weather.. and for the next two months conditions remain hot and humid . although cold snaps can still occur in late March. humid summers and long. and is generally regarded as the finest time of the year. 7x. Which one do you mean? especially By any chance . it seems to be that way.. quite cold. ½Š ˆ   5  . especially those who live on the east coast. Shin 2005 . temperatures begin to fall in mid September and the humidity subsides.. It is also a continental climate. Àˆ Wü ÷TX <¥ ¤#" . In April the weather warms up rapidly. Korea has a temperate climate. fine.°M’ö. .. õ óÞ §v ..... Ê ˆa UN  ®« # t . There is relatively little internal variation in Korea’s climate.. For various reasons . By and large the winter climate is clear and sunny with occasional snow. By December winter has set in and sub-zero temperatures are regular. but although much of Korea is on the same latitude as the Mediterranean Sea. and so while our description applies specifically to Seoul.. cold winters. and when the wind is from the north the chill factor can take the temperature down to minus twenty and further.= 20 » V Î 8 Some Useful Expressions ¾ Ü ..   ¦G<x. In fact. marked by hot. 9 Cultural Notes: Korea’s Climate In this Unit we learn some ways of talking about weather and climate./That’s not the point. After another burst of heat. it applies to all the significant population centres on the Peninsula as well. and snow showers can occur from mid November onwards. For example.low thirties in the day. Not necessarily so. By late May the daily temperature is quite high.. and by May the daily ]ø %­ temperature range is about fifteen to twenty-five degrees.. stable development over continental North Asia. This is mainly due to the continental climate pattern which brings in masses of cold air from west and north of the peninsula. The reason is that . the New Year finds Korea in the depth of winter.. Whatever one says [about it] . Running through the calendar year.. The day-to-day variation in weather patterns that most Australians. These snaps can often kill spring buds. Average temperature ranges for January would be about minus five to one or two degrees.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful